Copyright: System Guide
Citation: System Guide


Before You Begin
Before You Begin	1 of 4

Before You Begin

The Windows NT Server System Guide is for new and experienced administrators and users of networks. This manual describes the features that make the Microsoft [image] Windows NT [image] Server operating system the easiest network to set up and manage. This manual presents step-by-step procedures for using the system and network management applications provided in your product package.

This manual assumes that you have already installed Windows NT Server, as described in Chapter 1, “Installing Windows NT Server,” in the Windows NT Server Installation Guide.

This introduction provides the following information:

A description of the individual chapters in this manual

A guide to where you can find additional information about Windows NT Server

A list of the conventions used in the Windows NT Server manual set


How to Use This Manual
Before You Begin	2 of 4

How to Use This Manual

Turn to the chapter in this manual that contains the information you need:

Chapter 1, “Introducing Windows NT Server”

This chapter provides basic information about starting and quitting Windows NT Server, and what to do to get started after you install  your new operating system. Read this chapter for a quick understanding  of what’s in Windows NT Server and how you can find particular features.

Chapter 2, “Windows NT Basics”

This chapter reviews the basic elements of working with windows, menus,  and dialog boxes in Windows NT Server and Windows NT Workstation.  Read this chapter if you are not familiar with the standard techniques for  mouse and keyboard actions in Microsoft Windows [image]. This chapter also  provides a summary of keyboard shortcuts in Windows NT.

Chapter 3, “Program Manager”

This chapter describes how to use Program Manager to organize and run applications. Read this chapter for information about quitting Windows NT  and for procedures related to creating and using program groups and icons.

Chapter 4, “File Manager”

This chapter describes how to use File Manager to navigate drives and directories on the local computer and the network. Read this chapter for information about disk maintenance and how to share and secure directories  and files on the network.

Chapter 5, “Control Panel”

This chapter describes how to use Control Panel to customize options in Windows NT. Read this chapter for information on how to install and  configure display adapters, device drivers, network adapters and protocols, server properties and services, and various operating system options.

Chapter 6, “Print Manager”

This chapter describes how to install and control printers and printing with Windows NT. Read this chapter for information about sharing, securing, and auditing a printer and for instructions on administering network print servers remotely.

Chapter 7, “Mail”

This chapter provides an overview of the basic features of Microsoft Mail.  Read this chapter for information about creating and administering the workgroup postoffice.

Chapter 8, “Schedule+”

This chapter describes the basic features and procedures for using Microsoft Schedule+. Read this chapter for information about the Task list, planner, and Messages window, plus a summary of advanced features.

Chapter 9, “Command Prompt”

This chapter provides an overview of the Windows NT command prompt with  a list of available commands. Read this chapter for an explanation of command syntax and a comparison of Windows NT, MS-DOS [image], and LAN Manager commands.

Chapter 10, “Object Linking and Embedding”

This chapter provides an overview of the methods for sharing information between applications or documents using the special object linking and embedding (OLE) capabilities for Windows-based applications.

Chapter 11, “Other Application Environments”

This chapter provides information on running applications in the Windows 3.x, MS-DOS, and POSIX environments. Read this chapter for information about how Windows NT runs applications in a particular environment, and how to  set up and start applications in these other environments.

Chapter 12, “System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup”

This chapter describes how you can use the Windows NT Setup icon in the  main program group to maintain your system. Read this chapter for information about changing the keyboard, mouse, or other device drives, and about adding  or removing SCSI adapters, tape drives, and other Windows NT components. This chapter also describes how to delete user profiles for a local computer.

Chapter 13, “User Manager for Domains”

This chapter describes how to use User Manager for Domains to manage security for Windows NT Server domains and for individual computers.  Read this chapter for information about managing user accounts, groups,  and security policies.

Chapter 14, “User Profile Editor”

This chapter describes how to use User Profile Editor to create, edit, and save  a user profile. Read this chapter for information about customizing user profiles and making them available through a Windows NT Server domain.

Chapter 15, “Server Manager”

This chapter describes how to use Server Manager to administer Windows NT Server domains, workgroups, and computers.

Chapter 16, “Backup”

This chapter describes how to use Backup to protect data. Read this chapter for instructions on backing up, restoring, and maintaining data using tape drives.

Chapter 17, “Event Viewer”

This chapter describes how to use Event Viewer to view and manage the  event logs that record significant occurrences in a system. Read this chapter  for information about how to understand recorded events, save logs, and generate reports.

Chapter 18, “Disk Administrator”

This chapter describes how to use Disk Administrator to set up and organize hard disks. Read this chapter for information about using stripe sets and stripe sets with parity, plus information about establishing and breaking mirror sets and recovering data.

Chapter 19, “Performance Monitor”

This chapter describes how to use Performance Monitor to view and chart performance information for a single computer or for the network. Read this chapter for information about setting alerts and creating reports on activities.

Glossary and Index

The Glossary provides definitions of networking terms and new Windows NT concepts. Use the Index to find specific information quickly.


Finding More Information
Before You Begin	3 of 4

Finding More Information

This manual is written for users and for network administrators. In addition to reading this manual, be sure to read the README.WRI, PRINTER.WRI, and NETWORK.WRI files included in your systemroot directory. The online files contain additional important information about Windows NT, including information that was not available when the Windows NT Server manuals were printed.

Help is always available when you press F1 while you are working in Windows NT. Or at the command prompt, you can type help or net help and then press Enter. Two sources of online information will be particularly useful to you while you are learning Windows NT:

Introducing Windows NT: an online demonstration. To view this introduction  to the basics of Windows NT, choose the Introducing Windows NT icon in the Main program group.

Windows NT Help: an introduction to Windows NT operating system Help. To view this introduction to the many elements of online Help in Windows NT and how you can use it effectively, choose the Windows NT Help icon in the Main program group.


Conventions
Before You Begin	4 of 4

Conventions

The following conventional terms, text formats, and symbols are used throughout the printed documentation for Windows NT Server.

Convention	Meaning
Bold	Indicates the actual commands, words, or characters that  you type in a dialog box or at the command prompt.
Italic	Indicates a placeholder for information or parameters that  you must provide. For example, if the procedure asks you to type filename, you must type the actual name of a file. Italic  also indicates new terms and the titles of other books in the Microsoft Windows NT package.
ALL UPPERCASE	Indicates a directory, filename, or acronym. You can use lowercase letters when you type directory names or filenames  in a dialog box or at the command prompt, unless otherwise indicated for a specific application or utility.
Monospace	Represents examples of screen text or entries that you might type at the command line or in initialization files.
	Indicates a procedure.
	Indicates a procedure with only one step.
	Indicates a list of related information, not procedural steps.
Windows NT	Refers to operating system and networking functionality that  is available in both Windows NT Server and Windows NT Workstation.
\WINNT or systemroot	Refers to the Windows NT system tree. This can be \WINNT, \WINNT35, \WINDOWS, or whatever other directory name you specified when installing Windows NT.
	Indicates the group membership required for the account  used to log on to Windows NT in order to complete the  task described.
	Indicates a special note for RISC-based computers.
Guidelines for mouse and keyboard actions are described in Chapter 2, “Windows NT Basics.”


Introducing Windows NT Server
Chapter 1	1 of 16

Introducing Windows NT Server

After you install Windows NT Server, you can begin working right away. Windows NT Server takes care of most configuration tasks automatically, including preserving settings for other operating systems such as MS-DOS, if you maintain dual-boot capabilities. You can run your applications and manage files immediately, without editing special configuration or initialization files.

This chapter presents the basic information you need to get started with Windows NT Server and explains what you can do with the Windows NT operating system.

If you are new to using a graphical user interface such as Microsoft Windows or if you want a quick review, see Chapter 2, "Windows NT Basics," for a summary of the basic procedures you need to know.

For complete information about Windows NT file systems, security, and network planning issues, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide. This information will help you take best advantage of Windows NT Server at your site.


Starting and Quitting Windows NT Server
Introducing Windows NT Server	2 of 16

Starting and Quitting Windows NT Server

This section describes how to start Windows NT Server and log on to your computer, and also describes how to use online Help and the Windows NT Server introductory demonstration.


Starting Windows NT Server
Introducing Windows NT Server	3 of 16

Starting and Quitting Windows NT Server

Starting Windows NT Server

Because Windows NT Server is a secure system, you must identify yourself, or "log on," and enter a password each time you start Windows NT. On a computer running Windows NT Workstation, you can log on using a local account or a domain account. On a Windows NT Server computer, you must log on using a domain account. Servers do not maintain local accounts separate from the accounts in the domain containing the server.

In addition, only certain domain users can log on locally on a computer running Windows NT Server. To log on locally, you must be a member of one of the following groups:  Administrators, Server Operators, Print Operators, Account Operators, or Backup Operators. Other users can only access a computer running Windows NT Server over the network, unless you grant them access to log on locally at the server. For more information, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.

To start Windows NT Server

1.	Turn on your computer.

2.	If your computer is configured to start more than one operating system, press an arrow key at the startup screen until Windows NT Server is highlighted, and then press ENTER.

3.	When the logon message appears, press CTRL+ALT+DEL to log on.

Important

The CTRL+ALT+DEL sequence ensures the security of your system. Even if you see a message already displayed that asks you to enter your password, always press CTRL+ALT+DEL before you type your password.

4.	In the Welcome dialog box, type your domain username and password and then choose the OK button.

For example, you can log on using the Administrator account created while running Setup. The From box should always contain the name of the domain in which you have an account.

You can also display a Shutdown button in this dialog box to allow users to shut down the Windows NT Server without logging on. For information, see Chapter 2, "Troubleshooting," in the Installation Guide.

If you are a member of the Administrators group, you can begin network management tasks as soon as you log on. This includes creating, deleting, and managing user accounts and global and local groups, sharing directories and printers, granting resource permissions and rights to users, and installing operating system files and programs.


Using Windows NT Help
Introducing Windows NT Server	4 of 16

Starting and Quitting Windows NT Server

Using Windows NT Help

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

Online Help in Windows NT Server is a convenient, quick way to look up information about a task you are performing or a feature or dialog box you would like to know more about.

Windows NT Help includes the following:

Full-text search capability that enables you to find Help information quickly and an explanation of how to use full text search

A description of each command available from the command prompt

A glossary of Windows NT terms

Information about Microsoft Product Support Services

Information about accessibility for users with disabilities


Starting and Quitting the Online Demonstration
Introducing Windows NT Server	5 of 16

Starting and Quitting Windows NT Server

Starting and Quitting the Online Demonstration

The online demonstration installed with Windows NT Server introduces the built-in networking security and workgroup features of Windows NT. The topics include the following:

Logging on to Windows NT

Connecting to other computers and sharing files on a network

Creating user accounts and setting file permissions

Connecting to a printer

Using ClipBook to share information over the network

Communicating with other users

Although it should not be a problem in Windows NT Server, the demonstration uses 450K of memory when running in MS-DOS or Windows 3.1.

To run the "Introducing Windows NT" online demonstration

1.	Choose the Introducing Windows NT icon in the Main group.

2.	To quit, press the ESC key once if you are viewing the main menu, or press ESC twice if you are viewing a topic.


Quitting Windows NT Server
Introducing Windows NT Server	6 of 16

Starting and Quitting Windows NT Server

Quitting Windows NT Server

When you are working in Windows NT Server, you can press CTRL+ALT+DEL to change your password, to lock or secure the computer, or to log off so that you can restart your computer or log on using another user account.

To log off the current session

From the File menu in Program Manager, choose Logoff. Or press ALT+F4.

– Or –

Press CTRL+ALT+DEL, and then choose the Logoff button in the Windows NT Security dialog box.

To turn off your computer

From the File menu in Program Manager, choose Shutdown.

– Or –

Press CTRL+ALT+DEL, and then choose the Shutdown button in the Windows NT Security dialog box.

Caution

Never use the computer's power switch to quit Windows NT Server, or you may lose data. Always use Shutdown to quit, so Windows NT Server can save changes in all working files and properly close applications and services.


What to Do After Setup
Introducing Windows NT Server	7 of 16

What to Do After Setup

The Windows NT operating system affects every aspect of your work on the computer, from when you first turn on the computer, through all your actions to start applications, save files, and communicate with other users over the network.

Although Windows NT takes care of most configuration tasks automatically, you might want to modify your working environment or add elements to your system. This section suggests activities for using and modifying your system after installing Windows NT Server.


Using Windows NT Applications
Introducing Windows NT Server	8 of 16

What to Do After Setup

Using Windows NT Applications

Program Manager is the application that runs each time you start Windows NT Server. You can use Program Manager to organize and start applications and tools. The first time you start Windows NT Server, Program Manager shows the Main group window open on the desktop, plus icons for several built-in program groups. For more information, see Chapter 3, "Program Manager."

The following tables list the applications provided with Windows NT Server.

Main group

Application			Used to
	File Manager		Manage files and directories, share files on the network, and connect to shared directories on other computers. See Chapter 4.
	Control Panel		Customize the fonts, color, and desktop, and configure hardware devices and the network. See Chapter 5.
	Print Manager		Connect to, configure, and share printers, and control printing of documents. See Chapter 6.
	Mail		Send and receive electronic mail. See Chapter 7.
	Schedule+		Maintain a personal calendar and schedule meetings automatically. See Chapter 8.
	Command Prompt		Start programs or run batch files for MS-DOS, MS OS/2 version 1.x, and POSIX. See Chapter 9.
	ClipBook Viewer		Store clippings from data files and share that information over the network. See Chapter 10.
	PIF Editor		Create or change program information files for running MS-DOS – based applications. See Chapter 11.
	Windows NT Setup		Install device drivers and Windows NT components. See Chapter 12.
	Introducing Windows NT		View an online demonstration of the networking, security, and workgroup features of Windows NT.
	Windows NT Help		Look up information about a task, feature, or dialog box.
Administrative Tools group

Application			Used to
	User Manager for Domains		Manage user accounts and groups, and define security policies and trust relationships. See Chapter 13.
	User Profile Editor		Create customized user profiles containing Windows NT configuration information. See Chapter 14.
	Server Manager		Administer domains and computers. See Chapter 15.
	Backup		Back up and restore files on a tape drive for NTFS, FAT, or HPFS file systems. See Chapter 16.
	Event Viewer		View and manage event logs for system, security, and application events. See Chapter 17.
	Disk Administrator		View and manage hard disk partitions and other disk resources. See Chapter 18.
	Performance Monitor		Measure CPU use and other data on system performance. See Chapter 19.
Setting Up Startup Applications

You can specify which applications will start automatically whenever you log on. These changes will only be saved for your user account. If another user logs on to your computer, or if you log on to another user account, the startup applications defined for that user account will appear.

To define startup applications

In Program Manager, open the Startup group and add a program item for each application that you want to start each time you log on, following the procedures in "Creating Program Items" in Chapter 3, "Program Manager."


Setting Up Your Personal Working Environment
Introducing Windows NT Server	9 of 16

What to Do After Setup

Setting Up Your Personal Working Environment

You will probably want to configure the appearance and content of your basic workspace, the desktop.

To configure how your workspace looks and sounds

1.	In Control Panel, double-click the Color, Desktop, and Sound icons to define how your desktop looks and sounds, following the procedures in Chapter 5, "Control Panel."

2.	In the command prompt window, choose commands from the Control menu to configure fonts, screen size, position, and color, following the procedures in Chapter 9, "Command Prompt."

To set up custom program groups for running applications

In Program Manager, create program groups and add program-item icons, following the procedures in "What Are Groups and Program Items?" in Chapter 3, "Program Manager."

To change your password

1.	Log on to Windows NT in the usual way, and then press CTRL+ALT+DEL.

2.	In the Windows NT Security dialog box, choose the Change Password button.

3.	In the Change Password dialog box, type your old password, a new password, and a confirmation in the appropriate boxes, and then choose the OK button.


Configuring the Network
Introducing Windows NT Server	10 of 16

What to Do After Setup

Configuring the Network

Windows NT Server provides network services so that users can connect computers to share files, printers, and other resources. The following tools in Windows NT Server help you configure and monitor the network.

To install, configure, or remove any network component, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group.

Use		To
Network in Control Panel		Install and configure software to support the network.
Event Viewer		View the system, security, and application events on a computer to monitor how the computer is being used.
File Manager		Share files and directories on the network, and connect to shared directories.
Print Manager		Share printers on the network, and connect to shared printers.
Server in Control Panel		View connected users, shared resources, and open resources; manage directory replication and designate recipients of administrative alerts.
Services in Control Panel		Start and stop network services.
Server Manager		Manage shared directories on remote computers. Promote a server to domain controller. Add computers to and remove them from a domain.
User Manager for Domains		Manage user accounts, group members, and security policies.
Membership in a domain is assigned by the domain administrator in a Windows NT Server network.

The domain administrator can take advantage of the administrative features in Windows NT Server to centrally manage a collection of Windows NT servers and workstations. For details, see Chapter 15, "Server Manager."


Browsing Other Computers and Resources on the Network
Introducing Windows NT Server	11 of 16

What to Do After Setup

Browsing Other Computers and Resources on the Network

In Microsoft Windows-based networking you can browse domains, workgroups, and computers to look for shared directories and printers.

To browse for shared directories on the network

1.	In File Manager, choose Connect Network Drive from the Disk menu, or choose the Connect Drive button on the toolbar.

2.	The networks, domains and workgroups, computers, and shared directories are organized in a tree structure. From the Shared Directories box, choose an item to expand the list. Choose a network name to display available domains and workgroups, a domain or workgroup name to display available computers, or a computer name to display its shared directories.

To browse for shared printers on the network

1.	In Print Manager, choose Connect To Printer from the Printer menu, or choose the Connect To Printer button on the toolbar.

2.	From the Select Printer box, choose an item to expand the list. Choose a network name to display available domains and workgroups, a domain or workgroup name to display available computers, or a computer name to display its shared printers.

3.	To connect to a printer, double-click a printer name.


Managing Files and Disks
Introducing Windows NT Server	12 of 16

What to Do After Setup

Managing Files and Disks

A key function of any operating system is to provide a file system for storing and managing your application and data files. The tools for file management in Windows NT Server include the following.

Use		To
Disk Administrator		Partition hard disks, create and delete volume sets, create and delete stripe sets and stripe sets with parity, and establish and break mirror sets.
File Manager		Create and delete directories, manage files stored in directories, and define file attributes.
Server in Control Panel		View and remotely manage other computers.
Server Manager		View and remotely manage other computers. Change domain controllers.
Convert utility		Change a FAT or HPFS file system to NTFS for a disk partition after Setup. Run CONVERT.EXE from the command prompt.
Managing Files

When you format a hard disk, you prepare it to store files using a particular file system. Most operating systems require a specific file system to store files on a hard disk. Windows NT automatically supports the following three file systems:

The Windows NT file system (NTFS) is a new advanced file system that supports file recovery, extremely large storage media, and long filenames. NTFS is required if you want maximum data security for your installation, and is recommended if Windows NT is the only operating system on your computer.

The file allocation table (FAT) is the file system used by the MS-DOS operating system. FAT does not provide security. FAT is required for the system partition if you also use MS-DOS on your computer.

The high-performance file system (HPFS) is the file system used with the OS/2 operating system version 1.2 or later. HPFS does not provide security.

If you choose to install Windows NT on a disk partition formatted for FAT or HPFS, Windows NT automatically observes all the file-naming conventions of those file systems. For more information, see "Working with Files and Directories" in Chapter 4, "File Manager"; see also the online Command Reference and your documentation for Microsoft MS-DOS or Microsoft OS/2.

If you choose to use NTFS with Windows NT, these new file-naming conventions apply:

File and directory names can each be up to 255 characters, including extensions, and a name can have multiple extensions separated by periods.

Names can contain any uppercase or lowercase characters except the following:

?    \    *    "    <    >    |    /    :

If you mix uppercase and lowercase characters in a filename, Windows NT preserves the case when it displays the name. However, Windows NT does not regard case when distinguishing filenames you enter in dialog boxes or at the command prompt.

You can search for filenames or perform other multiple-file operations in Windows NT using wildcards, where an asterisk (*) stands for a whole word or group of characters, and a question mark (?) represents a single character.

When you create a file with a long name under NTFS, Windows NT also automatically creates a filename that is compatible with MS-DOS, so that computers running MS-DOS or applications that don't support long filenames can still identify the file.

Managing Hard Disks

Windows NT Server provides tools for managing disk resources to enhance performance and protect data. Use Disk Administrator on computers running either Windows NT Workstation and Windows NT Server to partition disks, format and label volumes, create and delete volume sets, extend volumes and volume sets, and create and delete stripe sets. With Windows NT Server, you can also create and delete stripe sets with parity, regenerate failed or missing members of stripe sets with parity, and establish or break mirror sets.

To manage hard disk partitions

After logging on as a member of the Administrators group, double-click the Disk Administrator icon in the Administrative Tools group, then follow the procedures in "Managing Disks" in Chapter 18, "Disk Administrator."

– Or –

At the command prompt, use the fdisk, format, and label utilities and similar command-line tools, as described in the Windows NT online Command Reference.

Disk Administrator also allows you to assign drive letters to both hard disk drives and CD-ROM drives, save and restore disk-configuration information, and delete mirror sets. For details, see Chapter 18, "Disk Administrator."

In addition, you can ensure data protection on hard disks by using Windows NT Backup, the UPS program in Control Panel, and the fault-tolerance features in Disk Administrator. These features allow you to take advantage of RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks) data management, disk mirroring, disk duplexing, disk striping, and disk striping with parity. For details, see "Protecting Data" in Chapter 18, "Disk Administrator."


Setting Up to Print
Introducing Windows NT Server	13 of 16

What to Do After Setup

Setting Up to Print

Windows NT provides several advantages in printing:

If you use Windows NT printers on the network, separate printer drivers do not have to be installed on each workstation, because the printer driver is stored on a single computer.

You can browse for available printers on the network.

You do not have to redirect a port for the printer - you just connect to a printer using Print Manager.

You can manage your print job from your local computer.

You can choose Print Manager in the Main program group of Program Manager to install and configure printers.

To connect to, install, or configure a network printer

If the network printer is on a Windows NT network, follow the procedures in "Connecting to a Network Printer" in Chapter 6, "Print Manager."

Or, if printer is on another kind of network, follow the procedures in "Installing a Printer" in Chapter 6.


Configuring Your System
Introducing Windows NT Server	14 of 16

What to Do After Setup

Configuring Your System

What happens when you start your computer depends on various elements:

The defaults you define for the boot loader and any user environment variables you define for applications

The services you configure to start automatically

The applications you specify in the Startup group in Program Manager

The contents of your logon script

Any user profile that might be assigned by the administrator for a Windows NT Server domain

This section describes how to get started defining each of these elements.

You can change some system settings only if you are logged on as a member of the Administrators group or if you belong to another group that can configure the computer. If you cannot run any application for changing system settings, ask your network administrator for assistance. For more information, see "Managing the Security Policies" in Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

In Windows NT, you define all elements of your system configuration using graphical tools such as Control Panel and Windows NT Setup. Windows NT automatically stores values that define the working environment for Windows NT, plus the information for running applications or for using alternate operating systems.

Control Panel is probably the main tool you will use to change your system configuration. For example, you can choose the Fonts option to install or remove screen fonts, including TrueType® fonts. Also, some configuration values change automatically when you install new software or when you define your workspace in an application such as Microsoft Excel.

The following key tools can be used to configure system hardware and software.

Use	To
Windows NT Setup	Install drivers for the mouse, keyboard, tape drives, and SCSI devices. Install or remove supporting components for Windows NT.
Control Panel	Configure video display and install drivers. Define desktop appearance and configure hardware and software for the computer and for the network. Configure how Windows NT acts when a fatal system error occurs.
PIF Editor	Change the memory settings required for running MS-DOS -based applications.
Print Manager	Install and configure printers to be used with your computer.
System in Control Panel	Define environment variables and preferences for alternate operating systems.
User Profile Editor	Define user access to Program Manager groups.
Defining the Boot Loader and Other Operating System Variables

You can specify the default operating system that your system proposes at startup, define user environment variables, and add or configure virtual-memory paging files to optimize performance in Windows NT.

To configure boot loader, user environment variables, or virtual memory

In the System option of Control Panel, specify the settings you want, following the procedures in "Defining Options for the Operating System" in Chapter 5, "Control Panel."

The boot loader defines the information needed for system startup, such as the location for the operating system's files. Windows NT automatically creates the correct configuration and checks this information whenever you start your system. How this configuration information is stored depends on your system's microprocessor:

For an x86-based computer, Windows NT saves your startup preferences in the BOOT.INI file in the root directory on your main hard drive. Configuration files such as AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS are used only to specify memory and other parameters for MS-DOS – based applications that you might run under Windows NT.

For a RISC-based computer, your startup preferences and all other system configuration information are stored in nonvolatile RAM.

You don't have to keep another operating system such as MS-DOS on your computer to run applications created for that operating system. For information about running applications created for other operating systems, see Chapter 11, "Other Application Environments."

Note

Windows NT includes a utility, the Registry Editor (REGEDT32.EXE), that allows experienced users to inspect and modify the configuration registry directly. However, incorrect entries you make using this utility can cause system errors. To change values in the configuration registry, we strongly recommend that you use the applications provided in the Main group and Administrative Tools group in Program Manager.

Setting Up Startup Network Services

Windows NT Server starts several network services automatically, so that the capabilities of the Windows NT network are automatically available as soon as you want to work with the system. For example, the Computer Browser, Event Log, Workstation, and Net Logon services start each time you log on. You might also want to start other services automatically at system startup, depending on your system needs.

To start network services automatically when you log on

In the Services option of Control Panel, set up services that you want to start automatically, following the procedures in "Managing Services" in Chapter 5, "Control Panel."


Setting Up Domains, User Accounts, and Groups
Introducing Windows NT Server	15 of 16

What to Do After Setup

Setting Up Domains, User Accounts, and Groups

To control how others can access computers and shared files on a Windows NT Server domain, the network administrator must create user accounts and specify user groups and security policies.

Setting Up a Domain

A domain is a collection of computers that share a common user account database and security policy. You create a domain when you run Windows NT Setup by specifying a new domain name in the Domain dialog box and then selecting the Domain Controller option.

For information about adding a computer to a domain, managing shared resources on computers, and setting up servers, see Chapter 15, "Server Manager."

Setting Up User Accounts and Groups

You probably want to create user accounts and groups for users.

A user account consists of all the information that Windows NT uses to define a user, including the username, a description, a password, and the groups to which that user belongs.

A group is an account that contains other accounts, which are called members. Groups provide an easy way to grant common capabilities to several users, because all permissions assigned to a group are provided to its members.

A group can be local or global. A global group is a number of user accounts from one domain that are grouped together under one group name. A global group can be assigned permissions and rights within a domain or on a workstation. A local group is a group that can include users and global groups from other domains. A local group can only be granted permissions and rights for its own workstation.

To set up user accounts and global groups

1.	In the Administrative Tools group in Program Manager, choose the User Manager for Domains icon.

2.	Create the user accounts you want for either the domain or an individual computer, following the procedures in "Managing User Accounts" in Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

3.	Create both the global groups you want for the domain or the local groups for either the domain or an individual computer, following the procedures in "Managing Groups" in Chapter 13.

For more information, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.

Setting Up User Profiles

Windows NT saves specific information in user profiles for each user account in a domain. This information includes, for example, per-user settings in Program Manager, File Manager, Control Panel, Print Manager, and the accessories.

To create and assign user profiles

1.	In the Administrative Tools group, choose User Profile Editor, and then follow the procedures in "Creating a New User Profile" in Chapter 14, "User Profile Editor."

2.	In User Manager for Domains, assign user profiles to one or more user accounts.

For more information, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.

Using Logon Scripts and Home Directories

Logon scripts can be used to configure users' working environments by making network connections and starting applications. The network administrator can create logon scripts, and then assign a different logon script to each user or create a logon script for multiple users.

A logon script runs automatically whenever a user logs on at a workstation or server running either Windows NT or MS-DOS. The script can be a batch file containing operating system commands (such as commands to make network connections or start applications) or an executable program. For more information about batch files, see the online reference for the command prompt.

To assign a logon script to a user, follow the procedure described in "Managing User Account Properties" in Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

The administrator might want to assign each user a home directory on a server. Users can store private data in their home directories, and also have access control over these directories to restrict or grant access to other users. If a user has a home directory on a computer other than his or her own workstation, a connection is automatically made to the home directory every time the user logs on.

To specify a home directory for a user account, follow the procedures in "Managing User Account Properties" in Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."


Managing Security
Introducing Windows NT Server	16 of 16

What to Do After Setup

Managing Security

The security provided through Windows NT when you use NTFS, combined with regular use of the Backup utility, can eliminate almost all possibility of data loss. Security in Windows NT consists of two basic elements:  preventing data loss resulting from unauthorized access or preventing data loss resulting from file damage.

For most actions related to security, you must log on as a member of the Administrators group.

Controlling Unauthorized Access

To control unauthorized access, Windows NT Server includes tools for limiting initial access to the system itself, to specific files and directories, and to resources such as printers. Windows NT Server also includes tools for monitoring security events.

The tools for controlling access to the system include the following.

Use		To
CTRL+ALT+DEL		Change your password.
File Manager		Share resources and establish permissions to protect specific files and directories.
Print Manager		Restrict new printer permissions.
User Manager for Domains		Create user accounts for identification and authentication when the user logs on, and authorize the specific actions a user can perform on the system.
User Profile Editor		Lock access to program groups.
You can also change your password by pressing CTRL+ALT+DEL and then choosing the Change Password button in the Windows NT Security dialog box.

The tools for auditing security transactions in Windows NT Server include the following.

Use		To
Event Viewer		View and manage the security event log.
File Manager		Define the files, directories, and users to be audited.
Print Manager		Define printers to be audited.
User Manager for Domains		Define the kinds of events to be audited.
Preventing File Damage and Data Loss

When you use NTFS, Windows NT logs all file transactions, replaces bad sectors automatically, and stores copies of all vital information. Therefore, Windows NT can preserve disk integrity and ensure complete, rapid recovery after power failure or other system failures.

No matter which file system you use, Windows NT also automatically preserves a previous working configuration to ensure that you can always start Windows NT, in spite of any changes to the system configuration that may occur during a work session. Windows NT also requires that you create an Emergency Repair disk when you run Setup so that your system can be repaired if system files are corrupted at startup. For information on repairing your system, see "System Diagnosis, Recovery, and Repair" in Chapter 2, "Troubleshooting," in the Installation Guide.

Setting Up Security Policies

You can define three basic security policies for user accounts in the domain or on a specific computer:

The Account policy controls how passwords are used by user accounts.

The User Rights policy controls the rights assigned to groups and user accounts. We do not recommend that you change these default settings.

The Audit policy controls what types of events are recorded in the security log (which you can view in Event Viewer if you are logged on as a member of the Administrators group).

You can also establish trust relationships between domains in Windows NT Server. Trust relationships are links between domains, which enable pass-through authentication in which a user has only one user account in one domain, yet can access the entire network.

To manage security policies for a domain or a computer

1.	From the Policy menu in User Manager, choose Account, User Rights, or Auditing, and then follow the procedures in "Managing the Security Policies" in Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

2.	In File Manager, choose the Auditing command from the Security menu, and then follow the procedures to specify auditing on selected files or directories as described in "Securing Directories and Files" in Chapter 4, "File Manager."

To establish trust relationships between domains

In User Manager for Domains, choose Trust Relationships from the Policy menu, and then follow the procedures in "Managing Trust Relationships" in Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

For more information, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


Additional Help Features

Performing Full-Text Searches in Help


Windows NT Basics
Chapter 2	1 of 18

Windows NT Basics

This chapter reviews the basics for working in Windows NT Workstation and Windows NT Server. These features and the related procedures in the graphical user interface of Windows NT are identical to those in versions of Windows for MS-DOS. If you are familiar with Windows, you can skip this chapter. You can practice any of the basic procedures described here without fear of harming your system.

This chapter emphasizes using the mouse to complete tasks. For information about using the keyboard to work with windows and dialog boxes, see "Using the Keyboard," later in this chapter. The following topics are included in the chapter:

Selecting items for action

Managing windows

Choosing commands

Using the Control menu and Task List

Using Help

Using dialog boxes and responding to system messages

Copying and pasting information between applications

Using keyboard shortcuts


Selecting Items for Action
Windows NT Basics	2 of 18

Selecting Items for Action

In Windows NT, you can use a mouse or other pointing device such as a pen to select items and carry out actions. For example, you select an icon, window, or other element by pointing to it with the mouse and clicking.

The procedures in this manual and in Help assume that you configured the left button as the primary mouse button. Any procedure that uses the secondary button will refer to it as the right mouse button.

The following terms are used to describe mouse actions.

Mouse term	Meaning
Point	Move the mouse until the tip of the mouse pointer rests on what you want to choose on the screen.
Click	Press and release the mouse button without moving the mouse. Clicking an item selects it. For many actions, you can select multiple items by holding down SHIFT while clicking.
Double-click	Click the mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Drag	Hold down the mouse button while you move the mouse.For some actions, you can extend a selection by pressing SHIFT while dragging. For other actions, you can move a copy of a selection to another location by pressing CTRL while dragging.
Guidelines for Selecting Items and Using the Mouse

To use Windows NT efficiently, use the mouse to select items and initiate commands. The following list presents basic guidelines for using the mouse:

When you select an icon, dialog box option, or other item, the selection is highlighted. For example, selected text or the label on a selected icon appears in reverse color.

To cancel a selection, click another item.

Double-clicking usually initiates the same action as selecting the item and then choosing a command. For example, double-clicking an icon in Program Manager is the same as selecting the icon and then choosing the Open command from the File menu.

When you move the mouse, the mouse pointer shows your location on the screen and often changes shape when the pointer crosses different areas on the screen. The following table shows some examples.

This pointer	Appears
	Where you can click to select items.
	Where you can drag the window border to size a window.
	Where you can draw or paint.
	Where you can enter text in a window or dialog box.
	When you start an application and can continue working while Windows NT completes a background task.


Managing Windows
Windows NT Basics	3 of 18

Managing Windows

All Windows NT operations take place on the desktop, the area of the screen where elements such as windows, icons, and dialog boxes appear. When you first start Windows NT, the Program Manager application window appears on the desktop, showing the Main group window and group icons for the other applications installed with Windows NT.

You can move windows and icons around on the desktop. When you click a window to begin working, the title bar changes color to show that it's the active window, and the window automatically becomes the active window.

You can switch to other windows on the desktop by clicking the window you want, or by pressing ALT+TAB to cycle through the running applications. You can also use the Task List to switch windows, as described in "Using the Control Menu and Task List," later in this chapter.


Starting Applications in Program Manager
Windows NT Basics	4 of 18

Managing Windows

Starting Applications in Program Manager

Program Manager is a Windows NT application that you use to start applications and also to organize applications and working files in logical groups. Applications and files are represented in Program Manager as program-item icons, and organized in groups that appear as windows or icons within the Program Manager window. You start an application by choosing its icon. For more information, see Chapter 3, "Program Manager."


Moving and Sizing Windows
Windows NT Basics	5 of 18

Managing Windows

Moving and Sizing Windows

You can move or size most windows in Windows NT, or scroll the contents of the window with the basic mouse actions shown in the following illustration.

The following list shows how to use the buttons in the window frame to manage the size and position of the window.

Choose	To display

Display the Control menu (this is the same as pressing ALT+SPACEBAR).

Reduce the application to an icon (this is the same as choosing Minimize from the Control menu).

Enlarge the application window to full screen (this is the same as choosing Maximize from the Control menu).

Return the application window to its previous size (this is the same as choosing Restore from the Control menu).


Using Document Windows
Windows NT Basics	6 of 18

Managing Windows

Using Document Windows

Some Windows-based applications also present document windows so that you can view more than one document simultaneously. You can size, scroll, and arrange document windows, but you cannot move them outside the application window.


Choosing Commands in Windows NT
Windows NT Basics	7 of 18

Choosing Commands in Windows NT

When you work with applications in Windows NT, you choose commands to complete actions. The applications and tools included with Windows NT provide several ways to choose commands. You can:

Use the mouse or keyboard to choose commands from the menu bar.

Choose buttons on toolbars (where available).

Use the drag-and-drop features in Program Manager or File Manager to move, copy, and print files, or to start applications.

This section describes how to choose commands from the menu bar in all Windows-based applications. For information about using drag-and-drop in Windows NT, see "Working with Files and Directories" in Chapter 4, "File Manager." For information about using a toolbar, see the documentation for your application.

In all Windows-based applications, commands are grouped on menus, with the menu names displayed in the menu bar across the top of the application window. Each application has different menus, but most applications include at least a File menu, Edit menu, and Help menu.

To choose a menu command

1.	To display the menu, point to the menu name in the menu bar and hold the mouse button down.

2.	Drag to select the command you want, and then release the mouse button.

Guidelines for Working with Menus in Windows NT

The following list presents some basic guidelines for menus:

When the menu is displayed, you can also press an arrow key to highlight a command name and then press ENTER to choose the command.

When you choose a command that ends in an ellipsis (...), the application displays a dialog box that asks you to supply more information.

If a command turns a feature on and off, a check mark ( [image]) appears by the command name when the feature is on.

When you choose a command that ends with an arrow ( [image]), the menu cascades to display more command names.

If a command name is dimmed, it indicates that the command does not apply to the current situation or that you need to make a selection or complete another action before choosing the command.


Using the Control Menu and Task List
Windows NT Basics	8 of 18

Using the Control Menu and Task List

All windows have a Control menu. You can use it to switch to another running application; close the window or quit the application; change the size and position of a window; or minimize or maximize it.

Most dialog boxes and messages also have a Control menu, usually with commands for moving or closing the dialog box.

To use a window's Control menu

1.	Click the Control-menu box in a window, or click an application icon on the desktop. Or press ALT+SPACEBAR to display the Control menu for an application window or for a dialog box. Press ALT+HYPHEN (-) to display the Control menu for a document window.

2.	Choose a command for the action you want.

The commands available on the Control menu vary for different applications, but most Control menus include at least the Move and Close commands.

The Control menu for each application window includes the Switch To command, which displays Task List. You can use Task List to switch to other currently running applications or to manage windows and icons on the desktop.

Although it is usually easiest to switch to another window by clicking that window, your current application may fill the screen, or some of the windows may not be visible. With Task List, you can switch windows quickly without having to search for the window you want.

To use Task List

1.	From the Control menu, choose Switch To; or press CTRL+ESC.

2.	In the task list, select the name of the application you want to work with.

To switch to a task not on the list, in the New Task box, type the executable name for the task you want. Choose the Run button.

3.	Choose one of the following buttons for the action you want.

Choose	To

Switch To	Switch to the application selected in the list.

End Task	Quit the selected application.

Cancel	Close Task List. You can also press ESC or double-click the Control-menu box to quit.

Cascade	Display windows in layers, showing the title of each window.

Tile	Resize all windows and arrange them side by side.

Arrange Icons	Rearrange application icons on the desktop.

To switch applications without using Task List

Press ALT+TAB.

Continue pressing ALT+TAB until the window you want is displayed.

If you do not want to use ALT+TAB for switching between windows, you can turn off this capability by choosing the Desktop icon in Control Panel and then clearing the Fast ALT+TAB Switching check box in the Desktop dialog box.


Using Help
Windows NT Basics	9 of 18

Using Help

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

Windows NT provides Help so that you can get useful information quickly while you are working. Help contains a description of each command and dialog box, and explains procedures for most tasks.

To get Help

Press F1 wherever you are working.

The following illustration shows the Help Contents window for Program Manager. The Help Contents lists the major topics for the current application. From this window you can move to more specific information, in this example, to a full text search.

To run a full text search for a Help topic

1.	In the Help window, choose the Find button.

2.	In the Find dialog box, type the word or phrase you're looking for. To find an exact match for a phrase, place quotes around it.

Without quotes, the search will locate instances of words within the phrase as well as the phrase itself.

3.	Select All Text under Look At.

4.	Choose the Search button to perform the search.

The following table summarizes the actions you can take while using Help.

To		Do this
Get help in a Windows-based application		Press F1 for context-sensitive Help, or choose a command from the Help menu.
Get help in a dialog box or message box		Press F1, or choose the Help button in the dialog box.
Get help on using Help		From the Help menu, choose How To Use Help.
See a list of Help topics		Choose the Contents button in the Help window.
Get help on a specific topic		Choose the Search button and select a topic to view, or choose the Find button and enter text to search for.
Go back to a previous topic		Choose the Back button, or choose the History button and double-click any listed topic.
Jump to another Help topic		Click the underlined jump term, or choose a button in the Contents topics.
Display a definition		Click the term with the dotted underline, and then click anywhere on the screen to close the definition.
Continue working with Help displayed		From the Help menu in the Help window, choose Always On Top.
Minimize Help to an icon		Choose the Minimize button in the Help window.
View another Help file		From the File menu in Help, choose Open and select another .HLP filename.
Exit Help		Double-click the Control-menu box.
You can also set bookmarks for frequently used Help topics, and annotate any Help topic. These and other Help features are explained in Help. Help is also available at the command prompt for all Windows NT commands. The following table shows the syntax for Help at the command prompt.

Syntax	Information provided
help	Available native system commands.
command /?	Description, syntax, parameters, and switches for native system commands, plus help for MS-DOS subsystem commands not listed when you type help.
help command	Description, syntax, parameters, and switches for native system commands.
net help	Available network commands.
net command /?	Syntax only for network commands.
net command /help	Syntax and description for network commands.
net help command	Syntax and description for network commands.
net help command /options	Parameters and switches for network commands.
You can also use the online Command Reference, which displays additional details, examples, and conceptual information for the system or network command you typed. To start the Command Reference, double-click the Help icon in the Main program group.


Using Dialog Boxes
Windows NT Basics	10 of 18

Using Dialog Boxes

Windows NT displays a dialog box to ask for information and to provide information you need to proceed. When you choose a command that displays a dialog box, that dialog box may include areas where you type numbers or text. You may also see various options to change or view settings related to the command.

To use a dialog box

1.	Select options or type text to specify the information you want in a dialog box.

Click an option to select it, or press ALT plus the underlined letter in the option name. If any item in a dialog box is dimmed, it is unavailable because it requires a selection or some previous action.

To see a description of the options, press F1 or choose the Help button in the dialog box.

2.	To move the dialog box in the window, drag its title bar.

3.	When you finish with the dialog box, choose the appropriate command button to carry out the command.

Usually, clicking the OK button carries out the command. Sometimes the button that carries out the command has a label such as Open or Find Next.

To close a dialog box without completing the command

In the dialog box, choose the Cancel button, or double-click the Control-menu box.

Guidelines for Buttons and Miscellaneous Items

The following list presents some basic guidelines for using buttons and other items in dialog boxes.

Option buttons and check boxes:

Click a round option button to select it and to turn off any other option in the group. You can select only one option button in a group.

Click a check box to turn that option on or off. You can select as many check boxes as you want.

When an option button or check box is selected, it's filled - a selected option button contains a dot and a selected check box contains an X.

Command buttons:

If you choose a button with an ellipsis (...), another dialog box appears.

If you choose a button with double arrows (>>), the dialog box expands.

List boxes:

Click an item in any kind of list to select it, or scroll to see more items.

In a drop-down list box, click the arrow to display a list of options to select.

In some lists, you can select multiple items. In such a list, click a selection a second time to turn it off.

Miscellaneous items:

Type, edit, and paste text in any text box. If a text box contains text when you move to it, all the text is selected and any text you type replaces it. Press DEL or BACKSPACE to edit the text.

Scroll a spin button or type in the box to select a number.

Drag a scroll box to select a range in a scale.


Responding to Messages
Windows NT Basics	11 of 18

Responding to Messages

Windows NT displays messages or warnings if you should know about possible consequences of a command action, or if Windows NT requires more information or cannot complete a command for any reason. Most messages explain the problem and what you should do to continue working.

To dismiss a message

Choose the OK button.

If the message contains two or more command buttons, choose the OK button to proceed, or choose the Cancel button to cancel the action and dismiss the message.


Cutting and Copying Information
Windows NT Basics	12 of 18

Cutting and Copying Information

When you cut or copy information from an application, it is placed onto the Clipboard, which is a temporary storage area in your computer's memory. You can then paste that information from the Clipboard into other documents or applications. You can also use the Clipboard to transfer information between Windows-based applications and some MS-DOS-based applications.

In some Windows-based applications, you can also paste information from the Clipboard to create a linked or embedded object. For more information, see Chapter 10, "Object Linking and Embedding."

You can use the ClipBook Viewer to view and save the contents of the Clipboard. For more information, choose the ClipBook Viewer icon in Program Manager, and then press F1 to get help.


Transferring Information Between Windows-Based Applications
Windows NT Basics	13 of 18

Cutting and Copying Information

Transferring Information Between Windows-Based Applications

You can use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands in most Windows-based applications to copy or move information within a document, between documents, or between Windows-based applications.

To copy or move information with the Clipboard

1.	In your document, select the information you want to copy or move.

2.	To copy the information, choose Copy from the Edit menu. To move the information, choose Cut from the Edit menu.

To paste information from the Clipboard

1.	If necessary, switch to the document or application that will receive the information from the Clipboard.

2.	Place the insertion point where you want the information to appear.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste.


Transferring Information Between MS-DOS–Based Applications
Windows NT Basics	14 of 18

Cutting and Copying Information

Transferring Information Between MS-DOS-Based Applications

When you are running an MS-DOS-based application under Windows NT, you can copy selected information or the entire screen onto the Clipboard. You can paste only text into an MS-DOS-based application, not a graphic or screen capture.

To copy information from an MS-DOS-based application

1.	To open the application's Control menu, click the Control-menu box or press ALT+SPACEBAR.

2.	From the Control menu, choose Edit.

3.	From the cascading Edit menu, choose Mark.

4.	In the document, select the information you want to copy.

5.	From the application's Control menu, choose Edit, and then from the cascading Edit menu, choose Copy.

In the command prompt window, the text is copied automatically.

To paste text into an MS-DOS-based application

1.	Copy the information onto the Clipboard.

2.	Switch to the application into which you want to paste the information.

3.	Place the insertion point where you want the information to appear.

4.	From the application's Control menu, choose Edit, and then from the cascading Edit menu, choose Paste.


Copying Screen Images
Windows NT Basics	15 of 18

Cutting and Copying Information

Copying Screen Images

For both Windows-based applications and MS-DOS-based applications, you can copy an entire screen onto the Clipboard. For Windows-based applications, you can copy an image of the active window onto the Clipboard. You can place this image in any file that can save or display bitmap images.

To copy the entire screen onto the Clipboard as text

Press PRINT SCREEN.

To copy a screen image for a non-Windows-based application, the application must be running in text mode, not graphics mode.

To copy an image of the active window onto the Clipboard

Press ALT+PRINT SCREEN.


Using the Keyboard
Windows NT Basics	16 of 18

Using the Keyboard

Microsoft Windows NT and Windows-based applications provide a set of common keyboard shortcuts that you can use to carry out commands and select options in dialog boxes. You can use these shortcut keys to bypass the menus.

The key names in the Windows NT documentation appear in small capital letters. For example, the Shift key appears as SHIFT, and the Control key appears as CTRL. The following conventions are used to describe keyboard actions in Windows NT.

Convention	Meaning

KEY1+KEY2	A plus sign (+) between key names means that you must press the keys at the same time. For example, "Press ALT+F4" means you press and hold down ALT while you press F4.

KEY1, KEY2	A comma (,) between key names means that the keys must be pressed sequentially. For example, "Press ALT, HYPHEN (-)" means you press and release ALT, and then press the hyphen.

Keypad	The numeric keys to the right of the standard alphanumeric keys. Press NUM LOCK to toggle between numbers or arrow keys.

Arrow keys	The keys labeled UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT, HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN on the extended keyboard or on the keypad; used to move or scroll in a document, window, or list.

Each shortcut key may also work with the SHIFT, CTRL, and ALT keys for different actions. The following list shows the general uses for shortcut keys, either individually or in combination with other keys.

Key	Used to

ENTER	Confirm or carry out an action.

ESC	Cancel an action.

F1, F2, F3, ...	Provide shortcuts for commands. If your keyboard has only 10 function keys, press ALT+F1 for F11, ALT+F2 for F12, and so on.

INS, DEL, BACKSPACE	Edit  -  insert, delete, or clear an item.

TAB or arrow keys	Move the cursor, select an item, or scroll in a window or list.

ALT+key	Choose commands or dialog box options, or perform other actions related to application windows.

SHIFT+key	Extend the selection.

CTRL+key	Choose a command, apply an action in a dialog box, or perform an alternate action on a selected object.


Using the Keyboard for Common Actions
Windows NT Basics	17 of 18

Using the Keyboard

Using the Keyboard for Common Actions

You can use standard keyboard procedures for many of the common tasks throughout Windows NT. The following procedures summarize how to start an application in Program Manager and open a file in an application.

To start an application in Program Manager

1.	Press CTRL+TAB to select the group you want to open, and then press ENTER to open that group window.

2.	Press an arrow key to select the program-item icon for the application you want, and then press ENTER to start the application.

Or press SHIFT+ENTER to start the application as an icon.

To open a file in an application

1.	Press ALT to select the menu bar.

2.	To choose Open from the File menu, press F,O (the direct-access keys, which are indicated by the underlined letters in the menu bar and in the menus).

Or press the RIGHT ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to select and open the menu. Press the Down Arrow key to select Open, and then press ENTER to choose it.

3.	In the Open dialog box, press TAB to move between the list of files, directories, and drives, and then press an arrow key to select the filename or directory you want.

4.	To choose the OK button, press ENTER.

To cancel your selection and close the dialog box, press ESC.

This same series of keyboard actions works everywhere in Windows NT for choosing menu items and for selecting options in dialog boxes.


Keyboard Shortcut Reference
Windows NT Basics	18 of 18

Using the Keyboard

Keyboard Shortcut Reference

The following tables summarize common keyboard shortcuts in Windows NT. Keys that must be pressed sequentially are separated by a comma; keys that must be pressed at the same time are separated by a plus sign.

Basic Windows NT Keyboard Shortcuts

To		Press
Using Help:
Open or switch to the Help window		F1
Move to and view the next jump term or definition		TAB, ENTER
Using Program Manager and File Manager:
Open the selected icon		ENTER
Move a selected group or item		F7
Copy a selected item		F8
Clear a selected group or item		DEL
Edit properties of a selected group or item¹		ALT+ENTER
Cascade the windows on the desktop		SHIFT+F5
Tile the windows on the desktop		SHIFT+F4
Using File Manager:
Expand the directory tree one level		+ (keypad)
Expand a directory branch		* (keypad)
Expand all branches		CTRL+* (keypad)
Collapse a directory branch		- (keypad)
Refresh the display		F5
Scrolling in a window or a dialog box:
Scroll up or down one line, or left or right one item		Arrow keys
Scroll up one window		PAGE UP
Scroll down one window		PAGE DOWN
Scroll left one window		CTRL+PAGE UP
Scroll right one window		CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Moving and selecting in a window or a dialog box:
Move to an item in a dialog box and select it		TAB or arrow keys
Move left, right, up, or down in a window or dialog box		Arrow keys
Move to the beginning of a line		HOME
Move to the end of a line		END
Move up or down one window		PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN
Move left one window		CTRL+PAGE UP
Move right one window		CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Extend the selection left, right, up, or down		SHIFT+arrow keys
Extend the selection to the beginning of the line		SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the end of the line		SHIFT+END
Extend the selection up one window		SHIFT+PAGE UP
Extend the selection down one window		SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Extend the selection left one window		CTRL+SHIFT+PAGE UP
Extend the selection right one window		CTRL+SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Editing in dialog boxes or applications:
Undo the last action		CTRL+Z or ALT+BACKSPACE
Delete the selection		SHIFT+DEL
Clear the selection		DEL
Copy the selection		CTRL+INS
Paste the selection		SHIFT+INS
Clear the preceding character		BACKSPACE
Working with a window:
Select the menu bar		ALT or F10
Carry out a command or action		ENTER
Cancel a command or action		ESC
Toggling full-screen and window display for non-Windows-based applications²		ALT+ENTER
Select an application's Control menu		ALT+SPACEBAR
Select the Control menu in a document window		ALT, HYPHEN (-)
Display the Task List		CTRL+ESC
Move to the next application		ALT+TAB
Quit the current application		ALT+F4
Working with multiple document windows:
Move a document window		CTRL+F7, arrow keys
Size a document window		CTRL+F8, arrow keys
Maximize a document window		CTRL+F10
Minimize a document window		CTRL+F9
Restore a document window		CTRL+F5
Close a document window		CTRL+F4
Move to the next document window		CTRL+F6
Switch to the previous document window		CTRL+SHIFT+F6
Move to the next pane		F6
Move to the previous pane		SHIFT+F6
¹  This shortcut also toggles between full-screen and window display for the command prompt and non-Windows-based applications.

²  This shortcut also allows you to edit properties of a selected group or item in Program Manager and File Manager.


Program Manager
Chapter 3	1 of 18

Program Manager

Use Program Manager to organize your applications and files in groups and to easily start applications.

This chapter explains how to use Program Manager, including the following topics:

Quitting Windows NT

Working with group windows and icons

Creating and deleting groups

Creating, copying, moving, and deleting program items

Changing program item icons

Starting applications from Program Manager

Starting applications automatically when you log on to Windows NT

Note

Windows NT does not support applications that replace Program Manager as the default shell. Many features of such applications are supported; however, you should not run these applications as a complete replacement for Program Manager.


Overview
Program Manager	2 of 18

Overview

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

Use Program Manager to start applications and to organize applications and files on the Windows NT desktop. Program Manager starts when you log on to Windows NT. The name of the computer or domain that you specified when you logged on and your username appear in the title bar of the Program Manager window. When you want to leave Windows NT, use Program Manager to log off or shut down your computer.

The first time you log on to Windows NT, Program Manager opens on your desktop with the Main group window open inside the Program Manager window.

Program Manager lets you organize your applications so that you can easily find and run them. To get working quickly, you can have an application open a document automatically when it starts. Or you can start applications automatically when you log on to Windows NT. Use groups and program items to organize your applications. Groups can be displayed as windows or icons.

Program-item icons appear inside a group window and represent the applications, accessories, and documents you can start from Program Manager. Double-clicking a program-item icon starts the application that the icon represents. Program-item icons can be moved between groups but not outside of them.

A group window is a separate window inside the Program Manager window that contains program-item icons. Each group window has its own Control menu in the upper left corner, but no menu bar. You can control group windows using commands from the Program Manager menu bar. Group windows cannot be moved outside the Program Manager window.

A group icon is a minimized group window. Group icons appear along the lower edge of the Program Manager window. Each is labeled to indicate what sort of program items are in the group. Like group windows, group icons cannot be moved outside the Program Manager window.


Quitting Windows NT Using Program Manager
Program Manager	3 of 18

Overview

Quitting Windows NT Using Program Manager

Program Manager runs as long as you are running Windows NT. To end your Windows NT session when you want to leave your computer running, return to Program Manager and log off. When you want to turn off your computer, return to Program Manager and use the Shutdown option.

To log off from Windows NT

1.	From the File menu, choose Logoff. Or double-click the Control-menu box.

2.	Choose the OK button to confirm that you want to log off.

The system closes any running applications and displays the Welcome dialog box. Before closing an application, the system prompts you to save any unsaved work. Running services are not stopped.

To shut down your computer

1.	From the File menu, choose Shutdown.

2.	Choose the OK button to confirm that you want to shut down your computer.

The system closes running applications and services, and informs you when you can safely switch off your computer.

If you want to restart your computer immediately rather than switch it off, select the Restart When Shutdown Is Complete check box. Windows NT automatically restarts after closing applications and services.

Caution

Never use the computer's power switch to quit Windows NT. Always choose the Shutdown command to quit, so Windows NT can save changes in all working files and properly close applications and services.


What Are Groups and Program Items?
Program Manager	4 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

A group contains program items. You can display a group as either an icon or a window. When a group window is open, you can work with its program items - icons that represent applications. When you choose a program item, the application it represents starts. If you have specified a document in the program item, the application opens the document for you when it starts.

Groups provide a convenient way to organize your applications, and program items provide an easy way to start your applications. Because you can associate a file with an application when you create a program item, you can create groups that organize files belonging to a project and let you easily switch from one part of the project to the next.

Windows NT provides personal groups and common groups. Personal groups are stored as part of each user's logon information. Each time a particular user logs on, that user's personal groups appear. Common groups appear for all users who log on to the computer. Personal and common groups have different icons:

When you installed Windows NT, the system created groups and program items for applications.

Group	Description

Main 	Contains the Windows NT system applications including File Manager, Control Panel, and Print Manager. The Read Me item contains information you should know before you start working with Windows NT.

Applications 	Contains applications found on your hard disk.

Administrative Tools 	Contains applications for system management including User Manager for Domains, Disk Administrator, and Backup.

Accessories 	Includes applications for word processing, drawing, and communications, plus several other applications such as a clock and a calculator.

Games	Offers games you can use to practice Windows NT skills.

Startup	Contains applications that start when you log on to Windows NT. You can add any applications you want to this group; it is empty until you add applications to it.


Opening Group Windows and Reducing Them to Icons
Program Manager	5 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Opening Group Windows and Reducing Them to Icons

To start an application from a group, first open the group window that contains the program-item icon for that application. Once you have started the application, you can reduce the group window to an icon to free room on your desktop. For more information on starting applications, see "Starting an Application from a Group," later in this chapter.

To open a group window

Double-click the group icon. Or select the group's name from the list at the bottom of the Window menu. Or press CTRL+F6 OR CTRL+TAB until the group icon you want is selected, and then press ENTER.

To reduce a group window to an icon

Click the Minimize button, or double-click the Control-menu box for the group.


Arranging Group Windows
Program Manager	6 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Arranging Group Windows

When several group windows are open, some windows will hide others. Use the Cascade and Tile commands from the Window menu to arrange all the open windows so that some part of each window is visible.

The Cascade command resizes and layers the open group windows within the Program Manager workspace so that each title bar is visible.

The Tile command divides the Program Manager workspace into smaller windows of similar sizes for each group window you have open.

If you open another group window after you use the Cascade or Tile command, it covers the arranged windows. To arrange it with the other windows, choose the Cascade or Tile command again.

To arrange all the open group windows

From the Window menu, choose Cascade or Tile.


Arranging Group and Program-Item Icons
Program Manager	7 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Arranging Group and Program-Item Icons

You can arrange icons one at a time, or have Program Manager organize them all at once. When Program Manager arranges group icons, it aligns them along the lower edge of the Program Manager window. When arranging program-item icons, Program Manager distributes them within their group window.

To arrange icons one at a time

Drag each icon to a new location.

To arrange group icons

1.	Select any group icon.

2.	From the Window menu, choose Arrange Icons to align the group icons along the lower edge of the Program Manager window.

To arrange program-item icons

1.	Open the group window that contains the program-item icons you want to rearrange.

2.	From the Window menu, choose Arrange Icons to distribute the program-item icons evenly within the selected group window.

Windows NT can automatically arrange program-item icons whenever you change the window size, or add, delete, or move program items. You can adjust the spacing between icons by choosing the Desktop icon from Control Panel, and then typing a number in the Icon Spacing box.

To automatically arrange icons

From the Options menu, choose Auto Arrange.

A check mark beside the command means it is in effect.


Saving Program Manager Settings
Program Manager	8 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Saving Program Manager Settings

Once you have set the appearance of your group windows and icons, you can save it. Then each time you log on to Windows NT, they will appear as you set them up. As an alternative, you can choose to save the appearance of group windows and icons as they are when you log off of Windows NT. When you next log on to Windows NT, they will appear as they were when you logged off.

To save the current settings

From the Options menu, choose Save Settings Now.

So that different settings are not saved when you log off from Windows NT, make sure that the Save Settings On Exit command is not checked.

To save settings when you log off from Windows NT

From the Options menu, choose Save Settings On Exit.

A check mark appears next to the command. You can turn this feature off by choosing the command again.


Creating Groups
Program Manager	9 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Creating Groups

You can create personal and common program groups using Program Manager. Generally, you will only need to create personal groups. When you log on, the groups you have created are ready for you. When another user logs on to the computer, that user does not see your program groups. You can add any number of groups to Program Manager to organize your applications and documents in a way that makes sense to you. After creating a group, you can add program items to it. For more information, see "Creating Program Items," later in this chapter.

Create a common program group only when you want all users of the computer to have access to the program items in the group. If, for example, you have installed an application that you want to make available to all users of the computer, you can place it in a common program group.

To create a common group, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group. Users who are not members of one of these groups can copy program items from a common group to their personal groups; however, they cannot delete or move program items from common groups.

To create a new group

1.	From the File menu, choose New.

2.	In the New Program Object dialog box, select Personal Program Group or Common Program Group, and then choose the OK button.

3.	In the Description box, type a description for the group you want to create and choose the OK button.

This description will appear in the title bar of the group window and below the group icon.


Creating Program Items
Program Manager	10 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Creating Program Items

To create a program item, define the properties for the item. You can create a program item using Program Manager, File Manager, or Windows NT Setup. If you use File Manager or Windows NT Setup to create a program item, Windows NT will define the item's properties for you. Each method of creating program items has advantages:

Use Program Manager when you want to specify the program item's properties such as the application's working directory or which document the application will open when it starts. Also use Program Manager when you want to change a program item's properties.

When you are using a mouse, File Manager provides the most direct way to create a program item and place it in the group you choose.

Windows NT Setup is fastest when you need to create many program items at one time. For more information on this method, see Chapter 12, "System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup."

Creating or Changing a Program Item Using Program Manager

You can use Program Manager to create a program item for an application or for an application and a document. The following steps guide you through the basics of creating a program item. If you want, you can also specify a working directory, a shortcut key, that the program start running minimized, and whether a Windows 3.1 application runs in its own memory space.

To create or change a program item in a common program group, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

To create a program item using Program Manager

1.	Open the group to which you want to add the item.

2.	From the File menu, choose New to display the New Program Object dialog box. Then select the Program Item option and choose the OK button. Or press and hold down ALT while double-clicking in a blank area of the group window.

3.	In the Description box, type a description that identifies the application.

This optional description becomes the label that appears under the icon in the group window. If you leave this box blank, Program Manager labels the icon for you. However, a description of your own can be very useful, especially if you set up multiple program items for the same application.

4.	In the Command Line box, type the name of the program file, including its path and extension.

For example, to add Microsoft Excel, located in a directory named C:\EXCEL, you would type:

c:\excel\excel.exe

If you don't know the name of the program file, choose the Browse button to display a list of files and directories. Select the appropriate filename from the list. You can use the directory listing to change to a different directory, if necessary. Choosing the OK button places the selected filename in the Command Line box.

If you want the application to open a document when it starts, after the program name type a space and then the document's filename. Include the path required to locate the document. Be sure to separate the program name from the document name with a space.

For example, to specify a spreadsheet named 92BUDGET.XLS, located in the C:\ADMIN\FY92 directory, as the document to be opened when you start Microsoft Excel, you would type:

c:\excel\excel.exe c:\admin\fy92\92budget.xls

If the document is in the same directory as the application, you can omit the path. For example, to specify a spreadsheet named EXPENSE.XLS, located in the C:\EXCEL directory, you would type:

c:\excel\excel.exe expense.xls.

5.	Choose the OK button.

The dialog box closes and the new program item appears in the group.

You can also specify a working directory, a shortcut key, and whether the application starts as an icon in the Program Item Properties dialog box.

To specify a working directory

In the Working Directory box, type the name of the directory.

When you start the application, the directory you specify as the working directory will become the current directory. It will be the default directory in the application's Open and Save As dialog boxes when you open and save files.

To specify an application shortcut key

Type the key combination in the Shortcut Key box.

A shortcut key allows you to switch quickly to the application when it is running. Valid shortcut-key sequences are CTRL+ALT+character, CTRL+SHIFT+character, SHIFT+ALT+character, and CTRL+SHIFT+ALT+character. Character can be any letter, number, or special character. When you type a character in the Shortcut Key box, Program Manager adds CTRL+ALT in front of it. To specify a different control-key sequence, you must type the sequence.

You can reserve shortcut keys for an MS-DOS application by using Program Manager or PIF Editor. Shortcut-key settings made in Program Manager override settings made in PIF Editor.

To run an application as an icon when it starts

Select the Run Minimized check box.

When this box is selected, the application is reduced to an icon when it starts. When you want applications you have added to the Startup group to run minimized when you start Windows NT, use this option.

To have a Windows 3.1 application run in a separate memory space

Select the Run in Separate Memory Space check box. (This check box is enabled when you type the path of a Windows 3.1 application in the Command Line box.)

Selecting this box causes this Windows 3.1 application to run in a separate memory space from other Windows 3.1 applications. Doing this protects other Windows 3.1 applications if this application crashes or hangs, and can provide better responsiveness because it allows true preemptive multitasking. However, it also uses more system resources.

Once you have created a program item, you can change its properties.

To change a program item

1.	Select the program item and choose Properties from the File menu.

2.	Change any of the options in the Program Item Properties dialog box and choose the OK button.

Creating a Program Item Using File Manager

You can also use File Manager to create program-item icons in Program Manager groups. You can move applications and associated documents from File Manager directories to Program Manager group windows or group icons.

To create a program item in a common program group, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

The following steps require a mouse and have no keyboard equivalent.

To create a program item using File Manager

1.	Arrange your desktop so that you can see both File Manager and the group where you want to place the new program item.

The destination group can be either a window or an icon.

2.	Open the File Manager window, and if necessary position and resize it.

If no other application windows are open, you can use the Tile button in the Task List to arrange the File Manager and Program Manager windows.

3.	Locate and select the program or document file in File Manager that you want to add. You can select multiple items and add them all to a group at the same time.

4.	Drag the file from File Manager to Program Manager, and place it in the group window or on the group icon.

As you drag the file, the mouse pointer turns into a replica of a file icon. If you have more than one file or document selected, you see a multiple-file icon.

Once you have created the program item, you can customize its properties by selecting the icon and choosing Properties from the File menu. For more information on program-item properties, see "Creating or Changing a Program Item Using Program Manager," earlier in this chapter.


Deleting Groups and Program Items
Program Manager	11 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Deleting Groups and Program Items

When you no longer need a group or program item, you can delete it. When you delete a group, Program Manager deletes the program items it contains. Deleting program items has no effect on the corresponding application and document files. They are not removed from your hard disk.

To delete a common program group or program items in a common group, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

To delete a group

1.	If the group contains program items, reduce it to an icon. If the group window is empty, you can delete it without reducing it to an icon.

2.	Select the group icon or empty group window.

3.	From the File menu, choose Delete. Or press DEL.

4.	A dialog box prompts you to confirm the deletion. Choose the Yes button to remove the group.

To delete a program item from a group

1.	Open the group window that contains the item you want to delete.

2.	Select the program-item icon.

3.	From the File menu, choose Delete. Or press DEL.

4.	A dialog box prompts you to confirm the deletion. Choose the Yes button to remove the program item.


Changing the Description of a Group
Program Manager	12 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Changing the Description of a Group

You can change the description of any group. The description is the label for the group icon and appears in the title bar of the group window.

To change the description of a common group, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

To change the description of a group

1.	Make sure the group whose description you want to change is reduced to an icon.

2.	Select the group icon.

3.	From the File menu, choose Properties. Or press and hold down ALT while double-clicking the program-group icon.

4.	In the Program Group Properties dialog box, type a new description, and then choose the OK button.


Copying a Program Item to Another Group
Program Manager	13 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Copying a Program Item to Another Group

The easiest way to copy a program item from one group to another is to use the mouse to drag the program-item icon onto the other group icon or into the other group window. If you don't have a mouse, you can use the Copy command on the File menu.

You can always copy a program item from a common group to one of your personal groups. However, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group to copy a program item from a personal group to a common group.

To copy a program item to another group

1.	If you're not concerned with where the new program-item icon is placed in the group window, open the group window containing the program-item icon you want to copy and leave the destination group reduced to an icon.

If you want to place the new program-item icon in a particular location in a group window, open the group windows for both the source and the destination.

2.	Press and hold down CTRL while you drag the program-item icon from its current location to the destination group's icon or window.

The mouse pointer becomes a replica of the program-item icon you are copying.

3.	When the copied icon is on top of the destination group's icon or inside the destination group's window, release the mouse button and the CTRL key.

You can create a duplicate program item within a group. Press CTRL while dragging the icon to another place in the window.

To copy a program item to another group using the Copy command

1.	Open the group window that contains the program item you want to copy.

2.	Select the program-item icon.

3.	From the File menu, choose Copy.

4.	In the To Group box, select the name of the group you want to copy the program item to.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Moving a Program Item to Another Group
Program Manager	14 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Moving a Program Item to Another Group

Moving a program item is easiest if you have a mouse. You can simply drag the program-item icon onto the other group icon or into a group window. If you don't have a mouse, you can use the Move command on the File menu.

To move a program item from a common group, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

To move a program item to another group

1.	Open the group window that contains the program item you want to move.

2.	Drag the program-item icon to the destination group's icon or window.

The mouse pointer becomes a replica of the program-item icon you are moving.

3.	When the program-item icon is on top of the destination group's icon or inside the destination group's window, release the mouse button.

To move a program item to another group using the Move command

1.	Open the group window that contains the program item you want to move.

2.	Select the program-item icon.

3.	From the File menu, choose Move.

4.	In the To Group box, select the name of the group you want to move the program item to.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Changing an Icon
Program Manager	15 of 18

What Are Groups and Program Items?

Changing an Icon

When you add a program item to a group, Program Manager selects an icon for that item. You can change the icon displayed in the group window.

To change an icon in a common group, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

To change an icon

1.	Select the program item whose icon you want to change.

2.	From the File menu, choose Properties.

3.	In the Program Item Properties dialog box, choose the Change Icon button.

4.	Use one of the following methods to select a new icon:

If more than one icon is available, select a different icon in the Current Icon box.

If no additional icons are available, Windows NT displays the icons available with PROGMAN.EXE. Select an icon in the Current Icon box.

In the File Name box, type the path to either PROGMAN.EXE or MORICONS.DLL, for example c:\systemroot\system32\moricons.dll, and choose the OK button. Then select an icon in the Current Icon box.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Starting an Application from a Group
Program Manager	16 of 18

Starting an Application from a Group

If an application is represented by a program-item icon in a group, the easiest way to start the application is to choose the program-item icon from the group window. If you included a document with the program item, it appears in the application workspace. For more information, see "Creating or Changing a Program Item Using Program Manager," earlier in this chapter.

To start an application from a group

1.	Open the group window that contains the program-item icon for the application.

2.	Double-click the icon.

When you start an application, Program Manager changes the current directory to the directory you specified in the Working Directory box when you added the program item to the group. If you are using an MS-DOS application, you can specify a working directory in either Program Manager or PIF Editor. Settings made in Program Manager override PIF Editor settings.

Use the following steps to run an application as an icon when you start the application.

To run an application as an icon

1.	Open the group window that contains the program item for the application.

2.	Press and hold down SHIFT while double-clicking the icon.

You can have Windows reduce Program Manager to an icon whenever you start an application. This is useful because the icon remains visible on the lower edge of the desktop when most applications are running, making it easy to find when you want to switch to Program Manager.

To reduce Program Manager to an icon whenever you run an application

From the Options menu, choose Minimize On Use.

A check mark appears beside the command when it is in effect. To cancel the command, choose it again.


Starting an Application When You Start Windows NT
Program Manager	17 of 18

Starting an Application from a Group

Starting an Application When You Start Windows NT

When you install Windows NT using the Setup program, Windows NT creates a Startup group. When you add a program item for an application to the Startup group, the application starts each time you log on to Windows NT.

For example, if you want to start File Manager whenever you log on to Windows NT, move the File Manager icon from the Main group to the Startup group. Program items in the Startup group start in the order their icons appear in the window starting with the top row, and moving left to right.

You can also have Windows NT automatically reduce an application to an icon when it starts. To do this, select the Run Minimized box in the Program Item Properties dialog box for the application's program item.


Returning to Program Manager from an Application
Program Manager	18 of 18

Starting an Application from a Group

Returning to Program Manager from an Application

When you are working with an application or document and you want to start a different application, you can do so by returning to Program Manager.

To return to Program Manager from an application

Click the Program Manager window or double-click the Program Manager icon. Or press ALT+TAB repeatedly until the message box shows the Program Manager title and icon. Or press ALT+ESC repeatedly to move through open application windows and application icons until you reach Program Manager.


File Manager
Chapter 4	1 of 50

File Manager

File Manager allows you to organize and work with directories and files.

This chapter explains how to use File Manager and includes the following topics:

Using directory windows to display directories and files

Navigating drives and directories

Working with directories and files

Sharing directories and files

Securing directories and files

Maintaining disks


Overview
File Manager	2 of 50

Overview

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

File Manager displays the organization of the directories and files on your disk drives and on network disk drives. Use File Manager to create and remove directories; move, copy, and delete files; connect to directories shared on the network; share directories; secure files and directories; and perform other disk, directory, and file management tasks.

When you first start File Manager, the File Manager window appears. It contains a menu bar, toolbar, drivebar, status bar, and a directory window that shows the contents of the current drive.

The toolbar provides quick access to commands through buttons and allows you to change drives by selecting from a list.

The drivebar allows you to change drives by selecting one of the drive icons. Different icons represent the floppy and hard drives on your computer, network drives to which you've connected, and CD-ROM drives.

The status bar shows you how much free space remains and total space exists on the current drive. It also shows you how many files are in the current directory and how much space they take up.

The toolbar, drivebar, and status bar are displayed by default. You can remove them from the screen by choosing the Toolbar, Drivebar, and Status Bar commands from the Options menu.


Starting and Quitting File Manager
File Manager	3 of 50

Overview

Starting and Quitting File Manager

By default, when you start File Manager, its window appears as it was when you last quit File Manager. Settings you make using the Options menu are always saved when you quit. The positions of directory windows and icons and the settings on the View menu are saved as long as the Save Settings On Exit command is in effect when you quit.

To start File Manager

Choose the File Manager icon in the Main Group. Or select the File Manager icon and press ENTER.

To quit File Manager

Choose the Control-menu box. Or, from the File menu, choose Exit.


Customizing the Toolbar
File Manager	4 of 50

Overview

Customizing the Toolbar

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

You can add, remove, and rearrange the buttons on the toolbar. Every command available on File Manager menus has an equivalent button.

To add a button to the toolbar

1.	From the Options menu, choose Customize Toolbar. Or double-click the background of the toolbar.

2.	In the Available Buttons box, select the button that you want to add. Select Separator to add a space between buttons.

3.	Choose the Add button.

To move a toolbar button

Press and hold down SHIFT while dragging the button to a new location on the toolbar.

– Or –

1.	From the Options menu, choose Customize Toolbar. Or double-click the background of the toolbar.

2.	In the Toolbar Buttons box, select the button or Separator you want to move.

To move the selection to the left on the toolbar, choose the Move Up button.

To move the selection to the right on the toolbar, choose the Move Down button.

3.	Choose the Close button.

To remove a toolbar button

Press and hold down SHIFT while dragging the button off the toolbar.

– Or –

1.	From the Options menu, choose Customize Toolbar. Or double-click the background of the toolbar.

2.	In the Toolbar Buttons box, select the button or Separator you want to remove, and then choose the Remove button.

3.	Choose the Close button.

To restore the default toolbar buttons

1.	From the Options menu, choose Customize Toolbar. Or double-click the background of the toolbar.

2.	Choose the Reset button.

3.	Choose the Close button.


Working with Directory Windows
File Manager	5 of 50

Working with Directory Windows

Each directory window is divided into two panes:  the left pane displays the directory tree, and the right pane lists the contents of the current directory. The directory tree shows the structure of the directories on a disk. The directory structure begins at the upper left with the root directory, the first directory on a disk. The root directory is created when you format a disk. It is represented by a backslash (\). For example, C:\ is the root directory for drive C. Other directories branch below the root directory. The contents list in the right pane of the directory window shows the names of files and directories within the current directory. Directories within a directory are known as subdirectories. The panes are separated by a split bar that allows you to adjust their widths.

The following table describes the elements in a directory window.

Element	Description

Directory path	The name and location of the current directory is displayed in the title bar of the directory window.

Volume label	The name that identifies your disk is displayed in brackets ([ ]) to the right of the directory path. This information appears only if you have assigned a label to your disk.

Network name	If you have selected a shared directory, its name is displayed instead of the volume label.

File system name	The name of the file system used on the selected drive is displayed next to the root directory.

Directory icons	Icons representing directories and shared directories appear in both panes. In the directory tree, directory icons are connected by a vertical line to the directory level above them. In the contents list, directory icons represent directories in the current directory.

Current directory	The directory you are currently using is represented by an icon that looks like an open directory folder in the directory tree. File Manager commands affect the current directory or files within it.

File icons	Icons next to filenames indicate file type. There are icons to represent program files, document files, and other types of files. For more information, see "Working with Files and Directories," later in this chapter.

Up icon	Double-clicking the arrow at the top of the contents pane takes you up one level in the directory tree.


Opening and Closing Directory Windows
File Manager	6 of 50

Working with Directory Windows

Opening and Closing Directory Windows

You can open additional directory windows that display the contents of the same drive or a different drive. Opening multiple directory windows makes it easy to move and copy files.

If you have two or more windows displaying the same drive and directory information, a number appears in the title bar of each window, indicating that there is more than one window displaying that directory.

A new directory window inherits its display options from the previous one. For example, if you are working with a directory window that shows only the directory tree, and you open a new directory window, the new window displays only the directory tree.

To open a new directory window

To open a window		Do this
That displays information for the selected drive		Double-click the drive icon. Or press TAB to select the drivebar and use the arrow keys to select a drive icon. Then choose Open from the File menu, or press ENTER
That displays the same information as the previous active window		From the Window menu, choose New Window. Or from the toolbar, click the New Window button.
That displays only the contents pane for the selected directory		In the directory tree, press and hold down SHIFT while double-clicking the directory icon. Or in the directory tree, select the directory icon, and then press SHIFT+ENTER.
When you finish working with a directory window, you can close it to clear space on your screen. If you have only one directory window open, you cannot close it.

To close the active directory window

Double-click the Control-menu box, located in the upper-left corner of the directory window. Or, from the Control menu, choose Close.

File Manager updates open directory windows automatically. For example, when you save a new file from an application, File Manager displays the new file name immediately. Sometimes File Manager cannot complete an update when, for example, you are using network directories or you have changed floppy disks. You can update the active directory window manually when this occurs.

To update a directory window

Click the drive icon for the current drive, or choose Refresh from the Window menu.


Selecting and Arranging Directory Windows and Icons
File Manager	7 of 50

Working with Directory Windows

Selecting and Arranging Directory Windows and Icons

Before you can work with the files and directories in a directory window, you must select the window. Selecting the window makes it active:  the title bar changes color or intensity and the window moves in front of any other open windows.

To select an open directory window

Click anywhere in the window. Or choose a window name from the list at the bottom of the Window menu. Or press CTRL+F6 or CTRL+TAB until the window you want is selected.

If the window you want to select is hidden by another window, you can use the Cascade or Tile commands on the Window menu to rearrange the open directory windows so that all of them are visible.

To arrange open directory windows

To		From the Window menu, choose
Overlap windows so that each window's title remains visible		Cascade
Resize and arrange windows without overlap so that each window is wider than it is long		Tile Horizontally
Resize and arrange windows without overlap so that each window is longer than it is wide		Tile Vertically
When you minimize a directory window, it becomes an icon. You can move icons individually by dragging them with a mouse, or File Manager can arrange them evenly all at once. For information about changing the spacing between icons arranged by File Manager, see "Changing the Desktop" in Chapter 5, "Control Panel."

To arrange icons

From the Window menu, choose Arrange Icons.


Displaying the Directory Tree or Contents
File Manager	8 of 50

Working with Directory Windows

Displaying the Directory Tree or Contents

When you first start File Manager, the directory window displays both the directory tree for the current drive and the contents of the current directory. By using commands on the View menu, you can choose to display only the directory tree or only the contents of the current directory. When both panes of a directory window are displayed, they are separated by a split bar that you can move to change the widths of the panes.

To display the directory tree or directory contents

To display		From the view menu, choose
Only the directory tree for the current drive		Tree Only
Only the contents of the current directory		Directory Only
The tree and contents for the current directory		Tree And Directory
To move the split bar

1.	Point to the split bar.

The pointer turns into a double bar with two arrows.

2.	Drag the bar to a new position.

– Or –

1.	From the View menu, choose Split to display a vertical bar.

2.	Use the arrow keys to move the selection bar to where you want to place the split bar, and then press ENTER.

If you decide you do not want to move the split bar, press ESC to cancel the command.


Changing the Font in File Manager
File Manager	9 of 50

Working with Directory Windows

Changing the Font in File Manager

You can change the font that File Manager uses to display the names of files and directories. When you change the font, it changes in all directory windows.

To change the font

1.	From the Options menu, choose Font.

2.	In the Font box, select the font you want to use.

When you select a font, a style, or a size, the text in the Sample box changes to reflect your choice.

3.	In the Font Style box, select a style option (for example, bold or italic).

4.	In the Size box, select a point size:  the larger the point size, the larger the character appears on your screen.

5.	By default, file and directory names appear in lowercase letters on FAT drives. On drives formatted to use the Windows NT files system (NTFS), names appear as they were typed in uppercase and lowercase.

To display names on FAT drives with their original case preserved, clear the Display Lowercase For FAT Drives check box.

To display names on all drives in lowercase, select the Display Lowercase For All Drives check box.

6.	Choose the OK button.


Navigating Drives and Directories
File Manager	10 of 50

Navigating Drives and Directories

You can use File Manager to change to different local and network drives and to navigate through the directory structure.


Changing Disk Drives
File Manager	11 of 50

Navigating Drives and Directories

Changing Disk Drives

A directory window shows the directory structure of the current drive. On the drivebar, the icon for the current drive is surrounded by a rectangle. On the toolbar, the current drive is shown in the list box.

When you change to a different drive, the names of the files and directories on that drive are displayed in the directory window. When File Manager searches the drive to display its contents, you can press ESC to stop the search. If you stop the search, only a partial directory tree is displayed, as indicated by the status bar at the bottom of the File Manager window.

To select another drive in a directory window

Click the drivebar icon representing the drive you want to use.

Or choose the drive from the toolbar drive list.

Or press and hold down CTRL while typing the letter of the drive you want to select.

– Or –

1.	Press TAB or F6 to move to the drivebar.

To move back to the directory tree or contents area without changing drives, press TAB or F6 again.

2.	Use the arrow keys to select the drive icon you want, and then press the SPACEBAR.

To change drives by using the Select Drive command

1.	From the Disk menu, choose Select Drive. Or double-click the background of the drivebar to display the Select Drive dialog box.

2.	Select the drive you want to change to.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Changing Directories
File Manager	12 of 50

Navigating Drives and Directories

Changing Directories

You can change directories using either the directory or the contents list.

In the directory tree, the current directory is marked by the selection cursor, a dotted rectangle around the highlighted icon and text. You can select only one directory at a time in the directory tree. To change to a different directory, move the selection cursor.

In the contents list, you can move up or down one level in the directory structure. You can go up one level by choosing the Up icon, and you can change to a subdirectory by choosing its icon in the list.

To change to another directory in the directory tree

Click the directory name you want to change to. Or use the following keys to change to a different directory.

Press	To change to

UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW	A directory above or below the current directory.

HOME or BACKSLASH (\)	The root directory.

END	The last directory in the list.

RIGHT ARROW	The first subdirectory of the current directory, if one is displayed in the directory tree.

LEFT ARROW or BACKSPACE	The next directory level up from the current directory.

PAGE UP	The directory one screen up from the current directory.

PAGE DOWN	The directory one screen down from the current directory.

CTRL+UP ARROW	The previous directory at the same level.

CTRL+DOWN ARROW	The next directory at the same level.

A character key	The next directory whose name begins with that letter or number.

To change directories by using the contents list

To		Do this
Move down a level		Choose the directory icon next to the subdirectory's name.
Move up a level		Choose the Up icon, or press the BACKSPACE key.


Expanding and Collapsing the Directory Tree
File Manager	13 of 50

Navigating Drives and Directories

Expanding and Collapsing the Directory Tree

When you first start File Manager, only the first level of directories are displayed in the directory tree.

When you expand a directory, the directory tree displays the names of the subdirectories in that directory. Like the structure of a tree, subdirectories branch from directories. You can expand an entire directory branch, a single level of the branch, or all branches in the tree. You can also collapse a directory so that its branch of subdirectories is not listed in the directory tree.

To expand or collapse a directory

To		Do this in the directory tree
Expand one level of a directory		Choose the icon or name of the directory you want to expand, or select the directory, and then choose Expand One Level from the Tree menu.
Expand an entire branch		Select the directory, and then choose Expand Branch from the Tree menu.
Expand all branches in the directory tree		From the Tree menu, choose Expand All.
Collapse a directory		Choose the icon or name of the directory you want to collapse, or select the directory, and then choose Collapse Branch from the Tree menu.


Showing Which Directories Expand
File Manager	14 of 50

Navigating Drives and Directories

Showing Which Directories Expand

If you want to know which directories have subdirectories, you can use the Indicate Expandable Branches command on the Tree menu. When you use this command, a plus sign (+) marks each directory that has subdirectories. The plus sign means you can expand the directory to display its subdirectories in the directory tree. After you expand a directory, the plus sign changes to a minus sign (-), indicating that the directory is expanded and can be collapsed. If you choose the Indicate Expandable Branches command, File Manager may take longer to create the directory tree.

To mark expandable directories in the directory tree

From the Tree menu, choose Indicate Expandable Branches.

A check mark appears next to the command in the Tree menu.

To turn off this feature, choose Indicate Expandable Branches again.


Connecting To and Disconnecting From a Network Drive
File Manager	15 of 50

Navigating Drives and Directories

Connecting To and Disconnecting From a Network Drive

You can use File Manager to connect to and disconnect from network drives. When you connect to a network drive, you can specify whether or not to reconnect to the drive each time you log on to Windows NT.

When you connect to a network drive, File Manager opens a new window in which to display the directory information. You can switch this feature off from the Options menu by choosing the Open New Window On Connect command.

Computers in your computer's domain or workgroup are displayed automatically in the Shared Directories box. If you are connecting over a slow network, for example, connecting through Remote Access Service, you can switch this off by clearing the Expand By Default check box.

If you are logged on as a member of the Administrators, Server Operators, or Backup Operators groups, you can connect to a computer's administrative root shares, for example \\SALESERVER\C$. Administrative shares are not displayed by the Shared Directories box in the Connect Network Drive dialog box.

To connect to a network drive

1.	Choose Connect Network Drive from the Disk menu, or choose the Connect Drive button on the toolbar.

2.	File Manager displays the first free drive letter in the drive box. You can accept the displayed drive letter for the connection, or choose another.

3.	Select or type a network path in the Path box. A network path consists of a computer name followed by the name of a shared directory, for example, \\shipping\public.

If you have connected to the directory before, select the path from the list displayed in the Path box. The Path box displays the previous ten paths.

You can use the Shared Directories box to select a network path. In Microsoft Windows-based networking you can browse domains, workgroups, and computers to look for shared directories. Other networks may contain different resources you can browse.

The networks, domains and workgroups, computers, and shared directories are organized in a tree structure. Choose an item to expand the list. Choose a network name to display available domains and workgroups, a domain or workgroup name to display available computers, or a computer name to display its shared directories. When you select a shared directory, File Manager fills in the Path box with the name you selected.

If you know the name of a computer, but need to see the names of its shared directories, you can type the computer name in the Path box and choose the OK button. Preface the computer name with two backslashes (\\). Windows NT adds the name of the computer's first shared directory to the Path box and displays all of the computer's shared directories in the Shared Directories box. To connect to a different directory, select it in the Shared Directories box.

You can type the name of a network resource in the Path box. On a Microsoft Windows-based network, type the name of a computer and shared directory. Preface the computer name with two backslashes (\\) and separate the computer name from the shared directory's name with a single backslash (\), for example \\shipping\salesq1.

4.	By default, you are connected under the username you used to log on. If you want to connect under a different username, type it in the Connect As box. For example, you may want to connect to a shared directory using a name that allows greater access to files in the directory.

On a Microsoft Windows-based network, you can connect using an account on a different domain by specifying the domain and the username for the account. Separate the domain name from the username with a backslash, for example projects\chrisbr.

5.	If you do not want to connect to the shared directory each time you log on, clear the Reconnect At Logon box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To disconnect from a network drive

1.	Choose Disconnect Network Drive from the Disk menu, or choose the Disconnect Drive button on the toolbar.

2.	In the Disconnect Network Drive dialog box, select one or more network drives and choose the OK button.


Working with Directory Information
File Manager	16 of 50

Working with Directory Information

You can control how File Manager displays directory information by using commands on the View menu.

The changes you make by using commands on the View menu affect the active directory window and any new windows you open from that window. Other open windows are not affected.

In the contents list, File Manager displays icons next to names so that you can quickly identify directories and files. The following table describes the icons.

Icon	Represents

Directories. These are listed first, in alphabetical order.

Shared directories. These are directories you can connect to on the network,or you are sharing on your computer.

Program files and batch files. Their default filename extensions are .EXE, .CMD, .COM, .PIF, and .BAT. These files start applications.

Document files. These files are associated with applications. When you open one of these files, the associated application starts automatically. For more information, see "Associating Files with an Application," later in this chapter.

System or hidden files. These files have system or hidden attributes. For more information, see "Setting File Attributes," later in this chapter.

All other files.


Displaying Information on Files
File Manager	17 of 50

Working with Directory Information

Displaying Information on Files

When you first start File Manager, only the names of directories and files are shown. In addition to names, you can also display the MS-DOS-style names of those files with long names, file size, last modification date and time, and attributes of files in the contents list.

To display only names of files and directories

From the View menu, choose Name, or choose the Name button on the toolbar.

To display complete information about each file

From the View menu, choose All File Details, or choose the All File Details button on the toolbar.

The MS-DOS-style filename, file size, last modification date and time, and file attributes are displayed next to each filename and directory name in the active directory window.

To display selected information about each file

1.	From the View menu, choose Partial Details.

2.	Select the check boxes of options you want to display, and clear the check boxes of options you don't want to display.

The table that follows describes each option.

3.	Choose the OK button.

You can select the following options in the Partial Details dialog box.

Select	To

Size	Display the size in bytes of each file.

Last Modification Date	Display the date each file was last modified, according to the system clock.

Last Modification Time	Display the time of day each file was last modified, according to the system clock.

File Attributes	Indicate whether files are hidden, system, archive, or read-only. For more information, see "Setting File Attributes," later in this chapter.

MS-DOS file names	Display short, MS-DOS-style names for long filenames.


Sorting the Contents of a Directory
File Manager	18 of 50

Working with Directory Information

Sorting the Contents of a Directory

When you first start File Manager, it lists directory contents alphabetically, with directories first, followed by filenames. You can sort the files and directories by name, type, size, or the date the file was last modified. Sorting files and directories affects the contents list only.

To sort the contents of a directory

To sort contents by		Use	Or from the View menu, choose
Alphabet:  Directories are sorted first, then files.			Sort By Name
Type:  Directories and then files are sorted alphabetically by filename extension.			Sort By Type
Size:  The largest file is listed first.			Sort By Size
Date:  Directories and then files are sorted with the most recent first.			Sort By Date


Limiting the Files to Display
File Manager	19 of 50

Working with Directory Information

Limiting the Files to Display

When you first start File Manager, the contents list displays the names of all the files and directories in the current directory, except hidden and system files. (For information about hidden and system files, see "Setting File Attributes," later in this chapter.) You can specify whether File Manager displays only certain types of files, or groups of files with similar filenames or extensions.

To specify which types of files are displayed in a directory window

1.	From the View menu, choose By File Type.

2.	In the By File Type dialog box, use the Name box to limit the display to a single filename. Use wildcards to limit the display to files with similar names.

A wildcard substitutes for one or more characters. Use an asterisk (*) to represent a group of characters. Use a question mark (?) to represent a single character. The Name box default, *.*, means all files in the directory are listed. For example, to display only those files with the extension .TXT, you can type *.txt.

3.	Under File Type, select the types of files you want to display.

Select	To

Directories	Display the names of directories that are in the current directory.

Programs	Display all filenames that have an .EXE, .COM, .PIF, .CMD, or .BAT extension.

Documents	Display the names of text or graphics files associated with an application. For information about associating files, see "Associating Files with an Application," later in this chapter.

Other Files	Display all filenames not included in the preceding three options.

4.	To display hidden and system files, select the Show Hidden/System Files check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Caution

If you choose to display hidden and system files, be careful not to rename or delete them. Your computer may not start or work properly without them.


Working with Files and Directories
File Manager	20 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Once you select a file or directory, you can use File Manager to copy, move, delete, or rename it. You can also use File Manager to create a new directory. You can start applications from File Manager, and, once a type of file is associated with an application, you can open a file and start its application at the same time. Use File Manager to set the attributes for files.


Naming a File or Directory
File Manager	21 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Naming a File or Directory

When you use Windows NT on drives formatted to use either the Windows NT file system (NTFS) or the file allocation table (FAT) file system, you can use long file and directory names. When you create a directory or rename a file and use a long file name, Windows NT automatically creates a shorter, MS-DOS-style name. This allows applications that do not support long file names to use the file.

Windows NT uses the following naming conventions for both NTFS and FAT:

Names can be up to 255 characters long, including the extension. Separate the extension from the name using a period.

Names preserve case, but are not case sensitive. When you name a file, your use of uppercase and lowercase letters will be retained. However, Windows NT does not distinguish filenames by their case. For example, Windows NT considers the filenames August Sales and AUGUST SALES to be identical.

Names can contain any uppercase or lowercase characters except the following:

?    "    /    \    <    >    *    |    :

When Windows NT creates a long name, it automatically creates a short, MS-DOS-style name as well. This keeps Windows NT compatible with MS-DOS workstations and applications. For example, a workstation running MS-DOS will use short names to see the shared directories and files on a Windows NT computer. Applications that do not support long file names will be able to work with files by using the short name. However, if you save a file using an application that does not support long filenames, the long filename will be lost and the file will have only a short name.

When you create a long name on either NTFS or FAT, Windows NT uses the following rules to create the short name:

Spaces are removed.

Periods are removed except for the last period in the filename that is followed by a character. Windows NT interprets this period as marking the start of the filename's extension.

Characters not allowed in MS-DOS-style names are changed to underscores (_).

The name, not including its extension, is truncated to six characters and a tilde (~) and a number are appended.

The name's extension is truncated to three characters.

The creation of short names in NTFS and FAT is different in the following ways:

On FAT, extended characters that are valid in the current code page can appear in short, MS-DOS-style names. On NTFS, extended characters are never allowed in short names.

On NTFS, if you give a file or directory a name that is also a valid short name, no separate short name is ever displayed. On FAT, short names are always displayed, even when they are identical to the long names.

If you are using Windows NT in an environment where long file names are not always supported, you may want to continue using MS-DOS conventions for the first six characters of names and use periods only to separate the name from the extension. For example, you could name a file AUGSLS-August 1992 Sales Report.XLS. Then the short name would be AUGSLS-1.XLS.

MS-DOS conventions for naming files are:

The name of a file or directory can have two parts:  a name and an optional extension. The two parts are separated by a period.

The name can contain up to eight characters, and the extension can contain up to three characters.

The name must start with either a letter or number. It can contain any uppercase or lowercase characters except the following:

.    "    /     \    [ ]    :    ;    |    =    ,    ?    *    +    <    >

If you use these characters in a filename, you may get unexpected results.

The name cannot contain any spaces.

The following names are reserved and cannot be used for files or directories:

AUX	COM3	LPT1	NUL
COM1	COM4	LPT2	PRN
COM2	CON	LPT3
Note

Although a range of characters can appear in file names, the Windows NT command prompt is limited to the characters available in the OEM code page you installed when you set up Windows NT. If you plan to work with files at the command prompt, use alphanumeric characters in file names, and avoid using characters that do not map to the OEM code pages (such as the bullet character).


Selecting Files or Directories
File Manager	22 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Selecting Files or Directories

Before you can work with a file or a directory, you must select it. When a file or directory is selected, its name and icon are highlighted in the directory window. In the contents list, you can select more than one file or directory at a time in order to perform a task with several files at once. For example, you may want to select several files and move them to another directory. You can select a group of files or directories that appear in consecutive order, or you can select items that are not in sequence.

To select files or directories

To select		Do this
A single file or directory		In the contents list, click the name of the file or directory you want to select. –Or– Press TAB to move the selection cursor to the contents list. Then use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys to select the file or directory.
Two or more items in sequence		Click the first file or directory you want to select. Then press and hold down SHIFT while you click the last item in the group. –Or– Press TAB to move to the contents list, and then use the arrow keys to select the first item. Then press and hold down SHIFT while selecting the remaining items using the arrow keys.
Two or more items out of sequence		Press and hold down CTRL while you click each item. –Or– Press TAB to move to the contents list, then use the arrow keys to select the first item. Press and release SHIFT+F8, then use the arrow keys to move to each item and press the SPACEBAR to select it. When you finish selecting items, press SHIFT+F8 again.
More than one group of items		Use any method to select the first sequential group of items. Hold down CTRL while you click the first item in the next group, and press and hold down CTRL+SHIFT while you click the last item in the group. –Or– Use the keyboard method with SHIFT+F8 to select the first group, then use the arrow keys to move to the first item in the next group and repeat the process, pressing SHIFT+F8 again when all items are selected.
All files in a directory		Press CTRL+SLASH (/).
When you are selecting files and directories using the keyboard, you can use the following keys.

Press		To select
UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW		A file or directory above or below the current selection.
END		The last file or directory in the list.
HOME		The first file or directory in the list.
PAGE UP		The file or directory at the top of the previous screen.
PAGE DOWN		The file or directory at the bottom of the next screen.
A letter or number		The next file or directory that begins with that letter or number.
To select a group of items by using the Select Files command

1.	From the File menu, choose Select Files.

2.	In the Files box, type the name of the file you want to select.

Use wildcards to specify a group of files. For example, to select all files with a .TXT extension, type *.txt. Or, to select all files in a directory, leave the default *.* in the Files box.

3.	Choose the Select button.

The Cancel button changes to the Close button.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have selected all the files you want.

You can choose the Deselect button at any time to cancel a selection. The Deselect button cancels the selected files that you specify in the Files box.

5.	Choose the Close button.

To cancel a selection of files or directories

To cancel		Do this
A single selection		Press and hold down CTRL while you click the item. –Or– Press and release SHIFT+F8, use the arrow keys to move to the selection you want to cancel and press the SPACEBAR. Then press SHIFT+F8 again.
All selections		Press CTRL+BACKSLASH (\).
To cancel a group of selected files by using the Select Files command

1.	From the File menu, choose Select Files.

2.	In the Files box in the Select Files dialog box, type the name of one of the selected files you want to cancel.

You can use wildcards to specify a group of files or all files that are selected in a directory.

3.	Choose the Deselect button.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you finish canceling selections.

5.	Choose the Close button.


Creating a Directory
File Manager	23 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Creating a Directory

You can create a directory by using the Create Directory command. After you create a directory, you can copy files and directories to it from other locations by using the Move and Copy commands. For more information, see "Moving and Copying Files and Directories," later in this chapter.

To create a directory

1.	In the directory tree, select the directory in which you want the new directory to appear.

2.	From the File menu, choose Create Directory.

3.	In the Name box, type a name for the new directory.

Use the same conventions for naming directories as you do for naming files. For information, see "Naming a File or Directory," earlier in this chapter.

If you decide to create the directory somewhere other than in the current directory, you can type the full path of the new directory.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Moving and Copying Files and Directories
File Manager	24 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Moving and Copying Files and Directories

You can move and copy files and directories from one location to another by dragging them with the mouse or by using the Copy or Move commands. You can copy and move items between directories and between drives. When you move or copy a directory, all the files and subdirectories in it are moved or copied.

On drives formatted to use the Windows NT file system (NTFS), you must have permission to move or copy a file or directory. For more information on file and directory permissions, see "Securing Directories and Files," later in this chapter.

Important

When you copy files or directories, security permissions set on them are discarded as is ownership and auditing information. They will inherit a new set of permissions from the directory into which they have been copied. In the case of files, if the new directory does not specify permissions for files, only the file's owner (the person who copied the file) will have permission to use the file. When you copy or move files or directories to a disk formatted to use the FAT file system, permissions are discarded and not replaced.

To move or copy files or directories by dragging

1.	Make sure the source and destination locations are visible. You can use the Cascade or Tile command on the Window menu to rearrange directory windows. The destination can be a directory icon, directory window, or drive icon. If the destination is a drive icon, the file will be placed in the current directory of that drive.

2.	Select the file or directory you want to move or copy. You can select more than one file or directory.

When you drag a selection, Windows NT assumes you want to copy it when the destination is on a different drive and move it when the destination is on the same drive.

To		Do this
Move to a location on the same drive		Drag the selection.
Move to a location on any drive		Press and hold down SHIFT while dragging the selection.
Copy to a location on a different drive		Drag the selection.
Copy to a location on any drive		Press and hold down CTRL while dragging the selection.
3.	Release the mouse button. If you are dragging while pressing SHIFT or CTRL, release the mouse button before releasing the key.

4.	To complete moving or copying, choose the Yes button in the confirmation message.

You can choose not to receive confirmation messages. For more information, see "Turning Off Confirmation Messages," later in this chapter.

If the destination directory contains a file with the same name, a dialog box prompts you to verify that you want to replace the existing file. Choose the Yes button to replace the existing file, or if you are moving or copying more than one file, choose the Yes To All button. If you choose the Yes To All button, File Manager does not prompt you for each file that is replaced.

To move or copy files or directories using commands

1.	Select the file or directory you want to move or copy.

You can select more than one file or directory.

2.	To move, from the File menu, choose Move. Or choose the Move button on the toolbar.

To copy, from the File menu, choose Copy. Or choose the Copy button on the toolbar.

The name of the selected file or directory appears in the From box of the Move or Copy dialog box.

You can select a different file or directory by typing its name in the From box. If the file or directory is not in the current directory, include the path.

3.	In the To box, type the destination drive or directory.

If you type a drive name without including a path, the file or directory will appear in the current directory of the drive.

If you type a new name, the original file or directory will be renamed when it is moved or copied.

4.	Choose the OK button.

If the destination directory contains a file with the same name, a message prompts you to verify that you want to replace the existing file. Choose the Yes button to replace the existing file, or if you are moving or copying more than one file, choose the Yes To All button. If you choose the Yes To All button, File Manager does not prompt you for each file that is replaced.

Copying a File to the Clipboard

You can copy a file onto the Clipboard so that the file can be linked to or embedded in another document. For more information about object linking and embedding, see Chapter 10, "Object Linking and Embedding."

To copy a file to the Clipboard

1.	Select the file you want to copy.

2.	From the File menu, choose Copy To Clipboard.

The name of the selected file appears in the Copy To Clipboard box. You can copy a different file by typing its name in the box. If the file is not in the current directory, include its path.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Deleting a File or Directory
File Manager	25 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Deleting a File or Directory

You can use File Manager to delete files and directories. By selecting multiple files or directories, you can delete them at one time. When you delete a directory, all files and subdirectories in the directory are deleted.

On drives formatted to use the Windows NT file system (NTFS), you must have permission to delete a file or directory. For more information on file and directory permissions, see "Securing Directories and Files," later in this chapter.

Caution

Once you delete files or directories, they cannot be recovered.

To delete a file or directory

1.	Select the file or directory you want to delete.

2.	From the File menu, choose Delete, or choose the Delete button on the toolbar. Or press DEL.

3.	Choose the OK button to delete the selected file or directory, or type the name of a different file or directory you want to remove. If you type a long name that contains spaces, be sure to enclose the name in quotation marks.

File Manager prompts you to confirm the deletion. (You can choose not to receive confirmation messages. For more information, see "Turning Off Confirmation Messages," later in this chapter.)

4.	To delete a single file or directory, choose the Yes button. To delete more than one file or directory without having to confirm each deletion, choose the Yes To All button.


Renaming a File or Directory
File Manager	26 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Renaming a File or Directory

You can rename any file or directory by choosing the Rename command from the File menu.

On drives formatted to use the Windows NT file system (NTFS), you must have permission to rename a file or directory. For more information on file and directory permissions, see "Securing Directories and Files," later in this chapter.

Caution

Be careful when you rename files. If you rename a file that your system requires, for example, any file that has an .SYS extension, your system may not start or run correctly.

To rename a file or directory

1.	Select the file or directory you want to rename.

2.	From the File menu, choose Rename.

The name of the selected file or directory appears in the From box. If you decide to rename a different file, type the name in the From box. To rename a group of files, use wildcards (for example, *.bak).

3.	In the To box, type the new name.

Use a file or directory name that does not already exist in the destination directory. You can specify only one filename in the To box. If you want to rename a group of files, you can only use wildcards (for example, *.txt).

4.	Choose the OK button.


Searching for a File or Directory
File Manager	27 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Searching for a File or Directory

When you want to find a file or directory, use the Search command. You can select files and directories in the Search Results window and use File menu commands to print, copy, move, delete, and rename them. You can view file details by using commands on the View menu. However, although you can move or copy files from the Search Results window, you cannot move or copy files into it.

To search for a file or directory

1.	Select the directory that you want to start the search from.

2.	From the File menu, choose Search.

3.	In the Search For box, type the name of the file or directory. Use wildcards to search for a group of files or directories with similar names or extensions.

For example, to search for all files with the extension .WRI, you would type *.wri in the Search For box.

4.	In the Start From box, the current directory is listed. To start the search from a different directory, type the directory name in the Start From box.

5.	By default, File Manager searches the directory listed in the Start From box, and all its subdirectories. If you do not want File Manager to search the subdirectories, clear the Search All Subdirectories check box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

File Manager searches the directory and subdirectories you specified, displaying its progress in a dialog box. To cancel the search, choose the Cancel button. You can continue working with File Manager while the search continues in the background. To hide the dialog box while the search continues, choose the Hide button. When the search is complete, the Search Results window appears, displaying all the filenames and directories found.

If you modify the drive on which the search was performed and the Search Results window is active (or is made active), a message appears, asking whether you want to update the Search Results window. If you choose the Yes button, the search is performed again on the modified drive.


Associating Files with an Application
File Manager	28 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Associating Files with an Application

A file is associated with an application through the file's filename extension and the application's file type. Once a file is associated with an application, you can choose any file with the same extension in the directory window to start the application and load the file. Associating a file with an application also allows you to print the file from within File Manager if the application supports this feature. A file extension can be associated with only one application; however, an application can be associated with several different file extensions.

Many applications are associated with files when you install them. If an application does not automatically set up an association, you can associate files with it by using the Associate command.

To create or change a file association using the Associate dialog box

1.	In a directory window, select a file that has the extension you want to associate.

For example, to associate files that have a .DAT extension with an application, select any file that has a .DAT extension.

2.	From the File menu, choose Associate.

3.	The filename extension of the file you selected appears in the Files With Extension box. To associate a different filename extension, or if no file was selected when you chose the Associate command, type the extension in the Files With Extension box.

The extension's current association is selected in the Associate With list. If the extension is not associated with a file type, (None) is selected.

4.	To associate the extension with a file type:

If the file type and program name appear in the Associate With list, select the file type and program name.

If the file type and program name do not appear in the Associate With list, type the program name including its extension in the Associate With box, for example newapp.exe. You can also choose the Browse button to search for the program name. In the Browse dialog box, selecting the program filename and choosing the OK button places the program name and its path in the Associate With box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

If you specified a program name, File Manager automatically creates a new file type for it.

To remove an association

1.	In a directory window, select a file with the extension that you want to remove.

2.	From the File menu, choose Associate.

3.	In the Associate dialog box, the extension of the selected file appears in the Files With Extension box. To remove the association for a different filename extension, or if no file was selected when you chose the Associate command, type the extension in the Files With Extension box.

4.	In the Associate With box, select (None).

5.	Choose the OK button.

Working with File Types

From the Associate dialog box, you can create, change, or delete file types. You can also work with file associations. To create a file type, name the file type and then provide the information that File Manager uses when opening or printing a file of that type either by starting the program or by using dynamic data exchange (DDE).

You can also configure a Windows 3.1 application associated with a certain file type to run in a separate memory space when you start it by choosing a file of that data type.

When DDE is used, you can specify the following options:

Option		Purpose
DDE Message		Specifies the DDE command to use if the application is already running
DDE Message Application Not Running		Specifies the DDE command to use if the application is not running
Application		Specifies the DDE application string used to initiate a DDE conversation with the application specified in the Command box
Topic		Specifies the DDE topic string used to initiate a DDE conversation with the application specified in the Command box
To create a file type

1.	In the Associate dialog box, choose the New Type button.

2.	In the New File Type dialog box, type the name of the file type in the File Type box.

3.	In the Action box, choose Open to specify the command File Manager executes when opening files of that type or Print to specify the command File Manager executes when printing files of that type.

4.	In the Command box, type the command for the Open or Print actions.

Commands start with the name of the program file followed by application-specific parameters and the %1 parameter. The %1 parameter represents the filename of the file currently selected in File Manager when the action is performed.

You can choose the Browse button to search for a program name. In the Browse dialog box, selecting the program filename and choosing the OK button places the program name and its path in the Command box.

If the application supports DDE, specify the name of the program file in the Command box. Then select the Uses DDE check box and specify the application-specific DDE commands.

5.	To associate an extension with the file type, type the extension in the New Extension box and choose the Add button. You can add multiple extensions.

6.	Choose the OK button.

File type information for an application is added when the application is installed. In general, you should not need to change existing file types.

Some file types are protected. To change a protected file type, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

To change a file type

1.	In the Associate dialog box, select the file type you want to change in the Associate With list, and then choose the Change Type button.

2.	In the Change File Type dialog box, make any changes to the file type name or the commands associated with the Open and Print actions.

3.	You can also add or remove extensions associated with the file type.

To associate an extension with the file type, type the extension in the New Extension box and choose the Add button. You can add multiple extensions.

To remove an associated extension, select it in the Extensions box and choose the Remove button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To change a file type so that its Windows 3.1 application starts in a separate memory space

1.	In the Associate dialog box, select the file type you want to change in the Associate With list, and then choose the Change Type button.

2.	In the Change File Type dialog box, in the Command box, type cmd /c start /separate in front of the current contents of that box. This should change the value of that box to the following:

cmd /c start /separate c:\path\appname.exe %1

3.	Choose the OK button.

For more information on starting Windows 3.1 applications in a separate memory space, see Chapter 11, "Other Application Environments."

To delete a file type

In the Associate dialog box, select the file type you want to delete in the Associate With list, and then choose the Delete Type button.


Starting an Application from File Manager
File Manager	29 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Starting an Application from File Manager

You can use File Manager to start your applications. You start an application by opening a program file or document file from a directory window. Program files almost always have a .COM, .EXE, .PIF, .CMD, or .BAT filename extension. Document files are associated with applications and are represented by document-file icons in directory windows. For information about the types of file icons, see "Working with Files and Directories," earlier in this chapter.

When you start an application that runs in a window, the window appears in front of any open File Manager windows. When you start an application that uses the entire screen, the application replaces the File Manager window. If you want to reduce File Manager to an icon each time you start an application, choose the Minimize On Use command from the Options menu.

To start an application from a program file or document file

In the directory window, choose the filename.

– Or –

1.	Select the filename in the directory window.

2.	From the File menu, choose Open; or press ENTER.

To start an application and open a file

Drag the icon for the data file onto the icon for the program file.

– Or –

1.	Select the program file for the application you want to use.

2.	From the File menu, choose Run.

3.	The name of the program file appears in the Command Line box. If you did not select a program file, or if you want to run a different application, type the name (and path, if necessary) of the program file in the Command Line box.

Then, in the Command Line box, add the name of the data file after the program filename. Include the path if the data file is not in the same directory as the program file.

4.	If you want the application to start minimized, select the Run Minimized check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Printing a File from File Manager
File Manager	30 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Printing a File from File Manager

Using File Manager, you can print files that are associated with applications. You can use the Print command, or, if you are using a mouse, you can simply drag the file icon onto the minimized Print Manager icon.

Note

Some applications do not support printing through File Manager. If this is the case, or if a file is not associated with an application, you must open the application and print the file from there.

To print a file by dragging the file icon

1.	Make sure Print Manager is started and minimized to an icon on the desktop.

2.	Drag the document-file icon onto the Print Manager icon.

To print a file by using the Print command

1.	In the directory window, select the file you want to print.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Turning Off Confirmation Messages
File Manager	31 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Turning Off Confirmation Messages

If you do not want a confirmation message to appear each time you delete or replace files and directories, you can change the confirmation settings. You can also turn off messages that appear when you perform certain mouse actions, such as moving and copying. If you turn off confirmation messages, File Manager carries out commands as soon as they are issued.

To turn off confirmation messages

1.	From the Options menu, choose Confirmation.

2.	Clear the check box for each confirmation option you want to cancel, and then choose the OK button.

Clear this option		If you don't want a warning message
File Delete		Before deleting files
Directory Delete		Before deleting directories
File Replace		Before writing over existing files
Mouse Action		Before moving or copying files by dragging
Disk Commands		Before formatting or copying a disk
Modifying System, Hidden, Read Only files		Before deleting, replacing, or moving system, hidden, and read-only files
Caution

If you clear the Directory Delete check box, remember that when you delete a directory, all files and subdirectories in that directory are deleted. Also, to avoid accidentally writing over files you want to keep, do not clear the File Replace check box.


Setting File Attributes
File Manager	32 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Setting File Attributes

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

File attributes are part of the directory information the operating system maintains for each file. This information helps the operating system identify a file and controls the kinds of tasks you can perform with the file. You can see file attributes in a directory window by choosing the All File Details command on the View menu.

On drives formatted to use the Windows NT file system (NTFS), you must have permission to change file attributes. For more information on file and directory permissions, see "Securing Directories and Files," later in this chapter.

The four file attributes are described in the following table.

Attribute	Description

Read-only (R)	Prevents a file from being changed.

Archive (A)	Identifies a file that has been modified since it was last backed up. When you use some commands, such as backup, the archive attribute is turned off.

Hidden (H)	Prevents a file from appearing in a directory listing at the command prompt. Files that have a hidden attribute appear in directory windows only if you select the Show Hidden/System Files check box by using the By File Type command on the View menu.

System (S)	Identifies the file as a system file. Files that have a system attribute appear in a directory window only if you select the Show Hidden/System Files check box by using the By File Type command on the View menu.

To change file attributes for one or more files

1.	Select the files whose attributes you want to set.

2.	From the File menu, choose Properties.

If you are using a network, more options may be available in the Properties dialog box.

3.	Select or clear the check boxes for the attribute settings.

When you have selected more than one file, check boxes will appear gray if the attribute for the files is not set alike.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Viewing a File’s Version Information
File Manager	33 of 50

Working with Files and Directories

Viewing a File's Version Information

File Manager allows you to see version information for files. This is information supplied by the manufacturer of an application including the company name and other comments.

To view a file's version information

1.	Select the file whose information you want to see.

2.	From the File menu, choose Properties.

3.	In the Version Information box, select the subject in the left box.

The information on the subject is displayed in the right box.


Working with Shared Directories and Files
File Manager	34 of 50

Working with Shared Directories and Files

Windows NT allows you to share directories and files over the network. Use File Manager to share and stop sharing directories. File Manager also allows you to monitor and control the use of shared files.

Windows NT automatically creates special shares for administrative and system use. When the server service starts, an administrative shared directory is created for the root directory of each drive on the computer and for the Windows NT system root, for example C:\WINNT. Administrative shares created for drives are named using the drive letter and a dollar sign, for example C$. The shared directory created for the system root is called ADMIN$. Members of the Administrators, Server Operators, or Backup Operators groups can connect to these shared directories. Permissions for these shares cannot be changed. However, Administrators can change other properties.


Sharing a Directory
File Manager	35 of 50

Working with Shared Directories and Files

Sharing a Directory

Share a directory when you want to make information located there available to others on the network.

Before you can share a directory, the Server service must be running. You can start the server service using the Services option in Control Panel.

To share a directory, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

To share a directory

1.	Select the directory you want to share in either the tree or contents panes of the directory window.

If you are logged on as a member of the Administrators group, you can share a directory on a remote computer. First connect to the computer's administrative root directory, for example C$. Then select the directory you want to share.

2.	From the Disk menu, choose Share As, or choose the Share Directory button on the toolbar.

If the directory you selected is already shared, the Shared Directories dialog box is displayed. Choose the New Share button to create a share using the New Share dialog box.

3.	The Share Name box shows the name users will specify to connect to the shared directory. By default, File Manager uses the name of the directory you selected. If you want to share the directory using a different name, type a new share name in the Share Name box. Share names can be up to 12 characters long.

4.	The path for the directory you selected appears in the Path box. If you decide you want to share a different directory, you can type a different path.

5.	Type a comment in the Comment box.

Users will see the comment when connecting to the directory using the Connect Network Drive dialog box. A comment is optional.

6.	Set a limit on the number of users who can connect to the shared directory at one time in the User Limit box.

By default, no limit is set.

7.	To set permissions on the shared directory, choose the Permissions button.

For more information on setting permissions, see "Setting Permissions Through Shared Directories," later in this chapter.

8.	Choose the OK button.

File Manager shows that the directory is shared by displaying a shared directory icon next to the directory's name.


Stopping Directory Sharing
File Manager	36 of 50

Working with Shared Directories and Files

Stopping Directory Sharing

Once you stop sharing a directory, it is no longer available over the network.

The Stop Sharing Directory dialog box displays shared directories you have created as well as shared directories created by the system. In general, you should not stop sharing directories created by the system, for example C$ or PRINT$. Administrative shares that are deleted are re-created automatically the next time the Server service is started.

To stop sharing a directory, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

Caution

If you choose to stop sharing a directory while users are connected, those users may lose their data.

To stop sharing a directory

1.	Select the drive containing the directories you want to stop sharing by selecting the drive's directory window or drivebar button.

2.	From the Disk menu, choose Stop Sharing. Or choose the Stop Sharing button on the toolbar.

3.	The Stop Sharing dialog box shows the computer name of the selected drive and, in the Shared Directories On box, the shared directories on the drive. For each share name, the directory path on the computer is shown. Select the directories you want to stop sharing. If you selected a shared directory before opening the Stop Sharing Directory dialog box, the shared directories corresponding to that directory are already selected.

4.	Choose the OK button.

If any users are connected to a shared directory, File Manager will warn you before sharing is stopped.


Changing Share Properties
File Manager	37 of 50

Working with Shared Directories and Files

Changing Share Properties

You can change the number of users allowed to connect to a shared directory, a shared directory's comment information, or the shared directory's permissions.

To change a shared directory's properties, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group. Members of the Administrators group can change share properties on administrative shares as well (for example, C$).

To change a shared directory's properties

1.	Select the shared directory whose properties you want to change in either the tree or contents panes of the directory window.

2.	From the Disk menu, choose Share As. Or choose the Share Directory button on the toolbar.

3.	If the directory has been shared more than once, select the name in the Share Name box of the shared directory whose properties you want to change. You can then:

Change the number of users allowed to connect to the directory at one time by selecting, under User Limit, the Unlimited option or the Users option. When you select the Users option, you can either type a limit or click the scroll arrows to raise or lower the limit.

Edit the Comment box to change the description that appears when users see the shared directory listed in the Network Connections dialog box.

Choose the Permissions button to change the permissions on the shared directory. For more information on setting permissions, see "Setting Permissions Through Shared Directories," later in this chapter.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Viewing or Closing Shared Files
File Manager	38 of 50

Working with Shared Directories and Files

Viewing or Closing Shared Files

You can view who is using shared files and stop the use of a file. When you are viewing the status of a shared file, File Manager provides the following information.

Item	Shows

Total Opens	The total number of users who are working with the file

Total Locks	The total number of locks on the file

Open By	The name of the user who has the file open

For	The type of access the user has to the file

Locks	The number of locks the user has placed on the file

File ID	The identification number of the file

To stop the use of shared files, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

To view or close a shared file

1.	Choose the file in the contents pane of the directory window.

2.	From the File menu, choose Properties.

3.	Choose the Open By button in the Properties dialog box.

4.	To stop use by one or more users, select the user or users and choose the Close Selected button.

To stop use by all users, choose the Close All button.

Caution

When you close a file that is in use, changes made to that file will not be saved.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Securing Directories and Files
File Manager	39 of 50

Securing Directories and Files

You can control users' access to directories and files on drives formatted to use the Windows NT file system (NTFS). Drives formatted to use FAT and HPFS do not support Windows NT security. You can, however, secure shared directories no matter what file system is in use.

To secure a directory or file, set permissions on it. Each permission you set specifies the access that a group or user can have to the directory or file. For example, when you set Read permission for the group called coworkers on the file MY IDEAS.DOC, the users in that group can display the file's data and attributes, but cannot change the file or delete it. For more information on how to work with groups and users, see Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

Windows NT offers a set of standard permissions you can set on directories and files. The standard permissions for directories are No Access, List, Read, Add, Add & Read, Change, and Full Control. The standard permissions for files are No Access, Read, Change, and Full Control.

The standard permissions are groups of individual permissions. When you set a standard permission, the abbreviations for the individual permissions are displayed beside the standard permission. For example, when you set the standard permission Read on a file, the abbreviation RX appears beside it. The individual permissions and their abbreviations are:

Read (R)	Write (W)	Execute (X)
Delete (D)	Change Permissions (P)	Take Ownership (O)
In addition to setting standard permissions, you can set special access permissions. Special access permissions allow you to define a custom set of individual permissions for directories and files.

To effectively work with NTFS security, keep the following in mind:

Users cannot use a directory or file unless they have been granted permission to do so or belong to a group that has permission to do so.

Permissions are cumulative except that the No Access permission overrides all other permissions. For example, if the coworkers group has Change permission for a file while the finance group has only Read permission and John is a member of both groups, John will be granted Change permission. However, if you change the finance group's permission for the file to No Access, John will not be able to use the file even though he is a member of a group that has access to it.

When you create files and subdirectories in a directory, they inherit permissions from the directory. For example, if you add a file to a directory that allows the coworkers group Change permission and the finance group Read permission, those same permissions will apply to the file.

The user who creates a file or directory is the owner of that file or directory. The owner can always control access to the file or directory by changing the permissions set on it. Users who are members of the Administrators group can always take ownership of a file or directory.

The easiest way to administer security is by setting permissions for groups, not individual users. Typically, a user will need access to many files. If the user is a member of a group that has access to the files, you can end the user's access by removing the user from the group rather than changing the permissions on each of the files. Note that setting permission for an individual user does not override the access granted to the user through groups to which the user belongs.

For more information on security in Windows NT, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


Setting Directory Permissions
File Manager	40 of 50

Securing Directories and Files

Setting Directory Permissions

When you first display a directory's permissions, the Directory Permissions dialog box shows the permissions that the directory inherited from the directory containing it. The Name box shows the groups and users for whom permissions have been set. If you have selected multiple directories, permissions are shown only if they are the same for all of the directories. You can change permissions, add a group or user to the list, or remove a group or user from the list. For more information on adding users and groups to the permissions list, see "Adding Users and Groups to Permissions and Auditing Lists," later in this chapter.

Setting permissions on a directory controls what users can do in that directory. When you set directory permissions, you are setting permissions on the directory and, by default, all the files that exist in the directory. Existing subdirectories and their files are not changed unless you specify to change them. When you create new files and new subdirectories, they inherit their permissions from the directory.

In some cases, directory permissions for a group or user are not passed on to subdirectories. This occurs, for example, when a group or user has been granted permissions through the CREATOR OWNER special group. Permissions that will not be inherited by subdirectories are marked with an asterisk, for example (All)*.

When you set a standard permission, two sets of individual permissions are displayed next to it:  the permissions set on the directory and the permissions set on files in the directory. For example, when you set Add & Read permission on a directory, you see (RWX), signifying Read, Write, and Execute permissions on the directory, and (RX), signifying Read and Execute permissions on files in the directory.

Some directory permissions set file permissions to Not Specified. When access to files for a user or group is not specified, that group or user cannot use files in the directory unless access is granted by another means, for example, by setting permissions that grant access on individual files.

When you are setting permissions on a directory, you can use the CREATOR OWNER special group to allow users to control only the subdirectories and files that they create within the directory. Permissions set on CREATOR OWNER are transferred to the user who creates a directory or file within the directory. For example, if you give Everyone Add & Read permission to the directory and CREATOR OWNER Change permission, when one user adds files to the directory, he or she will be able to change and delete the files, while other users will only be able to read them.

To change permissions on the directory, you must be the owner of the directory, or have been granted permission to do so by the owner.

The following table shows permissions for directories and the actions on directories available to users for each permission.

Note

Groups or users granted Full Control permission on a directory can delete files in that directory no matter what permissions protect the files.

The table following shows permissions for directories and the actions on files available to users for each permission.

To view or change directory permissions

1.	Select the directory in the directory window. You can select multiple directories.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Permissions. Or choose the Permissions button on the toolbar.

3.	By default, the Replace Permissions On Existing Files check box is selected, so the changes you make to permissions apply to the directory and its files only.

Select both the Replace Permissions On Subdirectories and the Replace Permissions On Existing Files check boxes to apply changed permissions to the directory and its files, and to existing subdirectories and their files.

To apply changed permissions to the directory only (not to existing files in the directory or to subdirectories and their existing files), clear both the Replace Permissions On Subdirectories and Replace Permissions On Existing Files check boxes.

To apply changed permissions to the directory and subdirectories only (not to existing files in the directory or subdirectories), select the Replace Permissions On Subdirectories check box and clear the Replace Permissions On Existing Files check box.

4.	Select the name of a group or user and choose a permission from the Type Of Access box.

You can customize directory and file permissions by choosing Special Directory Access... or Special File Access.... For more information on special access permissions, see "Setting Special Access Permissions," later in this chapter.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To remove directory permissions for a group or user

1.	In the Directory Permissions dialog box, select the name of the group or user.

2.	Choose the Remove button.


Setting File Permissions
File Manager	41 of 50

Securing Directories and Files

Setting File Permissions

When you first display a file's permissions, the File Permissions dialog box shows the permissions that the file inherited from the directory containing it. The Name box shows the groups and users for whom permissions have been set on the file. If you have selected multiple files, permissions are shown only if they are the same for all of the files. You can change permissions set for the listed groups and users, add a group or user to the list, or remove a group or user from the list. For more information on adding users and groups to the permissions list, see "Adding Users and Groups to Permissions and Auditing Lists," later in this chapter.

To change permissions on the file, you must be the owner of the file, or have been granted permission to do so by the owner. The following table shows permissions for files and the actions available to users for each permission.

To change permissions on a file

1.	Select one or more files from the contents pane of the directory window.

2.	Choose Permissions from the Security menu, or choose the Permissions button on the toolbar.

3.	Select the name of the group or user whose permission you want to change.

4.	Choose a permission from the Type Of Access box.

To customize the permissions set for the group or user, choose Special Access... from the Type Of Access box. For more information on special access file permissions, see "Setting Special Access Permissions," later in this chapter.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To remove file permissions for a group or user

1.	In the File Permissions dialog box, select the name of the group or user.

2.	Choose the Remove button.


Setting Special Access Permissions
File Manager	42 of 50

Securing Directories and Files

Setting Special Access Permissions

In general, the standard directory and file permissions are all you need to secure your directories and files. However, if you need to create a custom set of permissions, you can use special access permissions. You can set special access permissions on directories, on all the files in selected directories, or on selected files. When you set special access permissions on a directory, the permissions affect the directory only.

The following table shows special access permissions for directories and the actions available to users for each directory permission.

The following table shows special access permissions for files and the actions available to users for each permission.

To set special access permissions

1.	You can set special access permissions on directories, all files in directories, or selected files.

To set permissions on directories, select them in the directory window.

To set permissions on all the files in one or more directories, select the files' directories in the directory window.

To set permissions on selected files, select the files in the contents pane of the directory window.

2.	Choose Permissions from the Security menu, or choose the Permissions button on the toolbar.

3.	In the Permissions dialog box, select the group or user you want to grant special access.

If no groups or users are shown, indicating that the directories or files you selected have differing permissions, add a group or user before setting special access permissions.

4.	Open the appropriate Special Access dialog box.

To set permissions on directories, choose Special Directory Access... from the Type Of Access box or double-click the name of the group or user.

To set permissions on all the files in the selected directories, choose Special File Access... from the Type Of Access box.

To set permissions on selected files, choose Special File Access... from the Type Of Access box or double-click the name of the group or user.

The Special Access dialog box shows which access permissions have been granted based on the current standard or special permissions setting.

5.	To set special access permissions, select the check boxes for the access you want to grant.

To grant full control, select Full Control (All).

If you are setting permissions for all files in directories, you can select Access Not Specified. This removes permissions from files in the selected directories and prevents files from inheriting permissions from their directories.

6.	Choose the OK button.


Setting Permissions Through Shared Directories
File Manager	43 of 50

Securing Directories and Files

Setting Permissions Through Shared Directories

You can set permissions through a shared directory whether the directory is on a drive formatted to use the Windows NT file system (NTFS), FAT, or HPFS.

You can use the Access Through Share Permissions dialog box to change permissions set for the listed groups and users and remove a group or user from the permissions list. For information on adding users and groups to the permissions list for a shared directory, see "Adding Users and Groups to Permissions and Auditing Lists," later in this chapter.

To work with shared directory permissions, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Server Operators group.

To secure shared directories effectively, keep the following in mind:

Permissions set through a shared directory are effective only when the directory is reached over the network.

Permissions set through a shared directory apply to all files and subdirectories in the shared directory.

Permissions set through a shared directory that is on an NTFS volume operate in addition to NTFS permissions set on the directory itself. Shared directory permissions specify the maximum access allowed. For example, if a user has Read permission on the shared directory but List permission on the directory itself, the user's access is limited to List.

The following table shows the permissions for files and directories granted through the shared directory and the actions available to users for each permission.

To view or change permissions on a shared directory

1.	Select the shared directory whose permissions you want to change in either the tree or contents panes of the directory window.

2.	From the Disk menu, choose Share As. Or choose the Share Directory button on the toolbar.

3.	In the Share Directory dialog box, choose the Permissions button.

4.	In the Access Through Share Permissions dialog box, select the name of a group or user and select a permission from the Type Of Access box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To remove shared directory permissions for a group or user

1.	In the Access Through Share Permissions dialog box, select the name of the group or user.

2.	Choose the Remove button.


Auditing Files and Directories
File Manager	44 of 50

Securing Directories and Files

Auditing Files and Directories

Auditing files and directories allows you to track their usage. For a particular file or directory, you can specify which groups or users and which actions to audit. You can audit both successful and failed actions. Windows NT stores the information generated from auditing in a file. You can view the information using Event Viewer. For more information on Event Viewer, see Chapter 17, "Event Viewer."

You can use the File Auditing and Directory Auditing dialog boxes to change auditing set for the listed groups and users and remove a group or user from the audit list. For information on adding users and groups to the audit list, see "Adding Users and Groups to Permissions and Auditing Lists," later in this chapter.

Important

To audit files and directories, you must set the audit policy to audit file and object access. Set the audit policy using User Manager. For more information on audit policy, see Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

To audit files and directories, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group.

To audit the following activities on a directory, select the events shown.

To audit the following activities on a file, select the events shown.

To view or change file or directory auditing

1.	In the File Manager window, select the file or directory.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Auditing.

3.	If you are setting auditing on a directory, two check boxes allow you to control how auditing changes apply to existing files and subdirectories.

By default, the Replace Auditing On Existing Files check box is selected, so the changes you make to auditing apply to the directory and its files only.

Select both the Replace Auditing On Subdirectories and the Replace Auditing On Existing Files check boxes to apply auditing changes to the directory and its files, and to existing subdirectories and their files.

To apply auditing changes to the directory only (not to existing files in the directory or to subdirectories and their existing files), clear both the Replace Auditing On Subdirectories and Replace Auditing On Existing Files check boxes.

To apply auditing changes to the directory and subdirectories only (not to existing files in the directory or subdirectories), select the Replace Auditing On Subdirectories check box and clear the Replace Auditing On Existing Files check box.

4.	Set auditing for each group and user in the list:

Select the name of a group or user and then select the events to audit for that group or user.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To remove file or directory auditing for a group or user

1.	In the Auditing dialog box, select the name of the group or user in the list.

2.	Choose the Remove button.


Adding Users and Groups to Permissions and Auditing Lists
File Manager	45 of 50

Securing Directories and Files

Adding Users and Groups to Permissions and Auditing Lists

The Add Users And Groups dialog box is available from the dialog boxes that allow you to change and remove permissions and auditing for users and groups. Use the dialog box to add users and groups to the permissions or auditing list, search for the members of a group, and find the domain to which a group or user belongs.

To add a user or group to a permissions or auditing list

1.	In the permissions or auditing dialog box, choose the Add button.

The Add Users And Groups dialog box displays the groups on the computer or in the domain shown by the List Names From box. Local groups are shown for the computer or domain whose name is followed by an asterisk (*). You can select another domain by using the List Names From box.

Domains appear only if your computer is a member of a domain on a Windows NT Server network. The domains shown have a trust relationship.

2.	You can use options in the Add Users And Groups dialog box to display users, find the users in a group, or find the domain to which a group or user belongs.

To display the names of users on the selected computer or domain, choose the Show Users button.

To see a group's content, select the group and choose the Members button. Users are listed in a new dialog box. On a Windows NT Server network, global groups that are members of a local group appear in the list. To see a global group's users, select the group and choose the Members button. To include the group in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, choose the Add button. To include some of the group's users, select them and choose the Add button.

To add a group or user, you must know the domain which contains the group's or user's account. On a Windows NT Server network, choose the Search button to find the domain of a group or user. In the Find Account dialog box, type the name of the group or user in the Find User Or Group box and specify the domains you want to search. Then choose the Search button. To include the groups or users in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, select them in the Search Results box and choose the Add button.

3.	To add groups or users to the list, select them in the Names box and choose the Add button, or double-click the name of the group or user. Or you can type the names of groups and users in the Add Names box. Separate names using a semicolon.

If the account of the group or user is not located on the computer or domain shown by the List Names From box, you must specify the location. Type the computer or domain name followed by the group or user name and separate the names using a backslash, for example shipping\ernesta. You can type the name without waiting for Windows NT to list groups in the Names box.

4.	If you are adding users or groups to a permissions list, select the permission for the groups or users shown in the Add Names box using the Type Of Access box.

5	Choose the OK button.


Taking Ownership of Files or Directories
File Manager	46 of 50

Securing Directories and Files

Taking Ownership of Files or Directories

When you create a file or directory, you become the owner of it. By granting permissions, the owner controls how the file or directory is used. The owner can grant permission to another user to take ownership of a file or directory. Otherwise, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group to take ownership.

Although an administrator can take ownership, an administrator cannot transfer ownership to others. This preserves security. For example, only an administrator who takes ownership and changes permissions can gain access to a file on which you have set No Access permission. By checking the ownership of the file, you would see the ownership change and know who had violated the permission you set on the file. To make sure that your files are secure, you should check their ownership regularly.

To take ownership of a file or directory

1.	Select the file or directory in the File Manager window. You can select more than one file or directory at a time.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Owner.

3.	Choose the Take Ownership button.

If you have selected one or more directories, File Manager asks whether you want to take ownership of all files and subdirectories in the trees of the selected directories. Choose Yes if you want to do so.


Maintaining Disks
File Manager	47 of 50

Maintaining Disks

Use commands on the Disk menu to format, copy, and label floppy disks.


Formatting a Floppy Disk
File Manager	48 of 50

Maintaining Disks

Formatting a Floppy Disk

Formatting prepares a floppy disk so that information can be stored on it and retrieved from it. Windows NT uses the MS-DOS FAT file system when formatting a disk. When you format a disk, File Manager removes all the information from it, writes new directory information to it, and checks for unusable portions called bad sectors.

To format a floppy disk

1.	Insert a disk into a drive.

2.	From the Disk menu, choose Format Disk.

3.	In the Disk In box, make sure that the drive shown is the one containing the floppy you want to format. If necessary, select the correct drive.

4.	In the Capacity box, select the size of the disk you want to format.

5.	To give the disk a volume label, type a name in the Label box under Options.

6.	To quickly reformat a disk that has been formatted previously, select the Quick Format check box. A quick format deletes directory information in the file allocation table and root directory. The disk is not checked for bad sectors.

7.	Choose the OK button.

8.	A message prompts you to confirm that you want to format the disk. Formatting deletes all information on a disk, so make sure the disk is the one you want to format. Then choose the Yes button.

File Manager displays its progress in a dialog box as formatting proceeds. You can work with File Manager while formatting continues in the background. To cancel formatting, choose the Cancel button. To hide the dialog box while formatting continues, choose the Hide button.

After your disk is formatted, a message prompts you to indicate whether you want to format another disk.

Caution

You cannot recover information on a disk that has been formatted.


Copying a Floppy Disk
File Manager	49 of 50

Maintaining Disks

Copying a Floppy Disk

You can make a copy of a floppy disk by using the Copy Disk command on the Disk menu. When you copy a floppy disk, both disks must have the same storage capacity. For example, if the disk you are copying from (the source disk) has a capacity of 720K, the disk you are copying to (the destination disk) must also.

To copy an entire disk

1.	Insert the source disk in the drive you want to copy from. If you have two floppy disk drives of the same size, insert the destination disk in the drive you want to copy to.

2.	From the Disk menu, choose Copy Disk.

3.	If your computer has two floppy disk drives, select the letter of the source drive and the destination drive in the Copy Disk dialog box. Then choose the OK button.

If your computer has only one floppy disk drive, you are not prompted to select drives.

4.	A message prompts you to confirm that you want to copy the disk. There is no way to recover previously stored information on the destination disk, so make sure the disk in the destination drive is one you want to overwrite. Then choose the Yes button.

If you are making a copy using a single floppy disk drive, you are prompted to switch source and destination disks as needed.

A message informs you of the percentage of your disk that has been copied.

File Manager displays its progress in a dialog box as the copy is made. You can work with File Manager while copying continues in the background. To cancel copying, choose the Cancel button. To hide the dialog box while copying continues, choose the Hide button.


Labeling a Disk
File Manager	50 of 50

Maintaining Disks

Labeling a Disk

You can assign or change a label for a disk by selecting the Label Disk command on the Disk menu.

To assign or change a volume label

1.	Click the drive icon for the disk you want to label.

2.	From the Disk menu, choose Label Disk.

3.	In the Label box, type the label for the disk.

Labels on NTFS disks can contain up to 32 characters. Labels on FAT and HPFS disks can contain up to 11 characters.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Control Panel
Chapter 5	1 of 57

Control Panel

You can use Control Panel to customize various features of Windows NT.

This chapter describes the options available in Control Panel, which include the following:

Changing the desktop

Setting serial port communications options

Working with fonts

Working with date, time, and international settings

Customizing the keyboard, cursor, and mouse

Working with printers

Working with device drivers

Configuring video display resolution and color choices

Configuring sound devices

Defining options for the operating system and the uninterruptible power supply

Configuring the network

Managing server properties and services


Overview
Control Panel	2 of 57

Overview

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

Control Panel provides many options for customizing Windows NT so that it works and looks the way you want. The icons in Control Panel represent options, including network and sound capabilities, for configuring a computer. For each icon, there is a corresponding command on the Settings menu. Your Control Panel window may look different, depending on the devices you have installed, such as an extra pointing device.

Most changes made in Control Panel (except adding and removing fonts and some international changes) will affect only the user who is currently logged on to the computer.

Some options in Control Panel require you to be logged on as a member of a specific group. If you are not a member of the necessary group, a message appears.

The following table describes Control Panel options.

Choose	To

Color	Set the color of the various elements of the desktop.

Cursors	Change the appearance of the cursor.

Date/Time	Change the system date, time, and time zone.

Desktop	Specify the pattern, screen saver, alignment grid, icon spacing, and cursor blink rate.

Devices	Start, stop, and configure the startup type for device drivers.

Display	Install and configure drivers video display and test the resolution.

Drivers	Install and configure drivers for multimedia devices such as sound boards and synthesizers.

Fonts	Add or remove screen, vector, TrueType, and Type1 fonts. (Some printer fonts are installed automatically when you install a printer. Other printer fonts must be installed using a font installation program provided by the font manufacturer.)

International	Specify international settings such as the country, language, and keyboard; number and currency formats; and date and time formats without changing the language of the product itself.

Keyboard	Adjust the keyboard delay and repeat rate.

MIDI Mapper	Select, change, or create MIDI setups, patch maps, or key maps for playing a synthesizer connected to your computer. This icon appears only if you have the necessary hardware installed.

Mouse	Customize elements such as speed and button function for your pointing device.

Network	Install and configure network adapter cards and other network software, and join a workgroup or a domain.

Ports	Set parameters for serial communications ports, and add and remove serial ports.

Printers	Open Print Manager to work with local and network printers.

Server	For the local computer, view and manage connected users, directory shares, open resources, directory replication, and recipients of administrative alerts.

Services	Start, stop, pause, or continue the services available on the computer and configure startup options.

Sound	Assign sounds to system and application events, and turn on or off the warning beep and system sounds.

Sound Mapper	Configure installed sound drivers and manage priorities assigned to drivers. This icon appears only if you have the necessary hardware installed.

System	Specify the default operating system for startup, change user environment variables, and define paging file size.

UPS	Configure the uninterruptible power supply to ensure safe shutdown during a power failure.

For additional information about any option in Control Panel, see the online Help.


Changing the Desktop
Control Panel	3 of 57

Changing the Desktop

You can use the Desktop option to customize the appearance of your desktop (which is where elements such as windows, icons, and dialog boxes appear). You can specify a pattern or wallpaper for the desktop, adjust icon spacing, wrap icon titles, or set an invisible grid to easily align windows and icons. Use the Color option to select the colors used for displaying desktop elements.


Customizing Desktop Colors
Control Panel	4 of 57

Changing the Desktop

Customizing Desktop Colors

The colors assigned to the different parts of the desktop are saved in color schemes. Several predefined color schemes are provided. A solid color in Windows NT is directly supported by your display adapter. VGA adapters support 16 solid colors, and 256-color adapters support 20 solid colors. Both types of displays support hundreds of dithered colors, which are produced by patterns of colored dots to simulate a color or pattern. Depending on the screen resolution, dithered colors can look almost exactly like solid colors.

Changing an Existing Color Scheme

You can change individual colors assigned to a color scheme. If you find that you use only one or two color schemes, you can shorten the list of selections by deleting schemes. The only color scheme that cannot be deleted is Windows Default, the scheme you see the first time you start Windows NT.

To change the colors of a color scheme

1.	In the Control Panel window, double-click the Color icon.

2.	In the Color Schemes box of the Color dialog box, select the color scheme you want to change.

3.	Choose the Color Palette button.

The Color dialog box expands to include a list of screen elements, a palette of basic colors, and a palette titled Custom Colors.

4.	Click the part of the sample screen where you want to change the color. Or in the Screen Element box, select the element from the list.

You can see which element is selected in the Screen Element list.

Clicking "Highlighted" in the sample screen alternately selects the Highlight and Highlighted Text elements. Similarly, clicking the OK button in the sample screen alternately selects the Button Face, Button Shadow, and Button Text elements.

5.	In the Basic Colors palette, select the color you want.

The color is displayed in the sample screen.

6.	Change the color of any other screen elements until you are satisfied with the color scheme.

Control Panel uses the solid color closest to the selected dithered color for the following screen elements:

Window Frame		Window Text	Window Background
Menu Bar		Menu Text	Active and Inactive
Button Face		Button Text	Title Bar Text
Highlight		Highlighted Text	Disabled Text
7.	To save the new color selections, choose the Save Scheme button, and then type a name for the scheme.

If you don't save the scheme, Windows NT still uses the new color selections until you change them again, even if you quit and restart Windows. However, when you make another change or choose an existing scheme, the color selections are lost.

8.	Choose the OK button.

Defining Custom Colors

The Basic Colors palette contains 48 colors. You can define and use up to 16 additional custom colors in a color refiner box by specifying the hue, saturation, luminosity, and relative amounts of red, green, and blue.

Hue is the position of the color along the color spectrum. Saturation is the purity of the hue, moving from gray to the pure color. Luminosity is the brightness of the color on a scale from black to white.

To define a custom color

1.	In the Color dialog box, choose the Color Palette button, and then choose the Define Custom Colors button.

2.	Move the color refiner cursor to the area of the color refiner box that shows the color you want. Then drag the arrow next to the luminosity bar to adjust the luminosity.

The new color is displayed on the left side of the Color/Solid box. The right side of the box displays the solid color closest to your choice. To select the solid color, choose the right side of the box, or press ALT+O.

3.	When you are satisfied with the color, select a box in the Custom Colors palette for the new color. You can select an empty box or one that contains a color you want to change.

If you do not select a box for the new color, it is placed in the first available empty box or in the upper-left position in the Custom Colors palette. Subsequent custom colors fill the boxes in sequence from upper left to lower right unless you choose a specific box for the new color.

4.	Choose the Add Color button to add the new color to the Custom Colors palette.

5.	Define any other custom colors you want to add to the palette, and then choose the Close button to return to the Color dialog box. Or to return to the Color dialog box without closing the Custom Color Selector dialog box, drag the Custom Color Selector dialog box to a new position.

You can now choose the custom colors the same way you would choose colors from the Basic Colors palette.


Configuring Desktop Appearance
Control Panel	5 of 57

Changing the Desktop

Configuring Desktop Appearance

You can use the Desktop icon in Control Panel to configure the appearance of your desktop.

Changing or Creating a Pattern

You can change a predefined desktop pattern, create a new pattern, or remove a pattern.

To change an existing pattern

1.	In the Control Panel window, double-click the Desktop icon.

2.	Choose the Edit Pattern button.

3.	In the Name box, select a pattern.

A sample of the current pattern appears in the Sample box. The cell shows an enlarged version so you can make changes to the pattern.

4.	In the cell, click locations where you want to reverse the colors in the pattern.

5.	When the Sample box shows the pattern you want, choose the Change button.

6.	Choose the OK button to return to the Desktop dialog box.

To create a pattern

1.	In the Name box of the Edit Pattern dialog box, type a name for the new pattern.

2.	Click locations in the cell where you want to reverse the colors in the pattern.

3.	When the cell shows the pattern you want, choose the Add button.

4.	Choose the OK button to return to the Desktop dialog box.

The pattern you define is repeated as many times as necessary to completely fill the background. The colors of the pattern are determined by the Desktop and Window Text colors you choose.

If you find that you use only one or two patterns, you can select patterns you no longer use and choose the Remove button in the Edit Pattern dialog box.

Displaying Custom Wallpaper

You can display a .BMP bitmap graphic on your desktop instead of a solid color or pattern. Paint programs that produce .BMP files, such as Windows Paintbrush, can be used to create a bitmap or to modify a scanned image. After you create the bitmap, save the .BMP file in the \systemroot directory (or specify the full path when choosing the bitmap as wallpaper).

Note

Windows uses more memory when displaying wallpaper than when displaying a solid color or a pattern on the desktop. If you run out of memory when running an application, you can change to a color or pattern to free some memory.

To choose a bitmap to display as wallpaper

1.	In the Control Panel window, double-click the Desktop icon.

2.	In the File box under Wallpaper, select a bitmap from the list.

If you saved the bitmap in a directory other than the Windows NT directory, type the full path and bitmap filename.

3.	Select Center or Tile.

The Center option positions the bitmap in the center of the desktop. The Tile option repeats the bitmap as many times as necessary to cover the desktop.

If you select both a pattern and custom wallpaper in the Desktop dialog box, the wallpaper lies over the pattern. If you select the Center option for the wallpaper and the bitmap doesn't cover the entire desktop, you'll see the pattern around the edges of the bitmap.

If you want to remove a wallpaper from the list, delete the bitmap file from the \systemroot directory.

Preventing Icon Titles from Overlapping

Sometimes an icon's title is so wide that it overlaps an adjacent icon. You can use the Desktop icon to control the display of icon titles.

Windows NT calculates the standard spacing for application, document, and program-item icons based on the size of the widest icon. Usually this spacing is adequate. However, sometimes the description for an icon exceeds the icon's width, causing it to overlap adjacent icons.

Icon spacing is measured in pixels, the smallest unit of measurement on the screen. Increments of 10 pixels result in noticeable increases in spacing between icons.

To increase icon spacing and wrap an icon title

1.	Under Icons in the Desktop dialog box, click the up or down arrow in the Spacing box to increase or decrease the spacing between icons, or type a number.

2.	Select the Wrap Title check box if you want the title to wrap.

Changing Window Border Width

Many windows can be resized by using the mouse to drag the window border to a new size. If a window can be resized, you can make it easier to "grab" the window border by increasing the border width.

To change the border width of windows

Under the Sizing Grid in the Desktop dialog box, click the up or down arrow in the Border Width box to increase or decrease the border width. Or type a number from 1 to 50, with 1 being the narrowest border.

Changing the Sizing Grid of Windows

The position and alignment of application windows and icons on your desktop are determined by an invisible grid. When Windows NT is set up, the sizing grid is turned off so that icons and windows remain where you place them on the desktop. When the sizing grid is turned on, application windows and minimized icons align with the nearest invisible gridline.

The grid changes in multiples of 8 pixels. A value of 1 creates a grid with 8 pixels between gridlines, a value of 2 creates a grid with 16 pixels between gridlines, and so forth. A value of 0 cancels the grid.

This option only affects application windows and the application icons that appear at the bottom of your screen. The sizing grid has no effect on document windows and icons.

To set the grid spacing

Under the Sizing Grid in the Desktop dialog box, click the up or down arrow in the Granularity box to increase or decrease the size of the grid, or type a number from 0 to 49.


Switching Between Applications
Control Panel	6 of 57

Changing the Desktop

Switching Between Applications

Windows NT allows you to run multiple applications at one time. However, when doing this, it is sometimes difficult to locate a specific application window. You can use fast application switching to switch between your applications.

To use fast application switching

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Desktop icon.

2.	In the Desktop dialog box, select the Fast ALT+TAB Switching check box, and then choose the OK button.

If Fast Task Switch is selected, you can quickly cycle through the names of any running applications. If Fast Task Switch is not selected, pressing ALT+TAB still works, but only the title bar of each window is highlighted.

3.	Press ALT+TAB to cycle through the running applications. When you see the name of the application you want, release the keys.

If, while moving through the applications by pressing ALT+TAB, you want to return to your original application, press ALT+TAB+ESC.


Working with Screen Savers
Control Panel	7 of 57

Changing the Desktop

Working with Screen Savers

Screen savers are used to reduce wear on your display and to provide security for your system. A screen saver is a moving pattern or bitmap that appears after you have not used your computer for a specified time.

When Windows NT is set up, a default screen saver is selected. However, several other screen savers are available. Move the mouse or press any key to turn off the screen saver.

You can use the Windows NT screen savers or the IdleWild screen savers included in the Microsoft Entertainment Pack for Windows. To use the IdleWild screen savers, the IWLIB.DLL file and the screen saver files (those with the extension .IW) must be in the same directory. Place these files in your \systemroot directory.

When you use a screen saver provided by Windows NT, you can ensure that unauthorized users do not have access to your work by using password protection with a screen saver. If someone tries to use your computer once the password-protected screen saver is displayed, a Lock Workstation dialog box appears. To unlock the computer, the same password used to log on to the computer must be entered.

To select a screen saver and turn password protection on and off

1.	Under Screen Saver in the Desktop dialog box, select a screen saver in the Names box.

2.	In the Delay box, click the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the number of minutes before the screen saver is activated, or type a number between 1 and 99.

3.	If you want to protect your display with a password, select the Password Protect check box.

4.	To configure your screen saver, choose the Setup button, and then complete the setup dialog box that appears.

5.	To see how your screen saver looks, choose the Test button, and then move the mouse or press a key on the keyboard to stop the screen saver test.


Setting Serial Port Communications Options
Control Panel	8 of 57

Setting Serial Port Communications Options

You can specify the communications settings for each serial port your system uses by using the Ports option. Windows NT can support up to 256 serial ports. Serial ports (named COM1 through COM256) are used to connect to serial pointing devices, printers, and other serial devices. Most computers include at least two serial ports:  COM1 and COM2. Some devices, such as serial-port adapters, modems, and fax cards, use COM3 through COM256. The settings you specify determine how information is transferred between your computer and the serial device.

The communications settings you can specify include standard settings such as those for baud rate, parity, and flow control, and more advanced settings such as those that specify the base port address and interrupt request (IRQ) line that Windows NT uses to send information to a serial port. If you plan on using only COM1 and COM2, you may need to change only the standard settings. If you use COM3 through COM256, you may need to change the advanced settings.

Most communications applications that you use to exchange information between computers, such as Windows Terminal, require that you specify standard port settings within the application. These settings, such as baud rate, parity, and data bits, override the settings you specify by using the Ports option in Control Panel.

To specify standard communications settings

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Ports icon.

2.	In the Ports dialog box, select the name of the port for which you want to specify communications settings.

3.	Choose the Settings button.

4.	In the Settings dialog box, display the options for each setting by clicking the scroll arrow to the right of each box.

5.	Set the options to match the device connected to the port.

For information about the correct settings, see the documentation supplied with the device.

6.	When you finish specifying the settings, choose the OK button to return to the Ports dialog box, and then choose the Close button.

For additional help on setting advanced options, see the online Help in the Ports dialog box.


Working with Fonts
Control Panel	9 of 57

Working with Fonts

A font, or typeface, is a collection of letters, numerals, symbols, and punctuation marks that have common characteristics. Fonts come in different sizes and styles. Font sizes are the height of a character measured in points - a point is approximately 1/72 of an inch. Font styles include characteristics such as bold and italic. Because of the differences in display resolution between the screen and the printer, what appears on screen and what appears in the printed document may be different.

If you use TrueType fonts in your documents, Windows NT and all Windows applications display the fonts on the screen exactly as they appear when printed; there is no need to install matching screen fonts. In addition, by using TrueType fonts, your documents become more portable because they look the same printed on different printers, as long as you use the same application and print at the same resolution. If you print at a different resolution or are printing a document from an older application, line and page breaks might change.

Windows NT also supports Type 1 fonts. When installing Type 1 fonts, you are given the choice to convert Type 1 fonts to TrueType, use the original Type 1 font on a PostScript printer, or both.

Important

Converting Type 1 fonts to TrueType is governed by the license agreement for your Type 1 fonts. See your license agreement and PRINTER.WRI for additional details.


Adding Screen, TrueType, and Type 1 Fonts
Control Panel	10 of 57

Working with Fonts

Adding Screen, TrueType, and Type 1 Fonts

When you install a printer driver, screen fonts that match the printer fonts are usually installed. If you are using cartridge or soft fonts, your font manufacturer usually supplies an installation program for installing screen fonts, or the installation program that installs the cartridge or soft fonts may install the screen fonts automatically.

If no installation program is provided for installing screen fonts, you can use the Fonts option to install them. You can also use the Fonts option to install any additional TrueType or Type 1 fonts that you purchase.

Note

When installing Type 1 fonts, use the Install Type 1 Font Files For Use On The PostScript Printer option for dot-by-dot accuracy on PostScript print jobs. Choose the Convert Type 1 Font To TrueType option to match the screen to the PostScript printer, or to use the font on any non-PostScript printer. If your computer is low on disk space or if you do not want to see the precise fonts on screen, you can choose to install only the Type 1 font for the PostScript printer.

To add a font

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Fonts icon.

The Fonts dialog box lists all the installed fonts and the font type (for example, TrueType) displayed in parentheses.

The Sample box displays the selected font in all available sizes unless the font is a vector font or a TrueType font. Vector fonts can be scaled to any height, so the only size displayed is the size used to design the font. TrueType fonts can also be scaled to any height and are displayed in about 24-point size.

2.	In the Fonts dialog box, choose the Add button.

3.	In the Directories and Drives boxes of the Add Fonts dialog box, select the drive and directory that contain the fonts you want to add.

4.	In the List Of Fonts box, select the fonts you want to add.

To select a nonconsecutive list of fonts in the box, click the fonts while pressing CTRL.

To add every font in the list, choose the Select All button.

5.	If you have limited disk space, you can clear the Copy Fonts To Windows Directory check box. You can then use the fonts directly from the directory in which they are located, without copying them to your \systemroot\SYSTEM directory.

6.	Choose the OK button to add the selected fonts, and then choose the Close button.


Removing a Font
Control Panel	11 of 57

Working with Fonts

Removing a Font

The fonts installed in Windows NT occupy memory. If you don't use all the fonts you have installed, you can remove them from your system and free memory for use by your applications.

Important

The MS Sans Serif font set is used by most Windows NT dialog boxes. Do not remove this font; if you do, the text in the dialog boxes will be difficult to read. Deleting a font on a particular computer removes that font for every user who logs on to that computer.

To remove a font

1.	In the Installed Fonts list of the Fonts dialog box, select the fonts you want to remove.

To select a nonconsecutive list of fonts in the box, click the fonts while holding down the CTRL key.

2.	Choose the Remove button.

3.	If you want to delete the font files from your disk as well as remove the fonts from memory, select the Delete Font File From Disk check box.

Caution

It is recommended that you do not delete fonts from the disk if you chose not to copy the fonts to your \systemroot\SYSTEM directory. If you delete the fonts from your hard disk, you must supply the original Windows NT installation disks if you decide to add these fonts later.

If you are deleting a Type 1 font or a TrueType font that was converted from a Type 1 font, you can select the Delete Font File From Disk check box to remove both the TrueType conversion files and the original Type 1 font files, depending on your installation choices.

If Delete Font File From Disk is not checked, the files will be kept on your hard disk, but removed from memory.

4.	In the message that appears, choose the Yes button, or, if you are removing several fonts at the same time, choose the Yes To All button.

5.	In the Fonts dialog box, choose the Close button.

Using TrueType Fonts in Applications

You can regain some memory in your computer by turning off the TrueType fonts when you are not using them in your applications, or if you use only TrueType fonts in your documents, you can prevent all other fonts from appearing in the fonts list of your Windows applications. If you find you use only TrueType fonts in your documents, you can prevent all other fonts from appearing in the fonts list of your Windows and Windows NT applications. These fonts include screen, plotter, and printer fonts.

Note

Selecting the Show Only Fonts in Applications check box does not turn off non-TrueType fonts. It only prevents them from appearing in the fonts lists of you applications. You can still use your applications to view and print documents that contain other fonts. although some applications do not support listing TrueType fonts exclusively. If you select the Show Only TrueType Fonts In Applications check box, and no TrueType fonts appear in your application, then do not use this option.

To prevent TrueType fonts from being used by an application or to prevent non-TrueType fonts from appearing in font list, choose the Fonts icon and then choose the TrueType button. Change the options in the Enable TrueType Fonts and Show Only TrueType Fonts In Applications check boxes.

To set TrueType options

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Fonts icon.

2.	Choose the TrueType button.

3.	Clear the Enable TrueType Fonts check box to turn off TrueType fonts, or select the Show Only TrueType Fonts In Applications check box to use TrueType fonts exclusively.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Any change you make to the Enable TrueType Fonts option does not take effect until you restart Windows. If you change this option, a message appears asking you if you want to restart Windows.

5.	To restart Windows, choose the Restart Now button.


Working with Date, Time, and International Settings
Control Panel	12 of 57

Working with Date, Time, and International Settings

The system date and time are used in some Windows applications and in various places in Windows NT such as File Manager and Event Viewer. Before setting the date and time on your system, you must be sure to set the correct time zone. The way the date and time are displayed can be specified through the International option.


Configuring Date and Time
Control Panel	13 of 57

Working with Date, Time, and International Settings

Configuring Date and Time

The system date and time are reflected in Clock and Calendar (two Windows NT applications in the Accessories group), as well as in the information kept by File Manager for each file you save on your disk.

Setting the System Date and Time

To set the date and time on your system, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Power Users group.

To set the date and time

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Date/Time icon.

2.	In the Time Zone box, select the time zone for your area.

If your area uses daylight saving time, select the check box to automatically adjust the time.

3.	In the Date box, select the part of the date (day, month, or year) you want to change, and then type the new value, or click the up or down arrow.

4.	In the Time box, select the part of the time (hour, minute, second, suffix) you want to change, and then type the new value, or click the up or down arrow.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Changing the Date and Time Display

You can change the way the date is displayed in applications that have a date function. For example, you can vary the order of the month, day, and year, or change the punctuation used to separate parts of the date.

To change the date format

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the International icon.

2.	Under Date Format in the International dialog box, choose the Change button.

3.	In the International - Date Format dialog box, set the options you want for both the Short Date Format and Long Date Format.

The Short Date Format displays the date as three numbers representing the month, day, and year. You can specify the order and number of digits for each part of the date. For example, selecting Century displays the year as a four-digit number.

The Long Date Format displays the date as a combination of words and numbers (for example, Monday, October 19, 1994) or a variation you specify.

4.	Choose the OK button to return to the International dialog box.

You can also specify how the time is displayed in applications such as File Manager. For example, you can display the time in a 12-hour or 24-hour format, change the punctuation between the hour, minute, and second, or add suffixes to the time, such as A.M. for morning or PST for Pacific Standard Time.

To change the time format

1.	Under Time Format in the International dialog box, choose the Change button.

2.	Set the options you want, and then choose the OK button to return to the International dialog box.


Working with Other International Settings
Control Panel	14 of 57

Working with Date, Time, and International Settings

Working with Other International Settings

With the International option, you can specify basic international settings such as the country, language, and system of measurement you want to use. When you select a country, Windows NT automatically adjusts other formats to reflect those used by the selected country. You can also customize these settings.

To select international settings

1.	In the Control Panel window, double-click the International icon.

2.	In the International dialog box, specify the settings for Country, Language, Keyboard Layout, Measurement, and List Separator.

You need to be logged on as a member of the Administrators group to change the Language and Keyboard options.

A description of each option follows this procedure.

3.	Choose the appropriate Change button to customize settings for Date and Time Format as specified in the preceding section.

4.	Choose the Change button under Currency Format.

In the International - Currency Format dialog box, you can control the way currency is represented. For example, you can place the currency symbol in different locations relative to the amount, specify how negative currency values are represented, or change the currency symbol for your country.

5.	Set the options you want, and then choose the OK button to return to the International dialog box.

6.	Choose the Change button under Number Format.

In the International - Number Format dialog box, you can control the way numbers are displayed. For example, you can choose the punctuation separating thousands and punctuation separating the fractional part of a decimal number, or change the decimal display of numbers.

7.	Set the options you want, and then choose the OK button to return to the International dialog box.

Use this option	To

Country	Specify the country with the standard settings you want to use. When you select a country, Windows NT automatically adjusts the settings for the date, time, number, and currency formats.

Language	Specify the language you want to work in. The language you select affects the way applications sort information and provides ANSI code page, OEM code page, and OEM font information. For example, if the language you are working in includes extended characters, setting this option to that language ensures that your applications will correctly sort words or phrases that include these characters.

You must shut down and restart your computer for the new language setting to take effect.

Keyboard Layout	Specify the keyboard layout of your computer. Keyboard layouts vary to accommodate the special characters and symbols used in different languages. Windows NT uses this setting to interpret the keys you press.

Measurement	Select the metric or English system of measurement.

List Separator	Specify a symbol to separate elements in a list. In English, the list separator is typically a comma and is used to separate words or numbers that appear in a series.

Note

The following keyboard layouts are for use only with Unicode applications and require installing the Unicode font, Lucida Sans Unicode:

Czech	Polish (Programmers)		Turkish F
Greek	Russian		Turkish Q
Hungarian	Slovak
To install the Lucida Sans Unicode font, use the Font option in Control Panel. The font is available on the Windows NT compact disc.


Customizing the Keyboard, Cursor, and Mouse
Control Panel	15 of 57

Customizing the Keyboard, Cursor, and Mouse

You may have personal preferences about how your cursor, keyboard, mouse, or other pointing device works. For example, you may want the mouse pointer to move rapidly, the keyboard to repeat rapidly when you hold down a key, or the cursor to blink more slowly. You can use Control Panel to customize several options.

Choose	To

Keyboard	Adjust the keyboard's character-repeat speed.

Desktop	Adjust the cursor blink rate.

Cursors	Change the cursor appearance.

Mouse	Adjust the speed of the pointer, set the double-click speed, swap the functions of the left and right mouse buttons, and set any options specific to the mouse you are using.


Adjusting the Keyboard Delay and Repeat Rate
Control Panel	16 of 57

Customizing the Keyboard, Cursor, and Mouse

Adjusting the Keyboard Delay and Repeat Rate

You can adjust how long your computer waits after you hold down a key before it repeats that key, and then how fast the key repeats when you hold it down.

To change the keyboard delay and repeat rate

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Keyboard icon.

2.	Under Delay Before First Repeat, drag the scroll box toward Long or Short to increase or decrease the delay. Or click the appropriate scroll arrow.

3.	Under Repeat Rate, drag the scroll box toward Fast or Slow to increase or decrease the repeat rate. Or click the appropriate scroll arrow.

4.	To test the speed, move to the Test box and type or hold down any key on the keyboard. Adjust the box positions until you reach a delay speed and repeat rate you are comfortable with.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Adjusting the Cursor Blink Rate
Control Panel	17 of 57

Customizing the Keyboard, Cursor, and Mouse

Adjusting the Cursor Blink Rate

You can adjust how fast the cursor blinks.

To change the cursor blink rate

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Desktop icon.

2.	Under Cursor Blink Rate, drag the scroll box toward Fast or Slow or click the appropriate scroll arrow.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Changing the Cursor Appearance
Control Panel	18 of 57

Customizing the Keyboard, Cursor, and Mouse

Changing the Cursor Appearance

You can change the look of your cursor with animated or static cursors provided by Windows NT.

To change your cursor

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Cursors icon.

2.	In the Cursor Schemes box, open the list box and select a scheme. The default scheme is Windows Default.

3.	Modify a current scheme by selecting an action whose cursor you want to change and double-clicking it or choosing the Browse button.

4.	In the Directories and Drives boxes of the Browse dialog box, select the drive and directory that contains the cursor files you want to view.

5.	In the File Name box, select a file.

An example of what the cursor looks like appears in the Preview Window.

6.	Choose the OK button to return to the Cursors dialog box.

7.	Change the cursors for any other actions, and then choose the Save Scheme button.

8.	In the Save Scheme dialog box, type a name for a new scheme or press the OK button to modify an existing one.

To remove a selected scheme

Choose the Remove Scheme button.

To reset the selected action to the system default cursor

Choose the Reset button.


Customizing Your Mouse or Other Pointing Device
Control Panel	19 of 57

Customizing the Keyboard, Cursor, and Mouse

Customizing Your Mouse or Other Pointing Device

You can adjust the way Windows NT works with your mouse or other pointing devices. For example, if you are using a mouse, you may be able to switch the functions of the left and right buttons, change the speed of the mouse pointer, or change the double-click rate.

Before customizing settings for your pointing device, you need to install it and its driver, using Windows NT Setup. For information, see Chapter 12, "System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup."

To customize your pointing device

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the icon for your pointing device.

A dialog box appears for the device you are using.

2.	Set the options you want, and then choose the OK button.

For details about the options and their settings, see the documentation for your pointing device and Help, if available.


Working with Printers
Control Panel	20 of 57

Working with Printers

The Printers option in Control Panel opens Print Manager and allows you to work with local and network printers. With Print Manager you can:

Install local printers

Set printer properties

Connect to or share printers on a network

Remotely administer printers

For more information about Print Manager, see Chapter 6, "Print Manager."


Working with Multimedia Device Drivers
Control Panel	21 of 57

Working with Multimedia Device Drivers

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

When you add a new device to your system, such as a new sound board or video player, you need to install the driver that controls the device. A device driver is a program that allows a specific piece of hardware (or device) to communicate with Windows NT. Although the device may be installed in or connected to your computer, Windows NT does not recognize the device until after you install and configure the appropriate driver.


Installing and Configuring Drivers
Control Panel	22 of 57

Working with Multimedia Device Drivers

Installing and Configuring Drivers

Most devices come with the appropriate driver. Windows NT also supplies sound drivers for common sound devices, such as sound boards and synthesizers. If you do not have a driver for your device, contact your device dealer or manufacturer about providing one.

Installing a New Driver

To install kernel drivers (drivers that access hardware), you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group. The drivers you install will be available to all users.

To install a new driver

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Drivers icon.

The Drivers dialog box displays a list of the drivers already installed.

2.	In the Drivers dialog box, choose the Add button.

3.	In the Add dialog box, select the driver you want to install from the list, or select Unlisted Or Updated Driver if your driver is not yet known to the system, and then choose the OK button.

4.	You may get a message saying the driver is already present on your system. To reinstall the driver under List Of Drivers, choose the Current button. To install a new driver from a disk or from somewhere else on the system, choose the New button.

If a message asks you to insert the disk that contains the driver file, insert the appropriate disk containing the driver you want to install into drive A. Or, if the driver is located on your hard disk, type the drive and directory where the driver is located.

If you do not know where the driver file is located, choose the Browse button to locate and select the drive and directory that contain the driver file, but do not type the filename for the driver.

5.	If a setup dialog box appears, select the settings required by the driver, such as the port address and interrupts for a sound board.

Important

The settings you specify must not conflict with the settings used by other devices installed on your system, such as a mouse or network card. For example, the interrupts used by each device must be unique. You may get a message about a configuration error having occurred if the hardware used by the drivers you are installing or the options you have requested conflict with the hardware or drivers already installed on your system.

To avoid conflicts, see the manuals for your other hardware devices to determine the settings they use. Then see the manual that came with the device you are configuring for information about its settings.

6.	When you finish selecting the settings, choose the OK button.

Windows NT installs any additional related drivers automatically. These drivers may also require specific settings. In this case, other setup dialog boxes may appear.

7.	Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all related drivers have been configured.

The new driver and any changed driver settings do not take effect until you restart Windows NT. A message asks you if you want to restart Windows NT.

8.	To have the new driver take effect immediately, choose the Restart Now button.

Installing a Driver Not Supplied with Windows NT

When you purchase a new device, such as a sound board, the associated driver should be included with the device. If you do not have a driver for your device, contact the device manufacturer or dealer to get one. Follow any instructions the manufacturer provides for installing the driver.

Note

Drivers written for Windows 3.1 cannot be installed through the Drivers option in Control Panel. Application setup programs can install some Windows 3.1 multimedia drivers. Drivers should be written specifically for Windows NT. If a driver can't be installed, a message indicating the problem is displayed.

Setting Driver Options

After you have installed a driver, you can change any of its settings. If you want to use more than one set of settings for the same driver, you need to install that driver twice. For instructions on how to install a driver, see "Installing and Configuring Drivers," earlier in this section.

To adjust driver settings

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Drivers icon.

2.	In the Installed Drivers list in the Drivers dialog box, select the driver you want to configure.

3.	Choose the Setup button.

Some drivers do not require specific settings. If you select such a driver, the Setup button is unavailable.

The Setup dialog box appears. The options in this dialog box vary according to the driver you are configuring.

4.	Set the options as described in the manual for your device.

5.	Choose the OK button.

The changes you make do not take effect until you restart Windows NT. A message asks if you want to restart Windows NT.

6.	To have the new settings take effect immediately, choose the Restart Now button.

Removing a Driver

You need to be logged on as a member of the Administrators group to remove some drivers.

If you are no longer using a device, you can remove its driver from the Drivers list. Removing a driver from the Drivers list does not remove the driver file from your hard disk. If you need to use the same device later, you can add its driver again.

Caution

The drivers that are automatically installed while running Setup are required by your system (these are the drivers that are displayed when you first open the Drivers dialog box). If you remove one of these drivers, your system may not work properly.

To remove a driver

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Drivers icon.

2.	From the list of installed drivers in the Drivers dialog box, select the driver you want to remove.

3.	Choose the Remove button.

4.	When the message asks you to confirm your decision to remove the driver, choose the Yes button.

A message asks if you want to restart Windows NT.

5.	To have the removal take effect immediately, choose the Restart Now button.


Configuring Sound Drivers
Control Panel	23 of 57

Working with Multimedia Device Drivers

Configuring Sound Drivers

The Sound Mapper icon provides options for configuring sound drivers in Windows NT. In addition to configuring a sound driver, you can set the priority of a driver, disable a driver, or select a preferred sound device. This icon appears only if you have the necessary hardware installed.

Configuring a Sound Driver

Sound Mapper displays a list of installed drivers and identifies the current priority assigned to each one.

You can configure some drivers in the Sound Mapper Configuration dialog box. If the selected driver does not support configuration, the Configure button is not available. You can also get more information about the full name of the driver and the version you have installed in the About dialog box. In addition, the dialog box provides a brief description of what the driver does.

To configure a sound driver

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Sound Mapper icon.

2.	In the Sound Mapper Drivers list of the Sound Mapper Configuration dialog box, select the driver.

3.	Choose the Configure button.

The settings in the Configure Driver dialog box depend on the driver you choose. For more information, see the documentation that came with the driver.

To get more information about a driver

1.	In the Sound Mapper Drivers list in the Sound Mapper Configuration dialog box, select the driver.

2.	Choose the About button.

3.	To return to the Sound Mapper Configuration dialog box, choose the OK button.

Changing the Priority of a Sound Driver

When an application requests a sound driver, the system searches the available drivers and uses the first one it finds that meets the needs of the application. The priority of installed drivers defines the order in which the system searches drivers. The system first determines the status of the priority 1 driver, then the priority 2 driver, and so on until an available driver is found.

To change the priority of a sound driver

1.	From the Sound Mapper Drivers list in the Sound Mapper Configuration dialog box, select the driver whose priority you want to change.

2.	Choose the Priority button.

3.	From the Priority dialog box, choose the new priority you want to assign to the driver, and then choose the OK button.

When you change the priority, Sound Mapper automatically renumbers the priorities of other drivers to avoid conflicts. For example, assume drivers A, B, C, and D have priorities 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. If you change the priority of driver D from 4 to 2, Sound Mapper changes the priorities of drivers B and C to 3 and 4.

Disabling a Sound Driver

Disabling a driver means Sound Mapper will not consider it when a driver is needed by an application. However, the driver is not removed from your hard disk.

To disable a sound driver

1.	From the Sound Mapper Drivers list of the Sound Mapper Configuration dialog box, select the driver you want to disable.

2.	Choose the Priority button.

The Priority dialog box appears.

3.	From the Priority dialog box, select the Disable Driver check box, and then choose the OK button.

After you disable a driver, you must enable it before you can use it again. To enable a driver, clear the Disable Driver check box in the Priority dialog box.

Selecting a Preferred Sound Device

You can specify the device to use for playback or recording of sounds. The Sound Device Preferences section of the Sound Mapper Configuration dialog box shows the current selections.

To specify a preferred device

1.	In the Sound Mapper Configuration dialog box, click the arrow next to Playback or Recording, depending on which preference you want to set.

Sound Mapper displays a list of all available devices.

2.	From the list, choose the device you want to use as the preferred device.

3.	If you want to use only the preferred devices, select the Use Preferred Devices Only check box.

Note

If you select this check box, you will receive an error if the driver is not available (already in use, for example) when an application needs it.


Using Audio and MIDI Sounds in Windows NT
Control Panel	24 of 57

Working with Multimedia Device Drivers

Using Audio and MIDI Sounds in Windows NT

The Sound icon provides several options for controlling audio sound in Windows NT. To use audio sounds, you need to install a sound card and a sound driver, and then choose the Sound icon to assign different sounds to system and application events.

The Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) Mapper provides options for setting up and playing MIDI sound in Windows NT. To use MIDI sounds, you need a sound device such as a synthesizer and MIDI device drivers. Windows NT supports two different standards, the General MIDI guidelines and the Microsoft authoring guidelines for MIDI files (for playing MIDI information generated by an application or stored in a MIDI file). This icon appears only if you have the necessary hardware installed.

The information in this section is intended only as a general guide. For more specific help, see the documentation for the sound device you install.

Assigning Sounds to Events

With the Sound option, you can assign sounds to different application and system events. For example, you can select a sound to play whenever you start Windows NT. Other sounds play as specified by the application you are using. For example, some applications play the sound assigned to Default Beep whenever you click the mouse outside of an open dialog box. The sounds you can assign to these events are stored in files with the .WAV filename extension.

To use sound in Windows NT, the sound driver that controls your sound board must be installed and configured for your system. If you do not have a sound board or if the sound driver is not configured properly, you hear a warning beep when an error occurs. Windows NT does not support playing a waveform sound through the PC speaker; therefore, if you do not have sound hardware, the Test button is unavailable.

To assign sounds to events

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Sound icon.

2.	From the Events box in the Sound dialog box, select the event that you want to assign a sound to.

If a sound file is already assigned to that event, it is selected in the Files box. Otherwise, <none> is selected.

3.	In the Files box, select the sound file you want to use. If the file you want is not listed, select the drive and directory where the file is located by scrolling in the Files box, and then select the file.

If you don't want to assign a sound to the selected event, select <none>.

4.	To hear the sound, choose the Test button or choose the event or filename.

5.	Repeat steps 2 through 4 until you have assigned a sound to each event you want.

6.	Select the Enable System Sounds check box.

7.	Choose the OK button.

You can turn the warning beep and all other sounds off by clearing the Enable System Sounds check box and assigning <none> to Windows Logon and Windows Logoff.

Changing MIDI Settings

If you are using a sound device such as a synthesizer that has MIDI capabilities, you can specify MIDI settings for the setups, patch maps, and key maps.

Caution

To use MIDI Mapper, you should have a basic understanding of MIDI concepts and terminology. It is recommended that you not use MIDI Mapper to edit or create MIDI setups unless you are experienced with MIDI and understand the results of the changes you make.

For additional help on the MIDI Mapper, see the documentation for the sound device you are installing, or see the online Help in the MIDI Mapper dialog box.


Managing Devices
Control Panel	25 of 57

Managing Devices

Use the Devices option in Control Panel to start, stop, and configure the startup type for device drivers.


Starting and Stopping Devices
Control Panel	26 of 57

Managing Devices

Starting and Stopping Devices

Use the Devices dialog box to start and stop devices.

To start or stop a device

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Devices icon.

In the Devices dialog box, if Started is displayed in the Status column for a device, that device driver is loaded. If the Status column is blank, that device driver is not loaded.

The Startup column displays the startup type of each device. The startup types are described in the following procedure under "Configuring Device Startup."

2.	Select a device.

3.	Choose the Start or Stop button.

Some devices are essential to system operation and cannot be stopped. When such a device is selected, the Stop button is unavailable.

4.	Choose the Close button.


Configuring Device Startup
Control Panel	27 of 57

Managing Devices

Configuring Device Startup

You can determine when a device will start by specifying the startup type.

To configure device startup you must be logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators local group.

To set the startup type of a device

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Devices icon.

2.	In the Devices dialog box, select a device.

3.	Choose the Startup button.

4.	Select a startup type.

Select	To

Boot	Start the device every time the computer starts. Boot devices start before any other devices. Use for critical devices essential to system operation.

System	Start the device every time the system starts. System devices start after Boot devices. Use for critical devices essential to system operation.

Automatic	Start the device every time the system starts. Automatic devices start after Boot and System devices. Use for devices that are not critical for basic system operation.

Manual	Allow the device to be started by a user or by a dependent device.

Disabled	Prevent the device from being started by a user. However, the device can be started by the system.

Caution

Changing the startup type of a Boot or System device can leave the system in an unusable state.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	In the Devices dialog box, choose the Close button.


Configuring Video Display
Control Panel	28 of 57

Configuring Video Display

In this version of Windows NT, you can configure the display resolution and color choices for your screen or adapter or install another display driver by using the Display option in Control Panel. You can also test the resolution or new display driver before accepting the changes as part of your system configuration.

Testing the settings for your display configuration will help prevent you from selecting display options that are not compatible with your monitor and display adapter.

Choosing the Cancel button will cancel all changes made in the Display dialog boxes.

Caution

Some monitors can be physically damaged by incorrect video settings. Carefully check the manual for your monitor before choosing a new setting.

To configure your display

1.	In Control Panel, choose the Display option.

2.	In the Display Settings dialog box, use the options described in the following table to change your display settings. You can also choose the List All Modes button, as described in the next procedure.

Option	Description

Color Palette	Select from this list the number of colors you want for your display adapter. The larger the number, the greater the number of colors.

Desktop Area	Drag the scroll bar to change the visible screen area used by the display. The larger the desktop area, the smaller everything looks on your screen.

Font Size	Select from this list one of the font sizes for your display type. Typically, the selections will be Small Fonts and Large Fonts.

Refresh Frequency	Select from this list the adapter refresh rate. The higher the refresh rate, the less flicker you will see on your screen. You should not select a refresh rate that is not supported by your monitor at the selected resolution. If you are unsure, select the lowest refresh option.

Note

Sometimes a larger number of colors requires you to have a smaller desktop resolution, and vice versa. This is due to a limitation of the display adapter.

3.	To see how these settings work with your monitor, choose the Test button.

The test will display color boxes with text in them showing the new color palette, new desktop area, and new refresh frequency.

4.	If the test shows that the settings work with your display adapter and monitor, choose the OK button.

If the settings are not satisfactory, make adjustments until Test shows that the settings work with your monitor.

To quickly change the mode for your display

1.	In the Display Settings dialog box, choose the List All Modes button.

2.	In the Valid Modes dialog box, double-click the mode that you want.

3.	To see how these settings work with your monitor, choose the Test button.

The test will display color boxes with text in them showing the new color palette, new desktop area, and new refresh frequency.

After you make changes in the Display Settings dialog box, you must restart your computer for the changes to take effect. After Windows NT starts again, if you want to return to your previous display settings, you can restart the computer once more, and then press the spacebar to choose the Last Known Good configuration, as described in Chapter 2, "Troubleshooting" in the Installation Guide.

The following procedure describes how to install another display device driver.

To install a different display device driver

1.	In the Display Settings dialog box, choose the Change Display Type button.

The Display Type dialog box lists information about the current driver.

2.	In the Display Type dialog box, choose the Change button.

3.	In the Select Device dialog box, a list of all the drivers shipped with Windows NT appears in the Models list box, with the default Show All Devices option chosen.

4.	To install display drivers from a manufacturer's disk, choose the Other button, otherwise go to the next step. In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the location for the manufacturer's disk, and then choose the OK button.

For example, if the disk is in drive A, type a: in the box. If the files from the installation disk are on a network drive, you can type that location as a drive letter or as an absolute path, for example, \\filesvr\drivers.

The name of the device will appear in the Models list box.

5.	If you want the system to automatically detect the display adapter on your system, choose the Detect button.

6.	In the Models box, select the name of the device you want to use for your computer, and then choose Install. If you want to remove a driver, you can select it in this list and choose Deinstall.

7.	By default, the current driver will be disabled. If you want to keep multiple drivers installed, clear the Disable Current Driver box.

Note

Keeping multiple drivers installed may generate an error message in the system event log.

Restart the computer and choose the Display option again to select a resolution.

The appropriate drivers will be loaded.

8.	In the Display Type dialog box, choose the Close button.

9.	Complete the steps described in the first procedure to configure and test the settings for this display type.

If you want to see a list of the installed drivers that are compatible with your system, select Show Compatible Devices. To see a complete list of compatible drivers with the Show Compatible Devices option, first choose the Detect button and restart the computer.

You must install a driver before it can appear in the Models list box.


Defining Options for the Operating System
Control Panel	29 of 57

Defining Options for the Operating System

You can have more than one operating system installed on your computer if you want to use different operating systems at different times. Choose the System option in Control Panel to specify the operating system that the boot loader will use the next time you start your computer. You can also specify the user environment variables and view or change the size of your computer's virtual-memory paging file by using the System option.

To specify the default operating system for startup

1.	In the Control Panel window, double-click the System icon.

The System dialog box shows the settings for the user whose profile is currently active on this computer.

2.	In the Startup box, select the default operating system from the list of systems installed on your computer.

3.	In the Show List For box, specify the number of seconds the list of choices should be displayed before automatically starting the default operating system.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Changing the Environment Variables
Control Panel	30 of 57

Defining Options for the Operating System

Changing the Environment Variables

Windows NT requires certain information to find programs, to allocate memory space for some programs to run, and to control the behavior of various programs. This information  - called the system and user environment variables - can be viewed in the System dialog box. These environment variables are similar to those that can be set in the MS-DOS operating system, such as PATH and TEMP.

The system environment variables are defined by Windows NT, and are the same no matter who is logged on at the computer. If you are logged on as a member of the Administrators group, you can add new variables or change the values.

The user environment variables can be different for each user of a particular computer. They include any environment variables you want to define or variables defined by your applications, such as the path where application files are located.

After you change any environment variables in the System dialog box and choose the OK button, Windows NT saves the new values in the Registry so they are available automatically the next time you start your computer.

If any conflict exists between environment variables, Windows NT resolves the conflict in this way:

System environment variables are set first.

User environment variables defined in the System dialog box are set next and override system variables.

Variables defined in AUTOEXEC.BAT are set last, but do not override system or environmental variables.

Note

Path settings, unlike other environmental variables, are cumulative. The full path (what you see when you type path at the command prompt) is created by appending the path contained in AUTOEXEC.BAT to the paths defined in the System option in Control Panel.

To change environment variables for your computer

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the System icon.

The System dialog box shows the current system environment variables and the environment variables for the user whose profile is currently active on this computer.

2.	To change the value of an existing variable, select the variable you want to change.

(If you are an administrator on this computer, you can change variables in either the System Environment Variables box or the User Environment Variables box. If you are not an administrator, you can change only variables in the User Environment Variables box.)

The name of the selected variable appears in the Variable box, and its current value appears in the Value box.

In the Value box, type a new value for the variable, then choose the Set button.

3.	To add a new user environment variable, first select any variable in the User Environment Variables box. Then type the name of the new variable in the Variable box, type the value in the Value box, and choose the Set button.

If you are an administrator, you can add a new system environment variable by selecting any variable in the System Environment Variables box. Then type the name of the new variable in the Variable box, type the value in the Value box, and choose the Set button.

4.	To remove a variable completely, select it and then choose the Delete button.

5.	When you have completed all changes you want to make to environment variables, choose the OK button.

Choose the Cancel button at any time to remove all changes made in the System dialog box and restore the previous values.

Changes to these variables are stored immediately, but the changes won't affect programs that are already running when the changes are made. You must restart your computer to see the effects of the changes while running, for example, the command prompt.


Changing the Virtual-Memory Paging File
Control Panel	31 of 57

Defining Options for the Operating System

Changing the Virtual-Memory Paging File

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

Windows NT uses a special file on your hard disk called a virtual-memory paging file (or swap file). With virtual memory under Windows NT, some of the program code and other information are kept in RAM while other information is temporarily swapped to virtual memory. When that information is required again, Windows NT pulls it back into RAM and, if necessary, swaps other information to virtual memory. This activity is invisible, although you might notice that your hard disk is working. The resulting benefit is that you can run more programs at one time than your system's RAM would usually allow.

If you are logged on as a member of the Administrators group for a computer, you can change the size of the virtual-memory paging file or create additional paging files on other local hard drives.

A virtual-memory paging file is created automatically on your computer when you install Windows NT. Usually, you should leave the paging file at its recommended size for each drive. However, you might want to change the file size if, for example, you frequently work with applications that require a large amount of memory and that could therefore benefit from a larger paging file.

Note

The virtual-memory paging file is a file named PAGEFILE.SYS, usually located in your system partition. You cannot delete this file while running Windows NT. If you delete this file while running under another operating system, a new paging file is created automatically the next time you start Windows NT.

The recommended size for the virtual-memory paging file, which Windows NT identifies as the size that ensures the best performance, is equivalent to the amount of RAM available on your system plus 12 MB. However, the size of the file also depends on the amount of free space available on your hard disk when the paging file is created.

If you have multiple hard disks, you should consider creating a paging file for each local hard drive on your computer. Depending on the capabilities of your system's hard disk controller, the disks can be reading or writing information simultaneously, greatly improving performance. Also, because Windows NT expands the paging file as necessary, multiple paging files make expansion easier, since each file expands a little rather than a single file expanding a lot.

To change the size of your system's virtual-memory paging file

1.	In the System dialog box, choose the Virtual Memory button.

If you are not logged on as a member of the Administrators group, you cannot change the size of your computer's paging file.

2.	In the Drive box of the Virtual Memory dialog box, select the drive for which you want to change the paging file size.

3.	In each Paging File Size box, type a number in megabytes to specify the new initial size or maximum size for the paging file, and then choose the Set button.

For example, type 20 to create a 20 MB paging file.

4.	Choose the OK button to return to the System dialog box.

You may have to restart your computer to see the effects of the changes.


Changing Application Response Time
Control Panel	32 of 57

Defining Options for the Operating System

Changing Application Response Time

By default, Windows NT gives priority to the application running in the foreground of your display screen. This application receives more processor time relative to other applications running in the background. (A foreground application is the application running in the active window, topmost on your screen.)

To change the priority (response time) of a foreground application relative to other running applications

1.	Double-click the System icon in Control Panel.

2.	In the System dialog box, choose the Tasking button.

3.	In the Tasking dialog box, select one of the following options:

Best Foreground Application Response Time (Default)

Foreground Application More Responsive Than Background

Foreground And Background Applications Equally Responsive

The first two options vary the degree of priority given to the foreground application; the last button gives all applications an equal share of processing time.


System Recovery
Control Panel	33 of 57

Defining Options for the Operating System

System Recovery

When a severe error (called a STOP error, or fatal system error) occurs on Windows NT Server 3.5, by default the system writes an event to the system log, alerts administrators, dumps system memory to a file you can use for debugging, and then automatically reboots the server.

Because Windows NT Server automatically reboots, rather than waiting for administrator intervention, fatal system errors cause less server downtime than they would otherwise.

The dump of system memory to a log file can be valuable for debugging the cause of the STOP error. If you contact Microsoft Product Support about the error, they may ask for the log file. Notice that Windows NT writes the log file to the same filename (MEMORY.LOG, by default) each time a STOP error occurs; to preserve log files, you should copy them to a new filename each time a STOP error occurs.

Note that you can save some memory if you configure a server to not do any of the following when a STOP error occurs: dump system memory to the log file, write the event to the system log, or alert administrators. The amount of memory you would save varies for each computer, but on a typical system is about 60-70K. The savings comes from not having to keep in memory at all times certain drivers that enable these features.

If you want to change how Windows NT reacts to a STOP error, use the System option in Control Panel.

You must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group to select or deselect options in the Recovery dialog box.

To change how Windows NT acts when a STOP error occurs

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the System option.

2.	In the System dialog box, choose the Recovery button.

3.	In the Recovery dialog box, select the Write An Event To The System Log check box to have Windows NT write an event containing information about the error to the system log when a STOP error occurs.

4.	Select the Send An Administrative Alert check box to have Windows NT send an alert to administrators when a STOP error occurs.

5.	To have Windows NT write the contents of system memory to a log file when a STOP error occurs, select the Write Debugging Information To check box, and type the path and file name of the log file in the text box.

To have this log file overwrite any file of the same name, select the Overwrite Any Existing File check box. If you clear this check box, Windows NT will not write a log file if there is already a file by that name.

6.	Select the Automatically Reboot check box to have the computer reboot automatically after a STOP error.

7.	Choose the OK button.

After you change System Recovery options, you may have to restart the server to have the new options take effect. If so, a message will appear instructing you to restart the server.

Note

To use the Write An Event, Send An Administrative Alert, or Automatically Reboot options, the computer must have at least a 2 MB paging file on the system drive (the drive defined by the SYSTEMROOT environment variable). To use Write Debugging Info, the paging file on the system drive must be large enough to hold all of physical RAM plus 1 MB.


Setting Up the Uninterruptible Power Supply
Control Panel	34 of 57

Setting Up the Uninterruptible Power Supply

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) is a battery-operated power supply connected to a computer to keep the system running during a power failure. The UPS service for Windows NT detects and warns users of power failures, and manages a safe system shutdown when the backup power supply is about to fail.

Before purchasing a UPS device to use with Windows NT, confirm with the UPS manufacturer that both the device and its serial cable are compatible with Windows NT.

You can use the UPS option in Control Panel to set various options:

The serial port where the UPS device is connected.

Whether the UPS device sends a signal if the regular power supply fails.

Whether the UPS device sends a warning when battery power is low.

Whether the UPS service sends a signal telling the UPS device to shut off.

A command file to execute at shutdown time.

The expected life and recharge time for the battery.

The timing for warning messages.

The actual options for configuring the UPS service depend on the specific UPS hardware installed on your system. Incorrect settings can cause undesirable operation of your UPS hardware. For details about possible settings, see the documentation for your UPS device.

To set up the UPS service for a computer

1.	In the Control Panel window, double-click the UPS icon.

2.	In the UPS dialog box, select the Uninterruptible Power Supply Is Installed On check box, and then specify the serial port where the UPS device is connected.

You cannot specify a serial port unless the Uninterruptible Power Supply Is Installed On check box is selected.

3.	If the UPS device on your system can indicate a main power failure, select the Power Failure Signal check box.

This setting corresponds to the CTS pin for the UPS serial port connection.

4.	If the UPS device on your system can send a warning when battery power is low, select the Low Battery Signal check box.

This setting corresponds to the DCD pin for the UPS serial port connection.

5.	If the UPS device can accept a signal from the UPS service telling it to shut off, select the Remote UPS Shutdown check box.

This shuts off the UPS device battery when it is no longer needed. This setting corresponds to the DTR pin for the UPS serial port connection.

6.	For each item that is checked in the UPS Configuration group, specify Negative or Positive for the UPS Interface Voltages.

This setting defines how your UPS device expects to communicate with the UPS service. For information about making this choice, see the documentation for your UPS device.

Depending on which items you've checked in the UPS Configuration group, steps 7 through 10 may or may not be necessary.

7.	In the Expected Battery Life box, specify the time in minutes that the system can run on battery power. Check the UPS device documentation for the appropriate setting.

The range is 2 to 720 minutes; the default is 2 minutes.

8.	In the Battery Recharge Time box, specify the time in minutes that the battery must be recharged for every minute of run time. Check the UPS device documentation for the appropriate setting.

The range is 1 to 250 minutes; the default is 100 minutes for each minute of battery run-time.

9.	In the Time Between Power Failure box, specify the time, in seconds, between when a power failure occurs and when the first message is sent to notify users.

The range is 0 to 120 seconds; the default is 5 seconds.

10.	In the Delay Between Warning Messages box, specify the interval, in seconds, between messages sent to notify users of a power failure and to advise them to stop using the computer.

The range is 5 to 300 seconds; the default is 120 seconds.

11.	Choose the OK button.

Depending on the changes you make in the UPS dialog box, a message asks if you want to start, stop, or restart the UPS service, depending on whether it is currently running. Choose Yes or No. If you choose Yes, Windows NT configures the UPS service to begin automatically each time your system starts up.

After the UPS is configured, you can start and stop the UPS service using the Services option in Control Panel.

You can also configure the UPS option to execute a command file immediately prior to system shutdown. For example, such a file might run a command to close remote connections. This command file must execute within 30 seconds. Failure to complete execution in 30 seconds jeopardizes the safe shutdown of your Windows NT computer.

To set up the UPS service to execute a file prior to system shutdown

1.	In the \systemroot\SYSTEM32 directory, create a command file with one of the following file extensions:  .BAT, .CMD, .EXE, or .COM.

2.	Select the Execute Command File box.

3.	In the UPS dialog box, type the name of the file in the File Name box.


Using UPS with Other System Services
Control Panel	35 of 57

Setting Up the Uninterruptible Power Supply

Using UPS with Other System Services

The UPS service should be used in conjunction with the Windows NT Alerter, Messenger, and Event Log services. This will ensure that events related to the UPS service, such as a power failure or a UPS connection failure, are recorded in the system log of Event Viewer and that designated users are notified of these events over the network.

The Alerter and Messenger services must be started for a computer to generate a UPS or other type of network alert. After setting up the UPS service on your computer, use the Services tool in Control Panel to make sure the Alerter, Messenger, and Event Log services are configured to start automatically. Use the Server option in Control Panel to designate which users and computers will receive alerts. The Messenger service must be started on computers that are to receive UPS alerts and UPS warning messages.


Testing Your UPS Configuration
Control Panel	36 of 57

Setting Up the Uninterruptible Power Supply

Testing Your UPS Configuration

After configuring UPS options, you or your system administrator should test that your computer is protected from power failure.

To the test UPS configuration

1.	Simulate a power failure by disconnecting the power to the UPS device.

The computer and peripherals connected to the UPS device should remain operational and a warning message and/or alert should appear on screen.

2.	Wait until the UPS battery reaches a low level, at which point system shutdown should occur.

3.	Restore power to the UPS device.

4.	Check the system log in Event Viewer to ensure that all actions were logged and that there were no errors.

If the UPS service is configured to run a command file, you should test that the file's execution does not exceed the 30-second time limit.

To test command file configuration

Determine a worst case scenario. For example, if your command file starts up a custom application to disconnect logon sessions to a remote computer, test command file execution with a maximum number of logon sessions.

If you have problems running the UPS service, see the system log in Event Viewer for event details related to the UPS. For an explanation of UPS, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


Configuring the Network
Control Panel	37 of 57

Configuring the Network

You can use the Network option in Control Panel to make changes in your computer's network configuration. For example, if you add a new adapter card to your computer after installing Windows NT, you need to specify the network device drivers and supporting software that Windows NT needs to work with network adapter cards. You can also use the Network option to configure network bindings and set network provider search order.

For information about default settings for network adapter cards and other technical configuration details, see Chapter 2, "Troubleshooting," in the Installation Guide. For information about specific adapter cards, see NETWORK.WRI in your \systemroot directory.

For information to help you plan how to take best advantage of Windows NT Server at your site, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.

To make changes in the Network Settings dialog box, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group for your computer.

To use the Network option

Choose the Network icon in Control Panel.

The following table summarizes the buttons in the Network Settings dialog box.

Choose	To

Change(Computer Name)	Change the computer name for this computer.

Change(Domain Name)	Change the domain name for this computer.

Add Software 	Display one or more dialog boxes for installing a network software component.

Add Adapter 	Display one or more dialog boxes for installing a network adapter card.

Configure 	Display one or more dialog boxes for configuring the selected network software component or adapter card.

Update 	Display one or more dialog boxes for updating a network software component or adapter card.

Remove 	Remove a selected network software component or adapter card.

Bindings	Display a dialog box for adding and removing bindings for network components.

Networks	Display a dialog box for setting network search order if your computer is connected to more than one kind of network provider. (This button is available only if other network providers are present.)


Changing the Computer Name of a Windows NT Computer
Control Panel	38 of 57

Configuring the Network

Changing the Computer Name of a Windows NT Computer

How you change the computer name of a Windows NT computer depends on what role the computer plays. There are different procedures for primary domain controllers, backup domain controllers, and all other Windows NT computers. A computer name cannot be the same as any other computer, workgroup, or domain name on the network.

To change the computer name of a primary domain controller

1.	At the primary domain controller, choose the Network option in Control Panel. In the Network Settings dialog box, choose the Change button next to the computer name. Then type the new name in the Computer Name dialog box and choose the OK button.

2.	Restart the primary domain controller, to have the name change take effect.

3.	In Server Manager, select the old computer name from the list of computers and choose the Remove From Domain command from the Computer menu, to remove the previous computer name.

To change the computer name of a backup domain controller

1.	Open Server Manager and select the domain to which you are adding the computer. Then add the new computer name to the domain. For more information, see Chapter 15, "Server Manager."

2.	On the server that you are changing the name of, choose the Network option in Control Panel. In the Network Settings dialog box, choose the Change button next to the computer name. Then type the new name in the Computer Name dialog box and choose the OK button.

3.	Restart the server for which you have just changed the name. Notice that the Netlogon service will not yet start on this server.

4.	From any other computer that is a member of the domain, open Server Manager, and choose Synchronize With Domain Controller from the Computer menu.

You can now start the Netlogon service on the server that has had the name change.

5.	Finally, in Server Manager, select the old computer name from the list of computers and choose the Remove From Domain command from the Computer menu, to remove the previous computer name.

To change the computer name of a workstation or server

1.	If the computer is participating in a domain, a domain administrator must first open Server Manager and select the domain to which you are adding the computer. Then add the new computer name to the domain. For more information, see Chapter 15, "Server Manager."

2.	At the computer for which you are changing the name, in the Network Settings dialog box, choose the Change button next to the computer name.

3.	In the Computer Name dialog box, type a unique name for this computer, and then choose the OK button.

4.	Restart the computer to have the name change take effect.

5.	If the computer is participating in a domain, a domain administrator must remove the old computer name from the domain. To do so, in Server Manager select the old computer name from the list of computers and choose the Remove From Domain command From the Computer menu.


Changing the Name of a Domain
Control Panel	39 of 57

Configuring the Network

Changing the Name of a Domain

To change the name of a Windows NT domain, you must reenter the domain name on each server and workstation in the domain and then reestablish existing trust relationships.

To change a domain name, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group.

Note

You cannot change the domain membership of an individual Windows NT Server without reinstalling the operating system. For example, you cannot move a server from domain A to domain B by changing its domain name. Nor can you change the domain names of one or more servers in domain A to create a new domain B.

In addition, changing domain names does not enable you to merge two domains into a newly created third domain. To combine domains A and B, you must reinstall Windows NT Server on all the servers in domain B, specifying domain name A in the process. Then, after creating computer accounts in the new domain A for the workstations that were in domain B, change the domain name on each of these workstations.

To change a domain name

1.	On the domain controller choose the Network option in Control Panel.

2.	In the Network Settings dialog box, choose the Change button next to the domain name.

3.	Enter a domain name that is not already in use on your network and then restart the computer.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 on all computers running Windows NT Server and Windows NT Workstation in the domain.

5.	From a computer running Windows NT Server, use User Manager for Domains to reestablish any trust relationships with other domains.

Note that you can move computers running Windows NT Workstation from one domain to another without reinstalling Windows NT. To change the domain membership of a Windows NT Workstation computer, create a computer account for it in the new domain and then change the domain name in the Network Settings dialog box.


Installing Network Adapter Cards
Control Panel	40 of 57

Configuring the Network

Installing Network Adapter Cards

To communicate over the network, a computer must have a network adapter card installed. Windows NT uses a network device driver, which is software that coordinates communication between the adapter card and the computer's hardware and other software, controlling the physical function of the network adapter cards.

During the initial installation of Windows NT, you have the opportunity to install at least one network card. To add to or change your computer's network adapter cards after installation, you must choose the Network icon in Control Panel.

To install one or more network adapter cards

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, choose the Add Adapter button.

2.	In the Add Network Adapter dialog box, select the name of the adapter card that is installed in your computer, and then choose the Continue button.

If you have a disk with software from a vendor, select Other.

3.	When Setup asks for a disk, insert the disk in the drive, or type the path of the driver if the file is located on your hard disk or on a network drive. Then choose the OK button.

You may be asked to insert additional disks if more than one disk was provided by the hardware manufacturer. You may also be asked for specific Windows NT installation disks.

4.	When you complete all your changes and close the Network Settings dialog box, a message asks if you want to restart your computer for the changes to take effect. To restart your computer immediately, choose the Yes button.


Installing Network Software
Control Panel	41 of 57

Configuring the Network

Installing Network Software

Windows NT also uses network software (or protocol) drivers that bind to the adapter card driver. You can also add supporting software for network components in the Network Settings dialog box.

To install network software

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, choose the Add Software button.

2.	In the Add Network Software dialog box, select the software component you want to install, and then choose the Continue button.

If you have a disk with software from a vendor, select Other.

3.	When Setup asks for a disk, insert the disk in the drive. Or type the path of the software component if the file is located on your hard disk or on a network drive. Then choose the OK button.

You may be asked for additional disks if more than one disk was provided by the hardware manufacturer. You might also be asked for specific Windows NT installation disks.

4.	When you complete all your changes and close the Network Settings dialog box, a message asks if you want to restart your computer for the changes to take effect. To restart your computer immediately, choose the Yes button.


Updating or Removing Network Components
Control Panel	42 of 57

Configuring the Network

Updating or Removing Network Components

You can either update or remove the configuration information for an installed network software component or adapter card.

To update a network component

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, select the component you want to update in the Installed Network Software box or the Installed Adapter Cards box.

2.	Choose the Update button.

3.	Complete the dialog boxes that appear.

You will be asked to insert disks from the manufacturer that contain the updated driver information for the selected component.

When you remove a network component, the information is removed from your system configuration. The related software remains on your hard disk. After removing a network component, you must restart your system before you can reinstall that component.

To remove a network component

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, select the component you want to remove in the Installed Network Software box or the Installed Adapter Cards box.

2.	Choose the Remove button.

3.	Complete the dialog boxes that appear.

The dialog box for removing the component is supplied by the manufacturer. Choose the Help button in the dialog box for more information.

For your changes to take effect, you must restart your computer.


Configuring Network Software and Adapter Cards
Control Panel	43 of 57

Configuring the Network

Configuring Network Software and Adapter Cards

Many adapter cards and their supporting software can be configured to achieve the best performance on your system. You can set the appropriate configuration for your network components in the Network Settings dialog box.

The dialog boxes for configuring your adapter and software are supplied by the manufacturer. Most of these dialog boxes contain a Help button to guide you through making choices for optimal settings. For additional information, refer to the documentation for your network adapter card or software.

To configure network software or an adapter card

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, select the name of the item you want to configure in either the Installed Network Software box or the Installed Adapter Cards box.

Optionally, in the Description box, type text to describe the component, or keep the description provided by the manufacturer. If you have multiple adapter cards, consider including the slot number of the card in its description.

2.	Choose the Configure button.

Windows NT displays a dialog box specifically for the selected component, as provided by the component manufacturer.

For information about any items in the dialog box, choose the Help button.

3.	Complete options in the dialog box to specify your choices, and then choose the OK button.

For example, the following illustration shows a typical configuration dialog box for a 3Com® EtherLink® II network adapter card.

Windows NT Setup automatically installs computer browser software on your computer. This software enables you to list the computers that belong to each Windows NT domain on your network.

You can also browse LAN Manager domains from a Windows NT domain, but you must first add the names of these domains to the browsing list on the primary domain controller.

To add other domains to a Windows NT domain list

1.	Log on to the primary domain controller and select the Network icon in Control Panel.

2.	In the Network Settings dialog box, select Computer Browser.

3.	Choose the Configure button.

Windows NT displays the Browser Configuration dialog box.

4.	In this dialog box, type in the names of other domains to browse. Choose the Add button, and then choose the OK button.


Choosing and Configuring Protocol Software
Control Panel	44 of 57

Configuring the Network

Choosing and Configuring Protocol Software

To communicate over a network, each computer must be configured with at least one type of protocol software. Protocol software works between the upper-level network software and the network adapter card. The protocol packages data that is to be sent on the network in a way that the computer on the receiving end can understand. Microsoft provides several protocols for use with Windows NT:  NetBEUI (NetBIOS extended user interface), TCP/IP (transmission control protocol/internet protocol), NWLink (NetWare Link), and Data Link Control.

Protocol software	Description

NetBEUI	A small, efficient, and fast protocol tuned for small LANs.
It is installed automatically when you install Windows NT.

TCP/IP	Provides communication across wide area networks (WANs) and routers.

NWLink	Provides a protocol compatible with the Novell NetWare IPX/SPX protocol, so that Windows NT computers can interoperate with Novell NetWare servers.

Data Link Control	Not designed to be a primary protocol for use between PCs. It is useful if your computer needs to access IBM mainframe computers or if you are setting up a printer that attaches directly to the network, instead of to a serial or parallel port on a print server.

NetBEUI and NWLink are automatically installed during Windows NT Setup. If there are no wide area network (WAN) links in the network, and if there is no need to connect to any devices other than computers running Windows NT or other Windows operating systems, you do not need to add any protocol software. If you need WAN internet capability, add TCP/IP. With both protocols supported, you can benefit from NetBEUI performance when connecting to local computers and you can still connect over WANs to other networks.

To install other protocols included with Windows NT, choose the Add Software button in the Network Settings dialog box. All adapter card drivers that come with Windows NT can use any of the included protocols.

For additional information on installing and configuring network protocols, see Chapter 3, "Networking Services Overview," in the Installation Guide.

Setting LAN Adapter Numbers

When you install Windows NT on a computer (and when you install additional protocols or network adapter cards), Windows NT automatically assigns LAN adapter (Lana) numbers to protocol/network adapter card bindings. You need to change a LAN adapter number only if you have a NetBIOS application that specifies that it must use a certain LAN adapter number.

To set LAN adapter numbers for special applications

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, select NetBIOS Interface in the Installed Network Software box.

2.	Choose the Configure button.

3.	In the Network Route box, select the protocol whose LAN adapter number you need to change and then type in a new number in the Lana Number box.

4.	Complete options in the dialog box to specify your choices, and then choose the OK button.

For information about using TCP/IP with Windows NT, see the manual called Windows NT Server TCP/IP. For information about the available network protocols, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


Configuring Network Bindings
Control Panel	45 of 57

Configuring the Network

Configuring Network Bindings

The network consists of a series of software layers, where software in each layer performs specific functions for the layers above and below it. All network software layers end at the network adapter card, which moves information between computers. Each network component can be bound to one or more network components above it or below it to make the component's services available to any other component that can benefit from them.

By default, Windows NT maximally binds all network components to ensure that they are fully utilized. If you rarely use a particular adapter card and want to reduce the software loaded into memory, you can simply unbind (disconnect) that network adapter card from all network components.

When you choose the Bindings button in the Network Settings dialog box to add or remove bindings, the Network Bindings dialog box shows the bindings of network components as a series of bound paths, from the upper-layer services and protocols to the lowest layer of adapter-card device drivers.

Caution

Do not attempt to reconfigure binding settings unless you are an experienced network administrator familiar with the requirements of your network software.

If you have more than one kind of protocol installed, you can set the order in which workstation and NetBIOS software bind to each protocol. You might want to change the binding order for one of the following reasons:

If the protocol you use most frequently is first in the Binding list, average connection time decreases.

Some protocols are faster than others for certain network topologies. Putting the faster protocol first in the Bindings list improves performance.

For example, if you use both the NetBEUI and TCP/IP protocols, but only connect to TCP/IP periodically, put NetBEUI first in the protocol binding list.

To view bindings for network components

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, choose the Bindings button.

2.	In the Show Bindings For box of the Network Bindings dialog box, select one or more components. Or choose All Components to see a list of all bound components.

To enable or disable binding paths for selected network components

1.	In the Network Bindings dialog box, select a binding path.

2.	To enable the binding path, choose the Enable button.

To disable the binding path, choose the Disable button.

The icon next to the selected binding shows the current state of that binding path.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To change protocol binding order

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, choose the Bindings button.

2.	In the Show Bindings For box of the Network Bindings dialog box, select a top-level component such as workstation.

3.	Select the binding path to move up or down and use the protocol order buttons to change the binding order.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Configuring the Remote Procedure Call Service
Control Panel	46 of 57

Configuring the Network

Configuring the Remote Procedure Call Service

Windows NT Setup automatically installs the files you need for the Remote Procedure Call (RPC) service, a mechanism that enables programmers to easily develop distributed applications. However, to use this functionality, you need to specify the Name Service Interface (NSI) that the RPC service uses to communicate with name service databases. Use the RPC Name Service Provider Configuration dialog box to specify settings for the name service provider. To see this dialog box, choose the Network icon in Control Panel, select RPC Configuration in the Network Software list, and then choose Configure.

To configure the name service provider, you must know which provider you want. If you choose the DCE Cell Directory Service, you must also supply the network address of the provider. The Windows NT Locator is the default name service that is installed with Windows NT.


Configuring Server Memory
Control Panel	47 of 57

Configuring the Network

Configuring Server Memory

You can increase network responsiveness by tuning the memory Windows NT Server allocates for server operations.

To configure server memory

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, select Server in the Installed Network Software box.

2.	Choose the Configure button.

3.	In the Server dialog box, select one of the following options and then choose OK.

Minimize Memory Used

This allows memory to be allocated for up to approximately 10 network connections.

Balance

This provides memory for up to approximately 64 connections.

Maximize Throughput for File Sharing

Allocates maximum memory for file sharing operations. This is the default setting for Windows NT Server.

Maximize Throughput for Network Applications

Optimizes server memory for distributed applications that do their own memory caching, such as Microsoft SQL Server.


Setting Network Provider Search Order
Control Panel	48 of 57

Configuring the Network

Setting Network Provider Search Order

If you have more than one kind of network installed at your site, you can specify the order in which Windows NT searches the various networks for certain operations.

After you specify the network search order, Windows NT will always search in that order. After Windows NT finds the specified server, directory, file, or other item on one network, it does not continue to search the networks listed lower in the search order.

To set network provider search order

1.	In the Network Settings dialog box, choose the Networks button.

This button is dimmed if no other network providers are available.

2.	In the Access Providers In This Order box, select the name of the network whose order you want to change, and then choose the Up or Down button to move that network higher or lower in the search order.

3.	Continue selecting network names to define the order until all networks are listed in the order you want for searching, and then choose the OK button.


Managing Server Properties
Control Panel	49 of 57

Managing Server Properties

Use the Server option in Control Panel to display a summary of connections and resource use for the computer; to edit the computer description; to view connected users, shared resources, and open resources; and to manage directory replication and the recipients of administrative alerts.

The functions offered by the Server option in the Control Panel of every Windows NT Server are duplicated by the Properties command of Server Manager. However, while the Server option in the Control Panel can only manage properties for the local computer, Server Manager can manage properties for both the local computer and remote computers.

To manage properties

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Server icon.

The Server dialog box displays a usage summary for the computer.

Item	Meaning

Sessions	The number of users remotely connected to the computer

Open Files	The number of shared resources opened on the computer

File Locks	The number of file locks on open resources of the computer

Open Named Pipes	The number of named pipes opened on the computer

2.	To change the computer description, type new text in the Description box.

3.	To administer a property associated with one of the five buttons at the bottom of the Server dialog box, choose a button and complete the dialog box that appears. These buttons and their associated dialog boxes are described in procedures following this one.

Choose	To

Users	View a list of all the users connected over the network to the computer and the resources opened by a selected user. One or all of the connected users can be disconnected.

Shares	View a list of the computer's shared resources and the users connected over the network to a selected resource.One or all of the connected users can be disconnected.

In Use	View a list of the open shared resources on the computer. One resource or all resources can be closed.

Replication	Manage directory replication for the computer, and to specify the path to user logon scripts.

Alerts	View and manage the list of users and computers that are notified when administrative alerts occur on the computer.

4.	To exit, choose the OK button.


Viewing User Sessions
Control Panel	50 of 57

Managing Server Properties

Viewing User Sessions

Use the User Sessions dialog box to view all the users connected over the network to the computer, and the resources opened by a selected user.

One or all of the connected users can be disconnected. There are several reasons to do this. For example, you might be about to stop the Server service on the computer, or you might be about to shut down the computer. To avoid data loss, always warn users before disconnecting them.

To view users connected over the network to the computer

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Server icon.

2.	In the Server dialog box, choose the Users button.

In the User Sessions dialog box, the Connected Users box lists the users remotely connected to the computer.

Item	Meaning

Connected Users	The user name of a connected user. In some cases the user's computer name may be displayed instead of the user name.

Computer	The computer name of the computer where the user is logged on.

Opens	The number of resources opened on the computer by the user.

Time	The hours and minutes that have elapsed since this session was established.

Idle	The hours and minutes that have elapsed since the user last initiated an action.

Guest	Whether this user has guest status on the computer.

Below the Connected Users box, the Connected Users summary shows the number of users remotely connected to the computer.

3.	To view the resources used by a user, select a user name from the Connected Users box.

The Resource box lists the shared resources that user is connected to.

Item		Meaning
Icon		Graphically indicates the type of each listed resource:
			A shared directory
			A named pipe
			A shared printer
			A resource of an unrecognized type
Resource		The name of a shared resource to which the selected user is connected
Opens		The number of opens against this resource by this user
Time		The hours and minutes that have elapsed since this resource was first opened
In some cases, a connection to a printer is monitored here as a connection to a named pipe.

4.	To disconnect one user, select the user name from the Connected Users box and then choose the Disconnect button. To disconnect all users, choose the Disconnect All button.

Warn users before disconnecting them.

5.	To exit, choose the Close button, and then in the Server dialog box choose the OK button.


Viewing Shared Resources
Control Panel	51 of 57

Managing Server Properties

Viewing Shared Resources

Use the Shared Resources dialog box to view the shared resources available on the computer and the users connected over the network to a selected resource.

Note

To share directories or manage shared directories, use File Manager. To share printers or manage shared printers, use Print Manager.

One or all of the connected users can be disconnected. There are several reasons to do this. For example, you may need to allow another user to connect to a shared directory that already has its maximum number of users connected. To avoid data loss, always warn users before disconnecting them.

To view shared resources

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Server icon.

2.	In the Server dialog box, choose the Shares button.

In the Shared Resources dialog box, the Sharename box lists available resources.

Item		Meaning
Icon		Graphically indicates the type of each listed resource:
			A shared directory
			A named pipe
			A shared printer
			A resource of an unrecognized type
Sharename		The name of a shared resource
Uses		The number of connections to the shared resource
Path		The path of the shared resource
In some cases, a connection to a printer is monitored here as a connection to a named pipe.

3.	To view the users connected to a shared resource, select a share name from the Sharename box. The Connected Users box lists the connected users.

Item	Meaning

Connected Users	The user name of a user connected to the selected shared resource. In some cases the user's computer name may appear instead of the user name.

Time	The hours and minutes that have elapsed since the user first connected to this shared resource.

In Use	Whether the user currently has a file open from this shared resource.

Below the Connected Users box, the Connected Users summary shows the number of users connected to the selected resource.

4.	To disconnect one user from all shared resources, select the user name from the Connected Users box and then choose the Disconnect button. To disconnect all users from all shared resources, choose the Disconnect All button.

Warn users before disconnecting them. Each disconnected user is disconnected from all shared resources on the computer - not just the resource selected in the Sharename box.

5.	To exit, choose the Close button, and then in the Server dialog box choose the OK button.


Viewing Resources In Use
Control Panel	52 of 57

Managing Server Properties

Viewing Resources In Use

Use the Open Resources dialog box to view the resources open on the computer. One or all of the resources can be closed. To avoid data loss, always warn connected users before closing resources.

To view resources in use

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Server icon.

2.	In the Server dialog box, choose the In Use button.

The Open Resources dialog box shows the resources open on the computer.

Item		Meaning
Open Resources		The total number of open resources on the computer
File Locks		The total number of file locks on open resources
Icon		Graphically indicates the type of each listed resource:
			A file
			A named pipe
			A print job in a print spooler
			A resource of an unrecognized type
Opened By		The user name (or sometimes the computer name) for a user who opened a resource
For		The permission granted when the resource was opened
Locks		The number of locks on the resource
Path		The path of the open resource
In some cases, a print job is monitored here as an open named pipe.

3.	To close a single resource, select one resource from the list and then choose the Close Resource button. To close all resources, choose the Close All Resources button.

Warn connected users before closing resources.

4.	To update the displayed information, choose the Refresh button.

5.	To exit, choose the Close button, and then in the Server dialog box choose the OK button.


Managing Directory Replication
Control Panel	53 of 57

Managing Server Properties

Managing Directory Replication

Use the Directory Replication dialog box to manage directory replication for the computer, and to specify a local path to user logon scripts. Directory replication is the duplication of a master set of directories from a server (called an export server) to specified servers or workstations (called import computers) in the same or other domains.

Before replication can occur, a special user account must be created, configured, and assigned to the Replicator service. For information on preparing the Replicator service, and for detailed information explaining directory replication, see Chapter 15, "Server Manager."

The procedures that follow describe how to use the Server option in the Control Panel to set up the computer as an export server, as an import computer, and how to specify the logon script path.

Configuring the Computer for Export

Any Windows NT Server can be set up as an export server.

To set up an export server

1.	From File Manager or the command prompt, create the subdirectories that will be exported. They must be subdirectories of the replication export path (usually C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\EXPORT).

Optionally, you can add to these subdirectories the files that will be exported. However, it is not necessary to add the files at this time. Once you set up replication, any files later added to these subdirectories will be exported automatically.

2.	From Control Panel, choose the Server option, and then in the Server dialog box choose the Replication button.

The Directory Replication dialog box contains the following items relating to export replication.

Item	Description

Do Not Export	Prevents replication from this computer. Subdirectories and their files are not exported.

Export Directories	Enables replication export. Subdirectories and their files are exported from this computer.

From Path	The directory from which subdirectories and files will be exported. The default is C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\EXPORT.

Manage	Displays the Exported Directories dialog box, where export locks are added or removed, stabilization is enabled or disabled, and the entire subtree or only the first subdirectory is selected for replication.

To List	Subdirectories are exported from this export server to these domains and computers. By default, the To List contains a [blank] entry and the local domain automatically receives exported subdirectories.

Add	Displays the Select Computer dialog box. Used to add a computer or domain to the To List.

Remove	Removes a selected computer or domain from the To List.

3.	Select the Export Directories option.

4.	To change the directory from which subdirectories will be exported, type a new path in the From Path box.

5.	To export subdirectories to a domain or computer, under Export Directories choose the Add button, and then complete the Select Domain dialog box that appears.

The domain name or computer name is added to the To List.

Note

By default, the To List contains a [blank] entry and the local domain automatically receives exported subdirectories. If any entries are added to the To List, the local domain is no longer exported to, and must be explicitly added to the To List if it is to receive exported subdirectories from this export server.

6.	To stop exporting subdirectories to a domain or computer, under Export Directories select the domain or computer from the To List, and then choose the Remove button.

7.	To manage locks, stabilization, and subtree replication for the subdirectories exported from this computer, under Export Directories choose the Manage button, and then complete the dialog box that appears. For more information, see the following procedure.

8.	To exit, choose the OK button in the Directory Replication dialog box.

The system creates the special REPL$ share required for export replication.

9.	In the Server dialog box, choose the OK button.

To manage locks, stabilization, and subtree replication for the subdirectories exported from this computer

1.	In the Directory Replication dialog box, under Export Directories, choose the Manage button.

The Manage Exported Directories dialog box contains the following items.

Item	Description

Export Path	The directory from which subdirectories and files are exported.

Sub-Directory	A list of the subdirectories that are exported from this computer.

Locks	A lock prevents subdirectory export. More than one lock might be applied to a subdirectory. Export occurs only if this column has a value of 0.

Stabilize	Yes indicates that files in this export subdirectory will wait two minutes or more after changes before being exported. No indicates that changed files may be exported immediately. The default is No. To change this setting, use the Wait Until Stabilize check box.

Subtree	Yes indicates that the entire subtree will be exported. No indicates that only the first-level subdirectory will be exported. The default is Yes. To change this setting, use the Entire Subtree check box.

Locked Since	The date and time the oldest lock was placed on this subdirectory.

Export Settings For	Shows the selected subdirectory.

Add Lock	Adds a lock to the selected subdirectory, preventing export.

Remove Lock	Removes a lock from the selected subdirectory. Export occurs only when a subdirectory has 0 locks.

Wait Until Stabilized	If selected, specifies a two minute or longer wait-period during which no changes can occur before files can be replicated from the selected subdirectory. Helps to eliminate partial replication. If cleared, files in the selected subdirectory may be replicated as soon as changes occur. This setting is reflected in the Stabilized column.

Entire Subtree	If selected, all of the subdirectories and files in the selected subdirectory, as well as any subdirectories below that, will be exported. If cleared, only the first-level subdirectory will be exported. This setting is reflected in the Subtree column.

Add	Displays the Add Sub-Directory dialog box, used to add new subdirectories to the list of exported subdirectories.

However, this is usually unnecessary. This does not create the actual subdirectory, and when a subdirectory is created in the export path using File Manager or the command prompt, it is automatically added to the list.

 Remove	Removes the selected subdirectory from the list of exported subdirectories.

However, this is usually unnecessary. If that subdirectory still exists in the export path, it will still be exported and will later reappear in this list.

2.	To temporarily stop exporting a subdirectory, select the subdirectory from the list and then choose the Add Lock button. Or to resume exporting a locked subdirectory, select the subdirectory and then choose the Remove Lock button.

Usually, you should remove only locks that you have applied. Export resumes only when the Locks column shows a value of 0 for the subdirectory.

3.	To export a subdirectory and all the subdirectories in its tree, select the subdirectory and then select the Entire Subtree check box. Or to export only the highest subdirectory in a tree, select the subdirectory and then clear the Entire Subtree check box.

4.	To specify a two minute or longer wait-period during which no changes can occur before files are exported, select a subdirectory and then select the Wait Until Stabilized check box. Or to export files immediately after they are changed and saved, select a subdirectory and then clear the Wait Until Stabilized check box.

5.	To return to the Directory Replication dialog box, choose the OK button.

Configuring the Computer for Import

Any Windows NT Server can be configured as an import computer, including Windows NT Server computers that are already configured as export servers.

In addition to importing subdirectories from other export servers, a Windows NT Server computer can also import subdirectories from itself, for purposes of local backup or to provide a local set of replicated files (not the export masters) to be accessed by users.

You do not need to create the imported subdirectories, because a subdirectory is automatically created the first time it is imported.

To set up an import computer

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Server icon.

2.	In the Server dialog box, choose the Replication button.

The Directory Replication dialog box contains the following items relating to import replication.

Item	Description

Do Not Import	Prevents import of replicated subdirectories and files.

Import Directories	Allows replicated subdirectories and their files to be imported.

To Path	The directory in which replicated subdirectories and files will be stored. The default is c:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\repl\IMport.

Manage	Displays the Imported Directories dialog box, where the subdirectories to be imported are specified, and where import locks are added or removed.

From List	Subdirectories are replicated to this import computer from the domains and computers listed here. By default, the From List contains a [blank] entry and this computer automatically imports from the local domain.

Add	Displays the Select Computer dialog box. Used to add a computer or domain to the From List.

Remove	Removes a selected computer or domain from the From List.

3.	In the Directory Replication dialog box, select Import Directories.

4.	To change the directory where imported subdirectories will be stored, type a new path in the To Path box.

5.	To import subdirectories from a domain or computer, under Import Directories choose the Add button, and then complete the Select Domain dialog box that appears.

The domain name or computer name is added to the From List.

Note

By default, the From List contains a [blank] entry and this computer automatically imports from the local domain. If any entries are added to the From List, the local domain is no longer imported from. If needed, it must be explicitly added to the From List.

6.	To stop importing subdirectories from an export server or domain, select the domain or server name in the From List, and then choose the Remove button.

7.	To view a list of the subdirectories that have been imported to this computer, or to manage locks on those imported subdirectories, under Import Directories choose the Manage button, and then complete the dialog box that appears. For more information, see the following procedure.

8.	To exit, choose the OK buttons in the Directory Replication and Server dialog boxes.

To view a list of, or manage locks for, imported subdirectories

1.	In the Directory Replication dialog box, under Import Directories, choose the Manage button.

The Manage Imported Directories dialog box contains the following items.

Item	Description

Import Path	The directory in which replicated subdirectories and files are stored on this computer.

Sub-Directory	A list of the subdirectories that are imported to this computer.

A subdirectory is automatically imported if it is exported by one of the export servers or domains in the From List of the Directory Replication dialog box.

Locks	A lock prevents import to the subdirectory. More than one lock might be applied to a subdirectory. Import to a subdirectory only occurs if this column has a value of 0.

Status	OK indicates that the subdirectory is receiving regular updates from an export server and the imported data is identical to the exported data.

No Master indicates that the subdirectory is not receiving updates. The export server might not be running, or the export server might have stopped exporting updates.

No Sync indicates that the subdirectory has received updates, but the data is not up to date. This could be dueto a communications failure, open files on the import computer or export server, the import computer not having access permissions at the export server, or an export server malfunction.

[blank] indicates that replication has never occurred for that subdirectory. Replication may not be properly configured for this import computer, for the export server, or both.

Last Update	The date and time the last update was made to a file in this import subdirectory, or in its subtree.

Locked Since	The date and time the oldest lock was placed on this subdirectory.

Import Settings For	Shows the selected subdirectory.

Add Lock	Adds a lock to the selected subdirectory, preventing import.

Remove Lock	Removes a lock from the selected subdirectory. Import only occurs when a subdirectory has 0 locks.

Add	Displays the Add Sub-Directory dialog box, used to add new subdirectories to the list of imported subdirectories.

However, this is usually unnecessary. This does not create the actual subdirectory, and when a subdirectory is exported by one of the export servers or domains in the From List of the Directory Replication dialog box, it is automatically imported and is added to this list.

Remove	Removes the selected subdirectory from the list.

However, this is usually unnecessary. If that subdirectory is exported by one of the export servers or domains in the From List of the Directory Replication dialog box, it will still be imported and will later reappear in this list.

2.	To temporarily stop importing to a subdirectory, select the subdirectory from the list and then choose the Add Lock button.

3.	To resume importing to a locked subdirectory, select the subdirectory and then choose the Remove Lock button.

Usually, you should remove only locks that you have applied. Import resumes only when the Locks column shows a value of 0 for the subdirectory.

4.	To return to the Directory Replication dialog box, choose the OK button.

Specifying the Logon Script Path

Logon scripts are files that can be assigned to user accounts. Each time a user logs on, the assigned logon script is run. The logon script allows an administrator to affect the user's environment without managing all aspects of it. When a server performs a logon, the system locates the logon script by combining a filename specified in User Manager for Domains with a path specified in Server Manager.

Master copies of every logon script for a domain should be stored under one replication export directory of one server. This might be the domain controller, but does not need to be. Copies of these master logon scripts should be replicated to each server that participates in authenticating logons for the domain. If this is done, only one copy of each logon script will need to be maintained, yet every server that participates in authenticating domain logons will have an available, identical copy of all user logon scripts.

By default, replication is configured so that Windows NT Servers export subdirectories and logon scripts from the directory C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\EXPORT\SCRIPTS, and import subdirectories and logon scripts to the directory C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\IMPORT\SCRIPTS. For the domain controller and each server that participates in authenticating logons for the domain, the path to imported logon scripts must be entered in the Logon Script Path box of the Directory Replication dialog box.

To configure the logon script path for a server

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Server icon.

2.	Choose the Replication button.

3.	In the Logon Script Path box, type a local path.

Usually, you will enter a path to a \SCRIPTS subdirectory of the replication To Path. For example, C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\IMPORT\SCRIPTS.

An entry is required. Do not enter a blank in the Logon Script Path box.

4.	To exit, in the Directory Replication dialog box choose the OK button, and then in the Server dialog box choose the OK button.


Managing Administrative Alerts
Control Panel	54 of 57

Managing Server Properties

Managing Administrative Alerts

The Alerts dialog box displays and manages the list of users and computers that are notified when administrative alerts occur at this computer.

Administrative alerts are generated by the system and relate to server and resource use. They warn about security and access problems, user session problems, server shutdown because of power loss when the UPS service is available, and printer problems. For example, an alert is generated when disk space becomes low.

For alerts to be sent, the Alerter and Messenger services must be running on the computer originating the alert. For alerts to be received, the Messenger service must be running on the destination computer.

To manage the recipients of administrative alerts

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Server icon.

2.	In the Server dialog box, choose the Alerts button.

3.	To add a user or computer to the list of alert recipients, type the user name or computer name in the New Computer Or Username box, and then choose the Add button.

4.	To remove a user or computer from the list of alert recipients, select the user name or computer name from the Send Administrative Alerts To box, and then choose the Remove button.

5.	To exit, in the Alerts dialog box choose the OK button, and then in the Server dialog box choose the OK button.


Managing Services
Control Panel	55 of 57

Managing Services

Use the Services option in Control Panel to start, stop, pause, or continue each of the services available on the computer, to determine whether a service will start up automatically when the system starts, and to control certain other service startup parameters.

The default services provided with the system are shown in the following table.

Service		Description
Alerter		Notifies selected users and computers of administrative alerts that occur on this computer. Used by the Server and other services. Requires the Messenger service.
Clipbook Server		Supports the ClipBook Viewer application, allowing pages to be seen by remote ClipBooks.
Computer Browser		Maintains an up-to-date list of computers, and provides the list to applications when requested. Provides the computer lists displayed in the Select Computer and Select Domain dialog boxes, and in the main Server Manager window.
Directory Replicator		Replicates directories, and the files in those directories, between computers.
Event Log		Records system, security, and application events in the event logs.
Messenger		Sends and receives messages sent by administrators or by the Alerter service.
Net Logon		Provides authentication of account logons, and keeps the domain's security database synchronized between the primary domain controller and the other Windows NT Server domain controllers of the domain.
Network DDE		Provides a network transport for DDE (dynamic data exchange) conversations and provides security for DDE conversations.
Network DDE DSDM		Manages the shared DDE conversations. It is used by the Network DDE service. DSDM stands for DDE share database manager.
NT LM Security Support Provider		Provides Windows NT security to RPC applications that use transports other than LAN Manager named pipes.
Remote Procedure Call (RPC) Locator		Allows distributed applications to use the RPC name service. The RPC Locator service manages the RPC name service database. The server side of a distributed application registers its availability with the RPC Locator service. The client side of a distributed application queries the RPC Locator service to find available compatible server applications.
Remote Procedure Call (RPC) Service		Is the RPC subsystem for Windows NT. The RPC subsystem includes the endpoint mapper and other miscellaneous RPC services.
Schedule		Must be running for the at command to be used. The at command can be used to schedule commands and programs to run on a computer at a specified time and date.
Server		Provides file, print, and named pipe sharing, and RPC (remote procedure call) support.
Spooler		Provides print spooler services.
UPS		Manages an uninterruptible power supply connected to this computer.
Workstation		Provides network connections and communications.
The functions offered by the Services option in the Control Panel of every Windows NT Server computer are duplicated by the Services command of Server Manager. However, while the Services option in the Control Panel can only manage services for the local computer, Server Manager can manage services for both the local computer and remote computers.


Starting and Stopping Services
Control Panel	56 of 57

Managing Services

Starting and Stopping Services

Use the Services dialog box to start, stop, pause, or continue each of the services available on the computer, and to pass startup parameters to the service.

To start, stop, pause, or continue a service

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Services icon.

A blank in the Status column indicates that the service is stopped.

2.	In the Services dialog box, select a service.

3.	Choose the Start, Stop, Pause, or Continue button.

Optionally, to pass startup parameters to a service, type the parameters in the Startup Parameters box before choosing the Start button.

4.	In the Services dialog box, choose the Close button.

Note

When you pause the Server service, users in the server's Administrators and Server Operators groups can still make new connections to the computer, but all other users cannot.

Because stopping the Server service disconnects all remote connected users, use the following procedure to stop that service.

To stop the Server service

1.	Use the Services option in Control Panel to pause the Server service.

This prevents new users from establishing a connection with this computer.

2.	Notify all connected users, warning them to disconnect within a specified time period.

3.	After expiration of your warning period, use the Services option in Control Panel to stop the Server service.


Configuring Service Startup
Control Panel	57 of 57

Managing Services

Configuring Service Startup

Use the Service Startup dialog box to configure when and how a service is started and, optionally, to specify a user account the service will use to log on.

When services start, they log on. By default, most services log on using a special system account. (Of the services provided with Windows NT, only the Directory Replicator and Schedule services will usually log on using other user accounts.)

When a service logs on to a user account other than the system account, that user account must have the Password Never Expires option selected. The Directory Replicator service must log on to a domain user account that is a member of the domain's Backup Operators group. For instructions on configuring a user account, see Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

To configure service startup you must be logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators local group.

To configure startup for a service

1.	In the Control Panel window, choose the Services icon.

2.	In the Services dialog box, select a service.

3.	Choose the Startup button.

4.	Specify a startup type.

Select	To

Automatic	Start the service every time the system starts.

(The Server service will not start automatically unless the computer has at least 12 MB of memory.)

Manual	Allow the service to be started by a user or by a dependent service.

Disabled	Prevent the service from being started.

5.	Specify the user account the service will use to log on.

Select	To

System Account	Specify that the service will log on using the system account.

This Account	Specify a user account the service will use to log on.

Caution

Most services must log on using the system account.

6.	If you select This Account, choose the Browse button and specify a user account in the Add User dialog box that appears. After completing and exiting that dialog box, type the password for the user account in both the Password and Confirm Password boxes.

7.	Choose the OK button, and then in the Services dialog box, choose the Close button.

If a user account has been assigned to a service as described in steps 5 and 6 of the previous procedure, and if the password for that user account is later changed (for example, while using the User Properties dialog box in User Manager for Domains to administer the user account), the password for that user account must also be changed here, in the Service Startup dialog box.


Licensing

Console


Converting the Format of a Recorded Sound Using Sound Recorder

Multimedia Improvements


Print Manager
Chapter 6	1 of 27

Print Manager

Use Print Manager to work with local and network printers.

This chapter explains how to control printing and printers, and includes the following topics:

Installing a printer for use with Windows NT and your applications

Connecting to a network printer

Changing a printer's properties, including sharing a printer over the network

Securing a printer and auditing its use

Printing documents

Administering network print servers remotely

For additional information about printing and specific printer models or printer types, such as PostScript, Plotter, or PCL printers, see the PRINTER.WRI file in your \systemroot directory.


Overview
Print Manager	2 of 27

Overview

Use Print Manager to install local printers and to connect to printers on the network so that you can print to them from your applications. Each printer that is available appears in its own window in Print Manager. Printer windows show you the current activity of the printer, including a list of the documents waiting to be printed. If you have several printers available to you on the network, you can use Print Manager to find one that is ready to print and not busy printing other users' documents.

You can use Print Manager to control documents that have been sent to a printer. You can pause and resume printing, arrange the order in which waiting documents will be printed, and remove documents that are waiting to print.

Print Manager allows you to manage both local and remote printers to suit your needs. Use Print Manager to share printers on the network, control access to printers, and set other printer properties such as the hours the printer is available to print.

The Print Manager window contains a menu bar, toolbar, and status bar. Printer windows and icons represent printers you have installed or to which you are connected over the network. Server windows and icons represent servers to which you have connected in order to administer printers remotely.

The toolbar provides quick access to commands through buttons.

The status bar shows the status of the current job or printer, including how many pages of the job have been printed and how many documents are waiting to be printed.

The printer window shows information for one of the printers that you have installed or to which you are connected. For each printer, you can see what documents are waiting to be printed, who owns them, how large they are, and other information.

The server window shows information for all printers connected to a server that is running Windows NT.

The toolbar and status bar are displayed by default. You can hide them by choosing the Toolbar and Status Bar commands from the Options menu.


Starting and Quitting Print Manager
Print Manager	3 of 27

Overview

Starting and Quitting Print Manager

By default, when you start Print Manager, its window appears as it was when you last quit Print Manager. The positions of printer and server windows are saved as long as the Save Settings on Exit command is in effect when you quit.

To start Print Manager

From the Main Group, choose the Print Manager icon.

– Or –

In Control Panel, choose the Printers option.

To quit Print Manager

From the Printer menu, choose Exit.


Installing a Printer
Print Manager	4 of 27

Installing a Printer

Use the Print Manager Create Printer option from the Printer menu when:

You are physically installing a printer on a computer.

You are physically installing a printer that connects directly to the network.

You want to define a printer that prints to a file.

You want to define multiple printers with varying properties for the same physical printer.

To create a printer, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators, Server Operators, or Print Operators group.

The printers you create using Print Manager represent physical devices, usually physical printers. Because Print Manager printers are representations of physical devices, they can be used flexibly. You can create more than one printer representing the same physical printer, or you can create a printer that prints to a file. For example, if you have a printer in your office, but also share it with others over the network, you might want to create two printers for the physical printer. You can create a printer for yourself that is not shared over the network and a second printer that is shared. Then it's easy to control the use of the shared printer. You can set permissions on it, ensuring that only members of your department can print to it. Or you can set a low priority for it, ensuring that documents you send to the printer will always print before documents sent by those who share it.

Note

If you want to print to a printer that is already shared on a network, add it to the printers in Print Manager by connecting to it. For more information, see "Connecting to a Network Printer," later in this chapter.

When you choose Create Printer from the Printer menu, Print Manager displays a Create Printer dialog box where you can define the operation of the printer. To complete a basic printer installation, specify the printer name, driver, and an optional description. Then specify a printing destination. The destination can be a port, a file, or a network address. Print Manager will prompt you to select the appropriate printer driver or to install a new one if necessary.

To install a printer

1.	From the Printer menu, choose Create Printer.

2.	In the Printer Name box, type a name for the printer.

This name appears in the title bar of the printer window. It is the name network users running Windows NT will see when connecting to the printer if you share the printer over the network. The name can be up to 32 characters long.

3.	In the Driver box, select the printer's driver.

If your printer does not appear in the list, you can try installing the printer using a compatible driver. For example, if your printer is Hewlett-Packard® PCL® compatible, you may be able to use one of the HP LaserJet® drivers included with Windows NT. Consult your printer's documentation to determine which drivers you can choose.

4.	In the Description box, type an optional description.

Network users will see this description when adding the printer to their available printers. Use the description to inform them about the printer. For example, if the printer is available only during certain hours, you could include that information here.

5.	In the Print To box, choose a destination for printing output:

If you are installing a printer that you have physically connected to a computer, choose the appropriate parallel or serial port, for example, LPT1.

If the port you want does not appear in the list, choose Other. In the Print Destinations dialog box, choose Local Port and then choose the OK button. Type the name of the new port in the Port Name dialog box and choose the OK button. Print Manager adds the port to the list of print destinations.

If you want to print to a file, choose File. When you print, you are prompted for a file name.

If you are installing a Hewlett-Packard printer that connects directly to the network, choose Other. In the Print Destinations dialog box, choose Hewlett-Packard Network Port and then choose the OK button.

Before you can create a printer that uses a Hewlett-Packard network port, the Data Link Control protocol must be installed and running. You can install the protocol using the Network option in Control Panel.

If you are installing a TCP/IP printer, choose Other. In the Print Destinations dialog box, choose LPR Monitor and choose the OK button.

If you are installing a Digital Print Server, choose Other. In the Print Destinations dialog box, choose Digital Print Server Port and choose the OK button.

For details about completing the configuration dialog boxes, see the online Help.

6.	In the Create Printer dialog box, choose the OK button.

7.	If the appropriate printer driver is not already installed, Windows NT prompts you to enter the path of the distribution files where the driver is located. Type the path and choose the OK button. Windows NT prompts you to insert disks as necessary to install the driver.

Print Manager displays a dialog box that allows you to set up your printer's features. You can set these now or later.

This completes a basic printer installation. You can specify many other options when installing a printer. For more information, see "Changing a Printer's Properties," later in this chapter.


Installing a Printer Driver
Print Manager	5 of 27

Installing a Printer

Installing a Printer Driver

Use Print Manager when you need to install a new or additional printer driver for your printer.

Because RISC and x86-based computers use different printer drivers, you may want to install printer drivers for both platforms on your print servers if your network contains a mixture of RISC and x86-based computers. For example, when a RISC-based Windows NT computer connects to an x86-based Windows NT print server, the RISC version of the printer's driver must be available to the RISC-based computer. You can install the RISC printer driver on either the local computer or on the x86-based print server. If you install the driver on the server, it will be available to any other RISC-based Windows NT computer on your network.

To install a printer driver not listed in the Driver box

1.	Select the printer's icon or window.

2.	From the Printer menu, choose Properties. Or choose the Properties button on the toolbar.

3.	In the Printer Properties dialog box, select Other in the Driver box.

4.	In the Install Driver dialog box, specify the drive and path where the printer driver is located and choose the OK button.

If you are installing a second driver for a printer on a server, for example a RISC driver on an x86-based computer, specify the location of the PRINTER.INF file for the RISC drivers, for example, a shared directory on the network.

5.	In the Select Driver dialog box, select the driver in the Printer Driver box. If the driver is not located in the directory shown by the Source Directory box, edit the path. Then choose the OK button.

Print Manager installs the new driver.


Connecting to a Network Printer
Print Manager	6 of 27

Connecting to a Network Printer

To print to a printer that is shared over the network, connect to it. Connecting to the printer adds the printer to the available printers displayed in the Print Manager window.

By default, printers in your computer's domain or workgroup are displayed automatically in the Shared Printers box. If you are connecting over a slow network, for example connecting through Remote Access Service, you can switch this off by clearing the Expand By Default check box.

To connect to a network printer

1.	From the Printer menu, choose the Connect To Printer command. Or choose the Connect Printer button on the toolbar.

2.	In the Connect To Printer dialog box, select a printer.

The Shared Printers box shows networks, domains or workgroups, and shared printers organized in a tree structure. Double-click an item to expand the list:  double-click a network name to display domains or workgroups. Double-click a domain or workgroup name to display printers shared by computers running Windows NT and to display other print servers. To display printers shared by other print servers, for example computers running LAN Manager 2.x, double-click a computer name.

When you select a printer, Print Manager fills in the Printer box with the name of the computer sharing the printer and the name of the printer. The Printer Information box displays additional information, including the printer's description, status, and the number of waiting documents.

Or you can type the name of a computer and shared printer in the Printer box. Precede the computer name with two backslashes (\\) and separate the computer name from the shared printer's name with a single backslash (\), for example, \\printserver\laser.

3.	Choose the OK button.

4.	If the printer you selected is shared by a Windows NT computer and has a printer driver compatible with your computer, Print Manager connects you to the printer and you can print.

Print Manager prompts you to install a printer driver if the computer sharing the printer is not a Windows NT computer or if the printer driver available on the computer is not compatible. For example if your computer is RISC-based and the computer sharing the printer is x86-based, a RISC-compatible driver must be installed on either the computer sharing the printer or your computer. Choose the OK button to continue in order to install a driver.

5.	In the Select Driver dialog box, select the appropriate driver for the printer in the Driver box.

6.	In the Windows NT Setup dialog box, type the directory and path where Windows NT printer drivers are stored, and then choose the Continue button.

Windows NT installs the driver and displays a printer window for the connected printer.


Removing a Printer
Print Manager	7 of 27

Removing a Printer

You can use Print Manager to remove printers that you have installed and to which you are connected.

To remove a printer

1.	Select the printer window or printer icon.

2.	To remove a printer to which you are connected over the network, choose Remove Printer from the Printer menu, or choose the Disconnect Printer button on the toolbar.

To remove an installed printer, choose Remove Printer from the Printer menu.

3.	Print Manager prompts you for confirmation. Choose the Yes button to remove the printer.


Changing a Printer’s Properties
Print Manager	8 of 27

Changing a Printer's Properties

You can set printer properties when you create a printer or you can change a printer's properties after you have created it. Properties include:

Sharing the printer on the network.

Setting printing options such as the size and format of paper available at the printer and the font cartridges that are installed.

Setting job defaults such as the default paper size and printing orientation.

Setting printer details such as the hours the printer is available and the printing priority of documents sent to the printer.

To change printer properties, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators, Server Operators, or Print Operators group. You can also change printer properties if you have been granted Full Control permission for the printer.

To change the properties of an installed printer

1.	Select the printer's icon or window.

2.	From the Printer menu, choose Properties. Or choose the Properties button on the toolbar.

You can now change the printer's properties as discussed in the sections that follow.


Sharing a Printer
Print Manager	9 of 27

Changing a Printer's Properties

Sharing a Printer

Sharing a printer allows others on the network to connect to the printer and to print their documents on it. Before you can share a printer, the Server service must be running. You can start the Server service by using the Services option in Control Panel.

To share a printer on the network

1.	In the Printer Properties dialog box, select the Share This Printer On The Network check box.

2.	In the Share Name box, Print Manager creates a share name for the printer. Computers running Windows NT see the printer name when connecting to the printer; however, computers running MS-DOS require a share name that conforms to MS-DOS naming conventions in order to connect.

The share name is based on the printer name. You can edit the share name; however, if you want MS-DOS -based computers to connect to the printer, the share name must follow MS-DOS naming conventions and cannot be longer than 12 characters.

3.	In the Location box, type a description of the printer's location to let users know where their documents will be printed. Users see the printer's location in the Connect To Printer dialog box when they add the printer to their list of available printers.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Setting Printing Options
Print Manager	10 of 27

Changing a Printer's Properties

Setting Printing Options

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

Setup options allow you to configure the printer to take full advantage of its features. The options that are available depend on the printer. The following table lists typical setup options:

Option	Purpose

Forms	Specifies the size and format of paper used in the printer. Printers that support multiple paper trays or sources for paper allow you to match a form with a source.

Memory	Specifies the amount of memory available in the printer.

Font	Specifies the font cartridges installed in the printer. Controls the loading of soft fonts and font substitution.

Halftone	Adjusts the printing of halftone colors.

For more information on setup options available for your printer, choose the Help button in the Printer Setup dialog box.

To set or change printing options

1.	In the Printer Properties dialog box, choose the Setup button.

A typical Printer Setup dialog box used for setting printing options is shown below. The options available for your printer may be different.

2.	Set the options and then choose the OK button.


Setting Job Defaults
Print Manager	11 of 27

Changing a Printer's Properties

Setting Job Defaults

Job defaults include printing settings such as paper size and orientation. The settings in Print Manager establish how documents print by default, so you should use settings that are appropriate for the type of document you print most frequently. When you need to change a setting, you can do so from within your applications when you print. Settings made from within an application override the defaults set in Print Manager.

The settings that are available depend on the printer. The following table lists typical settings.

Setting	Purpose

Form	Selects a paper size

Orientation	Sets printing the page vertically or horizontally

Copies	Sets the number of copies to print

2 Sided	Sets printing on both sides of the paper

Resolution	Sets the resolution at which graphics print

Color	Switches between color and monochrome printing

Download Fonts	Specifies whether or not to download TrueType fonts to the printer

For more information on options available for your printer, choose the Help button in the Document Properties, Advanced Document Properties, and Halftone Color Adjustment dialog boxes.

To set or change job defaults

1.	In the Printer Properties dialog box, choose the Details button.

2.	In the Printer Details dialog box, choose the Job Defaults button and set defaults in the Document Properties dialog box.

A typical Document Properties dialog box used for setting job defaults is shown in the following dialog box. The options available for your printer may be different.

3.	In the Document Properties dialog box, choose the Options button to set more defaults in the Advanced Document Properties dialog box.

4.	In the Document Properties dialog box, choose the Halftone button to adjust halftone printing for color and monochrome graphics.

5.	Choose the OK button to close each dialog box.


Setting Printer Details
Print Manager	12 of 27

Changing a Printer's Properties

Setting Printer Details

Use the Printer Details dialog box to set the following printer features:

Set the hours a printer is available

Print a separator page

Create a pool of printers

Set printer priority

Specify a print processor

Specify a default data type

Print directly to ports

To set printer details

1.	In the Printer Properties dialog box, choose the Details button.

2.	Set or change printer details and then choose the OK button.

Setting Printing Hours

Setting printing hours sets the period during which the printer will print documents sent to it. Documents can be sent to the printer at any time, but they will only be printed during the hours that you have set. By default, printing hours are not limited.

Setting printing hours allows you to control the flow of work to a printer. For example, you can create two printers in Print Manager for the same physical printer and restrict the printing hours for one printer to nighttime hours. You can send documents to the nighttime printer at any time, but they will print only at night. Use the nighttime printer to print documents that are large or that you don't need immediately. This keeps the physical printer available during the day to print the documents you need right away. Print those documents by directing them to the printer whose hours you have not limited.

To set or change printer availability

In the Printer Details dialog box, set the period that the printer is available using the Available From and To scroll boxes.

Using Separator Files

You can use separator files for a variety of purposes. Windows NT includes separator files that print a page at the beginning of each document to make it easy to find a document among others at the printer and separator files that can switch a printer between PostScript® and PCL printing. You can also create your own separator files and specify their use by Print Manager.

The following table shows the names of separator files supplied with Windows NT, the purpose of each, also the type of printer with which each is compatible. To create your own separator file, you can copy and rename one of the supplied separator files.

Filename	Purpose		Compatible with
SYSPRINT.SEP	Prints a page before each document		PostScript
PCL.SEP	Switches dual-language HP printer to PCL printing		PCL
PSCRIPT.SEP	Switches dual-language HP printer to PostScript printing		PostScript
To specify a separator page

In the Printer Details dialog box, type the name of the separator file, including its path, in the Separator File box. To use the Windows NT default separator page, type sysprint.sep in the Separator File box.

If you want to search for a file, choose the browse button next to the Separator File box. You can then search for the file using the Select Separator Page dialog box.

Setting Printer Priority

Use the priority setting to control which documents will print first when sent to a printer. When you create two printers for the same physical printer and set different priorities for them, documents sent to the printer whose priority is higher will always print before documents sent to the printer whose priority is lower.

For example, if you are the primary user of the printer in your office, but you also share it with others over the network, you can ensure that your print jobs will always print before those of others by creating two different printers for the physical printer and setting a low priority for the shared printer.

To set or change the priority

In the Printer Details dialog box, set the priority in the Priority box.

By default, the priority is set to 1, which is the lowest priority. You can set a priority from 1 to 99.

Creating a Printer Pool

Print Manager allows you to pool printers. When printers are pooled, several printers connected to a server behave as a single printer. When a document is sent to the server, the first available printer in the pool will print it. The printers in the pool must be identical to ensure printing consistency. To create a pool of printers, create a printer and include in the printer definition the additional ports to which the pool printers are connected.

To create a printer pool

In the Printer Details dialog box, select port names from the Print To Additional Ports box that correspond to the ports where you have connected printers.

If the ports you need do not appear in the list, you can add them.

To add a port

1.	In the Printer Properties dialog box, select Network Printer in the Print To box.

2.	In the Print Destinations dialog box, select Local Port and choose the OK button.

3.	In the Port Name dialog box, type the name of the port you want to add in the Enter A Port Name box, and then choose the OK button.

Printing Directly to Ports

You can control how Print Manager sends documents to the printer. By default, documents are spooled before starting to print. When a document is spooled, it is stored on the hard disk first and then the spooler sends it to the printer. You can continue working with your application as soon as the document is stored on the disk. The spooler sends the document to the printer in the background.

If you want to bypass spooling, you can print directly to the printer. However, you will have to wait until the document is printed before continuing to work with your application.

To print directly to ports

In the Printer Details dialog box, select Print Directly To Ports.

Specifying a Print Processor or Data Type

The Windows NT print processor supports Journal, Text, and Raw data types. In general, you should not need to change either the default print processor or data type. These options are available so that specialized applications can modify the printing process. Such an application may require you to specify a specialized print processor and a particular data type when you create a printer to use with the application.

To set or change the print processor

In the Printer Details dialog box, select the filename of the processor in the Print Processor box.

To set or change the default data type

In the Printer Details dialog box, select a data type in the Default Data type box.

If you want a printer queue exclusively for text files, then select the Text data type. This type is for any application that prints straight type (for example, most older DOS applications) and will eject the last page of text print jobs.


Setting Time-outs
Print Manager	13 of 27

Changing a Printer's Properties

Setting Time-outs

For printers that are connected to a computer's parallel port, for example LPT1, you can control the amount of time that elapses before Print Manager decides that the printer is not responding and notifies you of an error. The setting affects the printer you've selected and any other local printers that use the same driver. The setting for Transmission Retry determines how long Print Manager will wait for a printer to ready itself to accept more data.

To set time-out options

1.	Select the printer whose time-outs you want to set.

Time-outs can be set only for printers connected to a parallel port.

2.	From the Printer menu, choose Properties.

3.	In the Printer Properties dialog box, choose the Settings button.

4.	Set the number of seconds in the Transmission Retry box, and then choose the OK button.

Note

You may need a large time-out if you use a plotter printer.


Securing a Printer
Print Manager	14 of 27

Securing a Printer

You can secure printers by setting permissions on them. Each permission you set specifies the access that a group or user has to the printer. For example, when you set Print permission for the group called marketing on the printer, members of that group can print documents on the printer, but cannot change any of the printer's properties.

Permissions are cumulative except that the No Access permission overrides all other permissions. For example, if the marketing group has Full Control permission while the finance group has only Print permission, and Annie is a member of both groups, Annie will have Full Control permission. However, if you change the finance group's permission to No Access, Annie will not be able to use the printer even though she is a member of a group that has access to it.

By default, if you have permission to print, you also can control the printing of any document you print. As creator of the document at the printer, you are allowed to control the document through permissions granted the Creator Owner. In general, you should not change the permissions granted to the Creator Owner or remove the Creator Owner from the permissions list.

To change permissions on a printer, you must be the owner of the printer or have been granted Full Control permission.

The following table shows the permissions for printers and the actions available to users for each permission.

To set or change printer permissions

1.	Select the printer window or icon for the printer whose permissions you want to set or change.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Permissions.

3.	Select the name of the group or user and choose a permission from the Type Of Access box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To add a group or user to the printer permissions list

1.	In the Printer Permissions dialog box, choose the Add button.

The Add Users And Groups dialog box displays the groups on the computer or in the domain shown by the List Names From box. Local groups are shown for the computer or domain whose name is followed by an asterisk (*).

You can select another domain by using the List Names From box. Domains appear only if your computer is a member of a domain on a Windows NT Server network. The domains shown have a trust relationship.

2.	You can use options in the Add Users And Groups dialog box to display users, find the users in a group, or find the domain to which a group or user belongs.

Choose the Show Users button to display the names of users on the current computer or domain.

To see a group's content, select the group and choose the Members button. Users are listed in a new dialog box. On a Windows NT Server network, global groups that are members of a local group appear in the list. To see a global group's users, select the group and choose the Members button. To include the group in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, choose the Add button. To include some of the group's users, select them and choose the Add button.

To add a group or user, you must know the domain which contains the group's or user's account. On a Windows NT Server network, choose the Search button to find the domain of a group or user. In the Find Account dialog box, type the name of the group or user in the Find User Or Group box and specify the domains to search. Then choose the Search button. To include the groups or users in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, select them in the Search Results box and choose the Add button.

3.	To add groups or users to the permissions list, select them and choose the Add button, or double-click the name of the group or user.

Or you can type the names of groups and users in the Add Names box. Separate names using a semicolon. If the account of the group or user is not located on the computer or domain shown by the List Names From box, you must specify the location. Type the computer or domain name followed by group or user name and separate the names using a backslash, for example shipping\ernesta. You can type the name without waiting for Windows NT to list groups in the Names box.

4.	Select the permission for the groups or users shown in the Add Names box using the Type Of Access box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To remove printer permissions for a group or user

1.	In the Printer Permissions dialog box, select the name of the group or user.

2.	Choose the Remove button.


Auditing a Printer
Print Manager	15 of 27

Auditing a Printer

Auditing a printer allows you to track its usage. For a particular printer, you can specify which groups or users and which actions to audit. You can audit both successful and failed actions. Windows NT stores the information generated from auditing in a file. You can view the information using Event Viewer. For more information, see Chapter 17, "Event Viewer."

Important

To audit a printer, you must set the audit policy to audit file and object access. Set the audit policy using User Manager. For more information on audit policy, see Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

To audit the following activities for a printer, select the events shown.

To set or change printer auditing

1.	Select the printer window or icon for the printer that you want to audit.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Auditing.

3.	Set auditing for each group and user in the list:

Select the name of a group or user, and then select the events to audit for that group or user.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To add a group or user to the printer auditing list

1.	In the Printer Auditing dialog box, choose the Add button.

The Add Users And Groups dialog box displays the groups on the computer or in the domain shown by the List Names From box. Local groups are shown for the computer or domain whose name is followed by an asterisk (*).

You can select another domain by using the List Names From box. Domains appear only if your computer is a member of a domain on a Windows NT Server network. The domains shown have a trust relationship.

2.	You can use options in the Add Users And Groups dialog box to display users, find the users in a group, or find the domain to which a group or user belongs.

Choose the Show Users button to display the names of users on the current computer or domain.

To see a group's content, select the group and choose the Members button. Users are listed in a new dialog box. On a Windows NT Server network, global groups that are members of a local group appear in the list. To see a global group's users, select the group and choose the Members button. To include the group in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, choose the Add button. To include some of the group's users, select them and choose the Add button.

To add a group or user, you must know the domain which contains the group's or user's account. On a Windows NT Server network, choose the Search button to find the domain of a group or user. In the Find Account dialog box, type the name of the group or user in the Find User Or Group box and specify the domains to search. Then choose the Search button. To include the groups or users in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, select them in the Search Results box and choose the Add button.

3.	To add groups or users to the auditing list, select them and choose the Add button, or double-click the name of the group or user.

Or you can type the names of groups and users in the Add Names box. Separate names using a semicolon. If the account of the group or user is not located on the computer or domain shown by the List Names From box, you must specify the location. Type the computer or domain name followed by group or user name and separate the names using a backslash, for example shipping\ernesta. You can type the name without waiting for Windows NT to list groups in the Names box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To remove printer auditing for a group or user

1.	In the Printer Auditing dialog box, select the name of the group or user.

2.	Choose the Remove button.


Taking Ownership of a Printer
Print Manager	16 of 27

Taking Ownership of a Printer

The owner of a printer can always change the permissions set on the printer. If you have Full Control permission for a printer, you can take ownership of it. Otherwise, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group to take ownership.

To take ownership of a printer

1.	Select the printer window or icon for the printer.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Owner.

3.	Choose the Take Ownership button.


Using Forms
Print Manager	17 of 27

Using Forms

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

A form specifies paper size and the size of margins. Many printers support a range of forms:  letter, legal, A4, #10 envelope, and so on. When you create a printer, you assign a form to each of the printer's trays. In addition to supporting standard forms, Print Manager allows you to create custom forms and assign them to printers. Use this feature to ensure that a printer is always ready to print your special forms.

For example, you can define a letter-sized form called Letterhead whose expanded top margin reserves space for the information on your company's letterhead. You can then assign this form to a paper tray on one of your printers and keep that tray filled with letterhead paper. Users connected to the printer can select the Letterhead form when printing from their applications and be assured that their documents will be printed on the company stationery. If a user selects a form that is not assigned to a tray on the printer, the document will wait to print until the selected form has been assigned to the printer.

Forms you create are stored on the computer. When you create a form for use with a particular printer, create the form on the computer used as the printer's server.

To create a form

1.	From the Printer menu, choose Forms.

2.	In the Form Description box:

In the Name box, type a name for the form.

In the Paper Size box, type the measurements for the width and height of the paper.

In the Print Area Margins box, type the measurements for the left, right, top, and bottom margins.

You can enter sizes in either inches or centimeters by selecting the English or Metric option buttons in the Units box.

3.	Choose the Add button.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To assign a form to a printer

1.	Select the printer to which you want to assign the form.

2.	Choose the Properties button, or choose Properties from the Printer menu.

3.	In the Printer Properties dialog box, choose the Setup button.

4.	Select the source, for example Upper Paper Tray, and the name of the form, for example Letter.

Source and form options are dependent on the printer.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To remove a form

1.	From the Printer menu, choose Forms.

2.	In the Forms On This Computer box, select the form you want to remove. You cannot delete any of the standard forms supplied with Windows NT.

3.	In the Forms dialog box, choose the Delete button.


Printing Documents
Print Manager	18 of 27

Printing Documents

The way you print documents depends on the application you are using. Use Print Manager to manipulate the documents at the printer. You can pause printing, and change the order of or remove documents that are waiting to print.

You can always control printing of your own documents. However, to control printing of other users' documents, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators, Server Operators, or Print Operators group; or you must have been granted Manage Documents or Full Control permission for the printer.


Setting the Default Printer
Print Manager	19 of 27

Printing Documents

Setting the Default Printer

When you choose the Print command in an application, the application sends the document to the default printer. Some applications allow you to select any of the available printers when you print. Set the default printer to be the printer you print to most often.

To set the default printer

On the Print Manager toolbar, choose the Default box and select a printer from the list.


Viewing Documents at the Printer
Print Manager	20 of 27

Printing Documents

Viewing Documents at the Printer

To see the documents that are printing or waiting to be printed, display the printer's window. Print Manager displays documents sorted by the order in which they will print.

The printer window shows each document's status, name, and owner; the time it was sent to the printer; its size in pages and bytes; and its priority. You can change the widths of the columns that display this information.

To change the widths of columns

Using the mouse, point to the vertical bar that follows the heading of the column whose width you want to change, and then drag the bar to widen or narrow the column.


Pausing and Resuming Printing
Print Manager	21 of 27

Printing Documents

Pausing and Resuming Printing

You can interrupt and restart printing of all documents on a printer or of one document on a printer.

To pause all printing

1.	Select the printer's window or icon.

If a document is selected in the printer window, deselect it by pressing the right mouse button or by pressing the SPACEBAR.

2.	From the Printer menu, choose Pause. Or choose the Pause button on the toolbar.

To resume all printing

1.	Select the printer's window or icon.

If a document is selected in the printer window, deselect it by pressing the right mouse button or by pressing the SPACEBAR.

2.	From the Printer menu, choose Resume. Or choose the Resume button on the toolbar.

To pause printing of a document

1.	Select the document in the printer window.

2.	From the Document menu, choose Pause. Or choose the Pause button on the toolbar.

To resume printing a document

1.	Select the document in the printer window.

2.	From the Document menu, choose Resume. Or choose the Resume button on the toolbar.


Changing Printing Order
Print Manager	22 of 27

Printing Documents

Changing Printing Order

You can change the order in which documents will be printed.

To change the order of a document

Select the document in the printer window, and then drag it to a new position in the printing order.

– Or –

Select the document in the printer window, and then press CTRL+UP ARROW or CTRL+DOWN ARROW to move the document up or down in the printing order.


Restarting Documents
Print Manager	23 of 27

Printing Documents

Restarting Documents

You can restart printing from Print Manager. When you restart a document, Print Manager reprints it from the beginning. For example, if your printer experiences a problem such as wrinkled paper, use Print Manager to restart printing. You can restart printing only when the Print Directly To Ports option is off.

To restart printing of a document

Select the document in the printer window, and then choose Restart from the Document menu.


Removing Waiting Documents
Print Manager	24 of 27

Printing Documents

Removing Waiting Documents

You can remove documents that are waiting to print one at a time, or you can remove all documents that are waiting to print.

To remove a waiting document

1.	Select the document in the printer window.

2.	From the Document menu, choose Remove Document. Or choose the Remove Document button on the toolbar.

To remove all waiting documents

1.	Select the printer's window or icon.

2.	From the Printer menu, choose Purge Printer.


Displaying or Changing Document Details
Print Manager	25 of 27

Printing Documents

Displaying or Changing Document Details

When you display detailed information on a document, Print Manager displays the file's name, status, owner, size in pages and kilobytes, and the time it was sent to the printer. Print Manager also shows who will be notified of the document's status when it prints, the range of time in which the document can be printed, the document's priority, and the document's print processor.

To display details about a document

1.	Select the document in the printer window.

2.	From the Document menu, choose Details. Or choose the Details button on the toolbar.

Changing Print Notification

By default, the owner of a document is notified when the document has been printed. You can change who is notified.

To change print notification

In the Document Details dialog box, type the username of the person you want to notify in the Notify box.

Changing Document Priority

By default, documents sent to a printer have the same priority while waiting to print. But when you raise the priority of a document, it will print before other documents that are waiting at that printer. If multiple printers with different priorities have been defined for a physical printer, documents sent to printers with higher priority will still print before documents sent to lower priority printers. For more information on printer priority, see "Setting Printer Priority," earlier in this chapter.

To change a document's priority

In the Document Details dialog box, set the document's priority in the priority box. You can set a priority from 1, the lowest priority, to 99.

Changing Document Printing Hours

You can specify a period of time during which the document will print. If, for example, you have a long document to print, you can specify that it print during the evening. The hours you set must be within the hours the printer is available. For more information on setting hours for a printer, see "Setting Printing Hours," earlier in this chapter.

To change printing hours for a document

In the Document Details dialog box, set the period of time during which the document will print in the Start Time and Until Time boxes.


Printing Extended or International Characters
Print Manager	26 of 27

Printing Documents

Printing Extended or International Characters

In addition to the 128 standard ASCII characters you can type by using your keyboard, you can use extended or international characters by using the Character Map application. For more information, see Help for Character Map.

When Windows NT prints a file, each character you typed while using your application is translated from the Windows NT character to the appropriate character on your printer. If your printer supports the same character, the character prints. Otherwise, some other character such as a period or other filler character prints instead. Check your printer manual and experiment with your printer to determine which extended characters are supported.

Note

This limitation applies only to the printer's hardware fonts. Fonts provided by Windows NT do print extended characters.


Administering Network Print Servers Remotely
Print Manager	27 of 27

Administering Network Print Servers Remotely

Print Manager allows you to administer network print servers remotely. You can change the properties of existing printers, as well as install new printers or remove printers.

To administer a printer, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators, Server Operators, or Print Operators group, or you must have been granted Full Control permission for the printer.

To install, remove, or change a printer remotely

1.	From the Printer menu, choose Server Viewer.

2.	In the Select Computer dialog box, double-click the name of a domain to display the servers in the domain. Choose the print server you want to administer, and choose the OK button.

3.	Print Manager displays a window that shows the printers on the server you have chosen. You can minimize server windows.

To	Choose

Install a new printer	Create Printer from the Printer menu. You can then install the printer just as you would a local printer.

Remove a printer	Remove Printer from the Printer menu.

Change a printer	Properties from the Printer menu.


Mail
Chapter 7	1 of 22

Mail

The Mail electronic mail system helps you communicate efficiently with coworkers. This chapter provides an overview of the basic features of Mail for all users, and also provides information for the administrator who creates and manages the workgroup postoffice (WGPO).

The following topics are presented in this chapter:

An overview of Mail

Using Mail

Setting up the Mail system

Managing the workgroup postoffice

Using Mail with other networks and other messaging systems

Although this chapter will get you started using Mail, your main source of information is online Help. To get Help, press F1 wherever you are working in Mail.


Overview
Mail	2 of 22

Overview

With Mail, you can:

Send and receive electronic messages (e-mail).

Attach files created with other applications, such as spreadsheet and word-processing applications, to your messages.

Find messages in your mailbox according to criteria you specify.

Print messages, organize and store messages in folders.

Before you can use Mail, an administrator must create a workgroup postoffice (WGPO), which contains all the information about Mail user accounts and serves as a collective mail drop facility for users. For information about how to create a WGPO, see "Setting Up the Mail System," later in this chapter.

When you connect to your postoffice and sign in for the first time (as described in "Starting and Quitting Mail"), Mail creates a file named username.MMF in the directory where you installed Windows NT. Mail uses this file to store your messages, message folders, and Personal Address Book. The postoffice updates the file when it receives messages for you. Each Mail user in your workgroup has a message file, which is like a private mailbox. Each message file and the messages in it are protected by a password that only their owner knows.

The first time you sign in, Mail displays the Inbox, showing your messages and folders.

The Inbox displays message headers, which show who sent the message, the subject, and the date and time the message was received in your mailbox. If the sender specifies an urgent priority for the message, an exclamation point appears beside the message icon; a low-priority message appears with a down arrow; and a message that includes an attachment appears with a paper clip in the message icon. When you read a message, it appears in a Read Note form, as described in "Reading a Message," later in this chapter.

You can use either the toolbar or menus to reply to messages, forward them to other Mail users, or print or delete them. You can move or copy messages to organize and store them in folders. You can also sort messages by priority, sender, subject, or date. If you want to keep a record of the messages you send to other people, you can automatically save copies in the Sent Mail folder. For more information about these activities, see "Using Mail," later in this chapter.

In the message body, you can cut and paste text between messages and files. If you want to send formatted files, such as Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel documents, you can attach them to a message. You can send as many attachments as you like with each message. For more information, see "Advanced Features of Mail," later in this chapter.


Starting and Quitting Mail
Mail	3 of 22

Overview

Starting and Quitting Mail

This section explains how to connect to a postoffice, sign in to Mail, change your password, and quit Mail.

When you start Mail for the first time, you must create or connect to a postoffice and create an account for yourself in the postoffice if the administrator has not set up an account for you.

If an existing Microsoft Mail postoffice has been assigned for your workgroup or if someone in your workgroup has already created a WGPO, you must connect to that postoffice. If you need to create a new postoffice, see "Creating a Workgroup Postoffice," later in this chapter.

If you have already connected to a postoffice and created your account, see "Signing In to Mail," later in this section.

Connecting to a Postoffice

Before connecting to a postoffice, ask the administrator for the path to the postoffice, and verify that your computer has enough available disk space for your message file (username.MMF). The required disk space depends on the number and type of messages stored in your mailbox. A typical small mailbox requires about 100K of disk space; a large mailbox might require several megabytes of disk space.

To connect to a postoffice

1.	From the Main group in Program Manager, choose the Mail icon.

2.	In the Welcome To Mail dialog box, select the Connect To An Existing Postoffice option button.

3.	In the Network Disk Resources dialog box, select the postoffice you want to connect to. In the Network Path box, type the path of the postoffice in the form \\computername\sharename; for example, type \\blake\wgpo.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	When Mail asks if you have an account on this postoffice, choose Yes if you already have an account. You will be asked for your password.

Or choose No if you need to create an account. The Enter Your Account Details dialog box appears, so you can create your account, as explained in the following section.

Creating an Account

After you connect to a postoffice, you need to create an account. Before creating one, check that the administrator has not already created an account for you.

To create an account

In the Enter Your Account Details dialog box, fill in the appropriate information, as described in the following tables.

Item	Description

Required information to create an account:

Name	Type your full name, for example, Blake Rambach. The maximum length is 30 characters, and the default is the user name you entered when you installed Windows NT.
Mailbox	Type a unique name with which you will sign in to Mail. Choose a mailbox name that is easy to remember, for example, BLAKER. The maximum length is 10 characters, and the default is your Windows NT username.
Password	Type a password. You will use this password and your mailbox name to sign in to Mail. Choose a password that is easy to remember. The maximum length is 8 characters, and the default is PASSWORD.

Optional information to create an account:

Phone #1	Type your phone number. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Phone #2	If you have two phone numbers or a phone number and a fax, type your second phone number. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Office	Type your office location, for example, 1056 to represent a room number. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Department	Type your department's name, for example, Executive Staff. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Notes	Type any comments about your account. The maximum length is 128 characters.
After you create an account, Mail displays the Inbox, where your messages and folders appear, as shown earlier in this chapter.

Signing In to Mail

When you create an account, you are signed in automatically. The next time you start Mail, you sign in by typing your mailbox name and password. You can also set up Mail to enter your mailbox name or name and password automatically when you start it.

To sign in to Mail

1.	In the Main group in Program Manager, choose the Mail icon.

2.	In the Name box of the Sign In dialog box, type your mailbox name and then press TAB.

The Postoffice Manager does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters; "BLAKER," "BlakeR," and "blaker" are considered to be the same.

3.	In the Password box, type your password and then press ENTER.

Mail displays your Inbox so that you can begin reading and sending messages, as described in "Using Mail," later in this chapter.

To sign in to Mail automatically

1.	In the Main group in Program Manager, choose the Mail icon.

2.	From the File menu, choose Properties.

3.	To have Mail automatically enter your mailbox name, at the end of the path in the Command Line box, type a space and then your mailbox name. For example, type c:\systemroot\msmail32.exe blaker.

Or to have Mail automatically enter your mailbox name and password, at the end of the path in the Command Line box, type a space, your mailbox name, another space, and then your password. For example, type c:\systemroot\msmail32.exe blaker secret.

Important

If security is important in your workgroup, record only your mailbox name and not your password, so others cannot read your messages or send messages under your name.

Changing Your Password

For security, change your password regularly. If security is not a concern, you don't need to change it. If you forget your password, you must ask the postoffice administrator to define a new password for you.

To change your password

1.	From the Mail menu, choose Change Password.

2.	Type your old password, and then press TAB.

For security, you do not see the characters as you type them.

3.	Type your new password, and then press TAB.

4.	To verify the new password, type it again exactly the same way, and then press ENTER.

Password verification distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase letters. "BLAKER," "BlakeR," and "blaker" are not considered the same. If your second attempt to type the new password does not match the first, the computer beeps; start over with a new password and then verify it.

Your new password is registered. You must use it the next time you sign in to Mail.

Quitting Mail

There are two commands on the File menu you can use to quit Mail:  Exit and Exit And Sign Out. If Mail is the only application you are running that requires you to sign in to your mailbox, both of these commands close Mail and sign you out.

If you are running another application, such as Schedule+, that uses Mail to communicate with your workgroup, the Exit command does not sign you out. This allows the other application to continue using the postoffice when Mail is closed. If you restart Mail, you don't need to sign in.

The Exit And Sign Out command closes Mail and signs you out. This command also closes any other application using Mail that might be running. If you restart Mail, you will need to sign in again.

When you quit Mail, by default Mail permanently deletes all the messages in the Deleted Mail folder. If you don't want the messages in this folder deleted when you quit Mail, turn off this option.

To preserve deleted Mail

1.	From the Mail menu, choose Options.

2.	Under Other, clear the Empty Deleted Mail When Exiting check box.

To quit Mail and sign out

From the File menu, choose Exit And Sign Out.

To quit Mail and remain signed in

From the File menu, choose Exit.

If other applications that use Mail are not running, the Exit command also signs you out.


Using Mail
Mail	4 of 22

Using Mail

This section covers the basic steps for sending, reading, replying to, and deleting messages. Some advanced features of Mail are described at the end of this section.


Sending a Message
Mail	5 of 22

Using Mail

Sending a Message

Sending a message involves a few simple steps:  addressing it, typing a subject and message, and then sending it.

Addressing a Message

The first step in sending a message is to open a Send Note form and choose the users to whom you want to send the message.

To address a message

1.	Choose the Compose button, or from the Mail menu, choose Compose Note.

A Send Note form appears.

2.	Choose the Address button.

Mail displays the Address Book, which contains the names of users on your postoffice.

For information about using the buttons in the Address Book and about using shortcut keys, see the table following this procedure.

3.	To locate usernames in the address list:

Type the first few characters of a name. The address list scrolls to the first name in the list with those characters and selects it. This is the fastest way to find a name.

Or click the scroll arrows in the scroll bar.

Or press the arrow keys to scroll through the list.

4.	To select a name that is highlighted in the list, choose the To button or press ENTER.

The selected username is added to the To box.

5.	To add names to the Cc list, repeat the steps for locating and selecting names, and then choose the Cc button or press ENTER.

6.	Choose the OK button.

The display shows the Send Note form with the selected name entered in the To box. If you select a name from the Address Book, the name is underlined in the Send Note form. The underline indicates that Mail verified the name in the postoffice.

Button	Shortcut key	Use
	CTRL+L	The Directory button to select a user directory from the list of available directories for postoffices and gateways on your network.
	CTRL+P	The Personal Address Book button to display names and groups in your Personal Address Book.
	CTRL+F	The Find button to find a name or first part of a name in the current user directory.
	CTRL+N CTRL+A	The New Address button to add a new name and address to your Personal Address Book or to address a message to another mail system. You can add a gateway address plus the name and address of a user on another mail postoffice.
You can copy the names of people to whom you often send messages from the Postoffice List into your own Personal Address Book. If you often send messages to the same group of people, you can choose Personal Groups from the Mail menu to create a personal group name for them. When you include that group name on a message's recipient list, all the individuals in the group receive the message.

You can also address mail to users on another mail system if a gateway has been added to your Mail network. A gateway is software that enables direct mail systems to communicate with each other. When a message is sent from one mail system to another, the gateway filters out information specific to the originating mail system, attaches information the second mail system needs to deliver the message, and sends the message on its way. If a gateway has been added to your Mail network, its name appears in the Address Book.

Typing and Sending a Message

The next step is to type the subject and message text.

To type a message subject and a message

1.	In the Send Note form, click the Subject box, or press TAB until the insertion point is in the Subject box, and then type a short description of the message.

If you make a mistake while typing, press the BACKSPACE key to erase the error, and then continue typing.

2.	Click anywhere in the message body, or press TAB, and then type the message you want to send.

If the text reaches the right margin of the form, the next word automatically moves to the next line; you don't need to press ENTER at the end of each line.

The last step is to send the message.

To send a message

1.	If you want to set options for the message you are sending, choose the Options button in the toolbar, and then select the options you want to set.

2.	In the Send Note form, choose the Send button.

For more information about the Options dialog box, see online Help.


Reading a Message
Mail	6 of 22

Using Mail

Reading a Message

The message header in your Inbox displays information about the message, including who the message is from and the date and time it was received. If you haven't read a new message, Mail displays a closed-envelope symbol and displays the message header in bold.

To read a message

Double-click the message in the Inbox. Or press TAB to move the highlight from the Folders list to the message list; use the arrow keys to highlight the message, and then press ENTER.

The message appears in a Read Note form.

The gray area at the top of the form is the message heading, which shows who sent the message, when it was received, the people or groups it was sent to, and the message subject.

Attached files appear in messages as icons. An attached file can contain any kind of data, including text, graphics, a spreadsheet, executable code, and so on. If you have the application used to create an attached data file, you can open the file while reading the message by double-clicking the icon.

Note

To avoid introducing a computer virus, you should use the same care when opening or activating an attached file or object in a message that you do when opening or activating a file or object from the network or a floppy disk.


Replying to a Message
Mail	7 of 22

Using Mail

Replying to a Message

After reading a message, you may want to send a reply. The Reply button or command automatically addresses the message to the person who sent it and includes the original message in the message body. Including the original message is useful because you can add comments above or within the original message.

To reply to a message

1.	Choose the Reply button, or from the Mail menu, choose Reply.

If you want to reply to everyone who received the original message, choose the Reply All button.

A Send Note form appears. The name of the original sender appears in the To box, and the title of the original message appears in the Subject box, preceded by the prefix RE: (for "reply"). The original message is included in the form, below the solid line.

2.	At the top of the message box, type your reply.

3.	If you want to insert comments within the message you received, use the arrow keys to move the insertion point to where you want to enter a comment. Press ENTER to start a new line after the original message, and then type the comment you want to insert.

4.	Choose the Send button.


Deleting a Message
Mail	8 of 22

Using Mail

Deleting a Message

To manage the number of messages in your Inbox, you should delete messages you've already read and no longer need.

To delete a message from the Inbox

1.	In the Inbox, select the message you want to delete.

2.	Choose the Delete button, or from the File menu, choose Delete.

The message is moved to the Deleted Mail folder, where you can retrieve it until it is deleted there. By default, Mail deletes messages in the Deleted Mail folder when you quit Mail. To change this option, choose Options from the Mail menu.


Advanced Features of Mail
Mail	9 of 22

Using Mail

Advanced Features of Mail

This section presents some advanced features of Mail. Use Help to find more details.

Attaching Files and Embedding Objects

You can choose the Attach button from the toolbar to send one or more application files, such as Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel documents, or batch files, programs, graphics files, or any other files that are available to you.

Mail displays the Attach dialog box, where you can select a file to attach in the same way that you select a filename in the Open or Save As dialog boxes.

Mail also includes object linking and embedding (OLE) capability, so you can copy parts of formatted documents from other applications, such as spreadsheets and word processing, into a message without losing formatting. You embed or link an object in a Mail message in the same ways as you do in any application with OLE capabilities. For information, see Chapter 10, "Object Linking and Embedding."

Creating Message Templates

If you send a specific message on a regular basis, such as a weekly progress report, you can set up a Send Note template for the message and basic addresses.

To create a message template

1.	Choose the Compose button on the toolbar, or from the Mail menu, choose Compose Note.

2.	Address the message to the people you will be sending it to regularly, and type the subject and template information.

3.	Close the message window by double-clicking the Send Note window's close box or by pressing CTRL+F4.

4.	When Mail asks if you want to save the message, choose the Yes button.

Mail displays the template message in your Inbox, but you can move this message to any folder.

To use a message template

1.	Display the message template by doing one of the following:

Drag the message header to the Outbox icon.

Or select the message, and from the Mail menu, choose Forward.

2.	Fill in the message. If necessary, change the list of recipients.

3.	Choose the Send button.

Finding Messages

You can choose Message Finder from the File menu to search for messages you stored in Mail folders. You can also keep multiple Message Finder windows minimized on the Mail workspace, each with its own search criteria. Then, when you want to search for a message with the criteria, maximize the icon.

Using Folders

Mail stores your private messages in folders that you create and manage using the New Folder and Folder Properties commands from the File menu. Your private messages are stored on your hard disk. Shared folders are stored in your postoffice and can be accessed by other users in your postoffice.

Working Offline

You may want to create new messages or work with messages you received without being connected to the postoffice (for example, while you are traveling or working at home). If you have Mail installed on your computer, you can compose and work with messages without being connected to the postoffice. This is called working offline.

To move your message file to a computer or disk from your postoffice

1.	From the Mail menu, choose Options.

2.	In the Options dialog box, choose the Server button.

3.	In the Storage box, select the Local option button.

4.	In the File box, type the path to the drive or directory where you want to save your message file, and then choose the OK button.

To work offline

1.	Start Mail on a computer that is not connected to the postoffice.

2.	In the message that asks if you want to work offline, choose the OK button.

3.	Type your password in the dialog box, and then choose the OK button.

4.	If Mail cannot find your message file, specify the path to it.

After you finish composing a message, choose the Send button. The message is moved to the Outbox. To move it to the postoffice when you resume working online, follow the procedure above for copying your message file to a computer or disk, but choose the Postoffice option instead of the Local option. When you connect to the Mail system, the messages in your Outbox are sent automatically.

Defining Other Mail Options

You can choose the Options command from the Mail menu to define various preferences for sending mail, checking for new mail, choosing the server, and emptying the Deleted Mail folder. For more information, see Help.


Setting Up the Mail System
Mail	10 of 22

Setting Up the Mail System

The following sections explain the concepts and procedures related to setting up and administering Mail in Windows NT and using Mail with other networks and other messaging systems. The rest of this chapter is written for the administrator who is responsible for creating and managing the workgroup postoffice (WGPO).


Planning a Workgroup Postoffice
Mail	11 of 22

Setting Up the Mail System

Planning a Workgroup Postoffice

Before your workgroup can use Mail, each user needs to connect to a postoffice. If your workgroup does not have an existing postoffice, an administrator in your workgroup needs to create and manage a WGPO using the Postoffice Manager.

This section describes the Mail messaging system and the workgroup postoffice to help you plan your WGPO.

The Mail Messaging System

The Windows NT messaging system consists of the Mail application and the WGPO. The Mail application runs on each user's computer, and the WGPO is stored in a shared directory on a computer running Windows NT.

If your company already has a messaging system, you can use the Mail application with the postoffice or messaging (mail) server that is part of that system. For information, see "Using Mail with Other Messaging Systems," later in this chapter.

The WGPO contains all the information about Mail user accounts and serves as a collective mail-drop facility for users in your workgroup. To communicate, users must be connected to the same postoffice and have an account on that postoffice.

The following figure shows three users in a workgroup with a WGPO. Bill, Blake, and Cristal belong to a workgroup called Engineering. To allow users in the Engineering workgroup to use Mail, Bill created a WGPO on his computer and accounts for himself, Blake, and Cristal. Because he created the WGPO, he will be its administrator. Bill, Blake, and Cristal use their respective computers to run Mail, and their message files are stored on their computers as well. They can now use Mail to send messages and files to each other.

Two users connected to different WGPOs cannot exchange messages.

The following figure shows a new workgroup that includes the original Engineering workgroup and three new users from Marketing: Ernest, Chris, and Peggy. Ernest created another WGPO on his computer, and he created accounts for himself, Chris, and Peggy. In this configuration, Bill, Blake, and Cristal can communicate with each other. Similarly, Ernest, Chris, and Peggy can communicate. However, Ernest, Chris, and Peggy cannot communicate with Bill, Blake, and Cristal because they are not connected to the same postoffice.

If Ernest deletes his postoffice and Bill creates accounts for Ernest, Peggy, and Chris on his postoffice, all six can communicate with each other.

You can create a WGPO on a computer that is part of your workgroup, on a Windows NT Server computer, or on computer on an existing network such as Novell NetWare.


Creating a Workgroup Postoffice
Mail	12 of 22

Setting Up the Mail System

Creating a Workgroup Postoffice

This section explains how to create a workgroup postoffice (WGPO). The person who creates the WGPO should plan to manage it. Creating the WGPO requires that you complete the following actions:

Verify that there is enough disk space on the computer where you will install it.

Create the WGPO and an account for the administrator.

Share the WGPO so that all users in your workgroup can use it.

Planning for Disk Space

Before creating a WGPO, verify that your computer meets the following requirements.

On the computer where the WGPO will be installed, there must be:

360K of available disk space for an empty postoffice.

16K of available disk space for each user account.

On each user's computer, there must be:

Enough available disk space for each user's mailbox, depending on the number and type of messages stored in a mailbox. A typical small mailbox requires about 100K of disk space; a large mailbox can use several megabytes of disk space.

Creating the Postoffice and the Administrator Account

After you verify that the computer has enough disk space to create a WGPO, you can create a WGPO and an administrator account. The administrator account is the first account you create in the WGPO. After you create the administrator account, you can modify it, but you cannot remove it.

This section describes how to create the WGPO on a computer running Windows NT Workstation or Windows NT Server. If you want to create the WGPO on a network server, see "Using Mail with Other Networks and Other Messaging Services," later in this chapter.

Important

The computer where you create a WGPO must be turned on at all times so that users can exchange mail.

You should create only one WGPO per workgroup. Only the users connected to the same WGPO can communicate with each other.

To create a WGPO and the administrator account

1.	Start Mail.

If a WGPO has not been assigned to your workgroup, Mail starts the workgroup postoffice Manager and displays the Welcome To Mail dialog box, as described in "Connecting to a Postoffice," earlier in this chapter.

2.	In the Welcome To Mail dialog box, select the Create A New Workgroup Postoffice option button, and then choose the OK button.

A message reminds you that there should be only one WGPO in a workgroup and that you will be responsible for managing any new WGPO you create.

3.	To create a new postoffice, choose the Yes button.

Or choose No to return to the Welcome To Mail dialog box so that you can connect to an existing postoffice.

4.	In the Create Workgroup Postoffice dialog box, select a location for the WGPO. You can create the WGPO either on your hard drive or on a network server:

To create the WGPO on your hard drive, select a drive from the Drives box and a directory from the Create WGPO In list, and then choose the OK button.

To create the WGPO on a network server, choose the Network button, and select a server and shared directory from the dialog box. Then choose the OK button.

5.	In the administrator Account Details dialog box, fill in the appropriate information to create the administrator account.

The requirements and optional information in this dialog box are the same as those described in "Creating an Account," earlier in this chapter.

When you fill in this dialog box, type names that are easy to read. You can use extended characters (such as letters with accents), but it is not recommended. Only alphanumeric characters are allowed in the Mailbox and Password boxes. The Postoffice Manager is not case-sensitive; that is, "BLAKER," "BlakeR," and "blaker" are considered to be the same.

6.	Choose the OK button.

When the message reminds you to share the WGPO directory that you just created, choose the OK button.

Important

If you are not able to create a WGPO, it is probably because you don't have enough disk space or, if you are creating the WGPO on a server, because you don't have write permission on that server. In either case, the solution is to find another location with enough disk space and where you have sufficient privileges to create the WGPO.

Sharing the Workgroup Postoffice

After you create a WGPO, you must share the WGPO directory that contains the data files with all users on the postoffice.

To share a workgroup postoffice on a Windows NT Workstation computer

1.	Open File Manager and select the WGPO directory.

2.	From File Manager's Disk menu, choose Share As.

3.	In the Share Name box, type a name for the postoffice. The default name is WGPO.

4.	If you want to, you can enter a comment in the Comment box.

This comment appears in the shares list Connect Network Drive dialog box.

5.	In the User Limit box, set a limit on the number of users who can connect to the shared directory at the same time.

By default, no limit is set.

6.	Choose the Permissions button and give all members of the postoffice Full Control access to the WGPO share.

For information on setting permissions, see "Setting Permissions Through Shared Directories" in Chapter 4, "File Manager," or press F1 while the Access Through Share Permissions dialog box is displayed.

7.	In the New Share dialog box, choose the OK button.

In the File Manager window, the WGPO directory is shown as a shared directory.

To share a WGPO on a Windows NT Server computer

1.	Create a directory on the Windows NT Server computer where the WGPO will be located. This can be a primary or backup domain controller.

2.	Share the directory you just created. Make sure you don't share the parent directory.

3.	Provide full access permissions to the directory.

4.	Create a WGPO as explained in "Creating a Workgroup Postoffice," earlier in this chapter.

After you create a WGPO, the Postoffice Manager command appears on the Mail menu when you start Mail. This command appears only on the computer where you create the WGPO.


Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice
Mail	13 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

After you create a WGPO and an administrator account, you can manage the WGPO with the Postoffice Manager.

With the Postoffice Manager, you can complete the following actions:

Add users to the WGPO

Modify existing user accounts

Remove users from the WGPO

Manage the disk space where the WGPO is stored

You may also need to manage the Mail system files.


Starting the Postoffice Manager
Mail	14 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

Starting the Postoffice Manager

Before you can start the Postoffice Manager, you must start Mail.

To start the Postoffice Manager

From the Mail menu, choose Postoffice Manager.

In the Postoffice Manager dialog box, you can add users, modify user accounts, and remove users.


Adding a User
Mail	15 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

Adding a User

To add a user to a WGPO, you must provide the user's name, mailbox name, and password. Optionally, you can also provide the user's phone number(s), office location, department, and comments about the user's account.

Note

Users can create their own WGPO account. If you create user accounts, be sure to give the necessary account information to the users.

To add a user

1.	From the Mail menu, choose Postoffice Manager.

2.	From the Postoffice Manager dialog box, choose the Add User button.

3.	In the Add User dialog box, fill in the appropriate information, and then choose the OK button.

For a complete description of the entries in the Add User dialog box, see "Creating an Account," earlier in this chapter.


Modifying a User Account
Mail	16 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

Modifying a User Account

With the Postoffice Manager, you can modify any information about the user's account.

To modify a user account

1.	From the Mail menu, choose Postoffice Manager.

2.	From the Postoffice Manager dialog box, select the username you want to modify.

3.	Choose the Details button.

A dialog box appears, showing the user's account information, which is identical to the information defined in "Creating an Account," earlier in this chapter.

4.	Change the appropriate entries, and then choose the OK button.


Removing a User
Mail	17 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

Removing a User

With the Postoffice Manager, you can remove a user from a WGPO.

Note

You cannot remove the Administrator account.

To remove a user

1.	From the Mail menu, choose Postoffice Manager.

2.	From the Postoffice Manager dialog box, select the username you want to remove.

3.	Choose the Remove User button.

When the message asks you to confirm that you want to remove the selected username, choose the Yes button.


Managing Disk Space
Mail	18 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

Managing Disk Space

One of the most important administrative tasks is managing the disk space where the WGPO is stored. To manage disk space, you need to check the current status of shared folders and recover unused disk space by compressing shared folders.

A shared folder is a public folder stored in the WGPO directory, unlike users' private folders, which are stored on their own computers. All users in a workgroup can open shared folders and see the messages they contain. Any user in the WGPO can create a shared folder and choose the appropriate access permissions (Read, Write, or Delete).

By checking the status of shared folders, you determine:  the number of shared folders, the number of messages stored in shared folders, the amount of disk space the messages use, and amount of disk space you can recover by compressing shared folders.

To check the status of shared folders

1.	From the Mail menu, choose Postoffice Manager.

2.	From the Postoffice Manager dialog box, choose the Shared Folders button.

The Shared Folders dialog box shows the current status of shared folders in a WGPO.

Compressing shared folders recovers disk space. When the Mail system runs out of disk space, this is the first step to take. If you still require more space, you can delete old messages and unused folders.

If the shared folders contain a large number of messages, the compression process may take a long time.

Important

Do not attempt to compress shared folders while others are using them.

To compress shared folders

1.	Before compressing a shared folder, ask all users in a workgroup to close the folder.

2.	From the Mail menu, choose Postoffice Manager.

3.	From the Postoffice Manager dialog box, choose the Shared Folders button.

4.	In the Shared Folders dialog box, choose the Compress button.

5.	Choose the Close button.


Managing the Mail System Files
Mail	19 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

Managing the Mail System Files

When you create a WGPO or when users connect to a postoffice, the Mail system files are modified. For each user, Mail creates a message file, USERNAME.MMF. This file stores messages, message folders, and the Personal Address Book for the user. The WGPO updates this file when it receives messages. The message file for each user is stored on his or her computer. Your message file is located in the directory where Windows NT was installed (the default is C:\WINNT).

The Mail system files are automatically managed by Mail, so you shouldn't need to alter them unless you want to change specific functionality or you want to restore these files to a particular state.

The following sections describe how these files are modified when you create a WGPO and when a user connects to a WGPO. They also describe how to back up and restore the Mail system files.

When you create a WGPO, the Postoffice Manager makes the following changes to the system files for the administrator account:

The WGPO directory is created in the specified location.

A message file is created for the administrator account, with the default name of USERNAME.MMF.

Backing Up and Restoring the Mail System Files

When a user connects to a WGPO, a message file is created for the user, with the default name of USERNAME.MMF. Mail automatically manages this file for each user. In general, you don't need to alter the Mail system files; however, you might want to restore them to a given state.

You should back up the Mail system files regularly. Then, if there is a problem, you can recover your mail and the Mail environment from the last backup copy. The following procedures explain how to back up and restore your USERNAME.MMF file and restore all folders in your mailbox.

If you want to back up or restore only some of the folders in your mailbox, use the Export Folder and Import Folder commands. For information about using Export and Import, see Help.

To back up your USERNAME.MMF file

1.	From the Mail menu, choose Backup.

2.	In the File Name box, specify the name and location of your backup file; for example, C:\USER\MARIA.MMF.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To restore a USERNAME.MMF file

1.	Open File Manager and select the backup copy of your message file.

2.	From the File menu, choose Rename.

3.	In the To box, type c:\systemroot\username.mmf (assuming that, by default, you installed Mail in the same directory that contains your Windows NT files).

4.	Choose the OK button.

The backup file becomes your message file, and your mailbox displays the messages and folders you had when you last backed up the file. New messages that you received after you backed up the message file do not appear in your Inbox.

Important

If a message file becomes corrupted, a message appears with this information and also presents an option to repair the file. The user or the administrator for the postoffice can repair the file immediately or quit Mail and repair it later. However, the user cannot use Mail until the corrupted file is repaired.


Restoring a User’s Password
Mail	20 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

Restoring a User's Password

If a user forgets a password, the administrator for the postoffice can define a new password.

To define a new password for a user

1.	Sign in to Mail and start the Postoffice Manager.

2.	In the Postoffice Manager dialog box, select the name of the user, and then choose the Details button.

3.	In the Password box, type a new password, and then choose the OK button.

4.	In the Postoffice Manager dialog box, choose the Close button.

The user can now sign in to Mail with the new password.

Caution

If the administrator for the postoffice forgets the password, that password cannot be recovered. The administrator must create a new WGPO.


Using Mail with Other Networks and Other Messaging Systems
Mail	21 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

Using Mail with Other Networks and Other Messaging Systems

You can also create a workgroup postoffice on a file server that is part of an existing network, such as a Novell NetWare server.

If you want to use Mail with another network, you need to set up support for that network in Windows NT, using the Control Panel. For information about the necessary drivers and any further instructions, contact your network vendor.


Using Mail with a NetWare Network
Mail	22 of 22

Managing Your Workgroup Postoffice

Using Mail with a NetWare Network

To use Mail with a Novell NetWare network, you need to create a WGPO on a NetWare server and grant full trustee rights to the WGPO directory.

To create a WGPO on a NetWare server

1.	Create a directory on the NetWare server where the WGPO will be located.

2.	Grant full trustee rights to this directory.

3.	Use the Control Panel to set up NetWare support in Windows NT, as described in "Configuring the Network" in Chapter 5, "Control Panel."

4.	Restart Windows NT.

5.	Log on to your NetWare server.

6.	Use File Manager to assign a drive letter to the NetWare directory where you want to create the WGPO.

7.	Create the WGPO as explained in "Creating a Workgroup Postoffice", earlier in this chapter.


Schedule+
Chapter 8	1 of 17

Schedule+

Schedule+ is a personal scheduling tool that you can use to track important appointments and tasks, block out time for meetings, and record notes.

This chapter describes the basic features and how to use Schedule+ in the following topics:

An overview of Schedule+

Using the Appointment Book

Using the Task list

Using the Planner to schedule a meeting

Using the Messages window to schedule a meeting

Advanced features of Schedule+

Although this chapter contains the basic information you need to use Schedule+, your main source of information is the online Help. To get help, press F1 wherever you are working in Schedule+.


Overview
Schedule+	2 of 17

Overview

Schedule+, which you can choose to install on your system when you install Windows NT, can be used to schedule individual events and tasks, and to set automatic reminders for events.

Schedule+ can also be used as a workgroup scheduling tool. When you need to meet with coworkers, you can view the times they are available. Then you can schedule the meeting in one step - without leaving your desk or contacting each person individually.

You can also designate another Schedule+ user as your assistant, who can schedule appointments and set up meetings for you.

A scheduling tool is most effective when it's always accessible for reference and for recording impromptu appointments. With Schedule+, you can print copies of your schedule, and you can use Schedule+ from a portable or home computer that has the software installed.

In Schedule+, you can work online or offline, and then merge your changes into the copy of your schedule on the postoffice later. For more information, see "Advanced Features of Schedule+," later in this chapter.


Starting and Quitting Schedule+
Schedule+	3 of 17

Overview

Starting and Quitting Schedule+

You use your mailbox name and password to sign in to Schedule+. (If you are already signed in to Mail, you won't be prompted to sign in.)

To start Schedule+ and sign in

1.	From the Main group in the Program Manager, choose the Schedule+ icon.

2.	In the Name box of the Sign In dialog box, type your mailbox name and press TAB.

3.	In the Password box, type your password for Mail, and then press ENTER.

When you're finished working with Schedule+, you can either quit Schedule+ or quit and sign out.

To quit Schedule+ and keep running Mail and Reminders

From the File menu, choose Exit.

Choose this method to quit if you want to continue using Mail or receiving reminders while you aren't working with Schedule+. You can restart Mail without signing in.

To quit Schedule+, Mail, and Reminders

From the File menu, choose Exit And Sign Out.

Choose this method to quit if you're finished working with Schedule+, Mail, and the Reminders program (MSRMND32.EXE), which tracks reminders you set and notifies you in advance of these events. The next time you start Schedule+, the Reminders program starts automatically. (If any reminders were set to occur when Reminders wasn't running, they aren't displayed when you start Schedule+.)


Organizing Your Screen
Schedule+	4 of 17

Overview

Organizing Your Screen

Organizing the workday requires two types of tasks:  scheduling events and communicating with coworkers about scheduled events. Schedule+ provides a window for each type of task:

The Schedule window. This window has your name on the title bar and tabs on the left side for your Appointment Book (Appts), Planner, and Task list (Tasks). When you want to work with your appointments or tasks, schedule meetings with others, or schedule a conference room or other resource, you work in the Schedule window.

The Messages window (if your computer is connected to your postoffice). When you receive meeting requests or replies to your meeting requests, the messages appear in this window.

To display the Schedule window

From the Window menu in Schedule+, choose your name.

To display the Messages window

From the Window menu, choose Messages. Or double-click the Messages icon to restore the window.

For more information about the Messages window, see "Using the Messages Window to Schedule Meetings," later in this chapter.


Using the Appointment Book
Schedule+	5 of 17

Using the Appointment Book

The Appointment Book displays your daily schedule. A time slot can contain a combination of appointments and tentative appointments. Appointments appear as "busy" times on your schedule when other users view it. Tentative appointments appear in gray time slots in the Appointment Book and don't appear as busy times on your schedule.

If you have an appointment that occurs regularly, you can schedule it once in your Appointment Book and designate it as recurring. Schedule+ automatically schedules the remaining occurrences in your Appointment Book.

You can also set Schedule+ to remind you before specific appointments or before all appointments, and you can designate specific appointments to be private so that other users can see that you are not available during that time, but they cannot see the description of your appointment. Schedule+ puts icons in time slots containing recurring appointments, meetings, private appointments, or appointments with reminders.

You can change the date you're viewing by choosing a new one in the calendar next to your appointments, and you can quickly return to today's date by choosing the Today tab on the left. You can also leave yourself notes for any day by typing them in the Notes box for that day.


Adding an Appointment
Schedule+	6 of 17

Using the Appointment Book

Adding an Appointment

You can add up to six appointments and tentative appointments for a particular time slot. You can also set options to control which users (if any) can view your appointments from their Appointment Book.

To add an appointment to your Appointment Book

1.	If your Appointment Book is not already displayed, click the Appts tab.

To maximize the Schedule window, double-click the title bar or press ALT, HYPHEN, X. To restore your Schedule window to its original size, double-click the title bar again or press ALT, HYPHEN, R.

2.	If you need to change the date, from the Edit menu, choose Go To Date. In the Go To Date dialog box, type the new number for the month, day, and year over the existing numbers. Then choose the OK button or press ENTER.

Or click the month box in the top right corner of the Appointment Book to display a menu, and then click the month you want. Then click the year box to display a menu, and then click the year you want. Or, finally, in the calendar, click a number to change the date.

The status bar at the bottom of the Schedule+ workspace displays the selected time slot.

3.	To select the appointment time, click in the box corresponding to the starting time, and then drag the mouse to block out the entire meeting time.

Or press SHIFT+TAB to move the selection to the appointment list, if it is not already there. Press the DOWN ARROW until the time slot you want is highlighted, and then press SHIFT+DOWN ARROW to include all the time slots you want in the selection.

4.	In the selected time slot, type text to describe the appointment.

To set a reminder for the appointment

1.	Double-click the time slot for the appointment. Or select it and then, from the Edit menu, choose Edit Appt.

2.	In the Appointment dialog box, select the Set Reminder For check box.

Schedule+ automatically enters 15 minutes for you, but you can specify a different amount of time.

You can also change the text in the Description box of the Appointment dialog box. The change will appear in your Appointment Book.

3.	To return to the Appointment Book, choose the OK button.

A small bell icon appears in the time slot of the appointment in the Appointment Book, indicating that you set a reminder.

You can choose General Options from the Options menu to specify whether Schedule+ automatically sets reminders for all new appointments and tasks. When you remove the reminder option, you must specifically set reminders for any appointments and tasks you want to be reminded of.


Adding a Tentative Appointment
Schedule+	7 of 17

Using the Appointment Book

Adding a Tentative Appointment

When you add an appointment to the Appointment Book, that time is blocked out in your Planner. When other people view your Planner to set up a meeting, they know that you're not available at that time. Sometimes, though, you might want to schedule an event in your Appointment Book but still leave yourself available for appointments during that time slot. For these times, you can add a tentative appointment to your Appointment Book.

Tentative appointments appear in gray time slots in your Appointment Book, and they do not appear in your Planner. When other people look at your schedule, you appear to be available for meetings during that time slot.

To add a tentative appointment

1.	In your Appointment Book, select the time slot you want.

2.	Type text to describe the tentative appointment.

3.	Double-click the time slot. Or from the Edit menu, choose Edit Appt.

4.	In the Appointment dialog box, select the Tentative check box, and then choose the OK button.

Your Appointment Book now displays the tentative appointment in a gray time slot. When you or other viewers look at your Planner, you don't see the tentative time slot marked as busy, so it appears that you are available for meetings during this time. Except for being "invisible" in your Planner, tentative appointments are just like regular appointments - you can set the same options for either type.

If you decide later to make this tentative appointment a regular appointment, you can clear the Tentative check box for the appointment. When you clear the Tentative check box, the appointment appears as a regular appointment.


Adding a Recurring Appointment
Schedule+	8 of 17

Using the Appointment Book

Adding a Recurring Appointment

If you have a meeting that occurs regularly, you can have Schedule+ enter it automatically on the appropriate days. You can designate a new or existing appointment to be recurring. For example, if you attend a staff meeting that occurs every other Monday, you can book that time on your schedule.

To add a recurring appointment

1.	If the Appointment Book is not already displayed, click the Appts tab, or press ALT+A.

2.	From the Appointments menu, choose New Recurring Appt.

3.	In the Recurring Appointment dialog box, choose the Change button.

4.	In the Change Recurrence dialog box, select the appropriate option button to specify whether this appointment should occur daily, weekly, biweekly, monthly, or yearly.

5.	If the meeting occurs every week, select one or more check boxes to specify the day on which the meeting occurs.

6.	In the Duration box, specify a date when the recurring appointment begins.

7.	If there's an end date for the recurring appointment, in the Duration box, select the Ends option button and enter a date in the text box.

Otherwise, select the No End Date option button.

8.	Choose the OK button.

You can also designate an existing appointment to be a recurring appointment by selecting it and then performing the steps described above.


Changing or Canceling an Appointment
Schedule+	9 of 17

Using the Appointment Book

Changing or Canceling an Appointment

Once you have added an appointment, you can change anything about it, or you can cancel it. If you make a change to a meeting you have scheduled, as described in "Using the Planner to Schedule Meetings" later in this chapter, you can also notify all attendees about the change.

To change an appointment

1.	If the Appointment Book is not already displayed, click the Appts tab, or press ALT+A.

2.	Select the appointment you want to change, and then double-click it.

3.	In the Appointment dialog box that appears, enter the changes you want to make, and then choose OK.

4.	If you are changing a group meeting that you arranged, Schedule+ asks if you want to notify the other attendees of the change. To send a notice, choose the Yes button.

5.	To add a personal note to the Send Request form that appears, type the note in the message area.

6.	When the Send Request form is as you want it, choose the Send button.

If you want to make only minor changes to an appointment, there are several shortcuts:

To modify the text of an appointment, select the appointment and edit directly in the Appointment Book.

To change the start time, select the appointment, click its top handle, and drag to the new start time.

To extend the end time, select the appointment, click its bottom handle, and drag to the new end time.

To cancel an appointment

1.	If the Appointment Book is not already displayed, click the Appts tab, or press ALT+A.

2.	Select the appointment you want to cancel.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Delete Appt.

4.	If you are canceling a group meeting that you arranged, Schedule+ asks if you want to notify the other attendees of the cancellation. To send a notice, choose the Yes button.

5.	To add a personal note to the Cancel Meeting form that appears, type the note in the message area.

6.	When the Cancel Meeting form is as you want it, choose the Send button.


Using the Task List
Schedule+	10 of 17

Using the Task List

When you are working on a task over a period of time, you can track it in the Schedule+ Task list. To reserve time for working on a particular task during the day, you can copy it to a specific time slot in your Appointment Book.


Adding a Task to the Task List
Schedule+	11 of 17

Using the Task List

Adding a Task to the Task List

Your Task list helps you keep track of tasks over a period of time. When you create a task, you give it a priority letter or number. If you need to complete the task by a certain date, you can note that, too. Tasks can be sorted by priority, due date, or alphabetically by description. You can group related tasks into projects, and then sort them by project.

To add a task to the Task list

1.	Display the Task list by clicking the Tasks tab or pressing ALT+T.

2.	In the New Task box of the Task list, enter a description of the task.

3.	Choose the Add button to add the new task to your Task list, or press ENTER.

4.	If you want to define a due date for the task, from the Task list, double-click the task, or select it and choose the Edit button.

If you do not want to set a due date, make sure None is selected in the Due Date box (the default). No due date will be assigned to the task, regardless of the date displayed in the By box.

5.	In the Due Date box of the Task dialog box, select the By option button and then change the date to the one you want.

To change each element of the date, select the element, and then either type the correct day or number over the existing one or click the arrows beside the box until the day or number you want appears. Schedule+ automatically fills in the correct day of the week.

6.	In the Start Work box, type a number and then select whether the work should start days, weeks, or months before it is due.

For example, type 1 and select Day(s) to specify that the task will become active one day before it is due.

7.	In the Priority box, type a number to indicate the priority for the task.

The default priority indicators are the numbers 1 - 9. If you want to change the priority indicator to letters, type the letter. You can mix letters and numbers in your Task list; number priorities are higher than letter priorities.

8.	If you want to set a reminder for the Start Work date, select the Set Reminder check box.

9.	If you want to ensure that other users do not see this task in your Appointment Book, select the Private check box.

10.	Choose the OK button.

The task is entered in your Task list with the due date and priority you set.

To modify a task

Double-click it in the Task list.

– Or –

Select the task and choose the Edit button.

To remove a task from your Task list

1.	From the Task list, select the task.

2.	Choose the Delete button, or press either ALT+L or the DEL key.


Scheduling Time in the Appointment Book for a Task
Schedule+	12 of 17

Using the Task List

Scheduling Time in the Appointment Book for a Task

Your Task list helps you keep track of the work you need to do by the end of each day, but you can also schedule a specific time during the day to complete a task. For example, if one of your tasks is to file a trip report, you can schedule a specific time slot in your Appointment Book to be sure you have time to do it.

To schedule time in your Appointment Book for a task

1.	In the Task list, select the task you want to schedule.

2.	Choose the Add To Schedule button.

3.	In the Choose Time dialog box, select the date and time slot you want to schedule the task for, and then choose the OK button.

The task remains in your Task list, but now it is also booked as an appointment in your Appointment Book for the day and time slot you chose. If the Private option is selected in the Task dialog box, other users cannot see the description for this task in your appointment book, although the time is reserved.


Using the Planner to Schedule Meetings
Schedule+	13 of 17

Using the Planner to Schedule Meetings

With the Schedule+ Planner, you can scan appointments several days at a time or compare other people's schedules to your own to determine when others are available for a meeting. You can also schedule resources.


Scheduling Attendees
Schedule+	14 of 17

Using the Planner to Schedule Meetings

Scheduling Attendees

When you compare potential attendees' schedules to your own, their appointments show a different-colored bar from your appointments. Empty slots are times when everyone is available for a meeting. When two or more people have overlapping appointments, the color bar shows a pattern of diagonal stripe. Unless you change the colors, your busy time slots contain a blue color bar. Other users' busy time slots contain a gray color bar. You can change these display colors. For details, choose the Display command from the Options menu, and then press F1 for help.

After you see the schedules for everyone, you can decide the time and date for the meeting and send requests from the Planner. The Auto-Pick feature automatically highlights the next time slot when all attendees are available.

Note

To schedule meetings with other Schedule+ users, you must be working online - your computer must be connected to your postoffice.

To set up a meeting

1.	Display your Planner by clicking the Planner tab or pressing ALT+P.

2.	To select a date for a meeting, from the Edit menu, choose the Go To Date command, and then type the correct numbers.

The vertical color bars in the time slots indicate your current appointments.

Note that your name automatically appears in the Attendees box.

3.	Choose the Change button.

The names listed in the Select Attendees dialog box are the Schedule+ users on your postoffice. If any conference rooms or other resources have been set up on Schedule+, the rooms and resource names also appear in the address list.

4.	From the address list, select the name of a person you want to invite to the meeting, and then choose the Add button or press ENTER.

The person's name appears with yours in the Attendees box.

Repeat this step for each additional person you want to invite.

5.	Choose the OK button.

In your Planner, the names you selected appear in the Attendees box, and those users' schedules are overlaid on yours. The color bars indicate busy time slots. The empty time slots indicate when all attendees are available.

To remove the schedule information for a particular individual, select their name in the Attendees box.

6.	In the Planner, select a time slot when all the attendees are available by dragging across the desired time, or press the appropriate arrow keys until the time slot is selected.

7.	Choose the Request Meeting button, or press ENTER.

The attendees, date, and time you selected in your Planner are entered automatically in the Send Request dialog box.

8.	In the Subject box of the Send Request dialog box, type a brief description of the meeting.

9.	If you want to receive a response, select the Ask For Responses check box.

These responses will be collected in your Messages window and in your Mail Inbox.

10.	Choose the Send button.

When Schedule+ has successfully sent the request to the attendees, it books the meeting automatically for the appropriate date and time slot in your Appointment Book.


Scheduling Resources
Schedule+	15 of 17

Using the Planner to Schedule Meetings

Scheduling Resources

You can use Schedule+ to reserve resources, such as conference rooms, equipment, or services.

A technician, conference room, piece of equipment, or anything else can be assigned an Appointment Book by the Schedule+ administrator. The administrator who designates an account as a resource account can set it up so that an assistant controls the resource's schedule, or can give users access privileges to reserve the resource directly.

To schedule a room or resource while you are scheduling a meeting

Include the room or resource in the Attendees list.

To schedule a room or resource without inviting people to a meeting

1.	Display your Planner.

2.	If the conference room or resource isn't in the Attendees box, choose the Change button and select the name of the room or resource from the address list. Then choose the OK button.

If the name of the resource you want to invite isn't in the address list currently shown, check another address list. You can view other address lists the same way you do in mail.

3.	Select a time slot for using the resource, based on the times when it is available.

4.	Choose the Request Meeting button.

5.	In the Subject box, type a brief description of the meeting (optional).

6.	Optionally, in the message area, type any message you want to include in your meeting request.

7.	Choose the Send button.

If the room or resource has been set up so that you can enter your own requests in its Appointment Book, the appointment is booked automatically. If an assistant controls the schedule for the resource, he or she sends you a reply to your request.


Using the Messages Window to Schedule Meetings
Schedule+	16 of 17

Using the Messages Window to Schedule Meetings

If you are connected to a postoffice, the Messages window is available. The Messages window contains meeting requests and meeting responses. Meeting requests invite you to meetings other users have set up, and meeting responses are other users' replies to your meeting requests.

To use the Messages window, you must make it the active window by double-clicking its icon, clicking the restored window, or choosing Messages from the Window menu.

Schedule+ messages appear in your Mail Inbox, as well as in your Schedule+ Messages window. You can read, respond to, and delete messages from either place. For more information about your Mail Inbox, see Chapter 7, "Mail."

When you accept a request, Schedule+ automatically notifies the sender that you will attend and then schedules the meeting in your Appointment Book. When you decline a request, Schedule+ notifies the sender that you won't attend and makes no changes to your Appointment Book. When you tentatively accept a request, Schedule+ notifies the sender that you might attend and schedules the meeting as a tentative appointment in your Appointment Book.

When you invite people to a meeting, they reply by sending meeting responses to let you know whether they'll attend. The meeting responses arrive in your Schedule+ Messages window as entries in the message list. A check mark in a meeting response entry means the person is planning to attend; an "X" means the person is not planning to attend; and a question mark means the person might attend. Entries in bold letters are requests or responses you haven't read.

When you read a Schedule+ meeting request in the Mail Inbox or Schedule+ Messages window, you can accept, decline, or tentatively accept the invitation, using the buttons at the top of the request.

Although you can see whether someone is planning to attend by looking at the symbol in the message list, you can also display the message to see whether the person provided more information in the reply.


Advanced Features of Schedule+
Schedule+	17 of 17

Advanced Features of Schedule+

Some of the advanced features of Schedule+ are described here briefly. For more information, see online Help.

You can choose General Options from the Options menu to define how Reminders are sent, the start and end times for your daily schedule, and other items.

You can allow other users to see or update your schedule.

You can choose Set Access Privileges from the Options menu to specify which users can see your Appointment Book and Task list. When other users check your schedule to coordinate an event, they usually can view only the times you are available or busy.

If you want another person to update your schedule for you, you can designate that person as your assistant in the Set Access Privileges dialog box. Your assistant can modify your schedule and send and receive meeting requests on your behalf.

You can archive data and exchange data with other schedule programs.

To create and manage your Schedule+ archives, choose Create Archive or Open Archive from the File menu. To exchange appointment information with other scheduling programs, choose Export Appointments or Import Appointments from the File menu.

You can work offline and then merge changes back into your schedule on the postoffice.

When your computer is connected to your postoffice, you are working online, and your appointments are recorded in a file on the postoffice and on your computer. The filename for this file is your username plus the .CAL filename extension. If you have the Schedule+ software on another computer, such as a portable or home computer, you can use the Move Local File command from the File menu to copy this file to the other computer.

While you are working offline (without connection to your postoffice), you can add and modify appointments. When you return to your office computer and reconnect to Schedule+ on the postoffice, Schedule+ automatically merges the changes made offline into the copy of your schedule on the postoffice.


Command Prompt
Chapter 9	1 of 25

Command Prompt

The command prompt is the character-based interface to Windows NT and its subsystems. Any supported command or application can be run at the command prompt regardless of the operating system it was designed for:  Windows NT, Windows 3.1, MS-DOS, MS OS/2 1.x, or POSIX. The command prompt also supports batch programs, redirection between subsystems, cutting and pasting information between subsystems, command line editing, and file management for the NTFS, FAT, and HPFS file systems.

This chapter explains how to use the Windows NT command prompt. The chapter includes the following topics:

An overview of the Windows NT command prompt

Lists of available commands

An explanation of command syntax

An explanation of command prompt functions


Overview
Command Prompt	2 of 25

Overview

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

The Windows NT command prompt is a single interface providing seamless operation and integration of applications from four different operating systems. The Windows NT command prompt is a major enhancement to the command line interface on current personal computer operating systems allowing you to:

Start any Windows NT, Windows 3.1, MS-DOS, character-based MS OS/2 version 1.x, or POSIX-compliant programs.

Issue Windows NT commands. The command prompt retains and enhances almost all the commands used in MS-DOS (except new utilities in version 6.x) and contains several new commands.

Administer or use network resources. Many LAN Manager commands are available.

Cut and paste information between applications with the Clipboard.

Use piping or redirection of data between subsystems.


Starting and Quitting the Command Prompt
Command Prompt	3 of 25

Overview

Starting and Quitting the Command Prompt

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

Start the command prompt by double-clicking the command prompt icon. The command prompt window displays the command prompt in monospaced characters followed by a blinking cursor. The default command prompt is the current drive and directory enclosed in brackets.

To quit the command prompt

Type exit at the command prompt, or choose Close from the Control menu, or double-click the Control-menu box.

To quit the command prompt when it, or an application started at the command prompt, fails to respond

1.	From the Control menu, choose Settings.

2.	In the Special box, choose the Terminate button.

Use Terminate as a last resort. You should quit applications by using the application's Quit or Exit command.


Changing the Command Prompt Display
Command Prompt	4 of 25

Overview

Changing the Command Prompt Display

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

You can configure the appearance of the command prompt window using the Control menu. The icon in the upper-left corner of any window is that window's Control menu. The Control menu allows you to:

Cut and paste information between any two windows.

Toggle between window mode and full-screen mode.

Enable QuickEdit mode.

Toggle between insert and overtype mode.

Change fonts used in window mode.

Set the cursor size, screen buffer size, and the position of the window.

Change the colors of text and background for the main screen and pop-up boxes.

Set the number of buffers and buffer size for command history (a record of commands typed at the command prompt).

Set default values for all command prompt and character-based windows.

Hide the mouse pointer for character-based subsystem applications.

To open the Control menu

Click the Control-menu box once, or press ALT+SPACEBAR.

The Control menu opens and you can select from the list of commands. (If you are in full-screen mode, the application will minimize and the control menu will appear from the icon.) For information on Control menu commands not listed below, see Chapter 2, "Windows NT Basics."

Control menu settings are stored based on the initial window title. The settings for each command prompt icon are independent for each unique title. This allows you to have different defaults for different needs. Use the Configure Default Values menu item to configure all default settings for all windows that retain the title Command Prompt and all character-based windows that appear as the result of starting a program.

An application's internal display settings will usually override font and color settings made in the Control menu.

Changing Window Modes

The command prompt can be used in either window or full-screen mode. You can also use QuickEdit mode which allows you to use your mouse to cut and paste, bypassing the Edit menu. Insert Mode causes text to be inserted at the cursor. If Insert Mode is not on, text typed at the cursor replaces existing text (overtypes).

To toggle between window and full-screen mode

Press ALT+ENTER.

By default, the command prompt opens as a window on your desktop.

To change the default window display options

1.	From the Control menu, choose Settings.

2.	In the Display Options box, choose either Window or Full Screen.

3.	To use this display option every time you start the command prompt from this icon, ensure that the Save Configuration check box is selected. If this box is not selected, the display option will be in effect only while the current command prompt window is open.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To turn QuickEdit mode on or off

1.	From the Control menu, choose Settings.

2.	Select the QuickEdit Mode check box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

You can always use the Edit menu commands, whether QuickEdit mode is on or off. For more information about QuickEdit, see "Transferring Information to or from a Command Prompt Window," later in this chapter.

To turn Insert mode on or off

1.	From the Control menu, choose Settings.

2.	Select the Insert Mode check box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

4.	Press the ENTER button for the change to take effect.

Insert mode is off by default.

Changing Fonts for Window Mode

You can choose from different fonts and font sizes for the command prompt display. Default fonts are saved based on the title of the window. When you change fonts, the window size will change to accommodate the new font size.

To change fonts for the command prompt

1.	From the Control menu, choose Fonts.

2.	In the Font box, choose a font. In the Size box, choose a size. Check Bold Fonts if you want bold fonts.

The Selected Font box displays an example of the selected font and its width and height. The Window Preview box displays how the current window size will change based on the font you choose, although you can later resize the window up to the maximum screen buffer size.

3.	To use the font every time you start the command prompt from this icon, ensure that the Save Configuration check box is selected. If this box is not selected, the new font is displayed only while the current command prompt window is open.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Changing the Cursor Size or Screen Size and Position

The command prompt cursor (the text insertion point) can be one of three sizes.

To change the cursor size

1.	From the Control menu, choose Screen Size And Position.

2.	In the Cursor Size box, select small, medium, or large.

3.	To use this cursor size every time you start the command prompt from this icon, ensure that the Save Cursor Size check box is selected. If this box is not selected, your cursor setting is displayed only while the current command prompt window is open.

4.	Ensure that the other Save check boxes are selected if you want to use the current settings every time you start the command prompt.

5.	Choose the OK button.

For an explanation of how to return control of the mouse pointer to an application, see Chapter 11, "Running Non-Windows Applications."

The screen buffer size is the size reserved in memory for the command prompt display. The buffer size is measured by the number of characters wide by the number of lines high. The position is the current window position on the screen.

Scroll bars are displayed if the current size of the window is smaller than the screen buffer size settings. You cannot resize a window to be larger than the area set by the screen buffer settings. If you switch to full screen display, Windows NT will display the number of lines (25, 43, or 50) supported by your hardware that is closest to your window mode configuration.

To change the screen buffer size

1.	From the Control menu, choose Screen Size And Position.

2.	In the Screen Buffer Size box, set the width and height of the window using the up or down arrows next to the settings, or type the new value.

The width setting determines the number of characters in width. The height setting determines how many lines are stored in memory.

3.	To use these screen buffer size settings every time you start the command prompt from this icon, ensure that the Save Screen Buffer Size check box is selected. If this box is not selected, your screen buffer settings are displayed only while the current command prompt window is open.

4.	Ensure that the Save Window Size And Position check box is selected if you want to use the current window size and position every time you start the command prompt.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Changing Screen Colors

You can specify the color of the text and background of the command prompt window. You can also specify the color of the text and background of pop-up windows that originate from the command prompt. Pop-up windows (for example, command history windows) are smaller character-based windows that present information to choose from.

To change screen colors

1.	From the Control menu, choose Screen Colors.

2.	In the Screen Colors dialog box, choose the colors for screen text, screen background, pop-up text, and pop-up background by clicking the element you want to change, and then clicking the color you want.

The Selected Screen Colors or Selected Popup Colors box displays your choice.

3.	To use the same colors every time you start the command prompt from this icon, ensure that the Save Configuration check box is selected. If this box is not selected, your settings are displayed only while the current command prompt window is open.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Configuring Command History

The command prompt stores the commands you type. Command history can save you time if you use the same commands frequently.

You use the up or down arrow keys to recall the stored commands. Pressing F7 displays a pop-up box with the stored commands. You can then use the arrow keys to scroll though the list until the command you want is selected. Press ENTER to issue the command. You can specify how many commands the command prompt should store.

Command history will also store commands used within character-based programs that accept buffered input, such as software program debuggers. A history buffer (temporary storage place) is created for each running program that accepts buffered input. You can specify how many buffers the command prompt should create.

To change command history buffer size or number of buffers

1.	From the Control menu, choose Command History.

2.	In the Command History dialog box, type the new buffer size or number of buffers. Or use the up and down arrows next to each field to change the values.

3.	To use the same settings every time you start the command prompt from this icon, ensure that the Save Configuration check box is selected. If this box is not selected, the settings are used only while the current command prompt window is open.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Configuring Default Settings for All Character-Based Windows

You can specify the default settings for all command prompt windows that retain the title Command Prompt and all character-based windows (consoles) that appear as the result of running a program.

Using this method configures the default settings for all character-based windows, including the command prompt. When you configure any command prompt window and select the Save Configuration check box, those settings are saved based on the title of the window and will override settings made using the Configuring Default Settings window. Any command prompt window with the same title will display those settings.

To configure default settings for all character-based windows

1.	From the Control menu, choose Configure Default Values.

A window appears that looks like another command prompt window. This window contains text explaining how to configure default values. The window will not accept commands; it is used only to configure default values.

2.	Use the Control menu of this window to configure default settings for all character-based windows as described in the previous sections.

3.	Ensure that the Save Configuration check box is selected for every setting you change. If this box is not selected, your settings will not be saved.

4.	When you are finished changing default values, double-click the Control menu to close the Default Configuration window and return to the command prompt.


Command Prompt Unicode Support
Command Prompt	5 of 25

Overview

Command Prompt Unicode Support

The command prompt supports Unicode™ in addition to ANSI/OEM.

When using the MS Console Font, you can create and see characters in filenames and directory names on a local or network NTFS drive that are not part of your default OEM code page. File and directory names on a FAT drive are still limited to characters in the code page because of the FAT file system's dependence on the OEM code page.

All internal command prompt commands support Unicode or ANSI/OEM text files, as do the following utilities:  doskey, fc, find, help, more, print, sort, xcopy. The commands now auto-detect whether a file is Unicode or ANSI/OEM and will process files appropriately.


Getting Help for the Command Prompt
Command Prompt	6 of 25

Overview

Getting Help for the Command Prompt

Online Help is available for all commands at the command prompt and in a Windows NT help file.

Help at the Command Prompt

Online Help is available for all Windows NT commands. The following table shows how to access the different types of help available at the command prompt and the information provided.

Syntax	Information provided

help	Names of native system commands.

command /?	Description, syntax, parameters, and switches for commands. This syntax also provides help for commands that are not listed when you type help.

help command	Description, syntax, parameters, and switches for native system commands.

net help	Names of available network commands.

net help command	Description, syntax, parameters, and switches for network commands.

net command /help	Description, syntax, parameters, and switches for network commands.

net command /?	Syntax only for network commands.

net helpmsg message#	Explanation and action for the numbered Help message.

Online Command Reference

The Windows NT online Command Reference is available to provide command syntax and parameters, details about a command, and examples of the command in use. To use the online Command Reference, double-click the Help icon in the Main program group.


Command Prompt Commands
Command Prompt	7 of 25

Command Prompt Commands

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

Any supported Windows NT command can be run at the same command prompt. Windows NT commands are classified as follows:

Native commands

Subsystem commands

Configuration commands

TCP/IP utilities

Special-purpose utilities

Command symbols


Native Commands
Command Prompt	8 of 25

Command Prompt Commands

Native Commands

A native command takes advantage of the 32-bit operating system. Most commands familiar to MS-DOS users are now native Windows NT system commands.

Some commands, such as dir and chdir, are internal, meaning the command is processed by CMD.EXE and resides in memory at all times. Internal commands can be run only at the command prompt. Other commands, such as chkdsk and xcopy, are external, meaning the command is stored in its own file and loads from disk when you use the command. External commands can be run at the command prompt, from the Program Manager dialog box in the File menu, or from the Task List's New Task box. Batch commands are for use in batch programs only, as described later in this chapter.

Note

Many of the new utilities provided in MS-DOS version 6.x are not available in Windows NT version 3.5, or the functionality is provided by a different means. For more information, see the online Command Reference.

Command	Purpose

at	Schedules commands and programs to run on a computer at a specified time and date.

attrib	Displays or changes file attributes.

break	Sets or clears extended CTRL+C checking.

cacls	Displays or modifies access control lists (ACLs) of files.

call	Calls one batch program from another (batch command only).

chcp	Displays or sets the active code page number.

chdir (cd)	Displays the name of or changes the current directory.

chkdsk	Checks a disk and displays a status report.

cls	Clears the screen.

cmd	Starts a new session of the Windows NT command interpreter.

comp	Compares the contents of two files or sets of files.

convert	Converts FAT and HPFS disk partitions to NTFS partitions.

copy	Copies one or more files to another location.

date	Displays or sets the date.

del	Deletes one or more files.

dir	Displays a list of files and subdirectories in a directory.

diskcomp	Compares the contents of two floppy disks.

diskcopy	Copies the contents of one floppy disk to another.

doskey	Edits command lines, recalls commands, and creates macros.

echo	Displays messages or turns command echoing on or off.

endlocal	Ends localization of environment changes in a batch file (batch command only).

erase	Deletes one or more files. (See del.)

exit	Quits the Windows NT command interpreter (CMD.EXE).

fc	Compares two files or sets of files, and displays the differences between them.

find	Searches for a text string in a file or files.

findstr	Searches for strings in files using literal text or regular expressions.

for	Runs a specified command for each file in a set of files.

format	Formats a disk for use with MS-DOS or Windows NT.

goto	Directs Windows NT to a labeled line in a batch program (batch command only).

graftabl	Enables Windows NT to display an extended character set in full-screen mode.

help	Provides Help information for Windows NT commands.

if	Performs conditional processing in batch programs (batch command only).

keyb	Configures a keyboard for a specific language.

label	Creates, changes, or deletes the volume label of a disk.

mkdir (md)	Creates a directory.

mode	Configures a system device.

more	Displays output one screen at a time.

move	Moves one or more files from one directory to the specified directory.

net accounts	Displays or sets password and logon requirements of servers in a domain.

net computer	Adds computers to Windows NT Server domains (available on Windows NT Server only).

net config	Displays the controllable services that are running.

net config server	Displays or changes settings for the Server service while the service is running.

net config workstation	Displays or changes settings for the Workstation service while it is running.

net continue	Reactivates suspended services.

net file	Displays the names of all open shared files on a server and the number of file locks, if any, on each file. This command also closes individual shared files and removes file locks.

net group	Adds, displays, or modifies global groups (Windows NT Server only).

net help	Provides a list of network commands and topics you can get help with, or provides help with a specific command or topic.

net helpmsg	Provides help with a network error message.

net localgroup	Adds, displays, or modifies local groups.

net name	Adds, deletes, or displays messaging names on a workstation.

net pause	Pauses services or shared printers.

net print	Displays or controls print jobs.

net send	Sends messages to other computers on the network.

net session	Lists or disconnects sessions between a server and workstations.

net share	Creates, deletes, or displays shared resources.

net start	Starts a service or displays a list of started services. The following are the services provided with Windows NT that can be started: alerter, client service for netware, clipbook server, computer browser, dhcp client, directory replicator, eventlog, ftp server, gateway service for netware, lpdsvc, messenger, net logon, network dde, network dde dsdm, network monitoring agent, nt lm security support provider, ole, remote access connection manager, remote access isnsap service, remote access server, remote procedure call (rpc) locator, remote procedure call (rpc) service, schedule, server, simple tcp/ip services, snmp, spooler, tcp/ip netbios helper, ups, and workstation.

The following services are available only on Windows NT Server: file server for macintosh, gateway service for netware, microsoft dhcp server, print server for macintosh, and windows internet name service.

net statistics	Displays the statistics log.

net stop	Stops a network service.

net time	Synchronizes the computer's clock with that of a server or domain, or displays the time for a server or domain.

net use	Connects a computer to or disconnects a computer from a shared resource, or displays information about computer connections.

net user	Adds or modifies user accounts or displays user account information.

net view	Displays a list of servers or displays resources being shared by a server.

path	Displays or sets a search path for executable files.

pause	Suspends processing of a batch file and displays a message (useful only in batch programs).

popd	Changes to the directory stored by the pushd command.

print	Prints a text file while you are using other Windows NT commands.

prompt	Changes the Windows NT command prompt.

pushd	Stores the current directory for use by the popd command, and then changes to the specified directory.

recover	Recovers readable information from a bad disk.

rem	Records comments (remarks) in batch files. Also available as a configuration command for the MS-DOS and OS/2 subsystems.

rename (ren)	Renames a file or files.

replace	Replaces files.

restore	Restores files that were backed up with MS-DOS backup.

rmdir (rd)	Removes a directory or directory tree.

set	Displays, sets, or removes Windows NT environment variables.

setlocal	Begins localization of environment changes in a batch file (batch command only).

shift	Shifts the position of replaceable parameters in batch files (batch command only).

sort	Sorts input.

start	Starts a separate window to run a program or command.

subst	Associates a path with a drive letter.

time	Displays or sets the system time.

title	Sets the title for the command prompt window.

tree	Graphically displays the directory structure of a drive or path.

type	Displays the contents of a text file.

ver	Displays the Windows NT version number.

verify	Tells Windows NT whether to verify that your files are written correctly to a disk.

vol	Displays a disk volume label and serial number.

xcopy	Copies files and directory trees.


Subsystem Commands
Command Prompt	9 of 25

Command Prompt Commands

Subsystem Commands

Windows NT includes 16-bit commands for the MS-DOS and other subsystems. These are older commands, such as edlin or graphics, and MS-DOS–specific commands, such as debug or exe2bin. These 16-bit commands are included to maintain MS-DOS compatibility.

Other MS-DOS subsystem commands, such as share, perform functions that are now inherent to Windows NT or the MS-DOS subsystem. The commands are accepted to preserve compatibility with existing files, but the commands have no effect because the functionality is automatic in Windows NT.

Command	Purpose

append	Allows programs to open data files in specified directories as if they were in the current directory.

backup	Backs up one or more files from one disk onto another.

debug	Runs Debug, a program testing and editing tool for MS-DOS applications.

edit	Starts MS-DOS Editor, which creates and changes ASCII files.

edlin	Starts Edlin, a line-oriented text editor.

exe2bin	Converts .EXE (executable) files to binary format.

expand	Expands one or more compressed files.

fastopen	Starts the Fastopen program.

graphics	Loads a program that can print graphics.

loadfix	Loads a program above the first 64K of memory, and then runs the program.

loadhigh (lh)	Loads a program into the upper memory area.

mem	Displays the amount of used and free memory for the MS-DOS subsystem.

nlsfunc	Loads country-specific information.

qbasic	Starts the QBasic programming environment.

setver	Sets the version number for MS-DOS that Windows NT reports to a program.

share	Starts the share program.


Configuration Commands
Command Prompt	10 of 25

Command Prompt Commands

Configuration Commands

You configure the MS-DOS subsystem with configuration commands, such as device or lastdrive. Place these commands in the CONFIG.NT file in the \systemroot\SYSTEM32 directory. These commands affect only the MS-DOS subsystem. Many of them, such as buffers and break, are ignored because the MS-DOS subsystem does not use them. They are accepted for compatibility only.

You configure the OS/2 subsystem with CONFIG.SYS commands, such as devicename or libpath. You must use an OS/2 editor to edit C:\CONFIG.SYS. No other method can be used to change the OS/2 subsystem CONFIG.SYS file. These commands affect only the OS/2 subsystem.

For more information on Windows NT subsystems, see Chapter 11, "Other Application Environments."

Command	Purpose

buffers	Allocates memory for a specified number of disk buffers when the system starts.

codepage	Specifies which code pages your system is prepared to use. (OS/2 only).

country	Enables a subsystem to use international time, dates, currency, case conversions, and decimal separators.

device	Loads into memory the device driver you specify.

devicehigh	Loads into high memory the device driver you specify.

devinfo	Specifies the information a device needs in order to use a particular code page (OS/2 only).

dos	Specifies that the MS-DOS subsystem is to maintain a link to its upper memory area or is to load part of itself in the high memory area (HMA).

dosonly	Prevents starting applications other than MS-DOS-based applications from the COMMAND.COM prompt.

driveparm	Defines parameters for block devices (OS/2 only).

echoconfig	Displays messages when the MS-DOS subsystem CONFIG.NT file is read.

fcbs	Specifies the number of file control blocks (FCBs) the command prompt can have open at the same time.

files	Sets the number of files that the command prompt can access at one time.

install	Loads a memory-resident program into memory.

lastdrive	Specifies the maximum number of drives you can access.

libpath	Specifies the location of OS/2 dynamic-link libraries (OS/2 only).

ntcmdprompt	Runs the Windows NT command interpreter, CMD.EXE, rather than COMMAND.COM after running a TSR or after starting the command prompt from within an MS-DOS application.

protshell	Specifies the name and location of the MS OS/2 command interpreter (OS/2 only).

shell	Specifies the name and location of the command interpreter for the MS-DOS subsystem.

stacks	Supports the dynamic use of data stacks to handle hardware interrupts.

switches	Forces an enhanced keyboard to behave like a conventional one.


TCP/IP Utilities
Command Prompt	11 of 25

Command Prompt Commands

TCP/IP Utilities

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

The TCP/IP utilities offer network connections to non-Microsoft hosts such as UNIX® system computers. You must have the TCP/IP network protocol installed to use the TCP/IP utilities.

For more information about the TCP/IP utilities and network protocol, see the TCP/IP Help file, TCPIP.HLP.

Command	Purpose

arp	Displays and modifies the IP-to-Ethernet address translation tables.

finger	Displays information about users on a remote system.

ftp	Transfers files to and from a node running ftp service; similar to tftp.

hostname	Prints the name of the current host.

ipconfig	Displays all current TCP/IP network configuration values.

lpq	Obtains status of a print queue on a host running the LPD server.

lpr	Prints a file to a host running an LPD server.

nbtstat	Displays protocol statistics and current TCP/IP connections using NBT.

netstat	Displays protocol statistics and current TCP/IP connections.

ping	Verifies connections to a remote host or hosts.

rcp	Copies files between computers.

rexec	Provides remote execution facilities similar to rsh. Rexec is password protected.

route	Manually manipulates network routing tables.

rsh	Runs commands on remote hosts.

tftp	Transfers files to and from a node running ftp service using trivial file transfer protocol; similar to ftp.

tracert	Determines the route taken to a destination.


Special-Purpose Utilities
Command Prompt	12 of 25

Command Prompt Commands

Special-Purpose Utilities

Special-purpose utilities are native 32-bit utilities, but they have a very limited purpose and may not appear in future versions of Windows NT.

Command	Purpose

aclconv	Restores OS/2 2.x ACLs to NTFS volumes.

diskperf	Starts, stops, and displays system disk performance counter use.

ipxroute	Manages the source routing variables of the NWLink protocol on a token-ring network. This command is available only if the NWLink protocol has been installed.

macfile	Manages Services for Macintosh servers, volumes, files, and directories (Windows NT Server only).

portuas	Converts a LAN Manager user account subsystem to a Windows NT user account database.

rasdial	Connects to a RAS server and provides remote access to the server and its network.


Command Symbols
Command Prompt	13 of 25

Command Prompt Commands

Command Symbols

Eleven command symbols allow you to manipulate the input or output of a command and permit conditional execution of a command. Used with commands and filter commands, the command symbols are powerful tools.

Symbol	Purpose

>	Redirects output.

>>	Appends redirected output to existing data.

<	Redirects input.

|	Pipes output.

||	Runs the command following the symbol only if the command preceding the symbol fails.

&	Separates multiple commands on the command line.

&&	Runs the command following the symbol only if the command preceding the symbol is successful.

( )	Groups commands.

^	Allows input of command symbols as text. Escape character.

; or ,	Separates parameters.

Sort, more, and find are the native filter commands that allow you to sort input and output, cause output to the screen to be displayed one screen at a time, and search for specified text in a file.

For complete syntax and explanations of the command symbols and filter commands, see the online Command Reference.


Command Syntax
Command Prompt	14 of 25

Command Syntax

Syntax is the order in which you must type a command and the elements that follow the command. Windows NT commands have up to four elements:  command name, parameters, switches, and values.

These two examples contain all four elements. Each element is explained below.

The first example lists all hidden files in the C:\LETTERS directory. The second example allows up to 10 users to connect to the C:\USERS\PUBLIC directory.


Command Names
Command Prompt	15 of 25

Command Syntax

Command Names

The command name, which you type first, states the action you want Windows NT to carry out. Some commands (such as the cls command, which clears your screen) consist only of a command name. Most Windows NT commands require more than a name. All network commands are preceded by the word net, for example, net share or net use.


Parameters
Command Prompt	16 of 25

Command Syntax

Parameters

Windows NT sometimes requires additional information, which you specify in one or more parameters after the command name. A parameter defines or creates the object you want Windows NT to act on. For example, the del command requires a parameter that is the name of the file you want to delete.

Some commands require more than one parameter. For example, to rename a file by using the rename (ren) command, you must include the original name of the file in addition to the new name. The following command renames LETTER.TXT to MEMO.TXT:  ren letter.txt memo.txt.

Caution

Some Windows NT commands accept semicolons to separate parameters. For example, if you wanted to delete all files on drive A and mistakenly typed del a;\*.*, Windows NT would erase the file A in the current directory and all files in the root directory of the current drive.

Position in the syntax line determines how a command works and whether a parameter is a source (first) or a destination (second). In the example above, the source, LETTER.TXT, specifies the location of data to be transferred or used as input to a command. The destination, MEMO.TXT, specifies a location to which the data specified by source is to be transferred.

Using Special Characters in Parameters

In a Windows NT command, a computer name, share name, username, or group name can contain special characters (for example, PROFIT&LOSS).

To type a parameter with a special character

Type the escape character (^) before the special character. For example, type net use g:  \\profit^&loss\reports.


Switches
Command Prompt	17 of 25

Command Syntax

Switches

Switches modify how a command performs a task. A switch is a forward slash (/) or a hyphen (-) usually followed by words, letters, or numbers. Some Windows NT commands do not have switches, whereas others have several.

If a command has more than one switch, you type them one after the other, separated with a space. Switches may be in any position or order after the command name. Some commands accept more than one switch after a forward slash. Other commands, such as TCP/IP utilities, accept a hyphen (-) instead of the forward slash.

The terms "parameter" and "switch" are often interchanged, since both elements follow the command name. The only meaningful difference between a switch and parameter is the presence of a forward slash or hyphen to indicate a switch and the parameter position in the syntax line to indicate whether the parameter is a source or destination. The term "argument" is also used to refer to parameters or switches.

Using the /Yes and /No Switches

With some network commands, Windows NT issues a prompt that requires a user response before a task can be completed. You can append the /yes (/y) or /no (/n) switch to a command to force a Yes or No answer for all responses. For example, stopping the Workstation service causes Windows NT to stop dependent services; Windows NT will prompt you before stopping each dependent service unless the /yes switch is included, as in the following:  net stop workstation /y.


Values
Command Prompt	18 of 25

Command Syntax

Values

Values determine how a switch works. A value is a colon (:) or an equal sign (=) followed by a word, letter, or number and must immediately follow the switch it modifies without a space. The following example of the format command contains two values, the file system to use (NTFS) and a volume label (Backup2):  format d:  /fs:ntfs /v:backup2.

Check the syntax for the specific command in online Help to determine if the command you want to use requires an equal sign or a colon.


Using the Command Prompt
Command Prompt	19 of 25

Using the Command Prompt

This section explains how to:

Start applications and use batch programs.

Cut and paste information to or from a command prompt window.

Simplify entering repetitive commands.

Pause or cancel execution of a command.


Starting Programs at the Command Prompt
Command Prompt	20 of 25

Using the Command Prompt

Starting Programs at the Command Prompt

You can start any program at the command prompt by typing the filename of the program.

To start a program at the command prompt

Type the program's executable file name, and then press ENTER.

For example, typing clock will start Clock (from the Accessories group).

The command prompt window used to start the program is unavailable until you stop the program.

To start a program at the command prompt and retain use of the command prompt window

Type start followed by the program's executable file name, and then press ENTER.

For example, typing start calc will start Calculator (from the Accessories group).

The command prompt window still accepts commands.

You can include the /separate switch to run Windows 3.1 programs in their own memory space. This ensures that if a Windows 3.1 application fails, it won't cause any other Windows 3.1 applications to fail. For more information on running Windows 3.1 applications in their own memory space, see Chapter 11, "Other Application Environments."

You can also pass additional parameters to a program at the command prompt. For example, the command notepad letter.txt starts Notepad and automatically loads the file LETTER.TXT.

When starting Event Viewer, User Manager, or Server Manager at the command prompt, you can improve their performance on networks with slow speeds by using the /l switch to run in low speed mode or the /h switch to run in high speed mode. These options are also available within each program; it is necessary to use these command prompt switches only if you choose to start these programs at the command prompt.

Other programs may accept parameters specific to the program. Each program determines the parameters it will accept at the command prompt. To determine whether a program will accept parameters at the command prompt, see the documentation for that program.

While a program or command is running, the window or icon title displays the program or command currently running. When the command finishes running, the program or command is removed from the window or icon title.


Batch Programs
Command Prompt	21 of 25

Using the Command Prompt

Batch Programs

Batch programs (also called batch files) allow you to simplify routine or repetitive tasks. A batch program is an unformatted text file that contains one or more commands and has a .BAT or .CMD filename extension. When the filename is typed at the command prompt, the commands in the file are executed sequentially.

Any command can be included in a batch file. In addition, several commands allow conditional processing of the commands in the batch file. For example, the if command carries out a command based on the results of a condition. Other commands allow you to control input and output and call other batch programs.


Transferring Information to or from a Command Prompt Window
Command Prompt	22 of 25

Using the Command Prompt

Transferring Information to or from a Command Prompt Window

You can transfer information to or from the command prompt using either QuickEdit mode or the Edit menu commands.

Note

To quickly switch a command prompt or subsystem application between a full screen and a window, press ALT+ENTER.

Copying and Pasting Information using QuickEdit Mode

QuickEdit mode allows you to copy and paste text in command prompt windows using only your mouse, bypassing the Control menu's Edit commands. QuickEdit mode copies data only when the command prompt is running as a window; however, you can paste in QuickEdit mode when the command prompt is either a window or a full screen. The data is treated as text. Use the Settings command from the Control menu to turn QuickEdit mode on or off.

Note

When QuickEdit mode is on, the mouse is disabled in all programs started at that command prompt. Use the start command to retain use of the mouse when starting a program from a command prompt window with QuickEdit mode enabled.

To cut and paste text at the command prompt using QuickEdit mode

1.	If necessary, use the Settings command from the Control menu to turn QuickEdit mode on.

2.	Position the arrow cursor at the beginning of the text you want to copy. Press the left mouse button. Keeping the left mouse button depressed, drag the cursor to the last character of the section you want to copy and release the left mouse button. The portion of the screen you want to copy is highlighted.

3.	Press the right mouse button to copy the highlighted area to the Clipboard. The highlight will disappear.

4.	Press the right mouse button to copy the contents of the Clipboard to the command prompt cursor. If the area copied was more than one line, a carriage return (ENTER) is added at the end of each line.

You must still use the Paste command from the Edit menu to paste the contents of the Clipboard into Windows applications.

Copying and Pasting Information Using the Edit Menu

The Edit menu commands allow you to copy and paste information in any window, not just command prompt windows. The data is transferred as text or as a bitmap to the Clipboard depending on how it was copied.

To copy selected information as text from a command prompt window or character-based application running in a window

1.	Press ALT+SPACEBAR to open the Control menu.

2.	From the Control menu, choose Edit.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Mark.

4.	Select the information you want to copy using a mouse.

5.	Press the right mouse button to transfer the selected information to the Clipboard or choose Edit and then choose Copy from the Control Menu.

To copy the contents of an entire screen onto the Clipboard as a bitmap

1.	Make sure the information you want to copy is on the screen.

2.	Press PRINT SCREEN.

The contents of the screen are copied onto the Clipboard.

To copy a window and its contents onto the Clipboard as a bitmap

1.	Make sure the window you want to copy is the active window.

2.	Press ALT+PRINT SCREEN.

A bitmap of the active window is created and placed onto the Clipboard. The application you want to transfer the information to must be able to read bitmap (.BMP) files.

To paste information into an application as text

1.	Make sure the information you want is on the Clipboard.

2.	Switch to the destination window.

3.	Place the insertion point where you want the information from the Clipboard to appear.

4.	If the application is running in full-screen mode, press ALT+SPACEBAR to open the Control menu.

5.	From the window's Control menu, choose Edit.

6.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste. If the area copied was more than one line, a carriage return (ENTER) is added at the end of each line.


Editing Commands with Doskey and Editing Keys
Command Prompt	23 of 25

Using the Command Prompt

Editing Commands with Doskey and Editing Keys

Windows NT provides Doskey to give you quick access to your most recent commands and enable you to assign frequently used command(s) to a single keystroke. Doskey is always available; you do not need to load the program into memory. Doskey is also available for character-based programs that accept buffered input.

The UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys cycle through commands previously entered. Press F7 to display all of the previous commands in a pop-up box; then use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to select a command and press ENTER (or press ESCAPE to cancel). Doskey also allows you to assign multiple commands to a single key or typed alias.

In addition to Doskey, several editing keys allow you to use and edit the last command you typed. Press F1 to display the last command one character at a time, or press F3 to display the entire command. Use the BACKSPACE or LEFT ARROW key to move the cursor in a command. The INSERT key toggles between insert and overtype mode.

For more information on Doskey and the command editing keys, see the online Command Reference.


Pausing or Canceling a Command
Command Prompt	24 of 25

Using the Command Prompt

Pausing or Canceling a Command

You can pause or stop the output of a command.

To pause the output of a command

Press CTRL+S or PAUSE.

Press any key except PAUSE to restart the output of the command. You can stop and restart the output of a command as many times as you want.

To stop Windows NT from completing a command

Press CTRL+BREAK or CTRL+C.

Your command is canceled, and the command prompt appears.

Important

Any action Windows NT carried out before you pressed CTRL+BREAK or CTRL+C cannot be undone.


Differences from MS-DOS and LAN Manager Commands
Command Prompt	25 of 25

Differences from MS-DOS and LAN Manager Commands

Windows NT retains and enhances almost all the functionality of MS-DOS and LAN Manager. For a detailed list of the differences, see the online Command Reference.


Command Prompt

Choosing the Properties Command


Choosing the Properties Command

Console


New Command-Line Utilities

Schedule Service

Changed Functionality for Command-Line Utilities


Object Linking and Embedding
Chapter 10	1 of 12

Object Linking and Embedding

In Windows NT, you can share information between applications using the special object linking and embedding (OLE) capabilities of Windows-based applications.

This chapter provides an overview of methods for sharing information between applications or documents, including the following topics:

An overview of object linking and embedding

Linking or embedding an object with menu commands

Linking or embedding objects with OLE applications

Maintaining linked or embedded objects


Overview
Object Linking and Embedding	2 of 12

Overview

With object linking and embedding, you can combine information from several applications into one compound document. You can also edit the information, without knowing which application was used to create it.

The applications included with Windows NT that have OLE capabilities are Cardfile, ClipBook Viewer, Mail, Paintbrush, Sound Recorder, and Write. For more information about how to use the OLE features of these Windows NT accessories, see the online Help for each. For information about the OLE capabilities of other Windows-based applications, see the documentation for those applications.

The following are basic OLE terms:

An object is any document, part of a document, or command created in a Windows-based application that has OLE capabilities. For example, a single cell in a spreadsheet, a range of cells, or an entire spreadsheet might be inserted as a linked or embedded object in a word processing document. When you choose an object to edit it, the application associated with that object starts automatically.

A package is an embedded icon that contains an object. A package can be inserted into any document created in an OLE application. When you choose a package, Windows executes any command associated with the package or runs the application in which the packaged information was originally created.

A compound document is any document that contains a linked or embedded object or package.

Two kinds of documents can be involved when you create linked or embedded objects and packages:

A source document is the file where the information in the object or package was originally created. For example, if you want to paste art from Paintbrush into another document, the .BMP or .PCX file that contains the original artwork is the source document. If an object is embedded, it no longer has a source document.

A destination document is the file where the object or package is inserted. For an embedded object, this is sometimes also called the container document. For example, if you paste art from Paintbrush into a document created in Microsoft Write, that text file is the destination document.

You can insert a linked object in a destination document to display information that was created and saved in another document. The information in the destination document can be updated dynamically (that is, continuously and automatically) whenever the source document changes.

You can insert an embedded object in a destination document to present information created in another application; the information in the embedded object need not exist in another file outside your document. Use an embedded object when you want to make changes while working in your document, but do not need to save the information separately.

You can also insert a package in a document when you want users to be able to run a command from within a compound document or when you need only to display a representation of the information the source document contains. For example, if some readers will want to view background information, you might place a background document as a package in a summary report; readers can choose the package to open that document or ignore it.

OLE applications can act as either client or server:

A client application is any Windows-based application that can display and store linked or embedded objects. For example, if you paste art into a Write document, then Write is the client application. The OLE client application stores all information for an embedded object, such as its page position and how the object is activated and displayed.

A server application is any Windows-based application in which you can edit an object that you selected in an OLE client application. For example, if you choose art you pasted in a Write document, then the server application runs (for example, Paintbrush).

You can create a compound document that includes formatted text, graphics, and information from a spreadsheet or a database, plus icons that run sound recordings or play multimedia devices. The more hardware your system has for creating and playing multimedia through sound boards, CD-ROM, and other media players, the more complex and rich a document you can create using object linking and embedding.

But even using a basic PC and the applications included with Windows NT such as Write and Paintbrush, you can take advantage of linking and embedding to create compound documents. You use applications and features in Windows with which you may already be familiar, including several Edit menu commands in Windows-based applications, plus ClipBook Viewer, File Manager, and Object Packager.

Feature or application		Used for
Edit-menu commands in Windows-based applications		Creating objects, editing object content, and repairing or removing links. For details, see "Linking or Embedding an Object with Menu Commands."
ClipBook Viewer		Saving and sharing Clipboard contents, and linking objects saved on another computer. For details, see "Using ClipBook Viewer."
File Manager		Linking or embedding files in documents through copying or drag-and-drop. For details, see "Using File Manager to Create a Package."
Object Packager		Creating and editing packages that contain files, parts of documents, or commands. For details, see "Using Object Packager to Create a Package."


File Security and Linked Objects
Object Linking and Embedding	3 of 12

File Security and Linked Objects

Because an embedded object is simply part of the document that contains it, the access restrictions that apply to the document also apply to embedded objects within the document.

The security of linked objects, however, is defined with the source document. The object you see in the destination document is only a representation of data contained in the source document. Suppose, for example, a word processing document contains a linked chart that was created in a spreadsheet product. The word processing document contains a copy of the chart, which you can view or print if you have read permission. But to edit the chart, you must have write permission for the source document, the file that contains the chart.


Linking or Embedding an Object with Menu Commands
Object Linking and Embedding	4 of 12

Linking or Embedding an Object with Menu Commands

The procedures for linking or embedding objects with menu commands are generally the same as those you use for copying and pasting information.

The following table shows typical commands used for sharing information in Windows-based applications. Check the documentation for your application to find the actual command names used.

Command	Action
Paste	Inserts information from the Clipboard into the destination document.
Paste Link	Inserts a linked object from the Clipboard. The information appears in the destination document but is defined and stored in the source document.
Paste Special	Displays a dialog box so you can choose the data format for the object before pasting it, and also choose either to paste a linked object or to paste only the information.
Links	Displays the Links dialog box so you can update the display of an object, cancel links, repair broken links, or edit an object.
Insert Object	Displays a dialog box so you can choose the type of objectto insert, and then embeds the object you create in the destination document. This command is a shortcut for running the server application to create the information, copying the information to the Clipboard, and then pasting it into the destination document with Paste Special.
Object (command name varies)	Starts the server application so you can edit or open a linked or embedded object. The actual command name depends on the selected object, such as Package Object or Picture. This command name might also be, for example, Edit Object, depending on the action allowed for that object. If several actions are possible, choosing this command displays another menu that lists other commands.
Some Windows-based applications such as Microsoft® Excel provide macros to control linking and embedding actions, using dynamic data exchange (DDE). For more information, see the technical reference for your application.

The following sections describe basic procedures for linking and embedding objects using the menu commands in your Windows-based applications.


Creating a Linked or Embedded Object
Object Linking and Embedding	5 of 12

Linking or Embedding an Object with Menu Commands

Creating a Linked or Embedded Object

You can use the copy-and-paste commands from the Edit menu of OLE applications to create linked or embedded objects.

To create an embedded object using the Edit menu commands

1.	Open the source document, select the information to be embedded, and then choose Copy from the Edit menu.

2.	Open the destination document, and then move the insertion point to where you want to insert the embedded object.

3.	Choose Paste from the Edit menu.

The result depends on the OLE capabilities of the applications used to create the source and destination documents. If you choose the Paste command in an application that does not support OLE, a static copy of the information is placed in the document. But if the application supports OLE, the information is placed in the best available format. For example, in Microsoft Write when there is text on the Clipboard, the information is pasted as text, not as an object. If the information is in Bitmap format, then the information is pasted as a Picture object.

You can also create an embedded object while working in the destination document by choosing the Insert Object command. For more information, see the documentation for your application.

To create a linked object using the Edit menu commands

1.	In the server application, open the source document.

If you want to create a linked object, make sure the file for the source document has been saved.

2.	Select the information to be linked.

3.	From the server application's Edit menu, choose Copy.

4.	In the client application, open the destination document, and then move the insertion point to where you want to insert the linked or embedded object.

5.	Choose Paste Link from the client application's Edit menu.

If the Paste Link command is not available, but you know there is information on the Clipboard, then the source document has not been saved. You must save the document before copying information, or save the information on the Clipboard in your local ClipBook as described in "Using ClipBook Viewer," later in this chapter.

In some applications, you can choose Paste Special if you want to choose the data type before pasting. Choosing the Paste button in this dialog box without choosing another data type has the same effect as choosing Paste from the Edit menu. The Paste Link button is available only if the format you select is supported by the application used to create the destination document.

Note

If you copy a linked object and paste it into another destination document, the link to the original source document is also copied and pasted.


Linking or Embedding Objects with OLE Applications in Windows NT
Object Linking and Embedding	6 of 12

Linking or Embedding Objects with OLE Applications in Windows NT

In addition to the accessories included with Windows NT such as Write and Sound Recorder that have OLE capabilities, several applications in Windows NT can be used to manage activities related to creating linked or embedded objects. These applications include the ClipBook Viewer for managing the Clipboard contents, and also File Manager and Object Packager for creating packages.


Using ClipBook Viewer
Object Linking and Embedding	7 of 12

Linking or Embedding Objects with OLE Applications in Windows NT

Using ClipBook Viewer

ClipBook Viewer provides temporary or permanent storage for information you want to transfer or share between applications and among members of your workgroup. You start ClipBook Viewer in the same way you do other applications, by choosing its icon in the Program Manager Main group. For information about all the options available in ClipBook Viewer, choose the Help button or press F1.

The following list shows the tools on the ClipBook Viewer toolbar. You can use these tools to choose commands and switch views.

Use		To		Use		To
		Connect to a ClipBook on another computer				Paste the contents of the Clipboard into the ClipBook
		Disconnect from a ClipBook on another computer				Delete contents of the Clipboard or selected ClipBook page
		Share a ClipBook page				Display the titles of the pages saved in the ClipBook
		Stop sharing a ClipBook page				Display thumbnail pictures of each page in the ClipBook
		Copy a selected ClipBook page onto the Clipboard				Display the contents of a selected ClipBook page
Saving and Sharing Information with ClipBook Viewer

You can use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands in Windows-based applications to place part or all of a document onto the Clipboard for pasting into another document. To store information placed on the Clipboard, you can paste it into your local ClipBook. Each item you paste into the ClipBook is called a page.

Your local ClipBook can hold up to 127 pages of information, and each page can have a name of up to 47 characters. The amount of information each page can hold is limited only by available storage space on your computer's hard disk.

To save information in ClipBook Viewer

1.	Cut or copy any amount of information in your Windows-based application.

2.	From the Edit menu in ClipBook Viewer, choose Paste. Or choose the Paste button from the toolbar.

3.	In the Paste dialog box, type a name for the page, and then choose the OK button.

You can copy information from ClipBook pages to place into documents created by other OLE applications, and you can share ClipBook pages with other users.

To share a ClipBook page

1.	In ClipBook Viewer, select the page you want to share.

2.	From the File menu, choose Share. Or choose the Share button on the toolbar.

3.	In the Share ClipBook Page dialog box, select the Start Application On Connect check box if the page contains data other than a bitmap or plain text.

Other users cannot establish links to formatted data unless the application used to create the information is already running on your computer.

4.	If the Start Application On Connect check box is selected, select the Run Minimized check box if you want the application to start as a minimized icon.

5.	To change users' permissions to access the shared page, choose the Permissions button.

By default, you have full control over a page you create, and everyone else has Read and Link access.

After you share a page, other workgroup members who know the correct password for the page can connect to your computer and use the shared page in their documents. You can also use ClipBook Viewer to connect to another person's computer, and then use any shared ClipBook pages from that computer in your documents, as described in the following section.

Linking an Object from Another Computer

If the source document is stored on a different computer, you can use ClipBook Viewer to place a linked object in a destination document stored on your computer. To take advantage of this, the object must be pasted as a page on the other computer's ClipBook, and the page must be designated as shared.

When you use ClipBook Viewer to link objects, the changes made in the source document are made automatically in all destination documents that contain the object.

To link an object stored on another computer

1.	Start ClipBook Viewer, and then from the File menu, choose Connect. Or choose the Connect button from the toolbar.

2.	In the Select Computer dialog box, type the name of the computer you want to connect to, or select the name from the Computers list, and then choose the OK button.

ClipBook Viewer displays the shared pages available in the ClipBook on the other computer.

3.	Select the page that contains the information you want to place as a linked object in your document.

4.	From the Edit menu, choose Copy. Or choose the Copy button from the toolbar.

5.	Open the destination document where you want to place the linked object.

6.	From the Edit menu of the destination document, choose Paste Link.

Or, if the application has a Paste Special command, choose Paste Special. Select the format for displaying the information, and then choose the Paste Link button.

7.	Save the destination document.

Maintaining the Security of Shared ClipBook Pages

You can control the access that individual users and groups have to shared ClipBook pages. You can also audit users who access shared pages, and you can take ownership of a page.

Setting Permissions on a ClipBook Page

Setting permissions on a ClipBook page specifies the access that a group or user has to it. Permissions are cumulative, except that the No Access permission overrides all other permissions. For example, if a user is a member of a group with Read permission and a member of a group with Change permission, the user will have Change permission.

To change permissions on the ClipBook page, you must be the owner of the page, or have been granted permission to do so by the owner.

To change or remove permissions on a ClipBook page

1.	Select a ClipBook page from the ClipBook window.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Permissions.

3.	Select the name of the group or user whose permission you want to change.

4.	Choose a permission from the Type of Access box.

Or, to remove ClipBook page permissions, select the name of the group or user in the ClipBook Permissions dialog box, and then choose the Remove button.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To add a group or user to the ClipBook permissions list

1.	From the Security menu, choose Permissions.

2.	In the ClipBook Permissions dialog box, choose the Add button.

The Add Users And Groups dialog box displays the groups on the computer or in the domain shown in the List Names From box. You can select another computer or domain from the List Names From box.

Domains appear only if your computer is a member of a domain on a Windows NT Server network. The domains shown have a trust relationship with the domain your computer belongs to.

3.	You can use options in the Add Users And Groups dialog box to display users, find the users in a group, or find the domain to which a group or user belongs.

To display the names of users on the selected computer or domain, choose the Show Users button.

To list a group's members, select the group, and then choose the Members button. Users are listed in a new dialog box. On a Windows NT Server network, global groups that are members of a local group appear in the list. To see a global group's members, select the group and choose the Members button. To include the group in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, choose the Add button. To include some of the group's users, select those users, and then choose the Add button.

To add a domain group or domain user, you must know which domain contains the group's or user's account. On a Windows NT Server network, choose the Search button to find the domain of a group or user. In the Find Account dialog box, type the name of the group or user in the Find User Or Group box, and specify the domains you want to search. Then choose the Search button. To include the groups or users in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, select them in the Search Results box, and then choose the Add button.

4.	To add groups or users to the permissions list, select them and choose the Add button, or double-click the name of the group or user. Or you can type the names of groups and users in the Add Names box, separating the names with a semicolon.

If the account of the group or user is not located on the computer or domain shown by the List Names From box, you must specify the location. Type the computer or domain name followed by the group or user name and separate the names using a backslash, for example shipping\ernesta. You can type the name without waiting for Windows NT to list groups in the Names box.

5.	In the Type of Access box, select the permission for the groups or users shown in the Add Names box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

For help with any dialog box, choose the Help button, or press F1 while using the dialog box.

Auditing ClipBook Pages

You can monitor, or audit, how specified individual users or members of groups are using shared ClipBook pages. You can audit both successful and failed actions. Windows NT stores the information generated from auditing in the security log. For information on the security log, see Chapter 17, "Event Viewer."

Before you can audit a ClipBook page, you must enable auditing for file and object access events in User Manager. For more information on setting audit policy, see Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

To audit pages, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group.

To audit a ClipBook page

1.	In the ClipBook window, select the ClipBook page.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Auditing.

3.	Select the name of the group or user.

4.	Select the events to audit, and then choose the OK button.

You can modify the auditing list for a shared ClipBook page at any time. You can add groups or users, and you can remove them.

To add a group or user to the auditing list

1.	In the ClipBook window, select the ClipBook page.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Auditing.

3.	In the Auditing dialog box, choose the Add button.

The Add Users And Groups dialog box displays the groups on the computer or in the domain shown by the List Names From box. You can select another computer or domain by using the List Names From box.

4.	You can use options in the Add Users And Groups dialog box to display users, find the users in a group, or find the domain to which a group or user belongs.

To display the names of users on the current computer or domain, choose the Show Users button

To list a group's members, select the group and choose the Members button. Users are listed in a new dialog box. On a Windows NT Server network, global groups that are members of a local group appear in the list. To see a global group's members, select the group and choose the Members button. To include the selected group in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, choose the Add button. To include some of the group's users, select those users, and then choose the Add button.

To add a domain group or domain user, you must know which domain contains the group's or user's account. On a Windows NT Server network, choose the Search button to find the domain of a group or user. In the Find Account dialog box, type the name of the group or user in the Find User Or Group box and specify the domains you want to search. Then choose the Search button. To include the groups or users in the Add Users And Groups dialog box, select them in the Search Results box and choose the Add button.

5.	To add groups or users to the audit list, select them in the Names box and choose the Add button, or double-click the name of the group or user. Or you can type the names of groups and users in the Add Names box. Separate names with a semicolon.

If the account of the group or user is not located on the computer or domain shown by the List Names From box, you must specify the location. Type the computer or domain name followed by the group or user name and separate the names using a backslash, for example, shipping\ernesta. You can type the name without waiting for Windows NT to list groups in the Names box.

6.	Choose the OK button.

To remove ClipBook page auditing for a group or user

1.	In the ClipBook window, select the ClipBook page.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Auditing.

3.	In the Auditing dialog box, select the name of the group or user in the list.

4.	Choose the Remove button.

For help with any dialog box, choose the Help button, or press F1 while using the dialog box.

Taking Ownership of a ClipBook Page

When you create a ClipBook page, you become the owner of it. By granting permissions, the owner controls how the ClipBook page is used.

To take ownership of a ClipBook page, you must either have Full Control access to the page or you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group.

Although an administrator can take ownership, an administrator cannot transfer ownership to others. This preserves security. For example, only an administrator who takes ownership and changes permissions can gain access to a ClipBook page on which the original owner has set No Access permission.

To take ownership of a ClipBook page

1.	Select the ClipBook page in the ClipBook Viewer window.

2.	From the Security menu, choose Owner.

3.	Choose the Take Ownership button.


Viewing the Contents of the Clipboard
Object Linking and Embedding	8 of 12

Linking or Embedding Objects with OLE Applications in Windows NT

Viewing the Contents of the Clipboard

With the Windows NT Clipboard, you can view information that has been cut or copied. You can view the contents of the Clipboard in a variety of formats, and you can save it as either a page in a ClipBook or as a file. You can also open files created in Clipboard and paste them in other documents.

To start Clipboard in ClipBook Viewer

In the ClipBook Viewer window, choose the Clipboard icon.

The View menu lists all the formats you can use to display the information currently on the Clipboard. Formats that are internal descriptions used by applications cannot be displayed on the screen. Such formats are also unavailable on the menu.

To view the Clipboard contents in another format, choose a format name from the View menu. To return to the format that appeared when you first started Clipboard, choose Default Format.

The formats available depend on the source application. For example, a graphics application such as Paintbrush might provide formats that other graphics applications can use, such as Bitmap, Picture, and Enhanced Metafile. The Native, ObjectLink, and OwnerLink formats cannot be displayed in Clipboard, but are used by the client application to identify what kind of information is on the Clipboard.

To save the Clipboard contents in a file that you can later open for pasting into documents, choose Save As from the File menu, and then specify a filename. Clipboard automatically adds the .CLP filename extension to the file.

To open a Clipboard file for pasting contents into a document, choose Open from the File menu, and then select a filename from the list provided.


Embedding a Package
Object Linking and Embedding	9 of 12

Linking or Embedding Objects with OLE Applications in Windows NT

Embedding a Package

A package is an embedded icon that contains an object, a file or part of a file, or a command. You might choose to embed a package in a document in various situations. For example, you can embed an icon:

To represent non-visual information, such as a sound clip for multimedia. At any time, you can choose the icon to play the recording.

To represent a specific document or executable file in a Mail message, so your readers can easily view or use the file contents.

To serve as a navigational link that connects information in various parts of other documents.

You can create, edit, and insert a package in several other ways, as described in the following sections. The following table summarizes these methods.

To create a package		To insert a package in a destination document
Copy a file in File Manager.		From the client application's Edit menu, choose Paste or Paste Link.
Drag a file icon from File Manager.		Drop the file icon in the window of the destination document.
Start Object Packager and follow the steps in Help.		From the client application's Edit menu, choose Paste.
Using File Manager to Create a Package

You can copy a file in File Manager and then use the Edit menu commands in your application to insert it as a package in a destination document. Or you can drag a file icon from File Manager to an application window if you want to link or embed the file as a packaged object.

For example, in a summary document you might embed a file package to serve as a token for another report or supporting details. Anyone who reads the summary document online can choose the icon to view the supporting report.

The embedded file must be associated with a file type and its filename extension defined in the Associate dialog box in File Manager. For information about how to add or change these associations, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

To link or embed a file package with Edit menu commands

1.	In File Manager, copy the file you want to link or embed.

2.	From the Edit menu in the destination document, choose Paste or Paste Link.

To embed a file package with drag-and-drop

1.	Start File Manager.

2.	Start the client application and open the destination document.

3.	To embed a file as a packaged object, drag its icon from File Manager, and then drop it in the window that contains the destination document.

The icon for the associated application is displayed in the destination document, with the filename as its label.

Note

If you want to create a file package with File Manager, the server application must have been written for Windows NT or Windows 3.1. If your application was written for an earlier version of Windows or for another operating system, you must use Object Packager to create the file package. Also, if you want the package to contain a linked document, you must use File Manager to place the file in Object Packager.

Using Object Packager to Create a Package

Object Packager is an application provided with Windows NT that you can use to create packages for placement in documents. With Object Packager, you can:

Create a package that contains a document or an executable command.

Create a package that contains a linked object.

Edit a package's contents, icon, or label.

Creating a package with Object Packager is the best choice when you want, for example, to share a linked object that resides on a Windows NT Server. If the package is then distributed in a mail message, all recipients can view the object contents without having to store large files on their computers.

To start Object Packager

1.	From the File menu in Program Manager, choose Run.

2.	In the Command Line box, type packager and then press ENTER.

To get help with Object Packager features and commands, press F1.

Note

If you place information in Object Packager that was created in an application that does not support OLE, the Picture option is not available.

To create a package in an e-mail message

1.	Save the source document in a shared directory.

2.	Start Mail and compose your e-mail message.

3.	From the Edit menu in Mail, choose Insert Object, and then in the Object Type box select Package.

4.	From the Edit menu in Object Packager, choose Command Line, and then type a complete path name for the file that you saved in a shared directory in step 1.

For example, type \\server1\public\filename.txt to identify a file saved in the root directory of the network server named \\SERVER1\PUBLIC.

5.	Choose the Insert Icon button in the Object Packager window, and then select an icon for the package you are sending. You can also choose Label from the Edit menu to define a label for the package.

6.	From the File menu in Object Packager, choose Exit, and then choose Yes in the message that asks if you want to update the mail message.

7.	Send your e-mail message in the usual way.

Each user who receives this e-mail message can choose the icon in the message to start the server application and view the contents of the file in the shared directory.


Maintaining Linked or Embedded Objects
Object Linking and Embedding	10 of 12

Maintaining Linked or Embedded Objects

After you create a linked object, you can edit, change, or break the link. You can also follow several steps to solve problems you might encounter with objects in destination documents, such as fixing broken links, finding unavailable server applications, or updating a linked object.


Editing an Object
Object Linking and Embedding	11 of 12

Maintaining Linked or Embedded Objects

Editing an Object

After a linked or embedded object has been inserted into a document, you can edit it by choosing the object or by using menu commands to run the server application.

To edit a linked object

1.	In the destination document, choose the object. The associated server application starts and the source document for the object is opened.

2.	Edit the object using the server application.

After you finish editing, the changes are automatically reflected in any destination document that displays the linked object.

Or, if the object has a manual link, choose the Update Now button in the Links dialog box to update the object. (For more information, see the online Help for the Links command in the destination application.)

3.	To save changes, choose Save from the server application's File menu while working in the source document.

To edit an embedded object

1.	In the destination document, choose the object to run the server application associated with the object.

2.	After you finish editing, choose Update from the server application's File menu, and then choose Exit to close the server application.

3.	To save changes, while working in the destination document choose Save from the client application's File menu.

The changes are saved only in the destination document, not in a separate file.

You can cancel a link so that updates in the source document are no longer made in the destination document. If you cancel a link and then decide you want to make changes, you must edit the object in the original application or source document, and then copy and paste it back into the destination document.

To cancel a link

1.	In the destination document, select the object whose link you want to cancel.

2.	In the Links dialog box, make sure the selected object is highlighted in the list. Choose the Cancel Link button, and then choose the OK button.

The information contained in the linked object remains in the destination document. Only the link has been removed.

In many applications, you can temporarily change an automatic link to a manual one, so the contents of a linked object are not updated or changed when other links are updated. For further information, see "Changing a Link or Fixing a Broken Link," later in this chapter.


Solving Problems with Linked or Embedded Objects
Object Linking and Embedding	12 of 12

Maintaining Linked or Embedded Objects

Solving Problems with Linked or Embedded Objects

This section describes solutions to problems you might encounter with linked or embedded objects in OLE applications.

Changing a Link or Fixing a Broken Link

You can use the Links command in the client application to change the filename of the source document to which an object is linked. For example, you might insert a report as a linked object in a spreadsheet. If you want that linked report to show information from a new file, you can change the link without replacing the object.

Also, the link to a source document can be broken if the location of the source document changes. To repair a broken link in the destination document, you can use the Links command to change the filename or path of the source document so that the link will work correctly again.

To change a link or fix a broken link

1.	In the destination document, select the object whose link you want to change.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

The following illustration shows an example of the Links dialog box, though it may appear somewhat different in various applications.

3.	In the Links dialog box, choose the Change Source button.

The Change Links dialog box appears, with options and control buttons that work the same way as those in the Open or Save As dialog box.

4.	In the File Name box of the Change Link dialog box, select the source document for the object's link, and then choose the OK button.

5.	When the Links dialog box reappears with the filename of the new source document selected, choose the OK button.

If a link no longer works after you try to repair it, you might need to delete the linked object, and then start over by pasting the object from the source document.

Responding to a "Server Unavailable" Message

You might receive a "server unavailable" message when you try to create, edit, play, or update an object in a destination document. The server application cannot respond if it is currently printing or performing other actions, or if a dialog box is open. To solve this problem:

Wait a few moments to find out if the application becomes available. If it does, the message disappears and your request is processed.

Or choose the Cancel button in the message, and then switch to the server application. Complete or cancel the action that causes the application to be unavailable.

Or make sure that the server application and source document are located in shared directories to which you have access. If the source document is on a different computer, make sure that computer is running.

Finding an Application if the Insert Object Command Fails

If you select an object type in the Insert Object dialog box, but the application doesn't open, then Windows NT cannot find the application. To solve this problem:

Make sure the server application for this object type is on your computer. For example, Sound Recorder (SOUNDREC.EXE) must be on your computer before you can insert or run a Sound object.

Make sure the directory for the server application matches the location specified in the Associate dialog box in File Manager.

Updating a Linked Object

If an object's link to its source document is manual, or if the server application is not open, the linked object must be manually updated in the destination document before changes appear. This is not true for packages that are represented by icons because when you choose the icon, the server application runs automatically.

If you make changes in the source document while the destination document is open, you must save the source document to see the changes in the destination document. If the link is manual, you must also update the linked object.

To update a linked object

1.	In the destination document, select the linked object.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Links.

3.	In the Links dialog box, choose the Update Now button, and then choose the OK button.

If you still have problems when you are trying to edit a linked object from the destination location, try the following:

Make sure the source document for the linked object you are editing is not located on another computer.

If the source document is located on another computer, make sure that computer is running.


Other Application Environments
Chapter 11	1 of 16

Other Application Environments

In addition to 32-bit applications designed for Windows NT, Windows NT supports applications designed for the following environments:  Windows 3.1, MS-DOS, 16-bit OS/2, and POSIX.

This chapter provides information on these environments, including the following topics:

How Windows NT runs applications

The Windows 3.1 environment

The MS-DOS environment

The OS/2 environment

Setting up and starting applications

Creating program information files (PIFs)


How Windows NT Runs Applications
Other Application Environments	2 of 16

How Windows NT Runs Applications

Windows NT is a modular operating system that uses operating subsystems to run applications. Each subsystem provides a different operating environment for applications. Windows NT runs Windows 3.1, MS-DOS, 16-bit OS/2, and POSIX based applications in addition to 32-bit applications designed for Windows NT.

The following table shows the Windows NT subsystems and the applications each subsystem supports.

Subsystem	Supports

Windows	Windows NT and Windows 3.1 based applications

MS-DOS 	Windows 3.1 and MS-DOS based applications

OS/2	16-bit character-based OS/2 applications (on x86-based computers only)

POSIX	POSIX applications compliant with IEEE Std 1003.1 and compiled using Windows NT

The Windows NT Executive is the portion of the operating system at the center of Windows NT that manages processes and memory. You can think of a process as a discrete set of computing tasks. Each time you start an MS-DOS, Windows 3.1, OS/2, or POSIX application, the Executive starts a process for the application's subsystem and starts the application within the process. When you run Windows 3.1 based applications, applications run by default as tasks within a single process.

Each process is protected. That is, the Executive makes sure that each process runs in its own area of the computer's memory. In this way, processes cannot interfere with one another. If an application fails, that failure will not affect the rest of the system.

Any application that you can run in Windows NT runs seamlessly. That is, you can start any application from Program Manager, File Manager, or the command prompt without concern for what sort of operating environment the application requires. This seamlessness allows full interaction among applications. Windows NT supports object linking and embedding (OLE), dynamic data exchange (DDE), full clipboard operation, and named pipes.


Supported Applications
Other Application Environments	3 of 16

How Windows NT Runs Applications

Supported Applications

Windows NT can run most Windows 3.1, MS-DOS, and 16-bit character-based OS/2 applications. Some of these applications use device drivers that directly address computer hardware. To protect the integrity of the operating environment, Windows NT prevents such drivers from being installed with the application: a device driver designed to run with Windows NT is required.

If you have an application that requires, but does not supply, a Windows NT-compatible device driver, check the application's manufacturer for the availability of new drivers. In some cases, the manufacturer may have developed a version of the application that is fully compatible with Windows NT. Check with the manufacturer for availability.

The following types of existing applications require either Windows NT-compatible device drivers or an application upgrade:

Applications that directly address hardware; for example, FAX cards, scanner cards, or terminal emulation cards

Applications that rely on their own disk device drivers; for example, applications that increase hard disk capacity

Applications that directly address disk drives; for example, disk maintenance applications

Applications that rely on their own graphics device drivers to address the hardware; for example, applications that use private printer drivers


Windows 3.1 Environment
Other Application Environments	4 of 16

Windows 3.1 Environment

Windows NT provides a complete operating environment for Windows 3.1 applications. The environment is comparable to the enhanced mode environment in Windows 3.1 where:

Virtual memory is supported (on x86-based computers only).

Object linking and embedding (OLE) is supported.

Dynamic data exchange is supported

Long filenames and path names are supported on NTFS and FAT partitions, but not on HPFS partitions.

On RISC-based computers, Windows NT provides the equivalent of the Windows Standard Mode environment.


Configuring the Windows 3.1 Environment
Other Application Environments	5 of 16

Windows 3.1 Environment

Configuring the Windows 3.1 Environment

When you install Windows NT, the installation program checks to see whether a previous version of Windows is installed on the computer. If it is, you should install Windows NT in the same directory as the previous version of Windows. This allows Windows NT to configure its environment based on the existing environment and allows Windows NT to support all the features of currently installed Windows 3.1-based applications.

Previous versions of Windows store Windows environment information in the WIN.INI and SYSTEM.INI files. Unlike previous versions of Windows, Windows NT stores this information in its registry database. If you installed Windows NT in the same directory as Windows 3.1, the first time you log on to Windows NT, Windows NT migrates any program groups that are not predefined for Windows NT (such as Main or Accessories) and the settings that configure your desktop.

If you later install a new application while running Windows 3.1, Windows NT does not automatically gather file association and object linking and embedding (OLE) information for the new application when you start Windows NT.

If you run Windows NT only, the WIN.INI and SYSTEM.INI files will not contain any Windows environment information. However, the files are available for use by Windows 3.1-based applications that require them to store their own configuration information.


Running a Windows 3.1 Application in Separate Memory
Other Application Environments	6 of 16

Windows 3.1 Environment

Running a Windows 3.1 Application in Separate Memory

When you start a Windows 3.1 (16-bit) application, by default it runs in the same memory space as other Windows 3.1 applications. You can, however, choose to run it in its own memory space.

Running a Windows 3.1 application in a separate memory space prevents it from affecting other Windows 3.1 applications if it crashes or hangs. It can also provide better responsiveness because it allows preemptive multitasking. However, it uses more memory.

Running a Windows 3.1 application in a separate memory space also prevents it from sharing memory with other Windows 3.1 applications, and some applications rely on this to work with other applications. However, cross-application communication using OLE or DDE will still work if you run one application in a separate memory space.

To run a Windows 3.1 application in its own memory space

1.	In Program Manager, from the File menu, choose Run.

2.	In the Command Line text box, type the path and name of the application.

When you do so, the Run in Separate Memory Space check box becomes available.

3.	Select the Run in Separate Memory Space check box.

To create a program item that runs a Windows 3.1 application in its own memory space

1.	In Program Manager, open the program group to which you want to add the program item.

2.	From the File menu, choose New. Then select the Program Item option and choose the OK button.

3.	Fill out the Description, Command Line, Working Directory, Shortcut Key, and Run Minimized boxes as you would normally. For more information, see Chapter 3, "Program Manager."

4.	Select the Run in Separate Memory Space check box. (This check box becomes active only when you type the path and filename of a Windows 3.1 application in the Command Line box.)

5.	Choose the OK button.

If you have an application that you always want to run in a separate memory space, and this application is associated with a particular file type, you can specify the file association in File Manager to start the application in a separate memory space. For more information on file associations, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

To change a file type so that its Windows 3.1 application starts in a separate memory space

1.	In File Manager, choose Associate from the File menu.

2.	In the Associate dialog box, select the file type you want to change in the Associate With list, and then choose the Change Type button.

3.	In the Change File Type dialog box, in the Command box, type cmd /c start /separate in front of the current contents of that box. This should change the value of that box to the following:

cmd /c start /separate c:\path\appname.exe %1

4.	Choose the OK button.


MS-DOS Environment
Other Application Environments	7 of 16

MS-DOS Environment

Windows NT provides a complete operating environment for MS-DOS applications.

Expanded memory is emulated for applications that require it.

On x86-based computers, character-based applications run either in a window or the full screen. Applications that use graphics run in the full screen.

Long filenames and path names are supported on NTFS and FAT partitions, but not on HPFS partitions.

On RISC-based computers, character-based and graphics-based applications run in a window only. You can change the size of the window using the Screen Size And Position command from the Control menu.


Configuring the MS-DOS Environment
Other Application Environments	8 of 16

MS-DOS Environment

Configuring the MS-DOS Environment

Windows NT configures the MS-DOS environment by reading the AUTOEXEC.BAT file when you log on, and by reading the AUTOEXEC.NT and CONFIG.NT files when you start an application in a new command window. The AUTOEXEC.NT and CONFIG.NT files are the Windows NT versions of AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS. In addition, you can use custom startup files to configure the MS-DOS environment. For more information on custom startup files, see "Creating Program Information Files (PIFs)," later in this chapter.

When you log on to Windows NT, the path and environment variables stored in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file are appended to the Windows NT path and environment settings. Because this portion of the operating environment is established at logon, the values set for the path and environment variables are available to each application you use. If you change these values, you must log off and log on to Windows NT again so that the changes take effect.

When you start an application in a new command window, Windows NT reads the CONFIG.NT and AUTOEXEC.NT files to configure the environment for the application. If, for example, you change an application's driver in the CONFIG.NT file, restarting the application puts the change into effect. You can edit these files just as you would CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT. The files are located in the C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32 directory.

As in previous versions of Windows, Windows NT allows you to customize the environment for each MS-DOS application by using program information files (PIFs).

Commands Available in CONFIG.NT

Windows NT supports the configuration commands shown in the table below. If you include commands in your CONFIG.NT file that are not supported, Windows NT ignores them. For more information on Windows NT commands, see Chapter 9, "Command Prompt."

Command	Function

country	Sets the language conventions for a specific country.

device	Loads an installable device driver. If necessary, you can load drivers that control memory, such as HIMEM.SYS, or that control character-based display, such as ANSI.SYS.

dos	Specifies how the upper memory area will be used.

dosonly	Prevents starting applications other than MS-DOS-based applications from the COMMAND.COM prompt.

echoconfig	Switches on the display of CONFIG.NT and AUTOEXEC.NT messages when you start an application.

fcbs	Sets the number of file control blocks (FCBs) that can be opened concurrently.

files	Sets the number of files that can be open at one time.

install	Loads a memory-resident program into memory.

loadhigh	Loads device drivers into the upper memory area.

ntcmdprompt	Runs the Windows NT command interpreter, CMD.EXE, rather than COMMAND.COM after running a TSR or after starting the command prompt from within an MS-DOS application.

rem	Marks lines in the CONFIG.NT file as comments (remarks).

shell	Specifies the command interpreter. Only the Windows NT command interpreter is supported.

stacks	Sets the amount of RAM reserved for processing hardware interrupts.

Commands Available in AUTOEXEC.NT

Windows NT supports a similar range of commands as MS-DOS for use in the AUTOEXEC.NT file. For more information on Windows NT commands, see Chapter 9, "Command Prompt."

Using Program Information Files

As in previous versions of Windows, when you start an MS-DOS application, Windows NT looks for a program information file (PIF) to use with the application. If you have been using a PIF to run an application in previous versions of Windows, you can continue to use it with Windows NT. However, Windows NT eliminates the need to set many PIF options and ignores options that do not apply. Windows NT also supports new options. You can specify startup files to configure an application's environment for each application you run. For more information on PIF options and creating PIFs, see "Creating Program Information Files (PIFs)," later in this chapter.

Some software manufacturers provide a PIF for an application. To determine whether a PIF has been supplied, contact the software manufacturer or search the disks for a file that has a .PIF filename extension. If you have PIFs from both Windows NT and the software manufacturer, use the PIF supplied by the manufacturer.

To use a PIF supplied with an application, copy the PIF to the directory where the application's files are located or to the directory where you set up Windows NT. Then, set up a program item so you can run the application from its PIF. For information about setting up a program item, see Chapter 3, "Program Manager."

Windows NT includes a PIF named _DEFAULT.PIF, located in the \systemroot directory. This PIF contains settings that work with most MS-DOS applications. Windows NT uses this PIF when it is the only one available for your application.


Running Memory-Resident Programs
Other Application Environments	9 of 16

MS-DOS Environment

Running Memory-Resident Programs

Windows NT supports MS-DOS memory-resident programs, also called pop-up and TSR (terminate-and-stay-resident) programs. Like any MS-DOS-based application you run in Windows NT, memory-resident programs run in the window in which they are started and can be used only within that window. MS-DOS-based TSR programs can function reliably only when running alone or with other MS-DOS-based applications.

In general, you should not start memory-resident programs from your AUTOEXEC.NT or CONFIG.NT files. If you do, each time you start an application that reads these files, you will also start another copy of the memory-resident program, thereby wasting memory.

If one of your applications requires a memory-resident program to work properly, start the memory-resident program and then start the application in the same command window. You can also create a custom startup file that starts the memory resident program, and then specify that startup file in the application's PIF. For more information on custom startup files, see "Custom Startup Files," later in this chapter.

When you exit an MS-DOS-based application, Windows NT returns to the Windows NT command interpreter, CMD.EXE. However, by default, when you run a TSR or temporarily suspend an MS-DOS-based application to return to the command prompt, Windows NT runs COMMAND.COM, the command interpreter for the MS-DOS environment. This preserves the MS-DOS environment, allowing you to use the TSR immediately. Because starting and running other types of applications from the COMMAND.COM prompt can disrupt a TSR or suspended MS-DOS-based application, Windows NT provides the dosonly command. The dosonly command allows only MS-DOS-based applications to be started from the COMMAND.COM prompt. You can include the dosonly command in your CONFIG.NT file or the equivalent custom startup file in an application's PIF.

When COMMAND.COM is running, some features of the Windows NT command prompt, such as the Doskey display of command history, are not available. If you would prefer to run the Windows NT command interpreter after you have started a TSR or started the command prompt from within an MS-DOS- based application, you can use the ntcmdprompt command. However, keep in mind that the TSR may not be available for use when you are running CMD.EXE. You can include the ntcmdprompt command in your CONFIG.NT file or the equivalent custom startup file in an application's PIF.

To run a memory-resident program with another application

1.	Start the memory-resident program.

You can start the program as you would any program in Windows NT:  from the command prompt, from File Manager, or from Program Manager.

2.	Start the application in the same window by typing its name at the command prompt and pressing ENTER.

A convenient way to start a memory-resident program with an application is to create a batch program that starts both programs, and then create a PIF for the batch program. For example, to create a batch program that starts the pop-up program SideKick® 2.0 and the word processor XyWrite®, use Notepad to create the following program and save the file as SKXYLOAD.BAT.

SK2

EDITOR

Then use PIF Editor to create a PIF that specifies SKXYLOAD.BAT in the Program Filename box. Give the PIF the same base name as the batch program, for example SKXYLOAD.PIF. You can start the programs from Program Manager by creating a program item for either the PIF or the batch program. You can also start both programs using the PIF or batch program in File Manager.

If you want to keep a pop-up program easily available while you are using Windows NT, you can start and run the program in a window. You can then switch to the window whenever you want, just as with any other program.

To run a pop-up program in a window

1.	Start the pop-up program.

You can start the program as you would any program in Windows NT:  from the command prompt, from File Manager, or from Program Manager.

2.	Press the appropriate key combination to display the program in the window.

A few pop-up programs require a key combination that is reserved for Windows NT, for example ALT+ESC. In such a case, create a PIF for the pop-up program and select the Reserve Shortcut Keys option for the conflicting key combination. Windows NT will reserve the key combination for use by the program so that you can display it.


OS/2 Environment
Other Application Environments	10 of 16

OS/2 Environment

Windows NT supports 16-bit character-based OS/2 applications on x86-based computers only. OS/2 bound applications (applications that can run under both OS/2 and MS-DOS) will run on RISC-based computers using the MS-DOS subsystem.


Configuring the OS/2 Environment
Other Application Environments	11 of 16

OS/2 Environment

Configuring the OS/2 Environment

When Windows NT starts for the first time, it checks the registry for OS/2 subsystem configuration information. If none is found, it looks for information in the original CONFIG.SYS file and adds the information to the registry. If the original CONFIG.SYS file does not exist or is not an OS/2 configuration file, the subsystem adds the following default information to the registry:

PROTSHELL=c:\os2\pmshell.exe c:\os2\os2.ini c:\os2\os2sys.ini

%SystemRoot%\system32\cmd.exe

SET COMSPEC=%SystemRoot%\system32\cmd.exe

The subsystem updates the environment variable Os2LibPath with LIBPATH information found in the original CONFIG.SYS file. The updated Os2LibPath is %SystemRoot%\system32\os2\dll concatenated with the list of directories specified in the LIBPATH line of the original CONFIG.SYS file.

Windows NT supports the OS/2 configuration commands shown in the table below. If you use commands that are not supported, Windows NT ignores them.

Command	Function

protshell	Specifies the command interpreter. Only the Windows NT command interpreter is supported.

devicename	Specifies a user-defined Windows NT device driver used by OS/2 applications.

libpath	Specifies the location of OS/2 16-bit dynamic-link libraries.

set	Sets environment variables.

country	Sets a country code that defines country-dependent information such as time, date, and currency conventions.

codepage	Specifies which code pages your system is prepared to use.

devinfo=KBD	Specifies the information the keyboard needs in order to use a particular code page.

The libpath, set, and devicename commands are processed as follows:

In CONFIG.SYS, libpath appends path information to the OS/2 library path in the Windows NT environment. At the command prompt, you can change the library path for OS/2 applications for only the current Command Prompt window by using the set os2libpath command.

To permanently change the OS/2 library path, you must change the Os2LibPath system environment variable using the System option in Control Panel. For more information, see "Changing the Environment Variables" in Chapter 5.

The following set commands are ignored in CONFIG.SYS:

set vio_ibmvga	set vio_vga	set prompt
set compspec	set video_devices
devicename specifies a device driver compatible with Windows NT for use with an OS/2 application. The syntax of the command is:

DEVICENAME=OS/2devicename [[path][NTdevicename]]

Devicename is the logical name OS/2 applications use to address the device. Path and NTdevicename specify the Windows NT device driver to which the OS/2 device name is mapped. If these are not specified, the device is mapped to \DEVICE\os/2devicename.

Changing OS/2 Configuration Information

Although the OS/2 configuration information is stored in the registry, you can edit that information just as you would edit an OS/2 CONFIG.SYS file. To edit the information, you must use an OS/2 text editor.

To change configuration information, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group.

To change configuration information

1.	While running Windows NT, start an OS/2 text editor in a window.

2.	Open the file called C:\CONFIG.SYS.

Windows NT retrieves the configuration information from the registry and stores it in a temporary file that you can edit.

3.	Edit the configuration information.

4.	Save and close the file.

5.	Exit the editor.

Windows NT stores the new information in the registry.

6.	Log off from Windows NT and restart your computer.


Setting Up and Starting Applications
Other Application Environments	12 of 16

Setting Up and Starting Applications

Set up a Windows 3.1, MS-DOS, OS/2, or POSIX application just as you would other applications, by using the Windows NT Setup program or Program Manager.

When you use thg Windows NT Setup program to set up an MS-DOS application, Setup creates a PIF (program information file) or uses the PIF that accompanies the application or the Windows NT default PIF. Windows 3.1, OS/2, and POSIX applications do not use PIFs. For more information on Windows NT Setup, see Chapter 12, "System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup."

When you use Program Manager to set up an MS-DOS-based application, Program Manager searches for a PIF to use with that application:

If it finds one, it sets up the application and the PIF to work together.

If no PIF is available, Windows NT uses the default PIF, named _DEFAULT.PIF, when you start the application.

For more information on using Program Manager to set up applications, see Chapter 3, "Program Manager."


Using an Application’s Own Mouse Cursor
Other Application Environments	13 of 16

Setting Up and Starting Applications

Using an Application's Own Mouse Cursor

Some MS-DOS-based applications use a mouse cursor that cannot be synchronized with the system mouse pointer used by Windows NT. If the system mouse pointer does not work as you expect with an MS-DOS-based application, you can hide the system pointer. This returns control of the mouse cursor to the application.

To hide the system mouse pointer

Press ALT+SPACEBAR to display the Control menu, and then choose Hide Mouse Pointer.

If the application switches between character-based and graphics modes, you may need to hide the system pointer again.

Once the system mouse pointer is hidden, you can use the mouse only within the application's window.

To display the system mouse pointer

Press ALT+SPACEBAR to display the Control menu, and then choose Display Mouse Pointer.

– Or –

Switch to another application by pressing the ALT+TAB key combination, or by pressing CTRL+ESC to switch using the Task List.


Starting an Application
Other Application Environments	14 of 16

Setting Up and Starting Applications

Starting an Application

You can start applications for all supported application environments from Program Manager, File Manager, or from the command prompt.

To start an application from Program Manager

1.	Open the group that contains the program-item icon for the application.

2.	Choose the icon. Or select it, and then press ENTER.

To start an application using the Program Manager Run command

1.	From the File menu, choose Run.

2.	In the Command Line box, type the name of the file that starts the application, including the filename extension. You can also include any optional parameters that the application uses when it starts.

If the application is MS-DOS-based, you can type the name of the application's PIF.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To start an application from File Manager

1.	In the Main group, choose the File Manager icon.

2.	In the directory window, choose the filename for the application. Or select the filename, and then press ENTER.

If the application is MS-DOS-based, you can use the filename of its PIF.

To start an application from the command prompt

1.	In the Main group, choose the Command Prompt icon.

2.	At the command prompt, type the application's executable filename, and then press ENTER.

Or, to run the application and retain use of the current command window, type start and the application's executable filename, and then press ENTER.

Include the path to the application if necessary. You can include any startup parameters for the application after the application's name.

When you start an MS-DOS-based application at the command prompt, Windows NT uses _DEFAULT.PIF to establish the MS-DOS environment. The following PIF settings in _DEFAULT.PIF are used to establish the environment:

EMS Memory	Application Shortcut Key
XMS Memory	Custom MS-DOS Initialization Files
Multitasking Options	Compatible Timer Hardware Emulation
Reserve Shortcut Keys
To start an MS-DOS-based application at the command prompt using its PIF, use the start command. For example, to start MYAPP.EXE using MYAPP.PIF, type start myapp.

The first MS-DOS-based application started at the command prompt establishes the MS-DOS environment for all MS-DOS-based applications run in that window.

In a few cases, Windows NT may not recognize that a program is MS-DOS based. If an MS-DOS-based application fails to start, try starting it using the forcedos command. For example, to start a program called MYPROG in the \OLDAPPS directory, type forcedos \oldapps\myprog at the command prompt.


Creating Program Information Files
Other Application Environments	15 of 16

Creating Program Information Files

A program information file (PIF) provides information to Windows NT on how best to run MS-DOS applications. Windows 3.1, OS/2, and POSIX applications do not use or require PIFs.

Create, modify, and save PIFs using PIF Editor. On both x86-based and RISC-based computers, create PIFs using the Enhanced mode version of PIF Editor. Typically, a PIF has the same filename as the associated application's main program file, except that a PIF has the .PIF filename extension. During Windows NT setup, PIFs are placed in the \systemroot directory.

Windows NT includes a PIF named _DEFAULT.PIF, located in the \systemroot directory where you set up Windows NT. This PIF contains settings that work with most MS-DOS applications. Windows NT uses this PIF when there is no other one available for your application, or when the application is started at the command prompt.

Because Windows NT might use the default PIF with more than one MS-DOS application, you should not modify it. You can use the default PIF as a starting point for creating a new PIF.

To create or change a PIF

1.	Start PIF Editor by choosing the PIF Editor icon in the Main group.

PIF Editor displays a new, untitled PIF window with PIF options set to their default values.

To edit an existing PIF, choose Open from the File menu, and then specify the PIF you want.

2.	Specify the PIF options for the application.

For more information on PIF options, see "Specifying PIF Options," later in this chapter.

3.	Save the PIF by choosing the Save or Save As command from the File menu.

If you are modifying the _DEFAULT.PIF file, be sure to choose the Save As command and to rename the file when you save it.

Always use the .PIF extension when you name a PIF file.

Using Multiple PIFs for an Application

You can create more than one PIF for an application. You may find it useful to do this if you run an application differently under different circumstances.

For example, you can specify in a PIF how much EMS (expanded) memory an application has access to. By using two PIFs, you could give an application access to a large amount of EMS memory when you're using large data files, but limit its use of memory when you're working with smaller files.

To set up two PIFs for an application

1.	Create two PIFs.

2.	For each PIF, indicate the appropriate settings.

In this example, you would set the EMS Required:  KB Limit setting to -1 for one PIF. For the other PIF, you would set the EMS Required:  KB Limit setting to 1024K.

3.	Save each PIF with a unique filename.

4.	Create program-item icons for both PIFs in Program Manager, giving each a distinct title. Because you want to start the application from its PIF in this case, be sure to specify the PIF filename, not the application's filename, in the Command Line box.

You can choose either icon to start the application.


Specifying PIF Options
Other Application Environments	16 of 16

Creating Program Information Files

Specifying PIF Options

Windows NT eliminates the need to set many PIF options for MS-DOS applications. However, Windows NT allows you to specify all PIF options in case you want to create PIFs for use when running applications with Windows 3.1. Only PIF options used by Windows NT are explained below. For information on other PIF options, including standard mode options, see your Windows 3.1 User's Guide.

Program Filename

In the Program Filename box, type the name of the file that starts the application. Include the path if necessary.

For most applications, you can type the path of the main program file, which usually has the extension .EXE or .COM. For example, to create a PIF for Microsoft Word, type c:\word\word.exe. If you start the application from a batch program, type its path, including the filename extension (usually .BAT).

You can also specify an environment variable in this box. Using an environment variable allows you to place the variable name in the PIF and assign it a value using the set command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. When you type the variable name, enclose it in percent signs (%). For example, in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file assign the value "c:\word\word.exe" to an environment variable named "worddir" by adding the line set worddir = c:\word\word.exe. Then in PIF Editor specify the environment variable %worddir% as the Program Filename.

Window Title

You can type a descriptive name in the Window Title box. For example, type Lotus 1-2-3 if you are creating a PIF for that application. The name you type appears under the application's icon when the application is minimized, and in the window title bar when the application is running in a window.

This entry is optional. If you leave the Window Title box blank, the application's title bar displays the name of the PIF without the filename extension.

You can also specify a title by using Program Manager. You do this by choosing the Properties command from Program Manager's File menu, and specifying a name in the Description box. Program Manager settings override PIF settings.

You can also specify an environment variable in this field. By using an environment variable, you can place a variable name in the PIF and assign it a value by using the set command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. When you type the variable name, enclose it in percent signs (%).

Optional Parameters

You can type application parameters in the Optional Parameters box. These are the same parameters you type after the application's filename when starting the program at the command prompt. For example, if you use the /c when you start Microsoft Word at the command prompt, type /c in the Optional Parameters box.

Parameters can be filenames, letters, numbers, or any type of information up to 62 characters in length. For information about valid parameters, see the application's documentation.

If you want Windows NT to prompt you for parameters whenever you start the application, type a question mark (?) in this box. You can also specify an environment variable in this field. By using an environment variable, you can place a variable name in the PIF and assign it a value by using the set command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. When you type the variable name, enclose it in percent signs (%).

This entry is optional. If the application does not require parameters, or if you do not want to use any parameters when you start your application, leave this box blank.

When you start the application by using the Run command in File Manager or Program Manager, any optional parameters you specify override the optional parameters specified in the PIF.

Startup Directory

Some applications require access to files in a particular directory before they can run. You can type a path in the Startup Directory box to specify the directory you want to be the current directory when the application starts, usually the directory where the application's program file is located. This entry is optional.

You can also specify this directory by using Program Manager. You do this by choosing the Properties command from Program Manager's File menu, and then specifying a directory in the Working Directory box. Program Manager settings override PIF Editor settings.

You can also specify an environment variable in this field. By using an environment variable, you can place a variable name in the PIF and assign it a value by using the set command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. When you type the variable name, enclose it in percent signs (%).

EMS Memory

Windows NT can simulate expanded memory for applications that use it. Use the EMS Memory options to specify how much expanded memory Windows NT should provide to an application. Although few applications actually require expanded memory, many run better if they can use it. For more information on how a particular application uses expanded memory, see the application's documentation. The following table describes the options.

Use	To

KB Required	Specify how many kilobytes of expanded memory are needed to start the application. In general, you can leave this option at the standard setting of 0, indicating that the application does not require expanded memory. The KB Required option does not limit how much expanded memory the application receives; Windows NT gives it at least as much as is specified by KB Required, plus any available expanded memory up to the amount specified by the KB Limit option.

Windows NT starts the application only if it can provide at least as much expanded memory as the KB Required option specifies. Otherwise, Windows NT displays a message indicating there is not enough expanded memory to run the application. If other applications are running, you can quit one or more of them, and then try running the application again.

KB Limit	Limit the amount of expanded memory provided to the application. Windows NT gives an application as much expanded memory as it requests, up to the amount you type in this box, or until no more memory is available.

This option is useful for limiting an application's access to expanded memory, since some applications take all available expanded memory whether they need it or not. The default setting of 1024 provides the application with as much expanded memory as it requests, up to a limit of 1024K, or until no more memory is available.

A setting of -1 allocates as much expanded memory to an application as it requests, up to a limit determined by the system. This can slow down the rest of your system.

To prevent Windows NT from providing any expanded memory to the application, set both KB Required and KB Limit to 0.

XMS Memory

Use the XMS Memory options to allocate extended memory to an application that uses memory according to the Lotus-Intel-Microsoft-AST Extended Memory Specification (XMS) standard. Because few applications require extended memory, you can usually leave these options at their default settings. A description of the options follows.

Use	To

KB Required	Specify how many kilobytes of extended memory are needed to start the application. In general, you can leave this option at the default setting of 0, indicating that this application does not require extended memory.

The KB Required option does not limit how much extended memory the application receives; Windows NT gives it as much extended memory as the application requests, up to the limit set by the KB Limit option or until no more memory is available.

Windows NT starts the application only if it can provide at least as much extended memory as the KB Required option specifies. Otherwise, Windows NT displays a message indicating there is not enough memory to run the application. If other applications are running, you can quit one or more of them and try running the application again.

KB Limit	Limit the amount of extended memory provided to the application. Windows NT gives an application as much extended memory as it requests, up to the amount you type in this box, or until no more memory is available. This option is useful for limiting an application's access to extended memory, since some applications take all available extended memory whether they need it or not.

The default setting of 1024 provides the application with as much extended memory as it requests, up to a limit of 1024K, or until there is no more memory available.

A setting of -1 allocates as much extended memory to an application as it requests, up to a limit determined by the system. This can slow down the rest of your system.

Display Usage

Use the Display Usage options to set whether a character-based application starts in a window or in a full screen. While a character-based application is running, you can move it from a window to a full screen, or vice versa, by pressing ALT+ENTER.

Use	To

Full Screen	Start the application in a full screen.

Windowed	Start the application in a window.

While an application is running, you can set display usage from the Control menu using the Settings command. Display usage set using the Control menu overrides the setting made using PIF Editor.

On RISC-based computers, applications run in a window only and this option does not apply. On x86-based computers, graphical applications run using the full screen only. If a character-based application running in a window switches to graphics mode, for example to display a chart, Windows NT will switch the display to the full screen automatically.

Close Window on Exit

Clear this check box if you want the window (or screen) to remain open when you quit the application. This is especially useful if you are running an application that displays output on the screen. If the window closes too quickly, you won't see the output.

By default, the window closes when you quit the application.

Multitasking Options

Specifying foreground and background priority determines how CPU (processor) resources are allocated to applications. The numbers that you specify for an application set the priority for the application relative to other applications that are running. (Therefore, these numbers cannot be translated into a fixed percentage of CPU time.) The higher the priority number an application has, the more CPU resources are allocated to it.

The default foreground priority is 100. Setting a number lower than 100 allows other applications to run faster by reducing the amount of CPU time given the MS-DOS-based application in the foreground. The default background priority is 50. You can set a number from 0 to 10000.

By default, the Detect Idle Time check box is selected. This allows the system to give processing resources to other applications while the application is idle, for example while it is waiting for keyboard input. Clear this option only if your application is running too slowly or not running correctly.

To set multitasking options

1.	In the PIF Editor window, choose the Advanced button.

2.	In the Multitasking area, set the background and foreground priorities by typing appropriate values in the Background Priority and Foreground Priority boxes.

3.	Select or clear the Detect Idle Time check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Reserve Shortcut Keys

Normally, Windows NT uses the key combinations in the following table to perform some action. Selecting one or more of the shortcut-key check boxes instructs Windows NT to ignore the specified key combination when the application is running in the foreground. Instead, the application responds to the key combination.

Use	To

ALT+TAB	Reserve the ALT+TAB shortcut key for the application. Otherwise, Windows NT switches between applications when you press this key combination.

ALT+ESC	Reserve the ALT+ESC shortcut key for the application. Otherwise, when you press this key combination, Windows NT cycles through the applications in the order each was started.

CTRL+ESC	Reserve the CTRL+ESC for the application. Otherwise, Windows NT displays the Task List when you press this key combination.

PRTSC	Reserve the PRINT SCREEN shortcut key for the application. Otherwise, Windows NT copies the contents of the screen onto the Clipboard when you press this key.

ALT+PRTSC	Reserve the ALT+PRINT SCREEN shortcut key for the application. Otherwise, Windows NT copies the contents of the active window onto the Clipboard when you press this key combination.

ALT+SPACE	Reserve the ALT+SPACEBAR shortcut key for the application. Otherwise, Windows NT displays the application's Control menu when you press this key combination.

ALT+ENTER	Reserve the ALT+ENTER shortcut key for the application. Otherwise, when you press this key combination, Windows NT switches the application between a window (if it can run in one) and a full screen.

To reserve shortcut keys

1.	In the PIF Editor window, choose the Advanced button.

2.	In the Other Options area, select the check boxes for the keys you want to reserve, and then choose the OK button.

Application Shortcut Key

An application shortcut key allows you to switch immediately to an application that is running in the background. By using an application shortcut key, you can switch to a particular application quickly, no matter where you are in Windows NT or which application you are using.

To assign an application shortcut key to an application, you can use the Properties command on the File menu in Program Manager, or you can use the Application Shortcut Key option in the application's PIF. Shortcut-key settings made in Program Manager override settings made in a PIF. The key combination you specify must include either the ALT or CTRL key. For example, the key combinations CTRL+Y, ALT+F4, CTRL+SHIFT+F11, and CTRL+ALT+7 are all valid application shortcut keys. You cannot specify a key combination that includes the ESC, ENTER, TAB, SPACEBAR, PRINT SCREEN, or BACKSPACE key.

After you assign an application shortcut key, the key combination works as a shortcut key only when that application is loaded. No other application (including Windows NT, Windows NT applications, and the application that uses the shortcut key) can use that key combination for any other purpose. For this reason, you should select application shortcut keys carefully. For example, suppose you specify ALT+F as the application shortcut key for Lotus® Freelance®. In many Windows applications, ALT+F is a shortcut key that displays the File menu. However, if Freelance is loaded when you are using Notepad, pressing ALT+F makes Freelance the active application, rather than displaying Notepad's File menu.

To specify a shortcut key by using Program Manager

1.	Switch to Program Manager.

2.	Select the icon for the application whose shortcut key you want to specify.

3.	From the File menu, choose Properties.

4.	Select the Shortcut Key box, and then press the key combination you want to use for this application.

5.	Choose the OK button.

If you press an invalid key combination, a message appears and Windows NT resets the key definition to its previous value.

To delete a shortcut-key definition by using Program Manager

1.	Switch to Program Manager.

2.	Select the application's icon.

3.	From the File menu, choose Properties.

4.	Select the Shortcut Key box, and then press SHIFT+BACKSPACE.

The shortcut key is set to None.

5.	Choose the OK button.

To specify a shortcut key by using PIF Editor

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	Select the PIF for the application whose shortcut key you want to specify, and then choose the OK button.

3.	Choose the Advanced button.

4.	In the Advanced dialog box, select the Application Shortcut Key box.

5.	Press the key combination you want.

Windows NT interprets any key combination you press as an application shortcut key unless you press keys that move you to another area in the dialog box (such as TAB).

6.	Choose the OK button.

If you press an invalid key combination, a message appears, and Windows NT resets the key definition to its previous value.

To delete a shortcut-key definition by using PIF Editor

1.	Open the PIF for the application whose shortcut key you want to delete.

2.	Choose the Advanced button.

3.	Select the Application Shortcut Key box.

4.	Press SHIFT+BACKSPACE to set the shortcut key to None.

Or, while pressing a key combination, press BACKSPACE to reset the shortcut key definition to its previous value.

Custom Startup Files

Windows NT allows you to create custom startup files that you can specify in an application's PIF. When you start the application, Windows NT will read the custom files you specify rather than the CONFIG.NT and AUTOEXEC.NT files. This allows you to create a custom MS-DOS environment for each application you use. For example, if one of your applications requires a memory resident program when it runs, you can include the name of that program in a custom startup file. When you start the application using its PIF, Windows NT will automatically start the memory resident program.

When you create startup files, base them on the AUTOEXEC.NT and CONFIG.NT files. That way, the basic information needed to configure the MS-DOS environment will already be included in your files. In configuration files, Windows NT uses the variable %SystemRoot% to represent the Windows directory. When processing the files, Windows NT automatically expands this variable.

To create custom startup files

1.	Using a text editor, for example Notepad, edit the CONFIG.NT and AUTOEXEC.NT files.

The files are located with your other Windows NT files in the directory \systemroot\SYSTEM32.

2.	Save each file under a new name.

To specify custom startup files in PIF Editor

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	Select the PIF for the application whose startup files you want to specify, and then choose the OK button.

3.	Choose the Windows NT button.

4.	In the Config Filename box, type the name of the file you want to use in place of CONFIG.NT.

5.	In the Autoexec Filename box, type the name of the file you want to use in place of AUTOEXEC.NT.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Compatible Timer Hardware Emulation

By default, Windows NT allows MS-DOS-based applications to specify the rate at which the computer's timer sends timing signals. If an application sets the rate too high, it may stop running. Some applications, such as games, are particularly sensitive. If your application starts but then fails to run correctly, try selecting the Compatible Timer Hardware Emulation check box. Selecting the check box reduces the rate at which timing signals are sent.

Use this option only if an application requires it. Selecting this option if an application does not require it can degrade the application's performance or affect the application's ability to calculate time.

To set compatible timer hardware emulation in PIF Editor

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	Select the PIF for the application whose timer emulation you want to change, and then choose the OK button.

3.	Choose the Windows NT button.

4.	In the Windows NT Options dialog box, select the Compatible Timer Hardware Emulation check box.

5.	Choose the OK button.


System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup
Chapter 12	1 of 11

System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup

You can use Windows NT Setup for system maintenance - whether Windows NT was initially installed from disks or from the network, or was installed by your equipment manufacturer. If you change the hardware or software in your computer, you need to ensure that your system configuration includes the correct device drivers and components for Windows NT.

This chapter presents the following topics:

Changing keyboard or mouse drivers

Setting up applications to run from Program Manager

Installing a new device driver

Adding and removing drivers for SCSI adapters and tape drives

Adding and removing Windows NT components

Deleting user profiles

To change printer drivers, use Print Manager. To install and configure network components, choose the Network icon in Control Panel. To change your keyboard layout or language, choose the International icon in Control Panel. To change your video display settings or driver, choose the Display icon in Control Panel.

For information about using Windows NT Setup from your original installation media together with your Emergency Repair disk to restore system files, see Chapter 2, "Troubleshooting," in the Installation Guide.


Starting and Quitting Windows NT Setup
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	2 of 11

Starting and Quitting Windows NT Setup

When you want to run Windows NT Setup for system maintenance, you start it like any other application that appears in a program group - by double-clicking its icon.

You can change some system settings only if you are logged on as a member of the Administrators group. If you cannot run Windows NT Setup or use the tools in Control Panel to change network settings, ask your network administrator for assistance.

To run Windows NT Setup for system maintenance

In Program Manager, choose the Windows NT Setup icon.

You can press F1 at any time to get help for Windows NT Setup.

Important

Before running the setup program for an application created for any version of Windows, you must quit Windows NT Setup. Otherwise, the application's setup program will fail.

To quit Windows NT Setup

From the Options menu, choose Exit.


Changing Keyboard or Mouse Drivers
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	3 of 11

Changing Keyboard or Mouse Drivers

You can use Windows NT Setup to change the system setting for your keyboard or mouse by specifying new options in the Change Mouse Or Keyboard dialog box. For example, if your computer previously used a serial mouse and you are installing a new bus mouse, you must use Windows NT Setup to change this setting.

To make system setting changes, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group for your computer.

To change system settings for the keyboard or mouse

1.	Make sure your hardware is set up to match the setting you are changing to.

2.	From the Options menu in Windows NT Setup, choose Change Mouse Or Keyboard.

3.	In the Change Mouse Or Keyboard dialog box, open the list for the setting you want to change by clicking the arrow at the right of the list.

4.	Make sure your hardware is listed, and then select the setting you want.

To install a new or updated driver file, choose Other, and then when Setup prompts you for a disk, insert a disk containing the driver file into drive A.

If Setup asks you to supply a Windows NT disk, insert the disk in the drive.

To install a sound driver or a supporting driver for multimedia devices, see "Working with Multimedia Device Drivers" in Chapter 5, "Control Panel."

5.	Choose the OK button.

If Setup asks you to supply a Windows NT disk, insert the disk in the drive.

After you complete all Setup options and quit Windows NT Setup, a message reminds you to restart your computer for the changes to take effect.

6.	To restart your computer, choose Shutdown from Program Manager's File menu. Do not flip the power switch to restart your computer.

To change drivers or configuration settings for your video display adapter, choose the Display icon in Control Panel. For information, see "Configuring Video Display" in Chapter 5, "Control Panel."


Setting Up Applications to Run from Program Manager
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	4 of 11

Setting Up Applications to Run from Program Manager

You can choose to set up applications on your hard disk that you want to run under Windows NT. To do this, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group.

To set up applications to run from Program Manager

1.	From the Options menu, choose Set Up Applications.

2.	In the Set Up Applications dialog box, specify where Setup should search for applications - either all directories on your hard disk or only the directories listed in your path.

3.	Choose the Search Now button.

4.	If Setup finds applications with executable filenames identical to other applications, a message asks you to select the correct names for the ambiguously named applications on your hard disk. Select the application name(s) in the list, and then choose the OK button.

5.	In the second Set Up Applications dialog box, select the specific applications you want in the left box, and then choose the Add button.

6.	When all the applications you want to install appear in the right list, choose the Continue button.

Setup adds program-item icons for the selected applications in the common Applications group in Program Manager. You can move the program-item icons to other program groups, if you want.

For more information about running applications created for other operating environments, see Chapter 11, "Other Application Environments."


Installing a New Device Driver
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	5 of 11

Installing a New Device Driver

New device drivers may periodically become available to supplement the device drivers supplied with Windows NT. You must use Windows NT Setup to install a new device driver.

If a new version is made available of a device driver already installed on your computer, use the procedure described in this section to install the revised driver.

To start a new device driver, use the Devices option in Control Panel or restart your computer.


Obtaining New Device Drivers
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	6 of 11

Installing a New Device Driver

Obtaining New Device Drivers

For information about obtaining new device drivers for your system, contact your hardware manufacturer or Microsoft Customer Support Services.

The Windows NT Driver Library is updated regularly to provide the most current Windows NT-compatible device drivers for printers, displays, networks, and other devices not included in the Windows NT Workstation and Windows NT Server retail packages. All drivers are tested by Microsoft for compatibility with the Windows NT Workstation and Windows NT Server operating systems. The Windows NT Driver Library is distributed through the Microsoft Download Service at 206-936-MSDL, between 6:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. Pacific time, Monday through Friday; it's also available through CompuServe and GEnie, or call 1-800-227-4679 to order the library from Microsoft.

Note

If you bought your copy of Windows NT outside the United States, the package contains an information card listing Microsoft subsidiary telephone numbers you can call to obtain information.


Setting Up New or Revised Device Drivers
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	7 of 11

Installing a New Device Driver

Setting Up New or Revised Device Drivers

Before running Windows NT Setup to install a new device driver, check for any special installation instructions that came with the driver. There may be other steps you need to take to set up the hardware. Some drivers include information files that tell Windows NT Setup what type of files (such as font files) the driver supports. If you are not sure what your driver supports, contact the hardware manufacturer.

To install a device driver not supplied with Windows NT

1.	Make sure your hardware matches the setting you are changing to.

2.	From the Options menu in Windows NT Setup, choose Change Mouse Or Keyboard.

3.	In the Change Mouse Or Keyboard dialog box, click the arrow beside the mouse or keyboard setting you want to change and choose Other.

Setup prompts you to insert the disk containing the device driver.

4.	Insert the disk in the drive, and then choose the OK button.

If the file is located on your hard disk or on a network drive, type the path of the drive that contains the file, and then choose the OK button.

Setup displays a list of the device drivers on that disk or drive.

5.	From the list of drivers, select the appropriate driver, and then choose the OK button.

If you are sure you want the displayed option, choose the OK button in the Change Mouse Or Keyboard dialog box.

You may be asked for additional disks if more than one disk was provided by the hardware manufacturer. You might also be asked for specific Windows NT disks.

Setup copies the appropriate files to the Windows NT system driver subdirectory. The default subdirectory is \systemroot\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS.

After all files are copied and you quit Windows NT Setup, a message reminds you to restart your computer for the changes to take effect.

6.	To restart your computer, choose Shutdown from Program Manager's File menu. Do not flip the power switch to restart your computer.


Correcting a Faulty Device-Driver Installation
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	8 of 11

Installing a New Device Driver

Correcting a Faulty Device-Driver Installation

Occasionally, Windows NT may not be able to run using the changes you make to the Windows NT system configuration. For example, you might specify the wrong mouse device driver when you change the system settings.

If a new configuration leaves your computer unable to start correctly, Windows NT automatically restores your previous working system configuration the next time you restart your computer. Windows NT can automatically maintain a working system configuration because changes that you make in Windows NT Setup and the previous working configuration are both saved. For more information, see "System Diagnosis, Recovery, and Repair" in Chapter 2, "Troubleshooting," of the Installation Guide.

Note

If you cannot correctly install a new device driver, check with your hardware manufacturer to ensure that you have the current driver.


Adding and Removing Drivers for SCSI Adapters and Tape Drives
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	9 of 11

Installing a New Device Driver

Adding and Removing Drivers for SCSI Adapters and Tape Drives

If you add or remove a tape drive or a SCSI drive such as a CD-ROM device as part of your system, you must tell Windows NT about the change by choosing the appropriate Add/Remove command from the Options menu in Windows NT Setup. This requires that you be logged on as a member of the Administrators group.

Note

When you use a SCSI tape drive, the tape drive must be turned on before you start your computer. Otherwise, the driver will not load properly.

To add a driver for a SCSI device

1.	From the Options menu in Windows NT Setup, choose Add/Remove SCSI Adapters or choose Add/Remove Tape Devices.

2.	In the SCSI Adapter Setup dialog box or the Tape Device Setup dialog box, choose the Add button.

3.	In the Select SCSI Adapter Option dialog box or the Select Tape Device dialog box, select a driver from the list, and then choose the Install button.

Follow the instructions on the screen. If you are asked to insert a disk, insert the disk in the designated drive, and then choose the OK button.

4.	When driver installation is complete, choose the Continue button to return to Windows NT Setup.

To remove a driver for a SCSI device or tape drive

1.	In the SCSI Adapter Setup list in the Add/Remove dialog box, select the SCSI device or tape device you want to remove.

2.	Choose the Remove button, and then choose the Continue button to return to Windows NT Setup.

When you complete any other Setup options and quit Windows NT Setup, a message reminds you to restart your computer so that the changes will take effect. To restart your computer, choose Shutdown from Program Manager's File menu. Do not flip the power switch to restart your computer. The next time you start Windows NT, the correct system configuration will appear.


Adding and Removing Windows NT Components
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	10 of 11

Adding and Removing Windows NT Components

You can use Windows NT Setup to add and remove various components that are not essential to the operation of Windows NT. For example, you might want to remove some non-essential Windows files to free up space on your hard disk, or add components you previously removed or that you did not install during initial setup. You can decide at any time to add or remove all or parts of components such as README files, accessories, games, screen savers, and wallpapers.

Caution

When you remove components, the files are deleted from your computer. If you want to add them later, you must supply the files from the Windows NT installation disks or from a source directory on your network.

To add or remove Windows NT components

1.	From the Options menu in Windows NT Setup, choose Add/Remove Windows Components.

In the Optional Windows Components dialog box, Setup lists the optional components and the hard disk space required to set them up on your computer:

Components currently on your computer are marked with an X in the check boxes. You can remove some or all of these components.

Total Disk Space Required shows the total hard disk space required by all selected components. This number increases or decreases as you select or clear the components' check boxes.

Disk Space Available shows your computer's total unused hard disk space. This number changes after adding or removing components or files.

Note

Windows NT Setup does not check whether the space required for the files you want to add matches the space available on disk. Check these amounts carefully before proceeding to ensure that you have adequate disk space to add the selected components.

2.	To add or remove a component, do one or more of the following:

To add an entire component (for example, all README files), select the check box next to it.

To remove an entire component, clear the check box.

To add or remove part of a component, follow the steps in the next procedure.

3.	Choose the OK button.

If you are adding a component or part of a component, a message asks you to insert the appropriate Windows NT disk. Insert the disk in the drive, and then choose the OK button.

If you are removing files, a message asks you to confirm the deletion. Choose the Yes button to delete the files.

Not all files for various components are required. For example, you may want to delete some screen saver files but keep others on your computer. You can add or remove just a portion of a Windows NT component.

To add or remove part of a Windows NT component

1.	In the Windows NT Setup dialog box for adding and removing components, choose the Files button next to the component you want to change.

The Customize dialog box lists that component's files. Files on the right are currently included on your computer and can be removed. Files on the left are not included and can be added.

2.	In either list of files, select the names of the files you want to add or remove, and then choose the Add or Remove button. Or choose the Add All button to add all files.

Total Disk Space Required shows the total hard disk space needed for the files you want to set up on your computer. Check this number to be sure there is adequate space on your disk for the files you have selected.

3.	Choose the OK button to return to the Windows NT Setup dialog box, and then choose the Continue button to add or remove the selected files.


Deleting User Profiles
System Maintenance with Windows NT Setup	11 of 11

Deleting User Profiles

A user profile defines the content and arrangement of Program Manager groups, screen colors, network and printer connections, mouse and keyboard settings, and other settings in the Windows NT environment. The user profile ensures that Windows NT will look and act in a familiar way while another user is working on your computer.

Each copy of a user profile remains on your computer until you delete it. You can remove these additional profiles from your computer with Windows NT Setup.

To delete a user profile from your computer

1.	From the Options menu in Windows NT Setup, choose Delete User Profiles.

2.	In the User Profiles list, select the user profile you want to remove from your computer.

3.	Choose the Delete button to remove the selected profile.

4.	Repeat this process until you have removed all the profiles you want, and then choose the Close button.

Setup warns you if it cannot delete a profile because the profile is currently in use or because you are not logged on as a member of a group that can delete profiles. Otherwise, the selected profiles are deleted from your computer.


User Manager for Domains
Chapter 13	1 of 30

User Manager for Domains

User Manager for Domains is a tool used to manage security for domains and computers.

This chapter presents the procedures used to accomplish specific tasks with User Manager for Domains. After a brief overview of User Manager for Domains, you will find procedures for:

Selecting the domain or computer to be administered

Managing user accounts

Managing groups

Managing security policies


Overview
User Manager for Domains	2 of 30

Overview

For Windows NT Server, the domain is the basic unit of security and administration. The servers in a domain form a single administrative unit, sharing security policies and all account information. Each domain has one security database that contains user accounts and groups, and that defines the security policies. The primary domain controller maintains the master of this security database, and all backup domain controllers in the domain keep a copy. Because of this, administrators need to manage only one user account for each user, and each user logs on to (and needs to remember the password for) only one account.

User Manager for Domains is the tool you use to create and manage user accounts, create and manage groups, and manage the security policies.


Starting and Quitting User Manager for Domains
User Manager for Domains	3 of 30

Overview

Starting and Quitting User Manager for Domains

To start User Manager for Domains

1.	Open the Administrative Tools group.

2.	Choose the User Manager for Domains icon.

The User Manager for Domains window appears, displaying the domain where your user account is defined.

To start User Manager for Domains from the command line

1.	From the File menu in Program Manager, choose Run.

2.	In the Command Line box type usrmgr, or to display a domain other than your logon domain, type usrmgr domainname.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Optionally, you can display an individual computer by providing the \\computername in place of the domainname, in step 2. You can only display a computer that maintains its own security database. If you specify the computer name of a primary or backup domain controller, the domain is displayed instead.

Most often you will start User Manager for Domains, administer the displayed domain, and then issue the Select Domain command (described later in this chapter) every time you need to display and administer a different domain.

However, in some situations it may be more convenient to start more than one instance of User Manager for Domains. For example, if you need to continuously administer two different domains, you might find it more convenient to start User Manager for Domains and display the first domain to be administered, and then start another instance of User Manager for Domains and display the second domain to be administered.

To quit User Manager for Domains

From the User menu, choose Exit.

When you quit User Manager for Domains, if the Options menu Save Settings On Exit command is enabled, the main window size and position, user account sort order, and setting of the Confirmation command are saved.


Managing the View
User Manager for Domains	4 of 30

Overview

Managing the View

In most cases, when User Manager for Domains starts, it displays the domain where your user account is defined. The name of the displayed domain appears in the User Manager for Domains title bar. In the User Manager for Domains window, the upper list shows the user accounts of the displayed domain, and the lower list shows the groups.

Selecting a Domain

When it first starts, User Manager for Domains displays the domain where your user account is defined. Use the Select Domain command to display a different domain or an individual computer.

To change the displayed domain

1.	From the User menu, choose Select Domain.

2.	Select a domain from the list in the Select Domain box, or type a domainname in the Domain box.

Optionally, to specify an individual computer instead of a domain, type a \\computername (always precede a computer name with two backslashes) in the Domain box. You can only display a computer that maintains its own security database. If you specify the computer name of a primary or backup domain controller, the domain is displayed instead.

You can type a name using both uppercase and lowercase, but in the Domain box the name is displayed in uppercase.

3.	If the domain or computer you have specified communicates with your computer across a connection providing relatively low transmission rates, select the Low Speed Connection option.

The system saves the setting of this option for each of the last 20 domains or computers you have administered. After you specify a domain or computer name, the previous setting of this option (if any) is displayed here. If no previous setting is known, the option is cleared. You can accept or change the setting.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Sorting the User Accounts

The user account list in the upper half of the User Manager for Domains window is sorted alphabetically by either the full names or the user names of the user accounts.

To change the sort order

From the View menu, choose either the Sort By Full Name or Sort By Username command.

Note

When the Low Speed Connection option is selected, the Sort By Full Name and Sort By Username commands are unavailable.

Refreshing the View

When User Manager for Domains first displays a domain or a computer, it receives the information necessary to create the user account and the group lists. This information is automatically updated at fixed intervals. However, if you need to make sure the displayed information is current, you can use the Refresh command.

If User Manager for Domains is used to make any additions, changes, or deletions to the displayed accounts, that information is immediately updated in the User Manager for Domains window. However, if any other source makes changes, for example another administrator simultaneously using User Manager for Domains against the same domain, those changes will not be reflected in your User Manager for Domains window until the next automatic update, or until you use the Refresh command to update the view.

To update the view with current information

From the View menu, choose Refresh.

Note

When the Low Speed Connection option is selected, the Refresh command is unavailable.

Using Low Speed Connection

When administering a domain or computer that communicates with your computer across a connection providing relatively low transmission rates, some normal User Manager for Domains functions may be performed slowly. This particularly affects the speed at which lists of user accounts, groups, or computers can be produced and displayed. In this situation, you can reduce delays by selecting the Low Speed Connection option, which causes the following changes to User Manager for Domains:

The list of user accounts does not appear in the User Manager for Domains window, and on the User menu the Select Users command is unavailable. However, user accounts can still be created or managed by choosing the New User, Copy, Delete, Rename, or Properties command from the User menu.

The list of groups does not appear in the User Manager for Domains window. Local groups can be still be created and managed by choosing the New Local Group, Copy, Delete, or Properties command from the User menu.

Global groups cannot be created or copied, properties of existing global groups cannot be managed, and on the User menu the New Global Group command is unavailable. However, global group memberships can still be managed indirectly, by managing the group memberships of individual user accounts.

The View menu commands (Sort By Full Name, Sort By Username, and Refresh) are unavailable.

Here are two ways to select or clear the Low Speed Connection option:

When you choose the Select Domain command from the User menu and specify a domain or computer that will be displayed by User Manager for Domains, you can select or clear the Low Speed Connection option in the Select Domain dialog box.

When a domain or computer is already displayed by User Manager for Domains, you can select or clear this option by choosing Low Speed Connection from the Options menu.

The system saves the setting of the Low Speed Connection option for each of the last 20 domains or computers you have administered. After you specify a domain or computer name in the Select Domain dialog box, the previous state of this option (if any) will be initially set. You can accept or change this setting.

If you have not previously administered the specified domain or computer, and if you do not select the Low Speed Connection option in the Select Domain dialog box, after you choose the OK button the system will automatically determine the appropriate connection mode and will select or clear the Low Speed Connection option accordingly. After connection you still have the option of changing the setting by using the Low Speed Connection command from the Options menu.

When starting User Manager for Domains from the command prompt, you can optionally append the low speed connection parameter [/l]or the normal (high speed) connection parameter [/h]. For example, to start User Manager for Domains and administer the domain Shipping using Low Speed Connection, you would type usrmgr shipping /l.


Changing the Font in User Manager
User Manager for Domains	5 of 30

Overview

Changing the Font in User Manager

You can change the font that User Manager uses to display the list of users and groups. Changing this font affects only the display of the list of users and groups in the main User Manager window.

To change the font

1.	From the Options menu, choose Font.

2.	In the Font box, select the font you want to use.

When you select a font, a style, or a size, the text in the Sample box changes to reflect your choice.

3.	In the Font Style box, select a style option (for example, bold or italic).

4.	In the Size box, select a point size:  the larger the point size, the larger the character appears on your screen.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Who Can Use User Manager for Domains?
User Manager for Domains	6 of 30

Overview

Who Can Use User Manager for Domains?

The actions a user can perform in User Manager for Domains are determined by the group memberships of the user account the user is logged on to.

If a user does not have sufficient authority to perform an action in User Manager for Domains, that command or option is usually shown as unavailable. In some cases the command is displayed as available and the user is able to invoke it, but the command is not executed.

Following are discussions of the User Manager for Domains abilities provided by some built-in Windows NT groups. If a user account belongs to more than one group, the user receives the greater of the possible abilities.

Administrators

A user who is logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators local group can perform all User Manager for Domains functions.

Domain Admins

The Domain Admins global group is by default a member of the Administrators local group of the domain, and a member of the Administrators local group of every Windows NT computer in the domain.

Because of this, a user who is logged on to a user account that is a member of the Domain Admins global group can perform the same User Manager for Domains functions as can a member of the Administrators local group, and can do this for the local domain and for the other Windows NT computers in the local domain.

Account Operators

A user who is logged on to a user account that is a member of the Account Operators group can use User Manager for Domains to create user accounts and groups, and to modify or delete most user accounts and groups of the domain.

Such a user cannot modify or delete the Administrators, Domain Admins, Account Operators, Backup Operators, Print Operators, or Server Operators groups, cannot modify or delete the user accounts of administrators, and cannot administer the security policies.


Managing User Accounts
User Manager for Domains	7 of 30

Managing User Accounts

A user account consists of all the information that defines a user to Windows NT. This includes such things as the user name and password required for the user to log on, the groups in which the user account has membership, and the rights and permissions the user has for using the system and accessing its resources. It also includes other information such as the user's full name, the account description, the user environment profile information, a list of logon workstations, a schedule of logon hours, and more.

Some built-in user accounts are provided when a Windows NT Server domain is created. You can create additional user accounts for other users who will be logging on, and you can modify existing accounts.


Built-In User Accounts
User Manager for Domains	8 of 30

Managing User Accounts

Built-In User Accounts

The following built-in user accounts are provided when Windows NT Server is installed on a primary domain controller. For information on the built-in user accounts provided with a computer running Windows NT Workstation, see "Administering Computers Running Windows NT Workstation," later in this chapter.

Administrator

The built-in Administrator account is a member of the Administrators, Domain Admins, and Domain Users built-in groups, and receives the rights and permissions granted to those groups.

The Administrator account is the account used by the person who manages the domain's overall configuration. The Administrator has more control over the domain and its workstations than does any other user. For example, the Administrator can manage security policies, establish trust relationships, create, modify, or delete user accounts and groups, modify operating system software, create and connect to shared directories (including administrative shares), install and connect to printers, format or partition a fixed disk, back up and restore files, debug the system, take ownership of files and other objects, install or update device drivers, unlock a server, log on from servers, shut down servers, and much more.

Because the Administrator account is a member of the Domain Admins global group, and because the Domain Admins global group is by default a member of the Administrators local group of the domain and the Administrators local group of every Windows NT computer in the domain, a user logged on to the Administrator account is able to administer both the local domain and all the Windows NT computers in the local domain.

The built-in Administrator account can be renamed, but it cannot be deleted. It cannot be removed from the built-in Administrators, Domain Admins, and Guests groups.

During installation of the primary domain controller of a new domain, Windows NT prompts the person doing the installation to enter a password for the built-in Administrator account. Guard this password carefully, not only for security purposes but also because if the password is forgotten or the person who knows the password becomes unavailable, the built-in Administrator account becomes unusable.

Following installation, it is a good idea to create an additional administrative account for each person who needs administrative-level abilities, and reserve the built-in Administrator account for emergency purposes. When each administrative user has a separate account, their actions can be audited. For information on creating user accounts, see "Adding User Accounts," later in this chapter.

Guest

The built-in Guest account is a member of the Domain Guests built-in group, and receives the rights and permissions granted to that group. The Guest account is provided as a convenience, so that occasional or one-time users can log on and be granted limited abilities.

The Guest account is installed with the Disable Account option selected. To allow the Guest account to be used, clear the Disable Account option as described in "Managing User Account Properties," later in this chapter.

The Guest account is installed with a blank password. If the password is left blank, users from untrusted domains (without accounts in this domain), can remotely connect to this domain using the Guest account.

The built-in Guest account can be renamed, but it cannot be deleted.


Adding User Accounts
User Manager for Domains	9 of 30

Managing User Accounts

Adding User Accounts

More users than those supported by the built-in user accounts will need to log on. To allow these users to log on, additional user accounts can be added either by creating new user accounts, or by making copies of existing user accounts.

When adding a user account you will be asked to provide a user name, which can be up to 20 characters. It must be unique, meaning it cannot be identical to any other user name or group name of the domain or computer being administered. It can contain any uppercase or lowercase characters except the following:

"    /    \    [    ]    :    ;    |    =    ,    +    *    ?    <    >

Be consistent in the way you enter user names, because when Windows NT presents lists of user accounts they are usually sorted by the user names. It is a good idea to establish a standard for user names, such as a shortened combination of the first and last names (Kimy for Kim Yoshida).

You will also be asked to provide a full name, which is the complete name of the user. It is a good idea to establish a standard for full names, so that they always begin with either the last name (Yoshida, Kim A.) or the first name (Kim A. Yoshida). The full name can also affect the sort order, because the user account list in the User Manager for Domains window can optionally be sorted by full name instead of user name.

Note

When Windows NT displays a user name and when the distinction is necessary, Windows NT identifies the domain or workstation the user account is from by presenting the name in the form DOMAINNAME\username or COMPUTERNAME\username. For example, a user account named Jeffho from a domain named Engineering would be displayed as ENGINEERING\Jeffho. In some situations the full name will be appended, for example, ENGINEERING\Jeffho (Howard, Jeff).

To create a new user account

1.	From the User menu, choose New User.

2.	In the Username box, type a user name of up to 20 characters.

3.	In the Full Name box, type the user's complete name. This entry is optional, but is recommended.

4.	In the Description box, type a description of the user or the user account. This entry is optional, but is recommended.

5.	In both the Password and Confirm Password boxes, type a password of up to 14 characters.

Passwords are case-sensitive. Password attributes are controlled by the Account policy. For information, see "Managing the Account Policy," later in this chapter.

6.	Select or clear the following options.

Option		Description
User Must Change Password At Next Logon		Forces the user to change the password.
User Cannot Change Password		Prevents the user from changing the assigned password. Usually, this option is selected only for user accounts (such as the Guest account) used by more than one person.
Password Never Expires		Prevents the password from expiring, overriding the Maximum Password Age setting in the Account policy. Use this option for user accounts to which services (for example, the Replicator service) will be assigned using Server Manager. Selection of this option overrides a selection of the User Must Change Password At Next Logon option.
Account Disabled		Prevents use of this account. For example, you might disable a new account to create an inactive template account that can be copied to create new accounts. Or, you might temporarily disable an account if it does not need to be used until a later date. For more information, see the discussion of disabled accounts under "Disabling or Deleting User Accounts," later in this chapter.
7.	To administer a user account property associated with one of the five buttons at the bottom of the dialog box, choose a button and complete the dialog box that appears.

Choose	To
Groups	Specify the groups in which the user account will be a member.
Profile	Specify a user profile, logon script, or home directory for the user account.
Hours	Specify the hours during which the user account can connect to a server.
Logon From	Specify the workstations from which the user can log on.
Account	Manage the account expiration date, and specify whether this is a global or a local account.
These buttons and their dialog boxes are described later in this chapter.

8.	Choose the Add button.

The user account is added. The New User dialog box reverts to its default settings.

9.	To add another user account, repeat steps 2–8.

10.	When you finish creating new user accounts, choose the Close button.

In many situations it may be quicker and more convenient to copy an existing user account than it would be to create an entirely new one. The main benefit of copying a user account is that the group memberships are copied to the new account.

When a user account is copied, the description, group memberships, logon hours, logon workstations, and account information are copied exactly. The profile information is copied, but it is copied conditionally as described in "Managing the User Environment Profile," later in this chapter. The user name, full name, and password of the new account are blank, and must be entered. The User Cannot Change Password and Password Never Expires check boxes are copied.

Usually, the User Must Change Password At Next Logon check box is selected, regardless of its setting in the original account. However, if the User Cannot Change Password check box is copied as selected, then the User Must Change Password At Next Logon check box is cleared.

The Account Disabled check box is always cleared, regardless of the setting in the original user account. This is done so that you can create a new user account, configure it as needed, disable it, and then use it as a template. As described in the following procedure, you can quickly make numerous copies of a disabled template account.

User Manager for Domains does not copy any rights and permissions that have been granted to a user account. However, it is recommended that these be provided only to groups, and not be granted directly to user accounts. Because the group memberships of the original account are copied to the new user account, the new user account will usually have the same abilities and access to resources as the original account.

To make a copy of an existing user account

1.	Select a user account from the list in the User Manager for Domains window, and then choose Copy from the User menu.

2.	In the Copy Of dialog box, configure the user account as described in the previous procedure for creating a new user account.

3.	When the user account is configured, choose the Add button.

The user account is added. The Copy Of dialog box reverts to its original settings.

4.	To add another user account, repeat steps 1–3.

5.	When you finish making copies of the selected user account, choose the Close button.


Managing User Account Properties
User Manager for Domains	10 of 30

Managing User Accounts

Managing User Account Properties

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

The procedure you use to modify user accounts differs slightly, depending on whether you are modifying one user account or multiple user accounts.

When you change the properties of an existing user account, the changes take effect the next time that user logs on.

To modify one user account

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, double-click a user account. Or select a user account, and then choose Properties from the User menu.

For security, the password is represented by a row of asterisks, with the number of asterisks different from the actual number of characters in the password.

2.	To change the Full Name or the Description, type new text in those boxes.

3.	To change the password, type a password of up to 14 characters in both the Password and Confirm Password boxes.

Remember to provide the new password to the user of this account.

4.	To change the settings of the Account Disabled option, Account Locked Out option, or the three password options, select or clear those check boxes.

5.	To administer a property associated with one of the five buttons at the bottom of the User Properties dialog box, choose a button and complete the dialog box that appears.

These buttons and their dialog boxes are described later in this chapter.

6.	Choose the OK button.

The advantage of modifying multiple user accounts is that you can make the same change simultaneously to several accounts. For example, you might select several accounts and add them to a new local group.

To modify two or more user accounts in the same way

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, select two or more user accounts.

2.	From the User menu, choose Properties.

If all the selected user accounts have an identical description, that text appears in the Description box. If one or more of the accounts have a different description, the Description box is empty.

If all the selected user accounts have the same setting for the Accounts Disabled option or one of the password options, the setting for that check box is displayed. If one or more of the accounts have a different setting for one of the options, that check box is indeterminate (filled with gray).

3.	To change the Description for all the selected user accounts, type new text in that box.

4.	To change an option setting for all the selected user accounts, select or clear the appropriate Accounts Disabled or password check box.

5.	To administer a property associated with one of the five buttons at the bottom of the User Properties dialog box, choose a button and complete the dialog box that appears.

These buttons and their dialog boxes are described later in this chapter.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Any changes you made are applied to all the selected user accounts.

Managing Group Memberships

Use the Group Memberships dialog box to manage, for the selected user accounts, membership in the groups of this domain or workstation.

The procedure you use to manage group memberships depends on whether you are administering one user account or multiple user accounts.

To manage group memberships when only one user account is selected

1.	Choose the Groups button from the New User, Copy Of, or User Properties dialog box.

In the Group Memberships dialog box, the Member Of box lists the groups this user account belongs to, and the Not Member Of box lists the groups this user account does not belong to.

2.	To add the user account to one or more groups, select one or more groups in the Not Member Of box, and then choose the Add button. Or, select one or more groups in the Not Member Of box, and then drag one of the selected group icons into the Member Of box.

3.	To remove the user account from one or more groups, select one or more groups in the Member Of box, and then choose the Remove button. Or, select one or more groups in the Member Of box, and then drag one of the selected group icons into the Not Member Of box.

You cannot remove the primary group.

4.	To change the user account's primary group, select one global group from the Member Of box, and then choose the Set button.

A primary group is used when a user logs on using Windows NT Services for Macintosh, or runs POSIX applications. Only a global group can be set as the primary group.

5.	Choose the OK button.

When two or more user accounts are selected, you can use the Group Memberships dialog box to add all the selected user accounts to one or more groups of this domain or workstation, or to remove all the selected user accounts from one or more groups of this domain or workstation.

To manage common group memberships for two or more user accounts

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, select two or more user accounts, and then choose Properties from the User menu.

2.	In the User Properties dialog box, choose the Groups button.

In the Group Memberships dialog box, the All Are Members Of box lists the groups that every one of the selected user accounts belong to. If one or more of the selected user accounts do not belong to a particular group, that group is listed in the Not All Are Members Of box.

3.	To add the selected user accounts to one or more groups, select one or more groups in the Not All Are Members Of box, and then choose the Add button. Or, select one or more groups in the Not All Are Members Of box, and then drag one of the selected group icons into the All Are Members Of box.

4.	To remove the selected user accounts from one or more groups, select one or more groups in the All Are Members Of box, and then choose the Remove button. Or, select one or more groups in the All Are Members Of box, and then drag one of the selected group icons into the Not All Are Members Of box.

You cannot remove a primary group.

5.	To change the primary group of all the selected user accounts, select one global group from the All Are Members Of box, and then choose the Set button.

A primary group is used when users log on using Windows NT Services for Macintosh, or run POSIX applications. Only a global group can be set as the primary group. If no primary group is shown, the selected user accounts are not all set to the same primary group.

6.	Choose the OK button.

When multiple user accounts are selected and the Group Memberships dialog box is open, the groups in the All Are Members Of box always have all the selected user accounts as members. But the groups in the Not All Are Members Of box may have none or some of the selected user accounts as members. If you need to ensure that a group has none of the selected user accounts as members, perform the following procedure.

To ensure that a group has none of the selected user accounts as members

1.	In the Group Memberships dialog box, move the group from the Not All Are Members Of box into the All Are Members Of box.

2.	Choose the OK button to save the change.

3.	In the User Properties dialog box, choose Groups.

4.	In the Group Memberships dialog box, move the group from the All Are Members Of box back into the Not All Are Members Of box.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Managing Profiles

Use the User Environment Profile dialog box to define the user profile path, logon script name, and home directory for the selected user accounts. All entries in this dialog box are optional.

User Profile Path

In the User Environment Profile dialog box, a user profile is assigned to a user account by typing its full path (including filename) in the User Profile Path box.

A user profile is a special file that is loaded by the system during a user's logon and that defines the Windows NT environment that is created for that user. This definition includes all the user-specific settings of a user's Windows environment, such as Program Manager groups and the program items in those groups, screen colors, network connections, printer connections, mouse settings, window size and position, and more.

Each Windows NT computer maintains a default user profile. If a user account does not have a user profile assigned, at the first logon to that account from a Windows NT computer, that computer's default user profile is loaded. A copy of this profile is saved, along with any changes the user makes to the Windows NT environment. At all subsequent logons from that computer, the user's copy of the profile is loaded. In this way a user's Windows NT configuration is saved from one session to the next. However, a different user profile is saved at each Windows NT computer the user logs on from.

Optionally, you can create user profiles with User Profile Editor and save them in shared network directories. Using User Manager for Domains, you can assign these user profiles to user accounts. Using user profiles you have created differs in several ways from using a computer's default user profile:

A user can move between various Windows NT computers in the network, yet still receive a consistent Windows NT environment. Since the user profile is stored in a network directory, it can be loaded no matter which Windows NT computer the user logs on from.

If appropriate, a single user profile can be assigned to a group of users who perform similar tasks. In this way a common configuration can be shared by multiple users.

If appropriate, an administrator can use the user profile to restrict a user's access and capabilities, by using options provided by User Profile Editor.

There are two types of user profiles that can be assigned to user accounts:

Personal user profiles. Each must be assigned to only one user. A personal user profile retains any changes the user makes to the Windows NT environment. At every logon the user receives the newest version of his or her environment. Filenames of personal user profiles end in the .USR file extension.

Mandatory user profiles. These can be assigned to any number of users. A mandatory user profile permanently defines the user's Windows NT environment, so that the original, unmodified settings are always loaded at every logon. Filenames of mandatory user profiles end in the .MAN file extension.

You assign user profiles to user accounts by specifying a full path, including filename, in User Manager for Domains. Here are some examples:

You might assign one mandatory profile to one or more user accounts by specifying, for example, a user profile path of \\AIREDALE\CLERKS\CLERKS.MAN.

You might assign a personal profile to one user account by specifying, for example, a user profile path of \\WOLFHOUND\ACCOUNTS\JEFFHO.USR.

You might assign separate personal profiles to multiple user accounts by specifying, for example, a user profile path of \\CAT\PROFILES\%USERNAME%.USR. (For information on %USERNAME%, see "Using %USERNAME% in the User Profile and Home Directory Paths.")

After a user profile path is assigned to a user account, it may or may not be necessary to create the specified user profile and place it in the specified network directory.

If you assign a mandatory user profile to a user account, you must create a profile of that name and place it in the specified network directory. At logon, if the assigned mandatory user profile is not found, the logon attempt is denied.

If you assign a personal user profile to a user account, you can optionally create a profile of that name and place it in the specified network directory. It is loaded every time the user logs on.

However, if a personal user profile of that name is not created, then at the user's first logon to that account the system copies the default user profile from the user's logon computer and saves it under the specified filename in the specified network directory. This allows you to assign personal user profiles to many user accounts with User Manager for Domains, without the need to individually create each personal user profile with User Profile Editor.

For more information on user profiles, see Chapter 14, "User Profile Editor."

Logon Script Name

Logon scripts are optional. If a logon script is assigned to a user account, it runs automatically every time the user logs on. It can be used to configure a user's working environment at every logon, and it allows an administrator to affect a user's environment without managing all aspects of it. A logon script can be assigned to one or more user accounts.

A logon script is typically a batch file (any text file with a .BAT or .CMD filename extension), but any executable program (.EXE filename extension) can also be used.

In the User Environment Profile dialog box, logon scripts are assigned to user accounts by typing the filename (for example, clerks.bat) in the Logon Script Name box. At logon, the server authenticating the logon locates the logon script (if one is assigned) by looking for the specified file following that server's local logon script path (usually C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\REPL\IMPORT\SCRIPTS). If a relative path was provided in front of the filename (for example, ADMINS\CRISTALW.BAT), the server looks for the logon script in that subdirectory of the logon script path.

The logon script path can be configured for each server of a domain by using either Server Manager (administering servers either locally or remotely), or by using the Server option in each server's Control Panel.

Usually, a master collection of logon scripts is maintained by an administrator in an export directory (usually C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\REPL\EXPORT\SCRIPTS and its subdirectories) of one replication export server in the domain, and this master collection is replicated to all the servers of the domain, so that each server has its own local copy of all logon scripts.

The entry in the Logon Script Name box only specifies the filename (and optionally the relative path) and does not create the actual logon script. You will need to create a logon script of the specified name, and place it in the appropriate directory on the appropriate replication export server.

You could place a logon script in a local directory of a user's computer, but you will usually do this only when you are administering user accounts that exist on a single computer, rather than in a domain. In this case, you must place the logon script following the computer's logon script path, or in a subdirectory of that logon script path. The logon script path for a Windows NT computer is systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\IMPORT\SCRIPTS.

For information about creating logon scripts, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide. For information about configuring a server's logon script path, see the discussion of directory replication in Chapter 15, "Server Manager."

Home Directory

A home directory is a directory that is accessible to the user and contains files and programs for that user. It becomes that user's default directory for the File Open and Save As dialog boxes, for the command prompt, and for all applications that do not have a working directory defined. A home directory can be assigned to an individual user or can be shared by many users.

Home directories make it easier for an administrator to back up user files and delete user accounts, because they collect many or all of a user's files in one location.

The default home directory is \USERS\DEFAULT, on the user's local drive where Windows NT is installed. With User Manager for Domains you can change this to a shared network directory, or to another local directory on the user's workstation. When administering the user accounts of a domain, you should assign network home directories. When administering the user accounts of a computer running Windows NT Workstation, you should assign local home directories.

If you specify a network path for the home directory, in most cases User Manager for Domains automatically creates that home directory. If it can't, a message appears instructing you to manually create the directory.

If you are administering a domain and you specify a local path for the home directory, User Manager for Domains will not create the home directory. If you are administering a computer running Windows NT Workstation or a server that is not a primary or backup domain controller and you specify a local path, in most cases User Manager for Domains automatically creates that home directory at that computer. If it can't, a message appears instructing you to manually create the directory.

In order for users to access their home directories, appropriate permissions must be granted. User Manager for Domains automatically applies those permissions if it creates the home directory. When one user account is being administered and a new home directory is created, that user is granted Full Control. When two or more user accounts are being administered and a new home directory is created, Full Control is granted to Everyone.

User Manager for Domains does not automatically apply permissions if the directory already exists. In this case, you must apply the permissions using File Manager.

Using %USERNAME% in the User Profile and Home Directory Paths

In the User Profile Path and the Home Directory boxes, %USERNAME% can be substituted for the last subdirectory in the path, and the system will later substitute the user name of the user account. This is useful when multiple user accounts are selected.

For example, say eight user accounts are selected. In the User Profile Path, you might type \\terrier\users\%username%.usr; and under Home Directory you might select the Connect option, specify a drive letter of K, select the To box, and type \\terrier\home\%username%. When you choose the OK button and the User Environment Profile is saved, for each user account the actual user name will be substituted for the %USERNAME% entry.

However, %USERNAME% cannot be entered in the User Profile Path when specifying mandatory user profiles.

Note

When assigning user profile paths and home directories that are on FAT volumes, if the user name of at least one of the selected user accounts is longer than 8 characters (or if it is longer than 8.3 characters when the user name contains a period), do not use the %USERNAME% wildcard. User names can contain up to 20 characters, but FAT volumes restrict directory and filenames to the 8.3 length convention (up to 8 characters, optionally followed by a period and up to 3 characters).

The assignment of user profile paths and home directories on NTFS volumes isnot affected by this limit, so for NTFS volumes the %USERNAME% wildcard can always be used regardless of the length of any user name.

Using System Environment Variables in User Profile Paths and Logon Scripts

Any system environment variable on a client computer running Windows NT Workstation can be used in a user account's user profile path, logon script path, home directory path, and within a logon script itself. To use the system environment variable in this way, enclose it in percent signs; for example, to use a client's servername environment variable in a user profile path you could type %servername%\scripts in the User Profile Path box.

One use of this is to ensure that logon scripts and user profiles are run most efficiently on domains that span WAN links, especially if you have users that sometimes work at both sites. Suppose you have two physical sites, Paris and London. On every Windows NT computer at the London site, set the servername system environment variable to be \\server\system32\repl\import\scripts, where server is the computer name of a backup domain controller in London, and on Paris computers set servername in a similar way, but using the computer name of a Paris backup domain controller. Then, in every user account in the domain, use %servername% in the logon script paths. This way, when a user logs on, the logon script is always loaded from a server at the local site.

Managing the User Environment Profile

To configure the user environment profile

1.	Choose the Profile button from the New User, Copy Of, or User Properties dialog box.

2.	Optionally, to specify a user profile for the selected user accounts, in the User Profile Path box type the full path (including filename) for the user profile. For example, you might type \\cat\profs\etc\%username%.usr.

When administering multiple user accounts, do not assign the same personal profile to all the accounts. Either use %USERNAME%.USR, or assign a mandatory profile.

3.	Optionally, to assign a logon script, type the filename in the Logon Script Name box. For example, type clerks.bat.

If the logon script is stored in a subdirectory of the logon script path, precede the filename with that relative path. For example, type admins\ernesta.cmd.

4.	Optionally, to specify a network directory as the home directory, select the Connect option, specify a drive letter, select the To box, and type a network path. For example, you might specify drive H and type \\cat\users\%username%.

When administering the user accounts of a domain, specify a network directory.

5.	Optionally, to specify a local directory as a home directory, select the Local Path box and type the local path (including the drive letter). For example, you might type c:\operators\jeffho.

When administering the user accounts of a computer running Windows NT Workstation or a server that is not a primary or backup domain controller, specify a local path.

Note

If no home directory is specified, the system will use the default local home directory (\USERS\DEFAULT on the user's local drive where Windows NT is installed) for each of the user accounts being administered.

6.	Choose the OK button.

How the User Environment Profile Is Copied

When a user account is copied, the logon script name is copied exactly.

If the user profile path of the original account contains a mandatory user profile, the path is copied exactly.

However, if the user profile path of the original account contains a personal user profile (.USR), and if the last part of that entry is the original user name, the new account substitutes the new user name there. If not, the path is copied exactly. Here are two examples:

If the original account has the user name LAURASHEP and the user profile path \\WESTSHOP\USERS\LAURASHEP.USR, during a copy a new account that is given the user name KIMY will be given the user profile path \\WESTSHOP\USERS\KIMY.USR.

If the original account has the user name CHRISDR and the user profile path \\SERVER3\OPERATORS\CD.USR, during a copy a new account that is given the user name ANNIEP will be given the same user profile path, \\SERVER3\OPERATORS\CD.USR.

The home directory is copied using a similar rule:  if in the original account the last subdirectory in the home directory path is identical to the user name, the new account substitutes the new user name there. If not, the entry is copied exactly. Here are two examples:

If the original account has the user name CARYR and the home directory \\SETTER\USERS\CARYR, a new account with the user name BILLO is given the home directory \\SETTER\USERS\BILLO.

If the original account has the user name BLAKER and the home directory \\HOUND\USERS\HOME, then a new account with the user name JIMGR is given the same home directory, \\HOUND\USERS\HOME.

Managing Logon Hours

Use the Logon Hours dialog box to restrict the days and hours during which a user can connect to a server. The default is to allow a user to connect during all hours of all days of the week, but you can optionally restrict a user to certain days and hours. This does not affect a user's ability to use a workstation.

The Logon Hours dialog box displays a one-week calendar, with logon hours displayed in one-hour increments across seven days. A box represents each hour. For example, the first box in each row represents the hour from midnight through 12:59 a.m., and the last box in each row represents the hour from 11:00 p.m. through 11:59 p.m.

When a box on the calendar is filled, the user is allowed to connect to servers during that hour. When a box is empty, the user cannot connect to servers during that hour.

When a user is connected to a server and the logon hours are exceeded, the user will either be disconnected from all server connections or will be allowed to remain connected but denied any new connections. This behavior depends on an option in the Account Policy dialog box, described later in this chapter.

To manage logon hours

1.	Choose the Hours button from the New User, Copy Of, or User Properties dialog box.

2.	In the Logon Hours dialog box, select the hours to be administered.

To select		Click
One hour		The box for that hour.
A block of hours		The beginning of the block and drag through the rows and columns to the end of the block.
One entire day		That day in the left column.
One hour across all seven days		The top box of that column.
The entire week		The top left box (above Sunday).
3.	Choose either the Allow or Disallow button.

Choose		To
Allow		Allow connections during the selected hours.
Disallow		Deny connections during the selected hours.
4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Managing Logon Workstations

Use the Logon Workstations dialog box to restrict the workstations from which users can log on to domain accounts. The default is to allow a user to log on from any workstation, but you can optionally restrict a user's logons to certain workstations.

To manage logon workstations

1.	Choose the Logon From button from the New User, Copy Of, or User Properties dialog box.

2.	Select one of the logon options.

Select		To
User May Log Onto All Workstations		Allow logons to the selected domain accounts from all workstations.
User May Log Onto These Workstations		Allow logons to the selected domain accounts only from the workstations entered in boxes 1 through 8.
3.	If you select User May Log Onto These Workstations, type computer names in at least one and up to eight of the numbered boxes.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Managing Account Information

Use the Account Information dialog box to define an account expiration date (if any) and to specify the account type for the selected user accounts.

When an account has an expiration date, the account will be disabled at the end of that day. (Expired accounts are not deleted, only disabled.) When an account expires, a user who is logged on remains logged on, but can establish no new network connections, and cannot log on again after logging off.

Most accounts are global accounts, and this is the default setting. A global account is a normal user account, in the user's home domain, and is represented by the global account icon. If there are multiple domains in the network, it is best if each user in the network has only one global account, in only one domain, and access to other domains is provided through trust relationships.

A local account is an account provided in this domain for a user whose global account is not in a trusted domain. This might be a Windows NT Server domain that is not trusted by this domain, or some other type of domain or network. Local accounts are represented by the special local account icon.

For a user from a non-trusted domain to participate in this domain, the user must be given a user account in this domain, and that account must be configured as a local account.

A primary use for local accounts is to facilitate the integration of untrusted domains (such as LAN Manager 2.x domains) which are expected to eventually become Windows NT domains. The use of local accounts limits the proliferation of temporary accounts in this domain, and allows easy identification and deletion of those accounts from this domain, once the untrusted domain migrates to Windows NT and establishes trust relationships.

A local account of one domain cannot be used in trusting domains. Local accounts do not appear in the Add Users and Groups dialog boxes of trusting domains. Therefore, if a user from a non-trusted domain needs to access several Windows NT Server domains, you must create a local account for the user on each of those Windows NT domains.

To manage user account information

1.	Choose the Account button from the New User, Copy Of, or User Properties dialog box.

2.	Under Account Expires, select either Never or End Of.

3.	If you select End Of, specify an expiration date in the End Of box.

4.	Under Account Type, select either Global Account or Local Account.

Most accounts are global accounts. Use local accounts only when a trust relationship does not exist with the user's home domain.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Disabling or Deleting User Accounts
User Manager for Domains	11 of 30

Managing User Accounts

Disabling or Deleting User Accounts

A user's ability to log on can be rescinded by either disabling or deleting the user account.

A disabled user account still exists, but the user is not permitted to log on. A disabled account continues to appear in the user account list of the User Manager for Domains window. A disabled account can be restored to enabled status at any time. A deleted user account is completely removed. It disappears from the user account list of the User Manager for Domains window, and it cannot be restored.

Be certain you want to delete a user account before you do so, because a deleted user account cannot be recovered. Internally, Windows NT knows every user account by its security identifier (SID), a unique number that identifies it. Every group and user account ever created for the domain has a SID. Internal processes in Windows NT refer to a user account's SID rather than its user name. So if you delete a user account and then create another user account with the same user name, the new user account will not have any of the rights or permissions previously granted to the old user account because the user accounts have different SID numbers.

Because of this it is a good idea to first disable a user account, and then periodically delete the disabled accounts. This is a low-risk way to remove users.

Another reason to disable an account occurs when you want to create an inactive template account that can be copied to create new accounts. You can create a new user account, configure it as needed, disable it, and then use it as a template. As described earlier in "Adding User Accounts," you can quickly make numerous enabled copies of a disabled template account.

To disable one or more user accounts

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, select one or more user accounts.

2.	From the User menu, choose Properties.

3.	Select the Account Disabled check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Logons are no longer allowed for those user accounts.

To enable one or more disabled accounts

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, select one or more user accounts.

2.	From the User menu, choose Properties.

3.	Clear the Account Disabled check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Logons are now allowed for those user accounts.

To delete one or more user accounts

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, select one or more user accounts.

The built-in Administrator and Guest accounts cannot be deleted.

2.	From the User menu, choose Delete.

3.	If a confirmation message appears, choose the OK button.

4.	When the delete message appears, choose the Yes button. If multiple user accounts are selected, choose the Yes To All button.


Unlocking User Accounts
User Manager for Domains	12 of 30

Managing User Accounts

Unlocking User Accounts

If a user account becomes locked out because of too many bad logon attempts, you can use the following procedure to unlock the account, so that it can log on.

To unlock a user account

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, select the account to be unlocked.

2.	From the User menu, choose Properties.

3.	Clear the Account Locked Out check box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Note

You cannot select the Account Locked Out check box to lock out an account. Accounts can only be locked out by too many bad logon attempts. If you want to prevent the use of an account, disable it.


Renaming User Accounts
User Manager for Domains	13 of 30

Managing User Accounts

Renaming User Accounts

Any user account can be renamed, including the built-in user accounts. Because it retains its security identifier (SID), a renamed user account retains all its other properties - for example, its description, password, group memberships, user environment profile, logon hours, logon workstations, account information, and any assigned permissions and rights.

To rename a user account

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, select one user account.

2.	From the User menu, choose Rename.

3.	In the Rename dialog box, type a new user name of up to 20 characters in the Change To box.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Selecting User Accounts
User Manager for Domains	14 of 30

Managing User Accounts

Selecting User Accounts

The user account list in the User Manager window includes all the user accounts of the displayed domain. One or more user accounts can be selected from this list.

After one account is selected you can copy, delete, rename, or modify the properties of that user account, or create a new group that contains that account.

After two or more user accounts are selected you can modify the properties of all those accounts in the same way, delete all those accounts, or create a new group containing all those accounts.

To select multiple user accounts you can use the mouse, the Select Users command, or both. The advantage of the Select Users command is that it can be used to select or deselect the entire user account membership of a group. However, only user accounts listed in the User Manager for Domains window are selected or deselected. Although local groups can contain user or group accounts not from the local domain, those user accounts are not affected by choices made in the Select Users dialog box. Additionally, if a local group is selected, and if that local group contains a global group, the user accounts of that global group are not affected.

Note

When the Low Speed Connection option is selected, the Select Users command is unavailable.

To select multiple user accounts

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, either select the user accounts you want to be initially selected, or select any group to make sure no user accounts are initially selected.

2.	From the User menu, choose Select Users.

3.	To select the users of a group, select the group from the list and choose the Select button.

4.	To deselect the users of a group, select the group from the list and choose the Deselect button.

5.	Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary.

6.	Choose the Close button.

The selected accounts are highlighted in the User Manager for Domains window.

Now that the desired accounts are selected, you can choose a command from the User menu. For example, you might choose Properties and simultaneously modify all the selected user accounts in the same way.

Multiple user account selections can be very useful. For example, suppose you want to create a new local group that contains all the user accounts of three existing groups. You could do this by using the Select Users command to select the user accounts of those groups, and then choosing the New Local Group command.

Or, suppose you want to delete all the user accounts of Group A that are not members of Group B. You could do this by using the Select Users command to select the users of Group A, deselecting the users of Group B, and then choosing the Delete command.


Managing Groups
User Manager for Domains	15 of 30

Managing Groups

Groups are collections of user accounts. Giving a user account membership in a group gives that user all the rights and permissions that have been granted to the group. This provides an easy way to grant common capabilities to sets of users.

The built-in groups provided with Windows NT have been granted useful collections of rights and built-in abilities. In most cases, one of these built-in groups will provide all the capabilities needed by a particular user. For example, if you have a user account that belongs to the built-in Administrators group, logging on with that account gives you administrative capabilities over the domain and the servers of the domain. To give a user account a needed set of capabilities, assign it to the appropriate built-in group.

You can also use groups to easily manage access to resources such as directories, files, or printers. You assign resource permissions to a group, and then add user accounts to that group. If you need to change the permissions provided to that set of users, you simply add or remove the permissions assigned to the group, rather than to each of the user accounts. Or, if you need to give a new user access to a specific set of resources (for example, a number of directories and files), all you have to do is add the user's account to the appropriate group, rather than changing the permissions on each individual resource. Maintaining permissions for a group is simpler than maintaining permissions for many user accounts.

In most situations the built-in groups provide all the capabilities needed by users. However, if necessary, User Manager for Domains can be used to create and define additional groups in order to control access to specific sets of resources by specific sets of users.

Two types of groups can be maintained in a Windows NT Server domain:  local groups and global groups.

Local groups are represented by the local group icon. Such a group is called local because it can only be granted permissions and rights for the servers of its own domain. However, it can contain user accounts and global groups both from its own domain and from trusted domains. Local groups provide a way for you to create handy sets of users from both inside and outside the domain, to be used only at servers of the domain.

A global group is represented by the global group icon. Such a group is called global because it can be used in many places:  its own domain, servers and workstations of the domain, and trusting domains. In all those places it can be granted rights and permissions and can become a member of local groups. However, it can only contain user accounts from its own domain. Global groups provide a way for you to create handy sets of users from inside the domain, available for use both in and out of the domain.

The following table summarizes how the two types of groups are used.

If		Need to be used in		You can put them in
User accounts from this domain		The servers and workstations of this domain, or of other domains		A global group
User accounts from this domain or other domains		The servers of this domain		A local group
Global groups from this domain or other domains		The servers of this domain		A local group
When adding a group you will be asked to provide a group name. It must be unique, meaning it cannot be identical to any other group name or user name of the domain or computer being administered. It can contain any uppercase or lowercase characters except the following:

"    /    \    [    ]    :    ;    |    =    ,    +    *    ?    <    >

Note

When Windows NT displays a group name and when the distinction is necessary, Windows NT identifies the domain or workstation the group is from by presenting the name in the form domainname\groupname or computername\groupname. For example, a group named Managers from a domain named Engineering would be displayed as Engineering\Managers.


Built-In Groups
User Manager for Domains	16 of 30

Managing Groups

Built-In Groups

The actions a user can perform depend on the group memberships of his or her user account. Several built-in groups are provided with Windows NT, and by default each of these groups is granted a particular set of user rights.

In addition to rights, some of the built-in local groups are granted built-in abilities. Although rights can be directly granted to and removed from groups and user accounts, these built-in abilities are not directly administerable. The only way for you to provide these built-in abilities to a user is to make that user a member of the appropriate local group.

The rights and built-in abilities granted to the built-in local groups on Windows NT domains are shown in the following table. In most situations these built-in local groups provide all the capabilities needed by the users of a domain. The built-in global groups of a domain are not shown in this table because the built-in global groups receive their rights and abilities indirectly, through their memberships in built-in local groups.

For information on the built-in user groups provided with computers running Windows NT Workstation and with servers that are not domain controllers, see "Administering Computers Running Windows NT Workstation," later in this chapter.

To provide these rights and built-in abilities to a user, add the user's account to the appropriate group. Following are brief discussions of each built-in group.

Administrators

The Administrators local group is the most powerful group in the domain. Members of this group have more control over the domain than do any other users. They manage the overall configuration of the domain and the domain's servers. The built-in Administrator user account is a member of the Administrators local group, and cannot be removed. By default the Domain Admins global group is also a member of this local group, but it can be removed.

Note that administrators do not automatically have access to every file in the domain. If a file's permissions do not grant access, the administrator cannot access the file. Every file on an NTFS volume has an owner, who can set permissions on the file. If needed, an administrator can take ownership of a file and thus have access to it. But if the administrator does so, this event is recorded in the security log (if auditing of files is turned on), and the administrator cannot give ownership back to the original owner. For more information, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

Domain Admins

The Domain Admins global group is a member of the Administrators local group for the domain, and of the Administrators local group for every Windows NT computer in the domain.

The built-in Administrator user account is a member of the Domain Admins global group.

Because of these memberships, a user logged on to the Administrator account is able to administer the domain, the primary and backup domain controllers, and all other Windows NT computers in the domain. (However, if you want to prevent Domain Admins from administering a particular workstation or a server that is not a domain controller, you can remove the Domain Admins global group from that computer's Administrators group.)

To provide administrative-level abilities to a new account, it should be made a member of the Domain Admins global group. This allows that user to administer the domain, the servers and workstations of the domain, and trusted domains that have added the Domain Admins global group from this domain to their Administrators local group.

Users

Membership in the Users local group provides the abilities most users need to perform normal tasks. Users logged on as members of the Users local group have no rights at servers running Windows NT Server. However, they do possess certain rights at their local workstations.

By default the Domain Users global group is a member of the Users local group, but it can be removed.

Domain Users

The Domain Users global group initially contains the domain's built-in Administrator account. By default, all new accounts created thereafter in the domain are added to the Domain Users group, unless you specifically remove them from this group.

The Domain Users global group is by default a member of the Users local group for the domain, and of the Users local group for every Windows NT computer in the domain. Domain Users is the default primary group for each user.

Because of these memberships, users of the domain have normal user access to and abilities for the domain and the Windows NT computers of the domain. (However, you can prevent Domain Users from being granted this access on a particular workstation or on a server that is not a domain controller by removing the Domain Users global group from that computer's Users group.)

Guests

The Guests local group allows occasional or one-time users to log on and be granted very limited abilities. Users logged on as members of the Guests local group have no rights at domain servers. However, they do possess certain rights at their individual workstations.

Domain Guests

The Domain Guests global group initially contains the domain's built-in Guest user account. If you add user accounts that are intended to have more limited rights and permissions than typical domain user accounts, you may want to add those accounts to the Domain Guests group and remove them from the Domain Users group.

The Domain Guests global group is a member of the domain's Guests local group.

Account Operators

Members of the Account Operators local group can use User Manager for Domains to create user accounts and groups for the domain and to modify or delete most user accounts and groups of the domain. Account Operators can also log on at domain servers, can shut down domain servers, and can use Server Manager to add computers to a domain.

However, an account operator cannot modify or delete the Administrators, Domain Admins, Account Operators, Backup Operators, Print Operators, or Server Operators groups, cannot modify or delete the user accounts of administrators, and cannot administer the security policies.

Backup Operators

Members of the Backup Operators local group can back up and restore files on the domain's primary and backup domain controllers. They can also log on at these servers, and shut them down.

Print Operators

Members of the Print Operators local group can create, delete, and manage printer shares on the domain's primary and backup domain controllers. Print Operators can also log on at these servers, and shut them down.

Server Operators

Members of the Server Operators local group can manage the domain's primary and backup domain controllers. For example, Server Operators can create, delete, and manage printer shares at these servers; create, delete and manage network shares; back up and restore files; lock and unlock these servers; format a server's fixed disk; and change the system time. Server Operators can also log on from servers and shut down servers.

Replicator

The Replicator local group supports directory replication functions. The only member of the domain's Replicator local group should be a domain user account used to log on the Replicator services of the primary domain controller and the backup domain controllers in the domain. Do not add the user accounts of actual users to this group.

Special Groups

In addition to the built-in groups mentioned above, some other groups are created by the system and are used for special purposes. These groups are not listed in the User Manager for Domains window.

However, when you administer a computer and Windows NT presents lists of groups, these special groups sometimes appear in the list. For example, they can appear when assigning permissions to directories, files, shared network directories, or printers.

Group	Refers to

EVERYONE	Anyone using the computer. This includes all local and remote users (that is, the INTERACTIVE and NETWORK groups combined).

In a domain, members of Everyone can access the network, connect to a server's shared network directories, and print to a server's printers.

INTERACTIVE	Anyone using a computer locally.

NETWORK	All users connected over the network to a computer.

SYSTEM	The operating system.

CREATOR OWNER	Transfer of permissions to creators of subdirectories, files, and print jobs. For a directory, if permissions are granted to the CREATOR OWNER group, the creator of a subdirectory or file will be granted those permissions for that subdirectory or file. For a printer, if permissions are granted to the CREATOR OWNER group, the creator of a print job will be granted those permissions for that print job.


Adding Global Groups
User Manager for Domains	17 of 30

Managing Groups

Adding Global Groups

A global group can be added either by creating a completely new global group, or by copying an existing global group.

Note

When the Low Speed Connection option has been selected, global groups cannot be created or copied.

To create a new global group

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window either select the user accounts you want to be the initial members of the new group, or select any group to ensure no user accounts are initially selected.

2.	From the User menu, choose New Global Group.

If you selected one or more user accounts in step 1, the selected users are the initial members of the new group.

3.	In the Group Name box, type a group name of up to 20 characters.

4.	In the Description box, type a description.

5.	To add members to the global group, select one or more user accounts from the Not Members box, and then choose the Add button. Or, select one or more user accounts from the Not Members box, and then drag one of the selected icons into the Members box.

6.	To remove members from the global group, select one or more user accounts from the Members box, and then choose the Remove button. Or, select one or more user accounts from the Members box, and then drag one of the selected icons into the Not Members box.

7.	When the membership of the global group is defined, choose the OK button.

The main advantage of copying a group is that the new group will have the same members as the original group. However, the permissions and rights of the original group are not copied to the new group.

To make a copy of an existing global group

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, select one global group.

2.	From the User menu, choose Copy.

3.	Define the new group as described in the previous procedure for creating a new global group.

You must provide a group name. You can accept or change the description and group members, which were copied from the original group.

4.	When the membership of the global group is defined, choose the OK button.

After a global group has been created it can be granted permissions in its domain, in a workstation in its domain, or in a domain that trusts its domain. These permissions might allow, for example, access to files (as set in File Manager) or printers (as set in Print Manager).


Managing Global Group Properties
User Manager for Domains	18 of 30

Managing Groups

Managing Global Group Properties

The description and the membership of global groups can be modified.

Note

When the Low Speed Connection option has been selected, global group properties cannot be managed.

To modify an existing global group

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, double-click one global group. Or select the global group, and then choose Properties from the User menu.

2.	To change the description, type new text in the Description box.

3.	To add members to the global group, select one or more user accounts from the Not Members box, and then choose the Add button. Or, select one or more user accounts from the Not Members box, and then drag one of the selected icons into the Members box.

4.	To remove members from the global group, select one or more user accounts from the Members box, and then choose the Remove button. Or, select one or more user accounts from the Members box, and then drag one of the selected icons into the Not Members box.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Adding Local Groups
User Manager for Domains	19 of 30

Managing Groups

Adding Local Groups

A local group can be added either by creating a completely new local group, or by copying an existing local group.

To create a new local group

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window either select the user accounts you want to be the initial members of the new group, or select any group to ensure no user accounts are initially selected.

2.	From the User menu, choose New Local Group.

If you selected one or more user accounts in step 1, the selected users are the initial members of the new group.

3.	To view the full names of the listed user accounts, choose the Show Full Names button.

This can be a lengthy operation when the local group contains numerous users from other domains.

4.	In the Group Name box, type a name for the new group.

5.	In the Description box, type a description.

6.	To add members to the local group, choose the Add button and complete the Add Users And Groups dialog box that appears.

You can add global groups and user accounts from this domain and from trusted domains. For information on the Add Users And Groups dialog box, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

7.	To remove members from the local group, select one or more names from the Members box, and then choose the Remove button.

8.	When the membership of the local group is defined, choose the OK button.

The main advantage of copying a group is that the new group will have the same members as the original group. However, the permissions, rights, and built-in abilities of the original group are not copied to the new group.

To make a copy of an existing local group

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, select one local group.

2.	From the User menu, choose Copy.

3.	Define the group as described in the previous procedure for creating a new local group.

You must provide a group name. You can accept or change the description and group members, which were copied from the original group.

4.	When the membership of the local group is defined, choose the OK button.

Once a local group has been created, it can be granted permissions in its domain. These permissions might allow, for example, access to files (as set in File Manager) or printers (as set in Print Manager).


Managing Local Group Properties
User Manager for Domains	20 of 30

Managing Groups

Managing Local Group Properties

The description and the membership of an existing local group can be modified.

To modify a local group

1.	In the User Manager for Domains window, double-click one local group. Or select the local group, and then choose Properties from the User menu.

In the Local Group Properties dialog box, the group name is displayed but cannot be changed.

2.	To view the full names of the listed user accounts, choose the Show Full Names button.

This can be a lengthy operation when the local group contains numerous users from other domains.

3.	To change the description, type new text in the Description box.

4.	To add members to the local group, choose the Add button and complete the Add Users And Groups dialog box that appears.

You can add global groups and user accounts from this domain and from trusted domains. For information on the Add Users And Groups dialog box, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

5.	To remove members from the local group, select one or more names from the Members box, and then choose the Remove button.

6.	When the membership of the local group is defined, choose the OK button.


Deleting Groups
User Manager for Domains	21 of 30

Managing Groups

Deleting Groups

Groups that have been created with User Manager for Domains can be deleted, but the built-in groups provided with Windows NT cannot.

Be certain you want to delete a group before you do so, because a deleted group cannot be recovered. Internally, Windows NT knows every group by its security identifier (SID), a unique number that identifies it. Every group and user account ever created for the domain has a SID. Internal processes in Windows NT refer to a group's SID rather than its group name. So if you delete a group and then create another group with the same group name, the new group will not have any of the rights or permissions granted the old group, because the groups have different SID numbers.

Deleting a group removes only that group:  it does not delete the user accounts or global groups that are members of the deleted group.

To delete a group

1.	Select the group from the group list in the User Manager for Domains window.

2.	From the User menu, choose Delete.

3.	If a confirmation message appears, choose the OK button.

4.	When the delete message appears, choose the Yes button.


Managing the Security Policies
User Manager for Domains	22 of 30

Managing the Security Policies

The following security policies can be managed with User Manager for Domains:

The Account policy, which controls the way passwords must be used by all user accounts and whether user accounts are locked out when they have too many bad logon attempts within a period of time

The User Rights policy, which controls the rights assigned to groups and user accounts

The Audit policy, which defines the security events that will be logged

The Trust Relationships policy, which specifies the domains that this domain trusts, and the domains that are allowed to trust this domain


Managing the Account Policy
User Manager for Domains	23 of 30

Managing the Security Policies

Managing the Account Policy

The Account policy controls the way passwords must be used by all user accounts, and also determines the computer's account lockout policy. The account lockout feature enables you to make Windows NT Server more secure from intruders who try to log on by guessing the passwords of existing user accounts. When account lockout is enabled, a user account becomes locked if there are a number of incorrect attempts to log on to that account within a specified amount of time. Locked accounts cannot log on. A locked account remains locked until an administrator unlocks it, or until a specified amount of time passes, depending on how you configure account lockout. By default, account lockout is disabled.

Changes to this policy affect each user at the next logon.

To manage the Account policy

1.	From the Policy menu, choose Account.

2.	In the Account Policy dialog box, define the four password parameters.

Parameter		Meaning
Maximum Password Age		The period of time a password can be used before the system requires the user to change it.
Minimum Password Age		The period of time a password must be used before the user is allowed to change it. If you select the Allow Changes Immediately option here, then under Password Uniqueness you must select the Do Not Keep Password History option.
Minimum Password Length		The fewest characters a password can contain.
Password Uniqueness		The number of new passwords that must be used by a user account before an old password can be reused. If you enter a uniqueness value here (for example, Remember 4 Passwords), then under Minimum Password Age you must specify an age value (for example, Allow Changes In 7 Days).
3.	Select No Account Lockout to specify that users are never locked out because of bad password attempts, or select Account Lockout to enable account lockout. If you choose Account Lockout, you should also set the following parameters.

Parameter		Meaning
Lockout After		The number of incorrect logon attempts that will cause the account to be locked. The range is 1 to 999.
Reset Count After		The maximum number of minutes that can occur between any two bad logon attempts. The range is 1 to 99999. For example, if Lockout After is 5 bad logon attempts, and Reset Count After is 30 minutes, then 5 bad logon attempts, each 29 minutes apart, would cause lockout.
Lockout Duration		Select Forever to cause locked accounts to remain locked until an administrator unlocks them. Select Duration and type a number to cause accounts to remain locked for the specified number of minutes.
4.	Select or clear the Forcibly Disconnect Remote Users From Server When Logon Hours Expire check box.

This option interacts with the Logon Hours defined for a user account. If this option is selected, a user account that exceeds its logon hours is disconnected from all connections to any server in the domain. The user receives a warning message a few minutes prior to expiration of the logon hours.

If this check box is cleared, the user will not be disconnected, but no new connections will be allowed and a warning message will be sent every 10 minutes.

5.	Select or clear the Users Must Log On In Order To Change Password check box. Selecting this prevents users from being able to change their own passwords when they expire-- the user must get help from an administrator. Clearing the box allows users to change their own passwords when they expire, without help from an administrator.

6.	Choose the OK button.


Managing the User Rights Policy
User Manager for Domains	24 of 30

Managing the Security Policies

Managing the User Rights Policy

A right authorizes a user to perform certain actions on the system. A user who logs on to an account to which the appropriate rights have been granted can carry out the corresponding actions. When a user does not have appropriate rights, Windows NT blocks attempts to carry out those actions.

Rights apply to the system as a whole, and are different from permissions, which apply to specific objects. A permission is a rule associated with an object (usually a directory, file, or printer) to regulate which users can have access to the object and in what manner. Most often the creator or owner of the object sets the permissions for the object.

Rights are not associated with a specific object. Instead, a right applies to the entire system, and may override permissions set on an object. For example, a user logged on as a member of the Backup Operators group has the right to perform backup tasks for all servers of the domain. Doing so requires the ability to read all files on those servers, even files on which their owners have set permissions that explicitly deny access to all users, including members of the Backup Operators group. A right, in this case the right to perform backup, takes precedence over all file and directory permissions.

Each of the built-in groups conveys certain rights and built-in abilities to the user accounts that belong to it. For information on the capabilities of these groups, see "Built-In Groups," earlier in this chapter.

The following table describes the user rights managed with the User Rights policy. Note that when you administer the User Rights policy for a domain, the computers referred to in the following table are the primary and backup domain controllers of the domain.

User right		Allows a user to
Access this computer from network		Connect over the network to a computer.
Add workstations to domain		Add a workstation to the domain, allowing the workstation to recognize the domain's user and global group accounts.
Back up files and directories		Back up files and directories. This right supersedes file and directory permissions.
Change the system time		Set the time for the internal clock of a computer.
Force shutdown from a remote system		This right is not currently implemented. It is reserved for future use.
Load and unload device drivers		Install and remove device drivers. This right appears here if 3.5 is the first version of Windows NT Server installed on the computer. If 3.5 is an upgrade, you may have to select the Show Advanced User Rights option to see this right.
Log on locally		Log on at the computer itself, from the computer's keyboard.
Manage auditing and security log		Specify what types of resource access (such as file access) are to be audited. View and clear the security log. Note that this right does not allow a user to set system auditing using the Audit command in the Policy menu of User Manager for Domains. This ability is always held only by administrators.
Restore files and directories		Restore files and directories. This right supersedes file and directory permissions.
Shut down the system		Shut down Windows NT.
Take ownership of files or other objects		Take ownership of files, directories, and other objects on a computer.
In addition to the user rights listed above, if the Show Advanced User Rights option is selected, some additional rights can be managed with the User Rights policy. Many of these advanced rights are useful only to programmers writing applications to run on Windows NT, and usually will not be granted to a group or user. However, a few advanced rights, shown in the following table, may be of interest to domain administrators.

Advanced user right		Allows
Bypass traverse checking		A user to change directories and travel through a directory tree, even if the user has no permissions for those directories.
Load and unload device drivers		A user to install and remove device drivers. This right appears as an advanced user right only if version 3.5 of Windows NT Server was installed as an upgrade of a previous version of Windows NT Server. Otherwise, this right appears whenever user rights are viewed.
Log on as a service		A process to register with the system as a service.
For more information on the rest of the programming rights, briefly defined in the following table, see the Windows NT programming documentation.

Advanced user right		Allows
Act as part of the operations system		A user to perform as a secure, trusted part of the operating system. Some subsystems are granted this right.
Create a pagefile		A user can create a page file (not available in this version of Windows NT).
Create a token object		A user or program to create access tokens. Only the Local Security Authority can do this.
Create permanent shared objects		A user to create special permanent objects, such as \\Device, which are used within Windows NT.
Debug programs		A user to debug various low-level objects such as threads.
Generate security audits		A user or program to generate security audit log entries.
Increase quotas		A user to increase object quotas (not available in this version of Windows NT).
Increase scheduling priority		A user to boost the priority of a process.
Lock pages in memory		A user to lock pages in memory so they cannot be paged out to a backing store such as PAGEFILE.SYS.
Log on as a batch job		A user to log on using a batch queue facility (not available in this version of Windows NT).
Modify firmware environment variables		A user to modify system environment variables. (Note that users can always modify their own user environment variables).
Profile single process		The use of Windows NT profiling (performance sampling) capabilities on a process.
Profile system performance		The use of Windows NT profiling capabilities on the system. (This can slow the system down.)
Replace a process-level token		A user to modify a process's security access token. This is a powerful privilege used only by the system.
In most situations the easiest way to provide rights to a user is to add that user's account to one of the built-in groups that already possesses the needed rights, rather than by administering the User Rights policy. However, if a special situation occurs, it is possible to assign a right to or remove it from a user or a group by employing the following procedure.

To manage the User Rights policy

1.	From the Policy menu, choose User Rights.

2.	Select a user right from those listed in the Right box.

When you select a right, the Grant To box lists the groups and user accounts that are assigned that right.

3.	To grant that right to additional groups or user accounts, choose the Add button and complete the Add Users And Groups dialog box that appears.

For information on the Add Users And Groups dialog box, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

4.	To remove a group or user account from the list of those granted this right, select a name in the Grant To box, and then choose the Remove button.

5.	Repeat steps 2 through 4 as necessary.

6.	To administer the advanced user rights, select the Show Advanced User Rights option, and then follow steps 2 through 4.

7.	Choose the OK button.


Managing the Audit Policy
User Manager for Domains	25 of 30

Managing the Security Policies

Managing the Audit Policy

Through auditing, you can track selected activities of users. The Audit policy determines the amount and type of security logging Windows NT will perform.

Windows NT can record a range of event types, from a system-wide event such as a user logging on, to an attempt by a particular user to read a specific file. Both successful and unsuccessful attempts to perform an action can be recorded.

Use the Audit policy to select the types of security events that will be audited. When such an event occurs, an entry is added to the computer's security log. The security log can be viewed with Event Viewer.

When administering domains, the Audit policy applies to the security log of the primary and backup domain controllers in the domain, because they share the same Audit policy. When you administer a computer running Windows NT Workstation or a server that is not a domain controller, this policy applies only to the security log of that computer.

The following table describes the type of events that can be audited.

Type of event		Description
Logon and Logoff		A user logged on or off, or made a network connection.
File and Object Access		A user accessed a directory or a file that is set for auditing in File Manager, or a user sent a print job to a printer that is set for auditing in Print Manager.
Use of User Rights		A user used a user right (except those rights related to logon and logoff).
User and Group Management		A user account or group was created, changed, or deleted. A user account was renamed, disabled, or enabled; or a password was set or changed.
Security Policy Changes		A change was made to the User Rights, Audit, or Trust Relationships policies.
Restart, Shutdown, and System		A user restarted or shut down the computer, or an event has occurred that affects system security or the security log.
Process Tracking		These events provided detailed tracking information for things like program activation, some forms of handle duplication, indirect object accesses, and process exit.
Because the security log is limited in size, carefully choose the events to be audited, and consider the amount of disk space you are willing to devote to the security log. The maximum size of the security log is defined in Event Viewer.

To manage the Audit policy

1.	From the Policy menu, choose Audit.

2.	Select one of the two main auditing options.

If you select		Then
Do Not Audit		Security events are not recorded in the security log
Audit These Events		Selected events are recorded in the security log
3.	If you select Audit These Events, specify the events to be audited by selecting or clearing the Success and Failure check boxes for each type of event.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Managing Trust Relationships
User Manager for Domains	26 of 30

Managing the Security Policies

Managing Trust Relationships

A trust relationship is a link between two domains, where one domain honors the users of another domain, trusting that other domain to authenticate the logons of its own users. When trust relationships are properly established between the domains of a network, they allow a user to have only one user account in one domain, yet to access the entire network. All the computers on the network can recognize the user account, and a user needs to log on and provide a password only once to access any computer on the network.

Trust relationships move the convenience of centralized administration to the network level, rather than just the domain level.

When you establish a trust relationship between domains, one domain (the trusting domain) trusts the other (the trusted domain). If you choose, you can have both domains trust each other.

User and global group accounts defined in the trusted domain can be given rights and resource permissions in the trusting domain, even though those accounts aren't members of the trusting domain's security database.

Trust relationships can only be created between Windows NT Server domains. When administering other Windows NT computers or a LAN Manager 2.x domain, the Trust Relationships command is unavailable.

Establishing a trust relationship requires two steps:  first one domain must permit a second domain to trust it, and then the second domain must be set to trust the first domain. Because the trust relationship is not yet established, these two steps may often need to be performed by separate administrators.

To permit another domain to trust this domain

1.	If User Manager for Domains does not already display the appropriate domain, from the User menu choose Select Domain. In the Select Domain dialog box that appears, specify the name of the domain that will be configured to permit another to trust it.

For example, you might specify the Production domain.

2.	From the Policy menu, choose Trust Relationships.

The Trust Relationships dialog box lists the trust relationships for the domain.

3.	Choose the Add button next to the Permitted To Trust This Domain box.

4.	In the Domain To Permit box, type the name of the domain that will be allowed to trust this domain.

For example, type the name of the Shipping domain.

5.	Type a password in both the Password and Confirm Password boxes.

Passwords are case-sensitive.

6.	In the Permit Domain To Trust dialog box, choose the OK button.

In the Trust Relationships dialog box, the added name appears in the Permitted To Trust This Domain list.

In this example, Shipping is now permitted to trust Production.

7.	In the Trust Relationships dialog box, choose the Close button.

8.	Provide the password to the administrator of the domain you have permitted to trust this domain. That administrator must complete the trust relationship by having that domain trust this one.

In this example, you would provide the password to the administrator of the Shipping domain.

To trust another domain

1.	Obtain a password from the administrator of the domain that will be trusted.

2.	If User Manager for Domains does not already display the appropriate domain, from the User menu choose Select Domain. In the Select Domain dialog box that appears, specify the name of the domain that will be configured to trust another.

In this example, you would specify the Shipping domain.

3.	From the Policy menu, choose Trust Relationships.

The Trust Relationships dialog box lists the trust relationships for the domain.

4.	Choose the Add button next to the Trusted Domains box.

5.	In the Domain box, type the name of the domain that will be trusted.

In this example, you would type Production.

6.	In the Password box, type the password required by that domain.

Passwords are case-sensitive.

7.	In the Add Trusted Domain dialog box, choose the OK button.

In the Trust Relationships dialog box, the added name appears in the Trusted Domains list. In this example, Shipping now trusts Production.

8.	In the Trust Relationships dialog box, choose the Close button.

This procedure presents a simple case where only one trust relationship is established between two domains. More complex actions can be accomplished. You can have both domains trust each other (in the previous example, Shipping trusts Production, but Production doesn't trust Shipping). For the domain being administered, you can add multiple domains to the list of trusted domains, or to the list of domains permitted to trust the domain. Using the Remove buttons, you can stop trusting other domains, or stop permitting other domains to trust the domain.

The order in which you establish trust is not critical. However, it is better to establish the Permitted To Trust This Domain relationship first, and then establish the Trusted Domain relationship. This way, the new trust relationship takes effect immediately. If you establish the Trust Domain relationship before the Permitted To Trust This Domain relationship, it can take up to 15 minutes for the trust relationship to take effect.

Trust between domains is not transitive. If Domain A trusts Domain B, and Domain B trusts Domain C, then Domain A does not automatically trust Domain C. To have Domain A trust Domain C, set up a trust relationship directly between those domains.

For detailed information about trust relationships, and strategies for planning trust relationships between the domains of a network, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


Administering Computers Running Windows NT Workstation
User Manager for Domains	27 of 30

Administering Computers Running Windows NT Workstation

Even if a computer running Windows NT Workstation participates in a domain, it still maintains its own user accounts, groups, and security policies, separate from those of the domain. Because of this, you can use User Manager for Domains to administer a computer running Windows NT Workstation. However, some User Manager for Domains functions are unavailable or behave slightly differently than they do when administering domains.

User Manager for Domains function		Behavior when administering a workstation
Managing group memberships for user accounts		User accounts cannot have membership in global groups, because global groups do not exist on workstations. User accounts do not have a setting for a primary group. (Primary groups are used in domains, and support POSIX applications and users logging on using Windows NT Services for Macintosh.)
Assigning user profile paths to user accounts		User profile paths cannot be assigned to workstation user accounts. In the User Environment Profile dialog box, the User Profile Path box is unavailable.
Managing logon hours, logon workstations, and account information for user accounts		This information does not apply to workstation user accounts, so the Hours, Logon From, and Accounts buttons do not appear in the New User, Copy Of, and User Properties dialog boxes.
Managing global groups		Global groups do not exist on workstations. On the User menu, the New Global Group command is unavailable.
Managing the Account policy		In the Account Policy dialog box, the Forcibly Disconnect Remote Users From Server When Logon Hours Expire option is unavailable.
Managing trust relationships		Trust relationships cannot be established. On the Policy menu, the Trust Relationships command is unavailable.
Although Global groups cannot be created or maintained at a workstation, if the workstation participates in a domain the global groups of that domain and of trusted domains can be used at that workstation. They can be granted permissions to resources of that workstation, and membership in that workstation's local groups.


Built-In User Accounts of a Workstation
User Manager for Domains	28 of 30

Administering Computers Running Windows NT Workstation

Built-In User Accounts of a Workstation

The following built-in user accounts are provided when Windows NT is installed on a workstation.

Administrator

The built-in Administrator account is a member of the built-in Administrators group, and receives the rights and permissions granted to that group. It cannot be removed from that group.

The Administrator account is the account used by the person who manages the workstation's overall configuration. The Administrator has more control over the workstation than does any other user. For example, the Administrator can create, modify, or delete user accounts and groups; manage security policies; create, administer, and connect to administrative shares; install and connect to printers; format or partition a fixed disk; back up and restore files; debug the system; take ownership of files and other objects; modify operating system software; install or update device drivers; unlock a workstation; and more.

The built-in Administrator account can be renamed, but it cannot be deleted.

Guest

The built-in Guest account is a member of the Guests group, and receives the rights and permissions granted to that group. For example, a user can log on to the Guest account, create files and delete those files, and read files that an administrator specifically permits Guests to read.

The Guest account is provided as a convenience so that occasional or one-time users of the computer can log on and be granted limited abilities. The Guest account is installed with a blank password.

The built-in Guest account can be renamed, but it cannot be deleted.

Initial User

If the computer is added to a domain during Windows NT installation, an Initial User account is not created, since the user of the computer is expected to log on using an account from the domain. (In this case, it is a good idea to add that user's account to the Power Users group of his or her workstation.)

However, the Initial User account is created if, during Windows NT installation, the computer is added to a workgroup or if it is not configured for network operation. The system prompts the person doing the installation to provide a user name and password. An account is created under the provided user name, so there is never an account that is actually named "Initial User."

Because it is a member of the Administrators group, the Initial User account can fully administer the workstation.


Built-In Groups of a Workstation
User Manager for Domains	29 of 30

Administering Computers Running Windows NT Workstation

Built-In Groups of a Workstation

The rights and built-in abilities granted to the built-in groups of workstations and of servers that are not domain controllers are shown in the following table.

To provide these rights and built-in abilities to a user, add the user's account to the appropriate group. Following are brief discussions of each built-in group.

Administrators

The Administrators group is the most powerful group on a computer. Administrators have more control over the computer than do any other users, and they manage the computer's overall configuration. The built-in Administrator user account is a member of the Administrators group, as is the Initial User account (if one was created during installation).

If a computer participates in a domain, the Domain Admins group is by default a member of the computer's Administrators group, and members of that domain group can administer the computer. (However, this can be prevented by removing the Domain Admins global group from the computer's Administrators group.)

Note that administrators do not automatically have access to every file on the computer. If a file's permissions do not grant access, the administrator cannot access the file. Every file on an NTFS volume has an owner, who can set permissions on the file. If needed, an administrator can take ownership of a file and thus have access to it. But if the administrator does so, this event is recorded in the security log (if auditing of files is turned on), and the administrator cannot give ownership back to the original owner. For more information, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

Power Users

The Power Users group provides limited administrative abilities to its member user accounts. A Power User can share directories on the network; set the computer's internal clock; install, share, and manage printers; and create common program groups.

A Power User can use User Manager to create user accounts and groups, and to modify or delete those user accounts and groups. A Power User can also add and remove users from the Power Users, Users, and Guests by groups.

Users

Membership in the Users group provides the abilities a user needs to perform normal tasks. Except for the built-in Administrator, Guest, and Initial User accounts, all workstation user accounts belong to the Users group. When a new user account is added, it is by default a member of this group.

If a Windows NT computer participates in a domain, the Domain Users group is by default a member of the computer's Users group, and domain users have normal user access to and abilities on the computer. (However, this can be prevented by removing the Domain Users global group from the computer's Users group.)

Guests

The Guests group allows occasional or one-time users to log on and be granted limited abilities. The built-in Guest user account is a member of the Guests group.

Resource permissions granted to the Users group can be withheld from the Guests group, effectively restricting the abilities of Guests.

Backup Operators

Members of the Backup Operators group can back up directories and files, and restore directories and files.

Replicator

The Replicator group supports directory replication functions. The only member of the Replicator group should be a domain user account used to log on the computer's Replicator Service. Do not add the accounts of actual users to this group.

Special Groups

In addition to the built-in groups mentioned above, some other groups are created by the system and are used for special purposes. These groups are not listed in the User Manager window.

However, when you administer a computer and Windows NT presents lists of groups, these special groups sometimes appear in the list. For example, they can appear when assigning permissions to directories, files, shared network directories, or printers.

Group	Refers to

Everyone	Anyone using the computer. This includes all local and remote users (that is, the INTERACTIVE and NETWORK groups combined).

Members can access the network, connect to the computer's shared network directories, and print to the computer's printers.

INTERACTIVE	Anyone using the computer locally.

NETWORK	All users connected over the network to the computer.

SYSTEM	The operating system.

CREATOR OWNER	Transfer of permissions to creators of subdirectories, files, and print jobs. For a directory, if permissions are granted to the CREATOR OWNER group, the creator of a subdirectory or file will be granted those permissions for that subdirectory or file. For a printer, if permissions are granted to the CREATOR OWNER group, the creator of a print job will be granted those permissions for that print job.


Administering Microsoft LAN Manager
User Manager for Domains	30 of 30

Administering Microsoft LAN Manager

When administering Microsoft LAN Manager (version 2.1 or newer) domains and servers, some User Manager for Domains functions are unavailable or behave slightly differently than when administering Windows NT.

User Manager for Domain function		Behavior when administering Microsoft LAN Manager 2.x
Renaming a user account		User accounts cannot be renamed. On the User menu, the Rename command is unavailable.
Managing user account properties		In the New User, Copy Of, and User Properties dialog boxes, the User Must Change Password At Next Logon and the Password Never Expires options are not available.
Managing group memberships for user accounts		Local groups do not exist. Only membership in global groups can be managed.
Managing environment profiles for user accounts		In the User Environment Profile dialog box, the User Profile Path box is unavailable, and the Logon Script and Home Directory boxes are slightly changed. For details, see the following section, "User Environment Profile."
Managing account information for user accounts		In the Account Information dialog box, the Account Type options are unavailable and Privilege Level options are added. For details, see the following section, "Account Information."
Managing local groups		Local groups do not exist. Only global groups are available. On the User menu, the New Local Group command is unavailable.
Managing the Account policy		In the Account Policy dialog box, the Forcibly Disconnect Remote Users From Server When Logon Hours Expire option is unavailable.
Managing the User Rights policy		Cannot be administered. On the Policy menu, the User Rights command is unavailable.
Managing the Audit policy		Cannot be administered. On the Policy menu, the Audit command is unavailable.
Managing trust relationships		Cannot be administered. On the Policy menu, the Trust Relationships command is unavailable.
When a LAN Manager 2.x server participates in a Windows NT Server domain, a server running Windows NT Server must be the primary domain controller, and the LAN Manager 2.x server receives a copy of the domain's security database, just as the backup domain controllers running Windows NT Server do. However, because LAN Manager 2.x servers do not recognize local groups, you cannot assign permissions for resources on LAN Manager 2.x servers to the domain's local groups.

Also, if the Windows NT Server domain trusts other domains, you cannot assign permissions at its LAN Manager 2.x servers to user accounts and global groups from the trusted domain. LAN Manager 2.x servers do not recognize trust relationships.

A LAN Manager 2.x domain cannot establish trust relationships with other domains. Because of this, the domain cannot use user accounts and global groups defined on other domains. For a Windows NT user to access a resource in a LAN Manager 2.x domain, that user must also have an account in the LAN Manager 2.x domain, or that domain must allow guest logons.

For a user from a LAN Manager 2.x domain to access a resource in a Windows NT domain, that user must be given a local account in the Windows NT domain, or the Windows NT domain must provide a Guest account that is enabled and that does not require a password.

User Environment Profile

When administering a Microsoft LAN Manager 2.x domain or server, use the User Environment Profile dialog box to manage the logon script and home directory for the selected users.

In LAN Manager 2.x, a logon script is a batch file containing LAN Manager and operating system commands used to configure workstations. A logon script can be assigned to one or more users. When the user logs on, the logon script runs on the server.

A home directory is a directory accessible to a user that can contain files and programs for that user. This can be expressed as an absolute path for a directory on the user's local computer (for example, C:\JEFFHO), or a network path for a directory on a server running user-level security. A network path of \\servername\USERS\username is recommended, for example, \\AIREDALE\USERS\JEFFHO.

To manage the user environment profile

1.	Choose the Profile button from the New User, Copy Of, or User Properties dialog box.

2.	Optionally, in the Logon Script box type the filename of a logon script.

3.	Optionally, in the Home Directory type the path for a home directory.

4.	To exit, choose the OK button.

Account Information

When administering a Microsoft LAN Manager 2.x domain or server, use the Account Information dialog box to manage the account expiration date and the privilege level for the selected users.

When an account has an expiration date, it means the account will be disabled (not deleted) at the end of that day. When an account expires, a user who is logged on remains logged on but can establish no new network connections, and after logging off cannot log on again.

The Privilege Level controls the LAN Manager commands the user can perform, and the user's ability to access shared resources.

To manage user account information

1.	Choose the Account button from the New User, Copy Of, or User Properties dialog box.

2.	Under Account Expires, select either Never or End Of.

3.	If you select End Of, specify an expiration date in the End Of box.

4.	Select a LAN Manager 2.x privilege level.

Privilege level	Meaning

Administrator	The user can perform all actions on the server.

User	The user can employ network resources (subject to the access permissions for the resources), view information about shared resources, view printer and communication-device queue status, and send and receive messages. The user's account is a member of the special Users group, to which permissions can be assigned. This is the default privilege level and will be assigned to most network users.

Guest	The user has the same abilities as User privilege, but the user's account is a member of the special Guest group instead of the Users group. To exclude temporary or occasional users from the Users group, give an account Guest privilege.

5.	If you select the User privilege level, you can optionally select one or more of the user operator privileges.

User operator privilege	Meaning

Account Operator	The user can create, remove, and modify user accounts that have user or guest privilege; create, remove and modify groups; and modify logon restrictions.

The user cannot modify an account that has Administrator privilege, except to change group memberships. The user cannot change an account's privilege level to Administrator.

Print Operator	The user can share and stop sharing printer queues; create, remove, and modify printer queues; control print jobs; and view a list of all resources shared on the server, including resources available only to Administrators.

Server Operator	The user can start and stop services; share and stop sharing resources; read and clear the error log; close user sessions and the files users have opened; and view a list of all the resources shared on the server, including resources available only to administrators.

Comm Operator	The user can share and stop sharing communication device queues; control communication device queue requests; and view a list of all resources shared on the server, including resources available only to administrators.

6.	To exit, choose the OK button.


User Profile Editor
Chapter 14	1 of 14

User Profile Editor

A user's workstation configuration and ability to change the configuration are determined by the user profile. If you are a Windows NT Server administrator, setting up user profiles is an important part of your job. With User Profile Editor, you can quickly customize and maintain user profiles and make them available throughout a Windows NT domain.

This chapter presents:

An overview of User Profile Editor

Procedures for creating, editing, and saving a user profile

A discussion of related considerations


Overview
User Profile Editor	2 of 14

Overview

Each Windows NT computer records some configuration information on a user-by-user basis. The saved information includes such things as the desktop arrangement, personal program groups and the program items in those groups, screen colors, screen savers, network connections, printer connections, mouse settings, and window size and position. This information is saved in user profiles.

When a user logs on, a user profile is loaded, and the specific Windows NT configuration recorded in the user profile is created. When a user logs off, changes to the Windows NT configuration are saved in the user profile. In this way, users automatically retain changes to their Windows NT configuration across logons at a particular computer. There is one exception:  this information is not saved for Guest accounts.

By default, every Windows NT computer maintains this user profile information. But in many situations, it is advantageous to create custom user profiles and assign those profiles to user accounts. Here are just a few reasons for doing so:

To give a user the same user profile at any computer in the network

With a custom user profile available on a network, the user has access to the same profile from any Windows NT computer in the user's domain.

To create one user profile for a set of users who perform similar tasks

For example, if you were the administrator of a bank's network, you might want to provide a consistent environment for all the bank's tellers. You could create a single user profile, store it in a shared directory on a server, and assign it to the user accounts of all the tellers.

After logon, each teller would always have the Windows NT configuration exactly as you set it up. Each would see the same Program Manager program groups with the same applications, and each would have access to the same network connections.

To enhance network security

As an administrator, you determine the capabilities a user will have. A user can change the Windows NT configuration only to the extent the user profile allows. You can define user profiles to limit a user's access to parts of the system. You can, for instance, disable Program Manager's Run command, prevent some or all changes to program groups and items, or deny the ability to add or remove network printer connections.

To reduce administrative workload

Customized user profiles can provide many administrative economies. For example, you might need to add a new application to a personal program group of a large set of users. If all the users are assigned to the same profile, you can accommodate them all by making the change only once.

With User Profile Editor, you can create Windows NT environments that are tailored to individual users with specific needs or to multiple users with the same needs, and you can make these environments available anywhere in the user's domain. You simply create and edit a profile, save it on a shared directory in a Windows NT domain, then assign it to one or more users.


What Is Defined by a User Profile?
User Profile Editor	3 of 14

Overview

What Is Defined by a User Profile?

By default, a Windows NT computer maintains a user profile for each user who has logged on to that computer (excepting Guest accounts). Each user profile contains information about a particular user's Windows NT configuration. The user-specific information recorded in a user profile is detailed in the following table.

Settings Saved in a User Profile

Source		Parameters saved
Program Manager		All user-definable settings for Program Manager, including personal program groups and their properties, program items and their properties, and all settings saved by the Save Settings On Exit and Save Settings Now commands.
File Manager		All user-definable settings for File Manager, including network connections, and everything saved by the Save Settings On Exit command.
Command prompt		All user-definable settings for the command prompt, including fonts, colors, settings for the screen size buffer, and window position.
Print Manager		Network printer connections and all settings saved by the Save Settings On Exit command.
Control Panel options		All settings for the Color, Mouse, Desktop, Cursor, Keyboard, International, and Sound options. For the System option, only the entries in the User Environment Variables box. The other Control Panel options do not contain user-specific settings.
Accessories		All user-specific application settings affecting the user's Windows NT configuration. These accessory applications include Calculator, Calendar, Cardfile, Clock, Notepad, Paintbrush, and Terminal.
Third-party Windows NT applications		Any application written specifically for Windows NT can be designed so that it tracks application settings on a per-user basis. If this user-specific information exists, it is saved in the user profile.
Online Help bookmarks		Any bookmarks placed in the Windows NT Help system.
When you create a customized user profile with User Profile Editor, the new user profile contains all the user-specific information from the Windows NT configuration of the account where you create the profile, plus a number of restrictions you can impose on the user only through User Profile Editor. The following table shows the options you can set with User Profile Editor.

Options in User Profile Editor

Option		Effect on user profile
Permission to use profile		Give a particular user or a Windows NT local or global group the necessary read and write access to the profile.
Program Manager settings		Control what applications, if any, are started when the user logs on to Windows NT, whether the user has access to common program groups, whether the user can make permanent changes to the user profile, and what access the user has to the Run command on the Program Manager File menu.
Program Group settings		Control the user's ability to make changes to personal program groups.
Network Connection setting		Control the user's ability to connect to, and disconnect from, network printers in Print Manager.


Mandatory and Personal User Profiles
User Profile Editor	4 of 14

Overview

Mandatory and Personal User Profiles

There are two types of user profiles, mandatory and personal:

Mandatory user profiles remain the same from one logon session to the next.

Personal user profiles can be changed from one logon session to the next, depending on the permissions specified in the user profile itself.

Mandatory User Profiles

During a logon session, a user can modify the workstation environment using the normal Windows NT tools, within the capabilities allowed by the mandatory user profile. When a user logs off, however, any changes to the Windows NT environment are discarded, and at the next logon the user's environment is created according to the unchanged mandatory user profile.

A single mandatory user profile can be assigned to any number of user accounts. When you need to support a distinct set of users with the same needs for system access, application availability, network connections, and the other parameters controlled by user profiles, assigning the same mandatory user profile to them all assures that all the users have exactly what they need.

Assigning a mandatory user profile to a set of users can also reduce the time you spend maintaining your user accounts. As an administrator, you create the mandatory user profile and assign it to one or more users. When changes are necessary (for example, to add a network connection, or to provide a new application) you need change only one user profile to modify the environment of every user assigned to it.

Mandatory user profiles are particularly beneficial in a controlled environment, where you need to control system access.

Maintenance is easier if you give a mandatory user profile a descriptive filename. For example, for a group of bank tellers you might create a mandatory user profile and save it as TELLER.MAN.

Personal User Profiles

With a personal user profile, the modifications a user makes to the Windows NT environment are automatically preserved from one logon session to the next. At first glance this may seem like the default behavior, but personal user profiles differ from the default functionality in two important ways:

The user has access to the same user profile throughout the domain. When you place a personal user profile on a shared network directory, it is available at every Windows NT computer the user logs on to.

As an administrator, you set up and maintain the user's Windows NT environment. The user can later modify the profile according to personal preference, but you always have direct access to it. If you need, for instance, to add a network connection that the user's profile does not permit, you can modify the user profile from your own workstation.

A personal user profile should be assigned to only one Windows NT Server user account. If, for example, the same personal user profile is assigned to two user accounts, changes made by one user will affect the other.

Maintenance is easier if you name each personal user profile for the username of the account assigned to it. For example, for a username of JEFFHO, you might create a personal user profile and save it as JEFFHO.USR.


Default Profiles
User Profile Editor	5 of 14

Overview

Default Profiles

Whenever Windows NT is running on a computer, a user profile determines the environment. To take the most typical case, when a user logs on, the settings in the user's assigned profile determine the way the computer looks and behaves.

Not every user, however, may have a user profile. And Windows NT can be running even if nobody is logged on. In those cases, Windows NT uses the user default profile and the system default profile. You can modify these profiles with User Profile Editor.

User Default Profile

Every Windows NT computer contains a user default profile. The user default profile is loaded:

When a user account does not have a profile assigned to it, and the user has never logged on to the current Windows NT computer.

When a user account's assigned profile cannot be accessed during logon (for example, if the server where the profile is stored is down), and the user has never logged on to the current Windows NT computer.

When a user logs on to the Guest account.

Except in the case of the Guest account, any changes the user makes to the Windows NT configuration are stored, when the user logs off, in a locally cached user profile on the Windows NT computer. The user default profile is unchanged. The next time the user logs on to the same computer, if no other user profile is available, the locally cached profile is loaded.

System Default Profile

When Windows NT is running on a computer that nobody is logged on to, the Welcome dialog box appears, prompting you to press CTRL+ALT+DEL to log on. Other aspects of the Windows NT environment, such as the screen's background color and its use of wallpaper and screen savers, are controlled by the system default profile.


Creating and Editing a User Profile
User Profile Editor	6 of 14

Creating and Editing a User Profile

With User Profile Editor, you can create new user profiles and modify existing ones. When you save a user profile, you can save it as a file, which you can later assign to one or more users or global groups, or you can save it as the user default or system default profile used by Windows NT, as described earlier in this chapter.

To start User Profile Editor, you must be logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators local group or the Domain Admins global group. When you edit a user profile, the changes you make affect the account you are working in. It is a good idea to establish a special Profile Administrator's account, and to log on to it before you create or change a user profile. When you edit an existing user profile from a Profile Administrator's account, you do not change the profile assigned to your own account. For information on creating accounts, see Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."


Creating a New User Profile
User Profile Editor	7 of 14

Creating and Editing a User Profile

Creating a New User Profile

Here is a summary of what you do to create a new user profile:

1.	Configure the Windows NT environment of your own computer to be exactly as you want it for the user profile you are creating.

2.	Define settings, described earlier in this chapter, in User Profile Editor.

3.	Save the configuration as a user profile.

Steps 2 and 3 require User Profile Editor. The more detailed procedure follows.

To create a new user profile

1.	Log on to a user account that belongs to the Administrators local group or the Domain Admins global group.

It is a good idea to create a special Profile Administrator's account for this purpose, as described earlier in this section, so your own user account and its assigned user profile remain unmodified.

2.	Configure the Windows NT environment of your own computer to be exactly as you want it for the user profile you are creating.

Set all the user-specific options described in the first table in this chapter.

3.	Start User Profile Editor:  open the Administrative Tools group and choose the User Profile Editor icon. Or from the File menu in Program Manager, choose Run, type upedit, and then choose the OK button.

4.	If you intend to assign the profile to one or more users, choose the Browse Button to the right of the Permitted To Use Profile box. In the User Browser dialog box that appears, add the name of the individual user or the global group you want to assign the profile to. (Do not add the name of a local group; it must be a user or global group.)

For information on the User Browser, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

5.	Set the options under Program Manager Settings. These options allow you to limit the user's access to some Program Manager functionality.

Select		To
Disable Run In File Menu		Disable the Run command of the Program Manager File menu, thus preventing users from directly running programs other than those in the program groups.
Disable Save Settings Menu Item And Never Save Settings		Disable the Save Settings On Exit and Save Settings Now commands of the Program Manager Options menu.
Show Common Program Groups		Display in Program Manager the common program groups. Clear this option to hide common program groups from a user of this profile.
Note

Selecting Disable Run In File Menu does not prevent users from starting programs from within other programs, by running File Manager or the command prompt, or by changing program-item command lines to run other programs. Other settings in User Profile Editor offer some protection, but User Profile Editor is only part of the Windows NT comprehensive security system.

6.	Under Program Manager Settings, select a startup group, or None.

The program items in the startup group are started whenever the user logs on.

7.	Under Program Group Settings, define each personal program group as locked or unlocked.

The user cannot change locked program groups or their program items. To lock one or more groups, select them from the Unlocked Program Groups list and choose Lock. The selected groups move to the Locked Program Groups list.

The user can change unlocked program groups and their program items. You can, however, limit the user's ability to make changes to unlocked groups, as described in the next step. To unlock one or more groups, select them from the Locked Program Groups list and choose Unlock. The selected groups move to the Unlocked Program Groups list.

8.	In the For Unlocked Groups, Allow User To box, select the option to be applied to unlocked personal program groups. The option you choose determines the kind of modifications the user can make.

Select		So users can
Make Any Change		Create, delete, and change program items and program groups.
Create/Delete/Change Program Items		Create, delete, and change program items. Users cannot create, delete, or change program groups.
Change All Program Item Properties		Change program items. Users cannot create or delete program items, nor can they create, delete, or change program groups.
Change Program Item Properties Except Command Line		Change all properties of a program item except the entry in the Command Line of the Program Item Properties dialog box. Users cannot create or delete program items, nor can they create, delete, or change program groups.
9.	Select or clear the Allow User To Connect/Remove Connections In Print Manager box.

10.	Save the profile as described in "Saving a User Profile," later in this chapter.

Mandatory user profiles must be assigned the file extension .MAN, and personal user profiles must be assigned the file extension .USR.


Modifying a User Profile
User Profile Editor	8 of 14

Creating and Editing a User Profile

Modifying a User Profile

There may be times when you need to change the environment defined in a user profile. For example, you may want to provide a new network connection or a new application to one or more users. If several users share one mandatory user profile, you need only edit that one profile, and each user assigned to it receives the changes at the next logon.

At other times, you may need to change only the settings in User Profile Editor. The procedure in this case is different.

Modifying the Entire User Environment

The procedure for modifying the entire user profile is similar to the procedure for creating it:

1.	Assign the user profile to an administrator's account, then log on under that account.

2.	Modify the Windows NT environment exactly as you want it for the user profile you are changing.

3.	Set the options in User Profile Editor, as described earlier in this chapter.

4.	Save the configuration as the current user profile.

Steps 3 and 4 require User Profile Editor. The more detailed procedure follows.

To change an existing user profile

1.	If you are changing a personal user profile (file extension .USR), be sure that the user the profile is assigned to is logged off.

2.	From User Manager for Domains, assign the user profile to a user account that belongs to the Domain Admins global group or the Administrators local group.

It is a good idea to create a special Profile Administrator's account for this purpose, as described earlier in this chapter, so your own user account and its assigned user profile remain unmodified.

3.	Log off the system, and then log back on under the administrator's account. This action loads the assigned profile.

Note

Except for the Startup group, the settings in the User Profile Editor window do not affect administrator accounts. For example, even if the Disable Run In File Menu option is selected in a user profile, an administrator account assigned that user profile still has access to the Run command.

4.	Configure the Windows NT environment of your own computer to be exactly as you want it for the user profile you are creating.

Make any changes you want to the user-specific settings described in the first table in this chapter.

5.	Start User Profile Editor:  open the Administrative Tools group and choose the User Profile Editor icon. Or from the File menu in Program Manager, choose Run, type upedit, and then choose the OK button.

The User Profile Editor window appears.

6.	Set the options in User Profile Editor as described in "Creating a New User Profile," earlier in this chapter.

7.	From the File Menu, choose Save To Current Profile.

Modifying Only the Settings in User Profile Editor

To modify only the settings in User Profile Editor, it is simpler to open the original profile and modify its settings as necessary.

To change only the User Profile Editor settings of an existing user profile

1.	Start User Profile Editor:  open the Administrative Tools group and choose the User Profile Editor icon. Or from the File menu in Program Manager, choose Run, type upedit, and then choose the OK button.

The User Profile Editor window appears.

2.	From the File menu, choose Open. In the dialog box that appears, select the user profile you want to change, and then choose the OK button.

3.	Set the options in User Profile Editor as described in "Creating a New User Profile," earlier in this chapter.

4.	Save the profile as described in "Saving a User Profile," later in this chapter.

Mandatory user profiles must be assigned the file extension .MAN, and personal user profiles must be assigned the file extension .USR.


Copying a User Profile
User Profile Editor	9 of 14

Creating and Editing a User Profile

Copying a User Profile

If more than one user is assigned to the same personal user profile, changes made by one user will affect other users. If you want to assign the same personal user profile to a number of users, it is best to make copies of the profile and assign each copy to a different individual.

To copy a user profile

1.	Start User Profile Editor:  open the Administrative Tools group and choose the User Profile Editor icon. Or from the File menu in Program Manager, choose Run, type upedit, and then choose the OK button.

The User Profile Editor window appears.

2.	From the File menu, choose Open. In the dialog box that appears, select the user profile you want to copy, and then choose the OK button.

3.	Choose the Browse button next to the Permitted To Use Profile box. In the User Browser dialog box that appears, add the name of the user or group you want to assign the copy of the profile to.

4.	From the File menu, choose Save As File. Save the profile under a unique filename.

Mandatory user profiles must be assigned the file extension .MAN, and personal user profiles must be assigned the file extension .USR.


Saving a User Profile
User Profile Editor	10 of 14

Creating and Editing a User Profile

Saving a User Profile

The way you save a user profile depends on what you want to do with it. You can save a user profile as a file, which you can then assign to a user, or you can save it as the default user or default system profile described in "Default Profiles," earlier in this chapter. As a system administrator, you can also save a profile as that of the account where you working.

In addition, a user profile that is to be assigned to one or more users can be either mandatory or personal. Mandatory and personal user profiles are described earlier in this chapter.

To save a user profile as a file

1.	Verify that the name of the user or group to whom you want to assign the file appears in the Permitted To Use File box. If it does not, or if no name appears there, choose the Browse button next to the box and add the user or group name in the User Browser dialog box that appears.

For information on the User Browser, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

2.	Choose Save As File.

The Save As dialog box appears.

3.	In the Save File As Type box, select Per-User Profile or Mandatory Profile.

4.	In the Directories box, choose a path. Choose a drive from the list provided. To save the user profile on a shared directory that you are not already connected to, choose the Network button and complete the Connect Network Drive dialog box that appears.

If you choose a network connection, the connection is always established when the assigned user logs on.

5.	In the File Name box, enter a filename.

Personal (Per-User) profiles have a file extension of .USR; mandatory profiles have a file extension of .MAN.

6.	Choose the OK button.

The user profile is saved with the settings of the options in the User Profile Editor window, plus all user-specific information from the Windows NT configuration of your computer.

If you are saving changes to a personal user profile that is already assigned to a user, be sure that the user is logged off. If you overwrite an existing personal user profile and the assigned user is currently logged on, the old version of the profile overwrites the new one as soon as the user logs off. After you save the edited personal user profile, use User Manager for Domains to update the user profile path assigned to the user account. The next time the user logs on, the new personal user profile is loaded.

This precaution is unnecessary when editing a mandatory user profile, or when saving any profile that is not yet assigned to a user account.

To save a user profile in all other cases

From the File menu, choose the menu item that saves the profile as you want to use it.

Select	To
Save To Current Profile	Save changes to the file in which the profile was originally stored.
Save As User Default	Save the profile on the local workstation as the user default profile.
Save As System Default	Save the profile on the local workstation as the system default profile.


Related Considerations
User Profile Editor	11 of 14

Related Considerations

As you manage user profiles, you need to keep in mind that:

Different users have different hardware and software configurations.

You must assign user profiles to user accounts.

Computers running Windows NT 3.1 do not support user profiles created on computers running Windows NT Workstation or Windows NT Server 3.5.


Allowing for Different Hardware and Software Configurations
User Profile Editor	12 of 14

Related Considerations

Allowing for Different Hardware and Software Configurations

When creating or changing a user profile, you must consider that users who log on to different machines are likely to find those machines configured differently. Applications may be stored in different directories or on different drives from machine to machine, some applications may be on one machine and not another, and workstation hardware and drivers may not always be the same. Here are some situations where differences may occur:

A user profile might be stored on a shared network directory and assigned to more than one user, each of whom uses a different workstation.

A user profile might be stored on a shared network directory and assigned to one user who logs on from more than one workstation.

Even if a profile is used at only one workstation, that workstation might have different characteristics than the one you use to create the profile.

In each case, the user profile stays the same even though the workstation configuration could vary. Therefore, when you create or maintain a user profile, allow for the differing workstation configurations the user may encounter. In particular, allow for different video displays and maintain consistent program paths.

Allowing for Different Video Displays

When creating profiles, you should lay out program groups using a computer that has the same type of video display that will be used by the people who will be assigned that profile. Problems can occur if you don't. For example, if you lay out program groups using a Super VGA screen, and then assign the profile to users who have standard VGA screens, the users may find the screen boundaries awkward or unusable.

Maintaining Consistent Program Paths

Unless every computer is set up with identical applications and directories, the program paths you specify in Program Manager and in the Command Line box of the Program Item Properties dialog box may not be correct for the Windows NT computer where the user profile is used. Here are some strategies to ensure that program paths are correct:

Put the application on a server, and include that path in the program item command line. One advantage of this technique is that it makes it easy to upgrade all users to a new version of a program by upgrading a single instance of that program. However, this implementation may be subject to restrictions imposed by an application's license.

Install the application in the same location on every workstation, and include that path in the program-item command line.

In the User Environment Variables box of the System option in the Windows NT Control Panel, add any application directory to the path. In the user profile, you have only to specify the program filename, not the full path name.


Assigning User Profiles to User Accounts
User Profile Editor	13 of 14

Related Considerations

Assigning User Profiles to User Accounts

In User Profile Editor, you create and edit user profiles. You also give specific users access to specific user profiles. It is still necessary, however, to assign the profile to a user account, and for that you need User Manager for Domains. For information on assigning profiles to users, see Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

Remember that mandatory user profiles (.MAN file extensions) can be assigned to any number of user accounts, but personal user profiles (.USR file extensions) should each be assigned to only one user account. If you assign a personal user profile to more than one user, changes made by one user will affect the system configuration of the others.


Using Previous Versions of Windows NT
User Profile Editor	14 of 14

Related Considerations

Using Previous Versions of Windows NT

Windows NT 3.5 uses a new, more efficient file format for user profiles. Windows NT 3.5 supports profiles created on computers running Windows NT 3.1, but profiles created on Windows NT 3.5 will not work on Windows NT 3.1. If you want to create profiles that will be used on both systems, the profiles must be created on computers running Windows NT 3.1.


Server Manager
Chapter 15	1 of 14

Server Manager

Server Manager is a tool for administering domains and computers.

This chapter begins with a brief overview of Server Manager, and then provides procedures for the following:

Selecting a domain, workgroup, or computer

Managing computers

Managing domains


Overview
Server Manager	2 of 14

Overview

With Server Manager you can administer domains and computers. You can display the member computers of a domain, and for a selected computer you can manage server properties and services, share directories, and send messages to connected users. You can also promote a backup domain controller to become the primary domain controller, synchronize computers with the primary domain controller, and add computers to and remove computers from the domain.


Starting and Quitting Server Manager
Server Manager	3 of 14

Overview

Starting and Quitting Server Manager

To start Server Manager

1.	Open the Administrative Tools group.

2.	Choose the Server Manager icon.

The Server Manager window appears, displaying your logon domain.

To start Server Manager from the command line

1.	From the File menu in Program Manager, choose Run.

2.	In the Command Line box type srvmgr, or to display a domain other than your logon domain, type srvmgr domainname.

Optionally, to display a Windows NT workgroup instead of a domain, type a workgroupname. To display an individual computer, type a \\computername (always precede computer names with two backslashes).

3.	Choose the OK button.

Most often you will start Server Manager, administer the displayed domain, and then use the Select Domain command (described later in this chapter) every time you need to display and administer a different domain. However, in some situations it may be more convenient to start more than one instance of Server Manager. For example, if you need to continuously administer two different domains, you might find it more convenient to start Server Manager and display the first domain to be administered, and then start another instance of Server Manager and display the second domain to be administered.

To use Server Manager to administer a domain and its servers, you must be logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators, Domain Admins, or Server Operators group for that domain. Members of the Account Operators group can also use Server Manager, but only to add computers to the domain.

To use Server Manager to administer a Windows NT Workstation computer, you must be logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators or Power Users group for that computer.

A few Server Manager functions are allowed only for Administrators or Domain Admins. When Server Operators, Account Operators, or Power Users attempt to perform these functions, a message is displayed indicating that access is denied.

To quit Server Manager

From the Computer menu, choose Exit.

When you quit Server Manager, if the Save Settings On Exit command from the Options menu is enabled, the main window size and position and the View menu settings are saved.


Managing the View
Server Manager	4 of 14

Overview

Managing the View

In most cases, when Server Manager starts it displays your logon domain. The Server Manager title bar shows the domain name, and the body of the Server Manager window lists the computers of that domain. A computer can be selected from the list, and can then be managed using commands from the Computer menu.

The body of the Server Manager window lists the computers of the domain that has been selected for administration (meaning the domain whose name appears in Server Manager's title bar). This list contains computers that are members of the domain, plus computers that the Computer Browser service reports as active on the domain.

The list can contain these kinds of computers:  Windows NT Server computers, Windows NT Workstation computers that are running the Server service, and Microsoft LAN Manager servers. Microsoft Windows for Workgroups computers might also appear in the list, but because they do not support remote administration they cannot be administered with Server Manager.

As described later in this chapter in "Selecting a Domain," you can choose to display a different domain, a Windows NT workgroup, or an individual computer. When a Windows NT workgroup has been selected for administration, the workgroup name appears in the title bar, and the body of the Server Manager window lists the computers of that workgroup. When an individual computer has been selected for administration, the computer name appears in the title bar and the body of the Server Manager window lists only that computer.

Server Manager provides the following information for each listed computer.

Item		Meaning
Icon		Graphically indicates the type of each listed computer:
			Primary domain controller. Maintains the domain's security database and authenticates network logons.
			Backup domain controller or other server. Backup domain controllers receive a copy of the domain's security database and authenticate network logons. Other servers do not.
			Workstation. Any other listed computer.
Computer		For each listed computer, this column provides the computer name.
Type		For each listed computer, this column states the operating system, the version number of the operating system, and whether the computer is a controller, server, or workstation.
Description		For each listed computer, this column can contain descriptive text. (This is an optional entry.)
If a computer does not support remote administration, or if it is unavailable to the network (for example, if it is turned off), its icon is dimmed, and the version number and description are absent.

Selecting a Domain

In most cases, when Server Manager starts, it displays your logon domain. Use the Select Domain command to display a different domain, a Windows NT workgroup, or an individual computer.

A domain is a collection of computers that are grouped for viewing purposes and that share a common security database. A workgroup is a collection of computers that are grouped only for viewing purposes.

To change the displayed domain

1.	From the Computer menu, choose Select Domain.

2.	Select a domain from the list in the Select Domain box, or type a domainname in the Domain box.

Optionally, to specify a Windows NT workgroup instead of a domain, type a workgroupname in the Domain box. To specify an individual computer, type a \\computername (always precede computer names with two backslashes).

You can type a name using both uppercase and lowercase, but in the Domain box the name will always be displayed in uppercase.

3.	If the domain, workgroup, or computer you have specified communicates with your computer across a connection providing relatively low transmission rates, select the Low Speed Connection option.

The system saves the setting of this option for each of the last 20 domains, workgroups, or computers you have administered. After you specify a name, the previous setting of this option (if any) will be initially displayed here. If no previous setting is known, the option will be initially cleared. You can accept or change the setting.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To use Server Manager to administer a domain and its servers, you must be logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators, Domain Admins, or Server Operators group for that domain. Members of the Account Operators group can also use Server Manager, but only to add computers to the domain.

To use Server Manager to administer a Windows NT Workstation computer, you must be logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators or Power Users group for that computer.

A few Server Manager functions are allowed only for Administrators or Domain Admins. When Server Operators, Account Operators, or Power Users attempt to perform these functions, a message is displayed indicating that access is denied.

Displaying Servers, Workstations, or Both

By default, the list of computers in the Server Manager window includes both servers and workstations. Optionally, you can filter the list and display only one of those types.

To display only servers or only workstations

From the View menu, choose either Servers or Workstations.

The notation (Servers) or (Workstations) appears on the title bar, and on the View menu a check mark appears next to the Servers or Workstations command.

To display both servers and workstations

From the View menu, choose All.

Displaying Domain Members Only

By default, the list of computers displayed in the Server Manager window contains those computers that are members of the domain, plus those computers that are listed by the Computer Browser service as active on the domain. Optionally, you can filter the list to display only those computers that participate in domain security. This would include only the domain's servers and Windows NT Workstation computers.

To display only those computers that are members of the domain

From the View menu, choose Show Domain Members Only.

A check mark appears on the View menu, next to the Show Domain Members Only command. Only the domain's servers and Windows NT Workstation computers will be shown.

To remove filtering and display all computers

From the View menu, choose Show Domain Members Only.

The check mark next to the Show Domain Members Only command is removed.

Refreshing the View

When Server Manager starts, and every time the Select Domain command is issued, Server Manager receives the information necessary to create the computer list displayed in the Server Manager window. The information is refreshed (updated with current data) after some Server Manager functions, such as changing computer properties, managing services, or promoting a backup domain controller to primary domain controller. (However, these refreshes do not occur when Low Speed Connection has been selected.) A refresh can also be initiated by a user.

To refresh the view with current information

From the View menu, choose Refresh.

Using Low Speed Connection

When administering a domain, workgroup, or computer that communicates with your computer across a connection providing relatively low transmission rates, use the Low Speed Connection option. This prevents automatic refresh of the Server Manager screen, which may be time-consuming when performed across slow connections. (Refreshes occur automatically after some Server Manager functions, such as changing computer properties, managing services, or promoting a backup domain controller to primary domain controller.)

There are two ways to select or clear the Low Speed Connection option:

When you have chosen the Select Domain command from the Computer menu and you are selecting a domain, Windows NT workgroup, or computer to be displayed by Server Manager, in the Select Domain dialog box you can select or clear the Low Speed Connection option.

When a domain, Windows NT workgroup, or computer is already displayed by Server Manager, you can select or clear slow network mode by choosing Low Speed Connection from the Options menu.

The system saves the setting of the Low Speed Connection option for each of the last 20 domains, workgroups, or computers you have administered. After you specify a name in the Select Domain dialog box, the previous state of this option (if any) will be initially set. You can accept or change this setting.

If you have not previously administered the specified domain, workgroup, or computer, and if you do not select the Low Speed Connection option in the Select Domain dialog box, after you choose the OK button, the system will automatically determine the appropriate connection mode and will select or clear the Low Speed Connection option accordingly. After connection, you still have the option of changing the setting by using the Low Speed Connection command from the Options menu.

Also, when starting Server Manager from the command prompt, you can optionally append the low speed connection parameter [/l] or the normal (high speed) connection parameter [/h]. For example, to start Server Manager and administer the domain Shipping using Low Speed Connection, you would type srvmgr shipping /l.


Managing a Computer
Server Manager	5 of 14

Managing a Computer

Server Manager can:

Manage server properties of a computer

Manage computer services

Manage shared directories

Send a message to all connected users

These procedures are discussed in the sections that follow.


Managing Server Properties
Server Manager	6 of 14

Managing a Computer

Managing Server Properties

Use the Properties command to display a summary of connections and resource usage for the selected computer; to edit the computer description; to view connected users, shared resources, and open resources; and to manage directory replication and the recipients of administrative alerts.

The functions offered by the Server Manager Properties command are duplicated by the Server option in the Control Panel of every Windows NT computer. However, while Server Manager can manage properties for both the local computer and remote computers, the Server option in Control Panel can only manage the local computer.

To manage properties

1.	Double-click a computer name in the Server Manager window, or select a computer name and then choose Properties from the Computer menu.

The Properties dialog box displays a usage summary for the computer.

Item	Meaning

Sessions	The number of users remotely connected to the computer

Open Files	The number of shared resources opened on the computer

File Locks	The number of file locks on open resources of the computer

Open Named Pipes	The number of named pipes open on the computer

2.	To change the computer description, type new text in the Description box.

3.	To administer a property associated with one of the five buttons at the bottom of the Properties dialog box, choose a button and complete the dialog box that appears. These buttons and their associated dialog boxes are described in procedures following this one.

Choose	To

Users	View a list of all the users connected over the network to the computer and the resources opened by a selected user. One or all of the connected users can be disconnected.

Shares	View a list of the computer's shared resources and the users connected over the network to a selected resource. One or all of the connected users can be disconnected.

In Use	View a list of the open shared resources on the computer. One resource or all resources can be closed.

Replication	Manage directory replication for the computer, and to specify the path to user logon scripts.

Alerts	View and manage the list of users and computers that are notified when administrative alerts occur on the computer.

4.	To exit, choose the OK button.

Viewing User Sessions

Use the User Sessions dialog box to view all the users connected over the network to the computer, and the resources opened by a selected user.

One or all of the connected users can be disconnected. There are several reasons to do this. For example, you might be about to stop the Server service on the computer, or you might be about to shut down the computer. To avoid data loss, always warn users before disconnecting them.

To view users connected over the network to the computer

1.	Double-click a computer name in the Server Manager window.

2.	In the Properties dialog box, choose the Users button.

In the User Sessions dialog box, the Connected Users box lists the users remotely connected to the computer.

Item	Meaning

Connected Users	The user name of a connected user. In some cases the user's computer name may be displayed instead of the user name.

Computer	The computer name of the computer where the user is logged on.

Opens	The number of resources opened on this computer by the user.

Time	The hours and minutes that have elapsed since this session was established.

Idle	The hours and minutes that have elapsed since the user last initiated an action.

Guest	Whether this user has guest status on the computer.

Below the Connected Users box, the Connected Users summary shows the number of users remotely connected to the computer.

3.	To view the resources used by a user, select a user name from the Connected Users box. The Resource box lists the shared resources that user is connected to.

Item	Meaning
Icon	Graphically indicates the type of each listed resource:
		A shared directory
		A named pipe
		A shared printer
		A communication-device queue(Microsoft LAN Manager servers only)
		A resource of an unrecognized type
Resource	The name of a shared resource to which the selected user is connected
Opens	The number of opens against this resource by this user
Time	The hours and minutes that have elapsed since this resource was first opened
In some cases, a connection to a printer is monitored here as a connection to a named pipe.

4.	To disconnect one user, select the user name from the Connected Users box and then choose the Disconnect button. To disconnect all users, choose the Disconnect All button. Warn users before disconnecting them.

Note

While you are remotely administering another computer, your user account will be listed as a user connected to the IPC$ resource. It cannot be disconnected.

5.	To exit, choose the Close button, and then in the Properties dialog box choose the OK button.

Viewing Shared Resources

Use the Shared Resources dialog box to view the shared resources available on the selected computer, and the users connected over the network to a selected resource.

Note

To share directories or manage shared directories, use the Shared Directories command from Server Manager, or use File Manager. To share printers or manage shared printers, use Print Manager.

One or all of the connected users can be disconnected. There are several reasons to do this. For example, you may need to allow another user to connect to a shared directory that already has its maximum number of users connected. To avoid data loss, always warn users before disconnecting them.

To view shared resources

1.	Double-click a computer name in the Server Manager window.

2.	In the Properties dialog box, choose the Shares button.

In the Shared Resources dialog box, the Sharename box lists available resources.

Item	Meaning
Icon	Graphically indicates the type of each listed resource:
		A shared directory
		A named pipe
		A shared printer
		A communication-device queue(Microsoft LAN Manager servers only)
		A resource of an unrecognized type
Sharename	The name of a shared resource
Uses	The number of connections to the shared resource
Path	The path of the shared resource
In some cases, a connection to a printer is monitored here as a connection to a named pipe.

3.	To view the users connected to a shared resource, select a share name from the Sharename box. The Connected Users box lists the connected users.

Item	Meaning

Connected Users	The user name of a user connected to the selected shared resource. In some cases the user's computer name may appear instead of the user name.

Time	The hours and minutes that have elapsed since the user first connected to this shared resource.

In Use	Whether the user currently has a file open from this shared resource.

Below the Connected Users box, the Connected Users summary shows the number of users connected to the selected resource.

4.	To disconnect one user from all shared resources, select the user name from the Connected Users box and then choose the Disconnect button. To disconnect all users from all shared resources, choose the Disconnect All button.

Warn users before disconnecting them. Each disconnected user is disconnected from all shared resources on the computer - not just the resource selected in the Sharename box.

Note

While you are remotely administering another computer, your user account will be listed as a connected user for the IPC$ share. It cannot be disconnected.

5.	To exit, choose the Close button, and then in the Properties dialog box choose the OK button.

Viewing Resources In Use

Use the Open Resources dialog box to view the resources open on the computer. One or all of the resources can be closed. To avoid data loss, always warn connected users before closing resources.

To view resources in use

1.	Double-click a computer name in the Server Manager window.

2.	In the Properties dialog box, choose the In Use button.

The Open Resources dialog box shows the resources open on the computer.

Item	Meaning
Open Resources	The total number of open resources on the computer
File Locks	The total number of file locks on open resources
Icon	Graphically indicates the type of each listed resource:
		A file
		A named pipe
		A print job in a print spooler
		A communication-device queue(Microsoft LAN Manager servers only)
		A resource of an unrecognized type
Opened By	The user name (or sometimes the computer name) for a user who opened a resource
For	The permission granted when the resource was opened
Locks	The number of locks on the resource
Path	The path of the open resource
In some cases, a print job is monitored here as an open named pipe.

3.	To close a single resource, select one resource from the list and then choose the Close Resource button. To close all resources, choose the Close All Resources button. Warn connected users before closing resources.

Note

While you are remotely administering another computer, your connection will be displayed here as an open named pipe. It cannot be closed.

4.	To update the displayed information, choose the Refresh button.

5.	To exit, choose the Close button, and then in the Properties dialog box choose the OK button.

Managing Directory Replication

Use the Directory Replication dialog box to set up replication export and replication import, and to specify a local path to user logon scripts.

Understanding Replication

Directory replication is the duplication of a master set of directories from a server (called an export server) to specified servers or workstations (called import computers) in the same or other domains. Replication simplifies the task of maintaining identical sets of directories and files on multiple computers, because only a single master copy of the data must be maintained. Files are replicated when they are added to an exported directory, and every time a change is saved to the file.

Replication helps balance loads. If you have a set of files that many users need to access, you can split the load between several computers. You configure one server to act as an export server and place the master copies of the files there, and configure the other computers to act as import computers. If this is done, only one copy of each file will need to be maintained, yet every computer that participates will have an available, identical copy of that set of files.

Each export server maintains a list of computers to which subdirectories are exported, and each import computer maintains a list of computers from which subdirectories are imported.

Export servers can also export to domain names, and import computers can import from those domain names. This is a convenient way to set up directory replication for many computers, because each export server and import computer only needs to specify a few domain names for export or import, rather than a long list of many computer names.

Note

Replication to a domain name will not always succeed when some or all of the replication import computers are located across a wide area network (WAN) bridge from an export server. When adding names to the export list on an export server, and when adding names to the import list on an import computer, for those computers separated by a WAN bridge you should specify the computer names (instead of or in addition to specifying the domain name).

On an export server there is a default export path, C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\repl\EXPort. Subdirectories created in the export path, and files placed in those subdirectories, are automatically exported. Export servers can replicate any number of subdirectories (limited only by available memory), with each exported subdirectory having up to 32 subdirectory levels in its tree.

Note

By default, the permissions for an export directory grant Full Control to the Replicator local group. If these permissions are changed, the exported files will be copied to the import computers but will receive the wrong permissions, and an error will be written to the event log reporting access denied. If necessary, use File Manager to grant Full Control to the Replicator local group for the export directories.

On an import computer there is a default import path, c:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\repl\IMPort. Imported subdirectories and their files are automatically placed here. You do not need to create these import subdirectories, because they are created automatically when replication occurs.

A network can have multiple export servers. To ensure the integrity of replicated information, they usually will not export duplicate subdirectories. Each master export subdirectory will usually be maintained on and exported by a single export server. It is possible to set up multiple servers that export the same subdirectory, but the exported files in those multiple master subdirectories might not be identical.

Replication Prerequisites

Before a Windows NT computer can be configured for replication, a special user account must be created, configured, and assigned to the Directory Replicator service.

Using User Manager for Domains, create a domain user account for the Directory Replicator service to use to log on. Make certain the user account has the Password Never Expires option selected, all logon hours allowed, and membership in the domain's Backup Operators group.

After the user account described above is created, for each computer that will be configured as an export server or an import computer, use Server Manager to configure the Directory Replicator service to start up automatically and to log on under that user account. When accomplishing this, make certain the password for that user account is entered correctly.

For information about managing user accounts, see Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains." For service startup configuration procedures see "Assigning a Logon Account to the Directory Replicator Service," later in this chapter.

Setting Up an Export Server

Any computer running Windows NT Server can be set up as an export server, but Windows NT Workstation computers cannot.

To set up an export server

1.	Assign a logon account to the Directory Replicator service of the export server. For information on this procedure, see "Assigning a Logon Account to the Directory Replicator Service," later in this chapter.

2.	From File Manager or the command prompt of the export server, create the subdirectories that will be exported. They must be subdirectories of the replication export path (usually C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\EXPORT).

Optionally, you can add to these subdirectories the files that will be exported. However, it is not necessary to add the files at this time. Once you set up replication, any files later added to these subdirectories will be exported automatically.

3.	From Server Manager, double-click the computer name of the replication export server, and then in the Properties dialog box choose the Replication button.

The Directory Replication dialog box contains the following items relating to export replication.

Item	Description

Do Not Export	Prevents replication from this computer. Subdirectories and their files are not exported.

Export Directories	Enables replication export. Subdirectories and their files are exported from this computer.

From Path	The directory from which subdirectories and files will be exported. The default is C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\EXPORT.

Manage	Displays the Exported Directories dialog box, where export locks are added or removed, stabilization is enabled or disabled, and the entire subtree or only the first subdirectory is selected for replication.

To List	Subdirectories are exported from this export server to these domains and computers. By default, the To List contains a [blank] entry and the local domain automatically receives exported subdirectories.

Add	Displays the Select Computer dialog box. Used to add a computer or domain to the To List.

Remove	Removes a selected computer or domain from the To List.

4.	Select the Export Directories option.

5.	To change the directory from which subdirectories will be exported, type a new path in the From Path box.

6.	To export subdirectories to a domain or computer, under Export Directories choose the Add button, and then complete the Select Domain dialog box that appears.

The domain name or computer name is added to the To List.

Note

By default, the To List contains a [blank] entry and the local domain automatically receives exported subdirectories. If any entries are added to the To List, the local domain is no longer exported to, and must be explicitly added to the To List if it is to receive exported subdirectories from this export server.

7.	To stop exporting subdirectories to a domain or computer, under Export Directories select the domain or computer from the To List, and then choose the Remove button.

8.	To manage locks, stabilization, and subtree replication for the subdirectories exported from this computer, under Export Directories choose the Manage button, and then complete the dialog box that appears. For more information, see the following procedure.

9.	To exit, choose the OK button in the Directory Replication dialog box.

If it does not already exist, the system creates the special REPL$ share, required for export replication. If it is not already running, the system starts the Directory Replicator service.

10.	Choose the OK button in the Properties dialog box.

To manage locks, stabilization, and subtree replication for the subdirectories exported from this computer

1.	In the Directory Replication dialog box, under Export Directories, choose the Manage button.

The Manage Exported Directories dialog box contains the following items.

Item	Description

Export Path	The directory from which subdirectories and files are exported.

Sub-Directory	A list of the subdirectories that are exported from this computer.

Locks	A lock prevents subdirectory export. More than one lock might be applied to a subdirectory. Export occurs only if this column has a value of 0.

Stabilize	Yes indicates that files in this export subdirectory will wait two minutes or more after changes before being exported. No indicates that changed files may be exported immediately. The default is No. To change this setting, use the Wait Until Stabilized check box.

Subtree	Yes indicates that the entire subtree will be exported. No indicates that only the first-level subdirectory will be exported. The default is Yes. To change this setting, use the Entire Subtree check box.

Locked Since	The date and time the oldest lock was placed on this subdirectory.

Export Settings For	Displays the selected subdirectory.

Add Lock	Adds a lock to the selected subdirectory, preventing export.

Remove Lock	Removes a lock from the selected subdirectory. Export only occurs when a subdirectory has 0 locks.

Wait Until Stabilized	If selected, specifies a two minute or longer wait-period during which no changes can occur before files can be replicated from the selected subdirectory. Helps to eliminate partial replication. If cleared, files in the selected subdirectory may be replicated as soon as changes occur. This setting is reflected in the Stabilize column.

Entire Subtree	If selected, all of the subdirectories and files in the selected subdirectory, as well as any subdirectories below that, will be exported. If cleared, only the first-level subdirectory will be exported. This setting is reflected in the Subtree column.

Add	Displays the Add Sub-Directory dialog box, used to add new subdirectories to the list of exported subdirectories.

However, this is usually unnecessary. This does not create the actual subdirectory; and when a subdirectory is created in the export path using File Manager or the command prompt, it is automatically added to the list.

Remove	Removes the selected subdirectory from the list of exported subdirectories.

However, this is usually unnecessary. If that subdirectory still exists in the export path, it will still be exported and will later reappear in this list.

2.	To temporarily stop exporting a subdirectory, select the subdirectory from the list, and then choose the Add Lock button. Or to resume exporting a locked subdirectory, select the subdirectory, and then choose the Remove Lock button.

Usually, you should only remove locks that you have applied. Export only resumes when the Locks column shows a value of 0 for the subdirectory.

3.	To export a subdirectory and all the subdirectories in its tree, select the subdirectory and then select the Entire Subtree check box. Or to export only the highest subdirectory in a tree, select the subdirectory and then clear the Entire Subtree check box.

4.	To specify a two minute or longer wait-period during which no changes can occur before files are exported, select a subdirectory and then select the Wait Until Stabilized check box. Or to export files immediately after they are changed and saved, select a subdirectory and then clear the Wait Until Stabilized check box.

5.	To return to the Directory Replication dialog box, choose the OK button.

Setting Up an Import Computer

Both Windows NT Server and Windows NT Workstation computers can be set up as import computers.

A computer running Windows NT Server that is configured as an export server can also be configured as an import computer. In addition to importing subdirectories from other export servers, a Windows NT Server computer can also import subdirectories from itself, for purposes of local backup or to provide a local set of replicated files (not the export masters) to be accessed by users.

You do not need to create the imported subdirectories, because a subdirectory is automatically created the first time it is imported.

To set up an import computer

1.	If this has not already been done, assign a logon account to the Directory Replicator service of the import computer. For information on this procedure, see "Assigning a Logon Account to the Directory Replicator Service," later in this chapter.

2.	In the Server Manager window, double-click the computer name of the computer you will configure as an import computer.

3.	In the Properties dialog box, choose the Replication button.

The following illustration shows the Windows NT Server version of the Directory Replication dialog box. The Windows NT Workstation version of this dialog box is slightly different, and contains only the items related to imported directories.

The Directory Replication dialog box contains the following items relating to import replication.

Item	Description

Do Not Import	Prevents import of replicated subdirectories and files.

Import Directories	Allows replicated subdirectories and their files to be imported.

To Path	The directory in which replicated subdirectories and files will be stored. The default is c:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\repl\IMport.

Manage	Displays the Imported Directories dialog box, where the subdirectories to be imported are specified, and where import locks are added or removed.

From List	Subdirectories are replicated to this import computer from the domains and computers listed here. By default, the From List contains a [blank] entry and this computer automatically imports from the local domain.

Add	Displays the Select Computer dialog box. Used to add a computer or domain to the From List.

Remove	Removes a selected computer or domain from the From List.

4.	In the Directory Replication dialog box, select Import Directories.

5.	To change the directory where imported subdirectories will be stored, type a new path in the To Path box.

6.	To import subdirectories from a domain or computer, under Import Directories choose the Add button, and then complete the Select Domain dialog box that appears.

The domain name or computer name is added to the From List.

Note

By default, the From List contains a [blank] entry and this computer automatically imports from the local domain. If any entries are added to the From List, the local domain is no longer imported from. If needed, it must be explicitly added to the From List.

7.	To stop importing subdirectories from an export server or domain, select the domain or server name in the From List, and then choose the Remove button.

8.	To view a list of the subdirectories that have been imported to this computer, or to manage locks on those imported subdirectories, under Import Directories choose the Manage button, and then complete the dialog box that appears. For more information, see the following procedure.

9.	To exit, choose the OK buttons in the Directory Replication and Properties dialog boxes.

To view a list of, or manage locks for, imported subdirectories

1.	In the Directory Replication dialog box, under Import Directories, choose the Manage button.

The Manage Imported Directories dialog box contains the following items.

Item	Description

Import Path	The directory in which replicated subdirectories and files are stored on this computer.

Sub-Directory	A list of the subdirectories that are imported to this computer.

A subdirectory is automatically imported if it is exported by one of the export servers or domains in the From List of the Directory Replication dialog box.

Locks	A lock prevents import to the subdirectory. More than one lock might be applied to a subdirectory. Import to a subdirectory only occurs if this column has a value of 0.

Status	OK indicates that the subdirectory is receiving regular updates from an export server and the imported data is identical to that exported.

No Master indicates that the subdirectory is not receiving updates. The export server might not be running, or the export server might have stopped exporting updates.

No Sync indicates that the subdirectory has received updates, but the data is not up to date. This could be due to a communications failure, open files on the import computer or export server, the import computer not having access permissions at the export server, or an export server malfunction.

[blank] indicates that replication has never occurred for that subdirectory. Replication may not be properly configured for this import computer, for the export server, or both.

Last Update	The date and time the last update was made to a file in this import subdirectory, or in its subtree.

Locked Since	The date and time the oldest lock was placed on this subdirectory.

Import Settings For	Shows the selected subdirectory.

Add Lock	Adds a lock to the selected subdirectory, preventing import.

Remove Lock	Removes a lock from the selected subdirectory. Import only occurs when a subdirectory has 0 locks.

Add	Displays the Add Sub-Directory dialog box, used to add new subdirectories to the list of imported subdirectories.

However, this is usually unnecessary. This does not create the actual subdirectory; and when a subdirectory is exported by one of the export servers or domains in the From List of the Directory Replication dialog box, it is automatically imported and is added to this list.

Remove	Removes the selected subdirectory from the list.

However, this is usually unnecessary. If that subdirectory is exported by one of the export servers or domains in the From List of the Directory Replication dialog box, it will still be imported and will later reappear in this list.

2.	To temporarily stop importing to a subdirectory, select the subdirectory from the list, and then choose the Add Lock button.

3.	To resume importing to a locked subdirectory, select the subdirectory, and then choose the Remove Lock button.

Usually, you should only remove locks that you have applied. Import only resumes when the Locks column shows a value of 0 for the subdirectory.

4.	To return to the Directory Replication dialog box, choose the OK button.

Specifying the Logon Script Path

Logon scripts are files that can be assigned to user accounts. Each time a user logs on, the assigned logon script is run. The logon script allows an administrator to affect the user's environment without managing all aspects of it. When a server performs a logon, the system locates the logon script by combining a filename specified in User Manager for Domains with a path specified in Server Manager.

Master copies of every logon script for a domain should be stored under one replication export directory of one server. This might be the primary domain controller, but does not need to be. Copies of these master logon scripts should be replicated to each server that participates in authenticating logons for the domain. If this is done, only one copy of each logon script will need to be maintained, yet every server that participates in authenticating domain logons will have an available, identical copy of all user logon scripts.

By default, replication is configured so that Windows NT Server computers export subdirectories and logon scripts from the directory C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\EXPORT\SCRIPTS, and import subdirectories and logon scripts to the directory C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\IMPORT\SCRIPTS. For the primary domain controller and each backup domain controller, the path to imported logon scripts must be entered in the Logon Script Path box of the Directory Replication dialog box.

To configure the logon script path for a server

1.	In the Server Manager window, double-click the computer name of the server.

2.	Choose the Replication button.

3.	In the Logon Script Path box, type a local path.

Usually, you will enter a path to a \SCRIPTS subdirectory of the replication To Path, for example, C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\REPL\IMPORT\SCRIPTS.

An entry is required. Do not enter a blank in the Logon Script Path box.

4.	To exit, in the Directory Replication dialog box choose the OK button, and then in the Properties dialog box choose the OK button.

The logon script path cannot be administered for Windows NT Server computers that don't function as primary or backup domain controllers, or for Windows NT Workstation computers. On these computers, store logon scripts in C:\systemroot\SYSTEM32\REPL\IMPORT\SCRIPTS or in subdirectories of that path.

Managing Administrative Alerts

The Alerts dialog box displays and manages the list of users and computers that are notified when administrative alerts occur at the selected computer.

Administrative alerts are generated by the system and relate to server and resource use. They warn about security and access problems, user session problems, server shutdown because of power loss when the UPS service is available, and printer problems. For example, an alert is generated when disk space becomes low.

For alerts to be sent, the Alerter and Messenger services must be running on the computer originating the alert. For alerts to be received, the Messenger service must be running on the destination computer.

To manage the recipients of administrative alerts

1.	Double-click a computer name in the Server Manager window.

2.	In the Properties dialog box, choose the Alerts button.

3.	To add a user or computer to the list of alert recipients, type the user name or computer name in the New Computer Or Username box, and then choose the Add button.

4.	To remove a user or computer from the list of alert recipients, select the user name or computer name in the Send Administrative Alerts To box, and then choose the Remove button.

5.	To exit, in the Alerts dialog box choose the OK button, and then in the Properties dialog box choose the OK button.


Managing Shared Directories
Server Manager	7 of 14

Managing a Computer

Managing Shared Directories

Sharing a directory makes the directory and the files located there available to other users of the network. The following procedures describe how to:

View the shared directories of a computer

Share a directory

Manage properties of a shared directory

Set permissions for a shared directory

Stop sharing a directory

For a directory to be shared the Server service must be running.

To view the shared directories of a computer

1.	Select a computer from the list in the Server Manager window, and then from the Computer menu choose Shared Directories.

The Shared Directories dialog box lists the shared directories of the computer, and shows the path of each shared directory. The list consists of those computer resources that have been shared by a user or an administrator, plus any special shares that may have been created by the system.

Depending on the configuration of the computer being administered, some or all of the following special shares can appear in this list. These shares are created by the system.

Share name	Represents

driveletter$	The root directory of a storage device on the computer. For example, C$ is a share name by which the root directory of drive C can be accessed over the network. Only members of the Administrators, Backup Operators, and Server Operators groups can connect to these shares.

ADMIN$	A resource used by the system during remote administration of a computer. The path of this resource is always the Windows NT system root (the directory in which Windows NT was installed, for example, C:\WINNT). Only members of the Administrators, Backup Operators, and Server Operators groups can connect to this share.

IPC$	A resource sharing the named pipes that are essential for communication between programs. Used during remote administration of a computer, and when viewing a computer's shared resources.

NETLOGON	A resource used by the Net Logon service for processing domain logon requests. This resource is only provided for Windows NT Server, not for Windows NT Workstation.

PRINT$	A resource that supports shared printers.

REPL$	A resource created by the system when a Windows NT Server computer is configured as a replication export server. Required for export replication.

Usually, you should not remove or modify these special shares.

2.	To exit, choose the Close button.

To share a directory

1.	Select a computer from the list in the Server Manager window, and then from the Computer menu choose Shared Directories.

2.	In the Shared Directories dialog box, choose the New Share button.

3.	Type a share name, path, and comment in the appropriate boxes.

In this box	Type

Share Name	A name used to identify and connect to this share. Share names can be up to 12 characters. If computers running MS-DOS will be connecting to this share, share names should be limited to 8 characters, optionally followed by a period and up to 3 characters.

Path	The absolute path of the directory to be shared. For example, C:\SHIPPING\INVOICE.

Comment	Any text describing the shared directory. Users see this comment when connecting to the shared directory using File Manager.

4.	To define the maximum number of users who can connect to the shared directory at one time, select either Unlimited or Allow. If you select Allow, specify a maximum number in the Users box.

5.	To manage the permission level granted to groups and user accounts, choose the Permissions button and complete the Access Through Share Permissions dialog box that appears.

Unless you change the default setting, a new shared directory provides Full Control to Everyone.

6.	To exit, in the New Share dialog box choose the OK button, and then in the Shared Directories dialog box, choose the Close button.

To manage properties for a shared directory

1.	Select a computer from the list in the Server Manager window, and then from the Computer menu choose Shared Directories.

2.	In the Shared Directories dialog box, select a share name from the list.

3.	Choose the Properties button.

4.	To change the path or comment, type new text in those boxes.

5.	To change the maximum number of users who can connect to the shared directory at one time, select either Unlimited or Allow. If you select Allow, specify a maximum number in the Users box.

6.	To change the permission level granted to groups and user accounts, choose the Permissions button and complete the Access Through Share Permissions dialog box that appears.

7.	To exit, in the Share Properties dialog box choose the OK button, and then in the Shared Directories dialog box, choose the Close button.

Use the Access Through Share Permissions dialog box to manage permissions for a shared directory. For detailed information on permissions, see Chapter 4, "File Manager."

To secure shared directories effectively, keep the following in mind:

Permissions set on a shared directory are effective only when the directory is accessed over the network. For NTFS volumes, it is usually better to assign permissions to directories (using File Manager locally), rather than to shares.

Permissions set on a shared directory apply to all files and subdirectories in the shared directory.

Permissions set on a shared directory that is on an NTFS volume operate in addition to NTFS permissions set on the directory itself. Shared directory permissions specify the maximum access allowed. For example, if a user has Read permission on the shared directory but List permission on the directory itself, the user's access is limited to List.

The following table shows the permissions available for shared directories and the actions available to users for each permission.

To set permissions for a shared directory

1.	Select a computer from the list in the Server Manager window, and then from the Computer menu choose Shared Directories.

2.	In the Shared Directories dialog box choose the New Share button, or select a share name from the list and then choose the Properties button.

3.	Choose the Permissions button.

4.	To change a permission, select a group or user account from the Name list, and then select a permission from the list in the Type Of Access box.

5.	To add a group or user account to the list of those granted permissions for this shared directory, choose the Add button and complete the Add Users And Groups dialog box that appears.

When assigning permissions to shared directories, it is usually better to assign permissions to groups rather than to individual user accounts.

6.	To remove a group or user account from the list of those granted permissions for this shared directory, select a group or user account from the Name list, and then choose the Remove button.

7.	To exit, choose the OK buttons in the Access Through Share Permissions dialog box and in the New Share or Share Properties dialog box, and then in the Shared Directories dialog box choose the Close button.

To stop sharing a directory

1.	Select a computer from the list in the Server Manager window, and then from the Computer menu choose Shared Directories.

2.	In the Shared Directories dialog box, select a share name from the list.

3.	Choose the Stop Sharing button.

The directory itself is not removed. It still exists, but it is no longer shared and can no longer be accessed by network users.

4.	To exit, choose the Close button.


Managing Services
Server Manager	8 of 14

Managing a Computer

Managing Services

Using the Services command, you can start, stop, pause, or continue each of the services available on the computer, determine whether a service will start up automatically when the system starts, and control some other service startup parameters.

The default services provided with the system are shown in the following table.

Service		Description
Alerter		Notifies selected users and computers of administrative alerts that occur on this computer. Used by the Server and other services. Requires the Messenger service.
Clipbook Server		Supports the ClipBook Viewer application, allowing pages to be seen by remote ClipBooks.
Computer Browser		Maintains an up-to-date list of computers, and provides the list to applications when requested. Provides the computer lists displayed in the Select Computer and Select Domain dialog boxes and in the main Server Manager window.
Directory Replicator		Replicates directories, and the files in those directories, between computers.
Event Log		Records system, security, and application events in the event logs.
Messenger		Sends and receives messages sent by administrators or by the Alerter service.
Net Logon		Provides authentication of account logons, and keeps the domain's security database synchronized between the primary domain controller and backup domain controllers of the domain.
Network DDE		Provides a network transport for DDE (dynamic data exchange) conversations and provides security for DDE conversations.
Network DDE DSDM		Manages the shared DDE conversations. It is used by the Network DDE service. DSDM stands for DDE share database manager.
NT LM Security Support Provider		Provides Windows NT security to RPC applications that use transports other than named pipes.
Remote Procedure Call Locator		Allows distributed applications to use the RPC name service. The RPC Locator service manages the RPC name service database. The server side of a distributed application registers its availability with the RPC Locator service. The client side of a distributed application queries the RPC Locator service to find available compatible server applications.
Remote Procedure Call Service		Is the RPC subsystem for Windows NT. The RPC subsystem includes the endpoint mapper and other miscellaneous RPC services.
Schedule		Must be running for the at command to be used. The at command can be used to schedule commands and programs to run on a computer at a specified time and date.
Server		Provides RPC (remote procedure call) support, and file, print, and named pipe sharing.
Spooler		Provides print spooler services.
UPS		Manages an uninterruptible power supply connected to this computer.
Workstation		Provides network connections and communications.
The functions offered by the Server Manager Services command are duplicated by the Services option in the Control Panel of every Windows NT computer. However, while Server Manager can manage services for both the local computer and remote computers, the Services option in Control Panel can only manage the local computer.

Starting and Stopping Services

Use the Services dialog box to start, stop, pause, or continue each of the services available on the selected computer, and to pass startup parameters to the service.

To start, stop, pause, or continue a service

1.	Select a computer from the list in the Server Manager window, and then from the Computer menu choose Services.

A blank in the Status column indicates that the service is stopped.

2.	In the Services dialog box, select a service.

3.	Choose the Start, Stop, Pause, or Continue button.

Optionally, to pass startup parameters to a service, type the parameters in the Startup Parameters box before choosing the Start button.

4.	In the Services dialog box, choose the Close button.

Note

When you pause the Server service, users in the server's Administrators and Server Operators groups can still make new connections to the computer, but all other users cannot.

Because stopping the Server service disconnects all remote connected users, use the following procedure to stop that service.

To stop the Server service

1.	Use the Services dialog box to pause the Server service on that computer.

This prevents new users from establishing a connection with that computer.

2.	Use the Send Message command to notify all connected users that they will be disconnected after a specified time period.

3.	After expiration of your warning period, use the Services dialog box to stop the Server service on that computer.

Once the Server service on a computer is stopped, that computer can no longer be remotely administered. Its Server service can only be restarted locally.

Configuring Service Startup

Use the Service Startup dialog box to configure when and how a service is started, and optionally, to specify a user account the service will use to log on.

When services start, they log on. By default, most services log on using a special system account. (Of the services provided with Windows NT, only the Directory Replicator and Schedule services will usually log on using other user accounts.)

When a user account other than the system account is used to log on a service, that user account must have the Password Never Expires option selected. For instructions on configuring a user account, see Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

To configure service startup you must be logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators local group.

To configure startup for a service

1.	Select a computer from the list in the Server Manager window, and then from the Computer menu choose Services.

2.	In the Services dialog box, select a service.

3.	Choose the Startup button.

4.	Specify a startup type.

Select		To
Automatic		Start the service every time the system starts.  (The Server service will not start automatically unless the computer has at least 12 MB of memory.)
Manual		Allow the service to be started by a user or by a dependent service.
Disabled		Prevent the service from being started.
5.	Specify the user account the service will use to log on.

Select		To
System Account		Specify that the service will log on using the system account.
This Account		Specify a user account the service will use to log on.
Note

Most services must use the system account to log on. Usually, of the default services provided with Windows NT, only the Directory Replicator and Schedule services will log on using other user accounts.

6.	If you select This Account, choose the Browse button and specify a user account in the Add User dialog box that appears. After completing and exiting that dialog box, type the password for the user account in both the Password and Confirm Password boxes.

7.	Choose the OK button, and then in the Services dialog box, choose the Close button.

If a user account has been assigned to a service as described in steps 5 and 6 of the previous procedure, and if the password for that user account is later changed (for example, while using the User Properties dialog box in User Manager for Domains to administer the user account), the password for that user account must also be changed here, in the Service Startup dialog box.

Assigning a Logon Account to the Schedule Service

By default, the Schedule service is configured to log on under the system account; the same account that is used by most services. However, when the Schedule service logs on under the system account, the at command can only be used to access those network resources that permit Guest access.

In many cases, if you want the at command to access network resources, you must create a special user account and then configure the Schedule service to log on using that special account.

To create a logon account for the Schedule service

1.	Create a user account for the service using User Manager or User Manager for Domains. When creating the account, select the Password Never Expires option.

2.	Give the account membership in the appropriate groups. The particular group memberships you assign will depend on the operations that need to be accomplished remotely.

For example, if the at command is to be used to perform regularly scheduled backups of the hard disk of a remote server in a Windows NT Server domain, the user account created for the Schedule service would need to be a member of the domain's Backup Operators local group.

3.	Assign the user account to the Schedule service using Server Manager or the Services option in Control Panel.

Assigning a Logon Account to the Directory Replicator Service

Most aspects of directory replication are managed for a particular computer by using either the Server Manager Properties command or the Server option in Control Panel.

However, before a computer can participate in replication, you must create a special user account and then, for each computer in a domain that will participate in replication, configure its Directory Replicator service to log on using that special account.

To create a logon account for the Directory Replicator service

1.	Use User Manager for Domains to create a domain user account, configuring the account so that:

The Password Never Expires option is selected.

All logon hours are allowed.

The user account has membership in the domain's Backup Operators group.

2.	For each computer that will participate in replication, use Server Manager or the Services option in Control Panel to configure the computer's Directory Replicator service to start up automatically, and to log on to the user account you created in step 1.


Sending a Message to Connected Users
Server Manager	9 of 14

Managing a Computer

Sending a Message to Connected Users

A message can be sent to all users who are connected to a computer. You may want to do this before you administer a computer with Server Manager - particularly if you will be disconnecting one or more users, or if you will be stopping the Server service on that computer.

For a message to be sent and received, the Messenger service must be running on the computer sending the message and on the computers receiving the message.

To send a message

1.	Select a computer from the list in the Server Manager window.

2.	From the Computer menu, choose Send Message.

3.	In the Send Message dialog box, type your message in the Message box.

4.	Choose the OK button.


Managing a Domain
Server Manager	10 of 14

Managing a Domain

When administering domains, Server Manager can:

Promote and demote domain controllers

Synchronize a backup domain controller with the primary domain controller

Synchronize all servers of a domain

Add computers to and remove computers from a domain


Promoting and Demoting Domain Controllers
Server Manager	11 of 14

Managing a Domain

Promoting and Demoting Domain Controllers

There is only one primary domain controller in a domain. It maintains the master copy of the domain's security database, which is automatically replicated to the backup domain controllers of the domain.

A backup domain controller can be promoted to become the primary domain controller. When a server is promoted, an up-to-date copy of the domain's security database is replicated from the old primary domain controller to the new one, and then the old primary domain controller is demoted to backup domain controller.

To promote a backup domain controller to primary domain controller

1.	Select a backup domain controller from the list of computers in the Server Manager window. Choose a computer that is capable of reliably handling high network traffic loads.

2.	From the Computer menu, choose Promote To Primary Domain Controller.

This can take several minutes. When completed, the old primary domain controller automatically reverts to server status.

Usually, when a backup domain controller is promoted to primary domain controller no special action needs to be taken to demote the former primary domain controller to backup domain controller, because the system does this automatically.

However, if a server is promoted to primary domain controller while the existing one is unavailable (for example, if it is being repaired), and if the former primary domain controller later returns to service, you must demote it.

If a former primary domain controller returns to service under this circumstance, until it is demoted it will not run the Net Logon service, it will not participate in authentication of user logons, and in the Server Manager window its icon will be dimmed.

To demote a former primary domain controller to server

1.	Select the former primary domain controller from the list of computers in the Server Manager window.

On the Computer menu, the Promote To Primary Domain Controller command becomes the Demote To Backup Domain Controller command.

2.	From the Computer menu, choose Demote To Backup Domain Controller.


Synchronizing Domain Computers
Server Manager	12 of 14

Managing a Domain

Synchronizing Domain Computers

The synchronization command in the Computer menu changes, depending on the type of computer that is selected from the list in the Server Manager window.

When the primary domain controller is selected, the Synchronize Entire Domain command appears on the Computer menu. This command replicates the domain's security database from the primary domain controller to all the backup domain controllers in the domain. This can take a substantial amount of time to complete.

When a backup domain controller is selected, the Synchronize With Primary Domain Controller command appears on the Computer menu. This command replicates the domain's security database from the primary domain controller to that backup domain controller. This can take a substantial amount of time to complete.

Synchronization is usually done automatically by the system, but if the copy of the domain's security database on one or more servers becomes unsynchronized, this is a manual way to correct the situation. It is rarely necessary.

To synchronize a backup domain controller with the primary domain controller

1.	Select the server from the list in the Server Manager window.

2.	From the Computer menu, choose Synchronize With Primary Domain Controller.

To synchronize all servers of a domain

1.	Select the primary domain controller from the list in the Server Manager window.

2.	From the Computer menu, choose Synchronize Entire Domain.


Adding or Removing Domain Computers
Server Manager	13 of 14

Managing a Domain

Adding or Removing Domain Computers

Before a computer running Windows NT Workstation or Windows NT Server can be a domain member and participate in domain security, it must be added to the domain. Computers that are added to a domain are given accounts in the domain's security database. If the added computer is a backup domain controller, after it is added it also receives a copy of the domain's security database.

There are three ways to add a computer to a domain. Only one of these methods requires Server Manager.

A workstation can be added to a domain during installation of Windows NT Workstation, and a server can be added to a domain during installation of Windows NT Server, but only when the installations are performed by an administrator.

An administrator can add an existing Windows NT computer to a domain using the Network option of that workstation's Control Panel. However, a backup domain controller cannot be added to the domain this way.

Or, an administrator or an account operator can use Server Manager's Add To Domain command to add a computer account to the domain's security database. Then the computer's user must have the computer join the domain under that computer account. This can be accomplished by a user either during installation, or after installation by using the Network option of that computer's Control Panel.

Note

Treat an added computer name as a security element. Until the intended computer joins the domain, it is possible for a user to give a different computer that computer name, and then have it join the domain using the computer account you have just created. If the added computer is a backup domain controller, when it joins it receives a copy of the domain's security database.

To add a computer to a domain, you must be logged on to a user account that is a member of the Administrators, Domain Admins, or Account Operators group of that domain.

To use Server Manager to add a computer to a domain

1.	From the Computer menu, choose Add To Domain.

2.	Under Windows NT Computer Type, choose Workstation Or Server or Backup Domain Controller.

3.	Type the computer name in the Computer Name box.

You can type the name using both uppercase and lowercase, but the computer name will always be displayed in uppercase, and Windows NT will store the name as uppercase.

4.	Choose the Add button.

In the domain's security database, an account is added for that computer name.

5.	Choose the Close button.

The computer is added to Server Manager's list. However, until the computer joins the domain (as described in step 6), the computer's icon is dimmed and its version number and description are absent from the list.

After a computer has been added, instruct a user or administrator of that computer to join the domain. For backup domain controllers, this can be done only during installation of Windows NT Server on the computer. For other Windows NT computers, this can be done either while installing Windows NT on the computer, or if Windows NT is already installed, using the Network option of that computer's Control Panel.

To remove a workstation or a server from a domain

1.	Select a computer from the list in the Server Manager window.

Do not select the primary domain controller. It cannot be removed.

2.	From the Computer menu, choose Remove From Domain.

The computer's account is deleted from the domain's security database. It can no longer participate in domain security.

3.	Instruct the user of that computer to remove this domain name from the Network option in Control Panel, and to enter (as appropriate) another domain name or workgroup name.

A backup domain controller cannot change domains, unless Windows NT Server is reinstalled on it. Other Windows NT Server computers and Windows NT Workstation computers can change domains without requiring Windows NT to be reinstalled.

To change a workstation or server from one domain to another

1.	From the Computer menu, choose Select Domain and complete the Select Domain Dialog box, specifying the new domain.

2.	From the Computer menu, choose Add To Domain and complete the Add Computer To Domain dialog box.

3.	Instruct a user or administrator of the computer being moved to enter the new domain name in the Network option in Control Panel.

4.	From the Computer menu, choose Select Domain and complete the Select Domain Dialog box, specifying the old domain.

5.	Select the computer name from the list in the Server Manager window, and then from the Computer menu choose Remove From Domain.

To change the computer name of a workstation or a server

1.	From the Computer menu, choose Add To Domain and complete the Add Computer To Domain dialog box, specifying the new computer name.

2.	Instruct the user of that computer to change the computer name in the Network option in Control Panel.

3.	If the name change is happening on a backup domain controller, go to the primary domain controller or any other backup domain controller in the domain. From there, open Server Manager, and choose Synchronize With Primary from the Computer menu.

You can now start the Netlogon service on the backup domain controller that has had the name change.

4.	Select the old computer name from the list in the Server Manager window, and then from the Computer menu, choose Remove From Domain.


Administering Microsoft LAN Manager
Server Manager	14 of 14

Administering Microsoft LAN Manager

When administering Microsoft LAN Manager 2.1 or newer servers, a few Server Manager functions are unavailable or work slightly differently than they do when administering Windows NT computers.

Server Manager function		Behavior with Microsoft LAN Manager 2x
Administering the list of alert recipients		The Server and Alerter services on that server must be stopped and restarted before the changes will take effect. Since the Server service can only be restarted locally, this action must be performed at that server.
Configuring service startup		In the Services dialog box, the Startup button is unavailable.
Promoting a server to primary domain controller		A LAN Manager 2.x server cannot be promoted to primary domain controller of a domain containing a Windows NT Server computer.
Synchronizing a server with the primary domain controller		When a LAN Manager 2.x server is selected, the Synchronize With Primary command reestablishes the computer account password on both that server and the primary domain controller. You can do this only for LAN Manager 2.x servers that are members of domains with LAN Manager 2.x primary domain controllers. You cannot use Server Manager to synchronize a LAN Manager 2.x server with a Windows NT Server primary domain controller.
Replication		Server Manager cannot administer LAN Manager 2.x replicators. A LAN Manager 2.x export server cannot replicate to Windows NT import computers. However, a Windows NT export server can replicate to LAN Manager 2.x servers (including LAN Manager for UNIX Systems 2.x servers). Usually, Windows NT and LAN Manager 2.x export servers will not coexist in the same domain.
When administering a Microsoft LAN Manager 2.x domain using Server Manager, the Servers, Workstations, and All commands on the View menu are unavailable.


Backup
Chapter 16	1 of 18

Backup

Backup is a graphical tool for protecting data from accidental loss, or hardware and media failures. It makes it easy for you to use a tape drive to back up and restore your important files on either the NTFS, FAT, or HPFS file system. It also makes it easier to archive that data for legal or historical purposes and remove older, unused files, safe in the knowledge that you can recover them if necessary.

This chapter provides information on how to use the graphical commands for selective backups and restores or to create your own batch file to automate the process, and includes the following main topics:

Backing up disk files to tape

Restoring tape files to disk

Maintaining tapes


Overview
Backup	2 of 18

Overview

In Windows NT, doing simple backups and restores on your local tape drive has been made easy with the Backup program. This program is located in the Administrative Tools group in Program Manager.

The following list provides an overview of some of the things you can do with this graphical tool to protect your data:

Back up and restore both local and remote files on an NTFS, FAT, or HPFS file system from your own computer using an attached tape drive.

Select files for backing up or restoring by volume, directory, or individual filename and view detailed file information, such as size or modification date.

Select an optional verification pass to ensure reliable backups or restorations.

Perform any of the following common backup operations:  Normal, Copy, Incremental, Differential, and Daily.

Place multiple backup sets on a tape, and either append new backup sets or overwrite the whole tape with the new ones.

Span multiple tapes with both backup sets and files, since there is no file-size restriction.

Create a batch file to automate repeated backups of drives.

Review a full catalog of backup sets and individual file and directory information so you can select files to be restored.

Control a restore's destination drive and directory.

Save log information on tape operations to a file. Also view tape-operation information in Event Viewer.


Starting and Quitting Backup
Backup	3 of 18

Overview

Starting and Quitting Backup

Double-click the Backup icon in the Administrative Tools group to display the main Backup window with the Drives window open and a Tapes icon. (You can also type ntbackup or start ntbackup at the command prompt.) The menu bar is supplemented with a toolbar for easier access to the most commonly used commands. The status bar at the bottom of the window provides descriptions of each of the commands and program-status information. Both context-sensitive and standard Help are provided for all Backup commands.

If this is the first time that you have used Backup or if you have just installed a new or additional tape backup device, you need to load the appropriate tape backup device driver and then restart your computer to activate it.

To load a tape driver

1.	In the Main program group, double-click the Windows NT Setup icon.

After determining your hardware configuration, the Windows NT Setup dialog box appears.

2.	From the Options menu, choose Add/Remove Tape Devices.

3.	In the Tape Device Setup dialog box, choose the Add button to view a list of the tape devices that are compatible with Windows NT.

4.	Select a device from the list and choose the Install button.

A message asks you to type a path name for the location of the tape device files and then choose Continue. The name of the selected tape device appears within the box in the Tape Device Setup dialog box.

5.	Choose the Close button.

6.	From the Options menu, choose Exit.

A message advises you that your computer configuration has changed and that you must shut down and then restart your computer to use the new configuration.

7.	In the Setup Message box, choose the OK button.

To avoid restarting your computer, you can also use the Devices option in Control Panel to start the tape device.

You can only back up files on a disk drive to which you normally have access. Otherwise, you need to be logged on as a member of the Administrators or Backup Operators group. Notice that backup rights enable you to bypass the protection provided by normal file permissions. Also, use caution in granting restore rights since they enable a user to ignore normal file-permission conflicts during restoration and to overwrite existing files.

The following most commonly used commands from the Operations and Select menus are also available on the toolbar:

Backup	Retension Tape	Check
Restore	Eject Tape	Uncheck
Catalog	Erase Tape
The Tree, View, and Window menus provide commands for manipulating your windows the same as in File Manager. The View menu also enables you to display or hide the status bar and toolbar, and to change your font selection. See online Help for detailed procedures.

To quit Backup, you can choose either Exit from the Operations menu or Close from the Control menu. To remove the tape before quitting, you can choose Eject Tape from the Operations menu or click the Eject Tape button on the toolbar. If the tape device supports software control of tape ejection, the tape is rewound and ejected. If it does not, the tape is simply rewound in preparation for manual ejection. Notice, however, that clicking the Eject Tape button when using certain tape drives can cause the tape not to eject and the program to display "No Tape in the Drive." If this occurs, eject the tape manually from the drive.


Selecting Your Hardware
Backup	4 of 18

Overview

Selecting Your Hardware

The system automatically checks for the proper hardware when you start Windows NT and initializes it each time you start Backup. Notice, however, that the tape drive must be turned on before you start Windows NT for the drivers to be loaded properly. If you have more than one tape backup device, you can use the Hardware Setup command from the Operations menu to select a different device.

Note

If you do not have a tape drive, you can use the backup or xcopy commands to back up files to a floppy disk.

Windows NT currently supports both high-capacity SCSI tape backup devices for 4 mm DAT, 8 mm, and .25-inch drives and the less expensive mini-cartridge drives. You may have more than one tape drive connected to your system. However, only one tape drive may be selected at a time.

Inserting a higher-density tape than the tape drive is capable of using may cause the program to display "Tape Drive Error Detected" and not allow the tape to be ejected until you close Backup.

Running Backup without a tape in certain tape drives may cause the Application log in Event Viewer to be updated every 3 to 4 seconds with a "No Tape in Drive" message. This can eventually fill up the log and leave no room for other messages until you delete the log.


Backing Up Disk Files to Tape
Backup	5 of 18

Backing Up Disk Files to Tape

Because information is the most important resource on a workstation or network, backing up that information is an administrator's most critical function. And, therefore, you need to create backup policies and standard hardware-maintenance policies for disaster avoidance rather than just recovery.

For ideas on how to establish these policies, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide. This chapter tells you how to implement policies using the Windows NT Backup program.

When formulating your policies, decide what needs to be backed up and what you consider to be a reasonable period of time during which essential services can be unavailable. Based on that decision, determine what steps you will take to protect critical data, which can range from a simple backup done with the Windows NT Backup program to the use of alternate sites or disk fault-tolerance methods. The Windows NT Server Disk Administrator program provides fault-tolerance functionality for creating mirror sets and stripe sets with parity.

Then decide how often you need to redo such a complete risk assessment. You will need to evaluate the continuing importance of various operations and determine likely new areas of exposure. If security is important to you, your backup policy should also provide for an independent review of the security audit log to ensure that backups are being performed according to policy.


Choosing Files to Back Up
Backup	6 of 18

Backing Up Disk Files to Tape

Choosing Files to Back Up

You can select either all the files on a disk or individual files only, the same way you would in File Manager. After selecting your files, choose the Check button on the toolbar to select each file's check box. Or if you only want to select a few files, just select the check box for each filename.

The Drives window will normally be open when you start the Backup program. However, sometimes you will want to minimize it and then reopen it when needed, either by double-clicking the Drives icon or by choosing Drives from the Window menu.

There will also be times when you will leave Backup, use File Manager to connect to another network drive, and then return to Backup and need to choose Refresh from the Window menu to update the Drives window and view the additional network drive.

To open the Disk File Selection window

In the Drives window, double-click the appropriate disk drive icon or letter.

Disk and Tape File Selection windows are organized the same as in File Manager, with the same viewing options for seeing the directory tree structure and the directory and filenames list. The default is a split, resizable panel showing both options. Filenames are only shown in the Directory List panel. Selecting All File Details displays filenames, size, last modification date and time, and file attributes (such as hidden, system, read-only, or archive).

To select all the files on a disk

In the Drives window, select the disk drive and then, from the Select menu, choose the Check command. Or choose the Check button on the toolbar.

– Or –

In the Drives window, select the check box for the appropriate disk drive.

Notice that, even when a disk drive is selected, the program will not back up those files and directories that the user does not have security permission to read. Hidden files with read permission can be backed up and are displayed with an exclamation point in the file's icon. All file attributes are preserved, including permissions.

To select files individually

1.	Open the Disk File Selection window.

2.	To select a few files, select the check box for each filename.

To select several files, select the first filename and then do one of the following:

Press and hold down the SHIFT key and then select the last contiguous filename.

Drag the mouse to the last contiguous filename.

Press and hold down the CTRL key and then select each non-contiguous filename.

3.	Choose the Check command from the Select menu, or the Check button on the toolbar, to select each file's check box.

Choose the Uncheck command from the Select menu, or the Uncheck button on the toolbar, to undo all your selections.

Notice that when only some files are selected, the corresponding disk-drive and directory check boxes have a gray background.


Setting the Tape Options
Backup	7 of 18

Backing Up Disk Files to Tape

Setting the Tape Options

After selecting one or more disk drives or files to back up, choose the Backup command from the Operations menu to open the Backup Information dialog box. The upper section provides information on the tape that you loaded. You can choose whether you want to append the new backup set after the last backup set or replace an old set with the new one. If you want to secure the tape by limiting access to it, select the check box for Restrict Access To Owner Or Administrator. If you want to confirm that the tape was backed up accurately, select the Verify After Backup check box. If you want to add a copy of your Windows NT Registry files to the backup set, select the Backup Local Registry check box. If you want to have the tape drive compress the data on the tape media, select the Hardware Compression check box.

Keep in mind, however, that moving tapes between different brands of tape drives can cause problems if one brand supports compression and the other one does not. Depending on the tape drive, the program could display messages such as "Tape Drive Error Detected," "Tape Drive Not Responding," or "Bad Tape." To erase a tape that is causing one of these problems, start NTBackup from the command prompt with the /nopoll switch. However, be careful not to use Backup with the /nopoll switch to perform anything other than erasing the tape.

The following table describes the options in the upper section of the Backup Information dialog box.

Item	Description
Current Tape	The current tape's name is shown here unless there is no tape loaded, it is blank, or it has an unrecognized format.
Creation Date	The creation date of the original backup set, or the date when it was last replaced, is automatically displayed here
Owner	The owner of the tape, that is, whoever put the first backup set on the tape, is automatically displayed here.
Tape Name	You can use up to 32 characters to create or change a current tape name.
Append	This operation adds the backup set(s) to the end of the last backup set on the active tape. Tape Name and Restrict Access To Owner Or Administrator are unavailable with this operation.
Replace	This operation overwrites all the information on the tape. However, if you do not confirm the choice, another message gives you the option of appending instead.
Verify After Backup	You can select whether or not to perform a verification comparison of the files that are written to tape and the files on the disks.
Restrict Access To Owner Or Administrator	You can designate the tape as "secure." Only the tape owner, or a member of the Administrators or Backup Operators group, can read, write, or erase the tape using the Windows NT Backup program. To restore it on another computer in the same domain, you must be logged on with the same user account name for that domain. Members of the Administrators or Backup Operators group can read, write, or erase a tape on any computer and in any domain.
Hardware Compression	You can request that the tape drive compress the data onto the tape media. However, do not select this option if you want to move this tape later to another tape drive that does not support hardware compression. This option is available only if the tape drive supports selectable hardware compression.
Backup Local Registry	You can include a copy of the local Windows NT Registry files in the backup set. This option is available only if the drive containing the Registry is selected.


Setting the Backup Set Options
Backup	8 of 18

Backing Up Disk Files to Tape

Setting the Backup Set Options

The second section of the Backup Information dialog box shows how many backup sets have been selected, each set being a collection of related files on one drive that is backed up during a single backup operation. If you select more than one disk drive, Backup provides a scroll bar for moving between backup sets so you can enter separate descriptions, up to a length of 32 characters, and select different backup types for each drive selected.

When deciding which backup type to use, one of the criteria should be whether or not it will mark the files as having been backed up. Windows NT maintains a marker (called the archive bit) for each file that allows backup programs to mark the files after backing them up. When the file changes, Windows NT marks the file as needing to be backed up again.

With Windows NT Backup, you can choose to back up only those files that have this marker set, and you can choose whether or not to mark the files as having been backed up. The normal (or full) backup type is best when a large amount of data changes between backups, or to provide a baseline for the other backup types. The incremental backup type is good if you need to keep frequent "checkpoint" versions of changed data. The differential backup type simplifies the process for restoring files. To provide for long-term storage with fewer tapes, you can use a combination of a normal backup plus either incremental or differential backups.

The following table describes the different types of backup operations that you can choose.

Choose	To

Normal	Back up and mark as such all the selected files on the disk. A normal backup is the same as a full backup.

Copy	Back up, but not mark as such, all the selected files on the disk.

Incremental	Back up and mark as such only those selected files that have been modified on the disk.

Differential	Back up, but not mark as such, only those selected files that have been modified on the disk.

Daily	Back up, but not mark as such, only those selected files that have been modified that same day on the disk. (This can be useful if you want to take work home and need a quick way to select the files that you worked on that day.)


Setting the Log Options
Backup	9 of 18

Backing Up Disk Files to Tape

Setting the Log Options

In the final section of the Backup Information dialog box, you can choose not to log information or you can choose to create a log that contains either a summary of major operations or full details on all operations. If you choose to create a log, you can type the name of the text file into which the information on completed tape operations will be logged. You can also use the Browse button at the end of the Log File box to help you locate the correct filename for the log.

The following are descriptions of the three logging options.

Choose	To

Full Detail	Log all operations information including the names of all the files and directories that are backed up.

Summary Only	Log only the major operations such as loading a tape, starting the backup, and failing to open a file.

Don't Log	Log no information.

When you are done, choose the OK button to display the Backup Status dialog box and start the backup process.


Checking the Backup Status
Backup	10 of 18

Backing Up Disk Files to Tape

Checking the Backup Status

The Backup Status dialog box contains an active status area; the names of the drive, directory, and file(s) that are being backed up; and a Summary section showing a log of major operations. You can also choose to stop the backup operation. If a large backup operation reaches the end of a tape before finishing, the Insert New Tape dialog box prompts you to insert a new tape. A collection of related tapes containing several backup sets is called a family set.

To display the Backup Status dialog box and start backing up

In the Backup Information dialog box, choose the OK button.

The status area at the top of the box shows the following information:

Directories, files, and bytes processed

Elapsed time in hours, minutes, and seconds

Number of corrupt or skipped files (that is, files that are unable to be copied because of both read errors and open/locked files)

Additional information provided includes the selected disk drive, directory path, and filename, along with a Summary section showing the tape label and an event log.

If you need to stop a backup job before it is completed, choose the Abort button. A message asks whether to continue or stop now and show it as a corrupted file. The Summary section then gives the final operation details and shows whether or not the operation completed successfully.


Using Batch Files to Do Backups
Backup	11 of 18

Backing Up Disk Files to Tape

Using Batch Files to Do Backups

You can create a command-line batch file to back up one or more drives on a regular basis. The parameters included in this batch command give you most of the same functionality provided in the graphical user interface. You can back up only directories, not individual files, and you cannot use wildcard characters.

Syntax

ntbackup operation path [/a][/v][/r][/d "text"][/b][/hc:{on | off}] [/t {option}][/l "filename"][/e][/tape:{n}]

 Parameters

operation

Specifies the operation, backup.

path

Specifies one or more paths of the directories to be backed up.

/a

Causes backup sets to be added after the last backup set on the tape. When /a is not specified, the program reuses the tape and replaces previous data. When more than one drive is specified but /a is not, the program overwrites the contents of the tape with the information from the first drive selected and then appends the backup sets for the remaining drives.

/v

Verifies the operation.

/r

Restricts access.

/d "text"

Specifies a description of the backup contents.

/b

Specifies that the local Registry be backed up.

/hc:on or /hc:off

Specifies that hardware compression is on or off.

/t {option}

Specifies the backup type. Option can be one of the following:

Normal  All the selected files are backed up and marked as such on the disk.

Copy  All the selected files are backed up, but they are not marked as such on the disk.

Incremental  Among the selected files, only those that have been modified are backed up and marked as such on the disk.

Differential  The selected files that have been modified are backed up, but they are not marked as such on the disk.

Daily  Among the selected files, only those that have been modified that same day are backed up, but they are not marked as such on the disk. (This can be useful if you want to take work home and need a quick way to select the files that you worked on that day.)

/l "filename"

Specifies the filename for the backup log.

/e

Specifies that the backup log include exceptions only.

/tape:{n}

Specifies the tape drive to which the files should be backed up. N is a number from 0 to 9 that corresponds to the tape drive number listed in the Registry.

The following three examples show how to implement this command.

The first example shows you how to perform the following activities:

Do a Normal-type backup of drives C, D, and E

Restrict access to the owner or administrator

Apply the description "Full Backup of drives C, D, and E" to all three backup sets

Perform a verification pass upon completion of the backup

Record the results of the session in the log file named C:\LOG\LOG.TXT

To do this, type the following at the command prompt:

NTBackup Backup C: D: E: /t Normal /v /r /d "Full Backup of drives C, D, and E" /l "C:\LOG\LOG.TXT"

The second example shows you how to perform the following activities:

Do a Copy-type backup of the files in C:\EXCEL\PERSONAL

Not restrict access

Use the description "Copy of Personal Excel Directory"

Perform a verification pass upon completion of the backup

Record the results of the session in the log file named C:\LOG.TXT

Write the backup to tape drive number 1, which is the second tape drive

To do this, type the following at the command prompt:

NTBackup Backup C:\EXCEL\PERSONAL /t Copy /v /d "Copy of Personal Excel Directory" /l "C:\LOG.TXT" /tape:1

The third example shows you how to perform the following activities:

Do an Incremental-type backup of drives C, D, E, and the Registry

Have the tape drive compress the data on the tape media

Apply the description "Compressed Incremental Backup of drives C, D, and E including Registry"

Perform a verification pass upon completion of the backup

Record the results of the session in the log file named C:\WEEKLY.LOG

To do this, type the following at the command prompt:

NTBackup Backup C: D: E: /t Incremental /b /hc:on /v /d 	"Compressed Incremental Backup of drives C, D, and E 	including Registry" /l "C:\WEEKLY.LOG"


Restoring Tape Files to Disk
Backup	12 of 18

Restoring Tape Files to Disk

Backed-up information is useless if it cannot be restored. Windows NT provides a Restore command to give access to tapes, backup sets, and files for restoring as they are needed.

Restoration policies for everyday maintenance, as well as disaster recovery, are just as important as backup policies. Practice ahead of time on spare drives, though, so you do not risk real data. You should also periodically do trial restorations to check whether or not files have been backed up properly. These verification restores can check for possible hardware problems that do not show up with the software or whose symptoms are not easily recognized. For that reason, you should also keep a backup status log and check it regularly for error messages.

When restoring a large number of files, you will need to consider what backup type you used. If you did differential or incremental backups, you will first need to restore the selected files from the most recent normal backup, then files from all subsequent incremental backups of those files, and finally the most recent differential backup performed after the last incremental backup.

For tape-management purposes, each tape has the following information associated with it:

A user-specified tape name

An original tape-creation date plus the date and time that each backup set was created

The computer name and the username of the user who created the tape

A tape-sequence number in the case of tape sets


Choosing What You Want to Restore
Backup	13 of 18

Restoring Tape Files to Disk

Choosing What You Want to Restore

You can choose to restore either the current tape, one or more backup sets, or individual files. Open the Tapes window and make your selections the same way you would in File Manager and for backing up.

All catalog information is maintained on the corresponding tape for that backup set. Family sets have the information on the last tape.

The tape name appears in the left panel of the Tapes window to the right of each tape icon. The following information is shown in the right panel of the Tapes window:

Drive backed up

Backup set number

Tape number, and what number it is in a set of tapes

Backup type

Date and time of backup

Backup description

When you insert a tape to be restored, only information on the first backup set appears in the right panel. If you want to restore the entire tape, you need to load the tape's catalog to display a list of any other backup sets. If you want to know which files are in each backup set, you need to load the individual catalogs for each backup set.

To load a catalog of the backup sets on a tape

1.	In the Tapes window, select the tape whose catalog you want to load.

2.	Double-click that tape's icon. Or, from the Operations menu, choose Catalog. Or choose the Catalog button on the toolbar.

The Catalog Status dialog box appears and provides the option of stopping the cataloging process.

After searching the tape, a complete list of backup sets appears in the Tapes window, with question marks displayed in each of their icons to show that their individual catalogs have not been loaded.

To load a catalog for an individual backup set

1.	In the Tapes window, select the backup set whose catalog you want to load.

2.	Double-click that backup set's icon.

The Catalog Status dialog box appears and provides the option of stopping the cataloging process.

After searching the tape, a complete list of the directories and files in the backup set appears in a Tape File Selection window. The list in the Tapes window now appears with a plus sign in the backup set's icon to show that it has been cataloged. Corrupt files (that is, files that contain errors) and their corresponding directories are marked by an icon with a red X.

The procedures for selecting files to restore are similar to those for selecting files to back up. Notice, however, that when you load a tape, only the first backup set on the tape is displayed until you load the tape's catalog. Therefore, when you select an entire tape, you are really only selecting those sets that are already displayed, and so you must load the tape's catalog first to get the complete list of backup sets.

To select all the files on a tape

1.	Load the tape's catalog of backup sets.

2.	In the Tapes window, select the check box for the appropriate tape. Or in the Tapes window, select the tape and then, from the Select menu, choose the Check command. Or choose the Check button on the toolbar.

To select individual backup sets on a tape

1.	Load the tape's catalog of backup sets.

The results appear in the right panel of the Tapes window.

2.	To select a few backup sets, select the check box for each backup set.

To select several backup sets, select the first backup set and then do one of the following:

Press and hold down the shift key and then select the last contiguous backup set.

Drag the mouse to the last contiguous backup set.

Press and hold down the CTRL key and then select each non-contiguous backup set.

3.	Choose the Check command from the Select menu, or the Check button on the toolbar, to select each backup set's check box.

Choose the Uncheck command from the Select menu, or the Uncheck button on the toolbar, to undo all your selections.

Notice that when only some backup sets are selected, the corresponding tape check box has a gray background.

To select individual files in a backup set on a tape

1.	In the Tapes window, load the catalog of the backup set from which you want to restore certain files.

The results appear in a Tape File Selection window.

2.	To select a few files, select the check box for each filename.

To select several files, select the first filename and then do one of the following:

Press and hold down the shift key and then select the last contiguous filename.

Drag the mouse to the last contiguous filename.

Press and hold down the CTRL key and then select each non-contiguous filename.

3.	Choose the Check command from the Select menu, or the Check button on the toolbar, to select each file's check box.

Choose the Uncheck command from the Select menu, or the Uncheck button on the toolbar, to undo all your selections.

Notice that when only some files are selected, the corresponding disk-drive and directory check boxes have a gray background.


Building Partial Tape and Backup Set Catalogs
Backup	14 of 18

Restoring Tape Files to Disk

Building Partial Tape and Backup Set Catalogs

If a backup operation spans several tapes and you choose to restore a single backup set, you are prompted to insert the last tape to load the tape catalog information and get a complete list of all the backup sets and their locations. However, if the last tape in such a family set is missing or damaged, you can force Backup to deal with the data on each remaining tape as if it were a single unit rather than a member of a family set. This can be done by starting Backup from the command prompt with the /missingtape switch. Notice, however, that this process will take additional time.

Sometimes, you will want to restore from a tape with files that were not backed up with the Windows NT Backup program. If the tape has the Microsoft tape format (MTF), Windows NT Backup can read it. However, the tape may or may not have the full on-tape catalog (OTC) information that Windows NT Backup produces. Also, some older tape backup devices may not support creating full on-tape catalogs with the Windows NT Backup program.

To build a catalog from a tape without a full on-tape catalog

1.	Insert the MTF-compatible tape in the tape backup device.

2.	Load whatever on-tape catalog information is available.

The Catalog Status dialog box appears and provides the option of stopping the cataloging process.

If there is no catalog information, the entire tape is scanned to determine all the backup sets, and then you must double-click each backup set's icon to determine its contents.

If there is partial information on the backup sets, that information is accessed quickly, and then you must double-click each backup set's icon to determine its contents.


Setting the Restore Options
Backup	15 of 18

Restoring Tape Files to Disk

Setting the Restore Options

After selecting one or more tapes, backup sets, or files to restore, choose the Restore command from the Operations menu to open the Restore Information dialog box. The first section provides information about the backup set(s) on the loaded tape and tells you how many other tapes are in that family set. For each backup set, you must specify the drive to which you want the information restored.

You can also specify an alternate directory path to place a backup set's files into a different directory instead of into the original one on the default drive. This might be done to compare them to the files on the disk. You can use the Browse button at the end of the Alternate Path box to help you find the correct path name.

If you want to verify the contents of the files restored onto disk against the files on tape and then log any exceptions, select the Verify After Restore check box. When you select the Restore File Permissions check box, the system restores the permissions information along with the file. Otherwise, the files inherit the permissions information of the directory into which they are restored. When you want to restore the Registry files, select the Restore Local Registry check box. However, you will need to restart the computer for the restored information to take effect.

When you restore files that were backed up from an NTFS volume to an NTFS volume, you can restore the original file-access permissions as well. However, you should do so only if you are restoring files to computers in the same domain as that of the original owner's account. For example, you could restore them to other computers in the REDMOND domain if the files allowed access to REDMOND\PEGET, but not if they only allowed access to PEGET1\PEGET. Do not restore file permissions if you are using the backup tape to transfer files to another computer outside that domain or if you are restoring files to a computer that has not been completely restored following the corruption of the operating system.


Setting the Log Options
Backup	16 of 18

Restoring Tape Files to Disk

Setting the Log Options

In the bottom section of the Restore Information dialog box, you can choose not to log information or you can choose to create a log that contains either a summary of major operations or full details on all operations. If you choose to create a log, you can type the name of the text file into which the information on completed tape operations will be logged. You can also use the Browse button at the end of the Log File box to help you locate the correct filename for the log.

The following are descriptions of the three logging options.

Choose	To
Full Detail	Log all operations information including the names of all the files and directories that are restored.
Summary Only	Log only the major operations such as loading a tape, starting the restore process, and failing to create a file.
Don't Log	Log no information.
When you are done, choose the OK button to display the Restore Status dialog box and start the restore process.


Checking the Restore Status
Backup	17 of 18

Restoring Tape Files to Disk

Checking the Restore Status

The Restore Status dialog box contains an active status area; the names of the drive, directory, and files that are being restored; and a Summary section showing a log of major operations. You can also choose to stop the restore operation. If a file being restored already exists on disk and is newer than the one on the tape, the Confirm File Replace dialog box will prompt you to confirm whether or not to restore the file from the tape. If the restore operation reaches the end of a tape before finishing the restoration of a backup set or file, the Insert New Tape dialog box will prompt you to insert a new tape.

To display the Restore Status dialog box and start restoring

In the Restore Information dialog box, choose the OK button.

The status area at the top of the box shows the same types of information as in the Backup Status dialog box.

If you need to stop a restore job before it is completed, choose the Abort button. A message asks whether to continue or stop now. The Summary section then gives the final operation details and shows whether or not the operation completed successfully.


Maintaining Tapes
Backup	18 of 18

Maintaining Tapes

The Windows NT Backup program provides three commands under the Operations menu to help you maintain your backup tapes. The Erase Tape command causes the whole tape to be erased. A warning message in the Erase Tape dialog box advises you that all the information on the tape will be destroyed. It also gives you the name of the tape and when it was created.

You can do either a Quick Erase, during which the tape header is simply rewritten, or a Secure Erase, during which the entire tape is overwritten. The secure-erase method may take several hours to complete, depending on the drive technology and tape length. You should categorize the information on the backup tapes by which method of erasing to use, and then create and maintain a list for easy reference.

The Retension Tape command eliminates loose spots on the tape by fast forwarding to the end of the tape and then rewinding. This procedure winds the tape evenly so it will run more smoothly past the tape drive heads.

To reduce tape slippage, manufacturers of tape backup drives recommend that you retension .25-inch tape once every 20 uses. Note that 4 mm and 8 mm tapes do not require retensioning, and so the command is unavailable. How much time it takes to forward and rewind the media depends on the device technology. See the manufacturer's documentation for specific retensioning requirements.

The Format Tape command formats an unformatted mini-cartridge tape. This type of tape is treated like a floppy disk and must be formatted before it can be used. If you do not have a mini-cartridge drive installed and activated, this command is unavailable.


Event Viewer
Chapter 17	1 of 18

Event Viewer

In Windows NT, an event is any significant occurrence in the system or in an application that requires users to be notified. For some critical events such as a full server or an interrupted power supply, you may see a message on screen. For many other events that do not require immediate attention, Windows NT adds information to an event log file to provide information without disturbing your usual work. This event logging service starts automatically each time you start Windows NT.

You can use Event Viewer to view and manage event logs for your system. You can also save event logs to view later or to generate reports about your system. This chapter describes how to use Event Viewer, with the following topics:

An overview of Event Viewer

Viewing event logs

Setting options for logging events

Viewing specific logged events

Using archived log files


Overview
Event Viewer	2 of 18

Overview

Event Viewer is the tool you can use to monitor various kinds of events in your system, which are recorded in event logs. Windows NT records events in three kinds of logs:

The system log records events logged by the Windows NT system components. For example, the failure of a driver or other system component to load during startup is recorded in the system log.

The application log records events logged by applications. For example, a database program might record a file error in the application log.

The security log records security events. This helps track changes to the security system and identify any possible breaches to security. For example, attempts to log on to the system may be recorded in the security log, depending on the Audit settings in User Manager.

To control the types of security events that are audited, choose the Audit command from the Policies menu in User Manager. For more information, see "Managing the Audit Policy" in Chapter 13, "User Manager for Domains."

To control the auditing of file and directory access, choose the Auditing command from the Security menu in File Manager. For more information, see "Auditing Files and Directories" in Chapter 4, "File Manager."

After you select a log for display in Event Viewer, you can view, sort, filter, and search for details about events. You can also archive logs in various file formats.

Event Viewer displays events from a single log. Each line in the log shows information about one event, including date, time, source, event type, category, Event ID, user account, and computer name.

The terms in the following table describe items in the Event Viewer window.

Item	Meaning

Source	The software that logged the event, which can be either an application name, such as "SQL Server," or a component of the system or of a large application, such as a driver name. For example, "Elnkii" indicates the EtherLink II driver.

Category	A classification of the event by the event source. For example, the security categories include Logon and Logoff, Policy Change, Privilege Use, System Event, Object Access, Detailed Tracking, and Account Management.

Event	A unique number for each source to identify the event. The Event ID can also be used by product support representatives to track what event occurred in the system.

User	The user name for the user who was logged on and working when the event occurred. "N/A" indicates that the entry did not specify a user.

Computer	The computer name for the computer where the event occurred.

The icon on the left side of the Event Viewer screen describes the classification of the event by Windows NT such as Error, Warning, Information, Success Audit, and Failure Audit.

Icon	Event type	Meaning
	Error	Significant problems, such as a loss of data or loss of functions. For example, an Error event might be logged if a service was not loaded during Windows NT startup.
	Warning	Events that are not necessarily significant but that indicate possible future problems. For example, a Warning event might be logged when disk space is low.
	Information	Infrequent significant events that describe successful operations of major server services. For example, when a database program loads successfully, it may log an Information event.
	Success Audit	Audited security access attempts that were successful. For example, a user's successful attempt to log on to the system might be logged as a Success Audit event.
	Failure Audit	Audited security access attempts that failed. For example, if a user tried to access a network drive and failed, the attempt might be logged as a Failure Audit event.
When Event Viewer displays an error (system) log for a LAN Manager 2.x server, only the date, time, source, and event ID are shown. For an audit (security) log, only the date, time, category, user, and computer are shown.


Starting and Quitting Event Viewer
Event Viewer	3 of 18

Overview

Starting and Quitting Event Viewer

You start and quit Event Viewer in the same way as any application in Program Manager.

To start Event Viewer

In the Administrative Tools group in Program Manager, choose the Event Viewer icon.

To quit Event Viewer

From the Log menu, choose Exit.


Viewing Event Logs
Event Viewer	4 of 18

Viewing Event Logs

You determine the log and computer selected for viewing in Event Viewer, and you can refresh the view, as described in the sections that follow.


Selecting a Log for Event Viewing
Event Viewer	5 of 18

Viewing Event Logs

Selecting a Log for Event Viewing

By default, the system log on the local computer is displayed the first time you start Event Viewer. You can also view the security and application logs.

If you select a LAN Manager 2.x server for viewing, Event Viewer can display its error (system) log and its audit (security) log. If you were viewing another computer's application log before selecting a LAN Manager 2.x server, the system log is displayed.

To select another log for viewing

From the Log menu, choose System, Security, or Application.

Event Viewer shows the events recorded in that log. The corresponding command name is checked on the Log menu, and the log name appears on the title bar.

To view the content of a security log, you must be logged on as a member of the Administrators group.


Selecting a Computer for Event Viewing
Event Viewer	6 of 18

Viewing Event Logs

Selecting a Computer for Event Viewing

When you first start Event Viewer, the events for the local computer are displayed.

If you want to view events for another computer, choose Select Computer from the Log menu. If the computer you select is across a link with slow transmission rates, select the Low Speed Connection box. If this box is selected, Windows NT does not list all the computers in the default domain, thereby minimizing network traffic across the link. (If slow transmission rates are commonplace, choose Low Speed Connection from the Event Viewer Options menu.)

The computer you select for viewing can be a Windows NT Workstation computer, a server or domain controller running Windows NT Server, or a LAN Manager 2.x server.

To select another computer in Event Viewer

1.	From the Log menu, choose Select Computer.

2.	In the Computer box, type the computer name of the computer to view. Or select a computer name in the Select Computer box.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Refreshing the View
Event Viewer	7 of 18

Viewing Event Logs

Refreshing the View

When you first open a log, Event Viewer displays the current information for that log. Unless you choose the Refresh command to refresh the view, this information is not updated. That is, any new events that occur while viewing the log are not added to the list, and overwritten entries are not removed from the list. The event listing is updated automatically only when you select a different log for viewing or when you start Event Viewer again.

To update the events currently shown in Event Viewer

From the View menu, choose Refresh. Or press F5.

If you are viewing an archived log, the Refresh command is not available because archived files are never updated.


Changing the Font in Event Viewer
Event Viewer	8 of 18

Viewing Event Logs

Changing the Font in Event Viewer

You can change the font that Event Viewer uses to display the list of events in each log. Changing this font affects only the display of the list of events in the main Event Viewer window.

To change the font

1.	From the Options menu, choose Font.

2.	In the Font box, select the font you want to use.

When you select a font, a style, or a size, the text in the Sample box changes to reflect your choice.

3.	In the Font Style box, select a style option (for example, bold or italic).

4.	In the Size box, select a point size:  the larger the point size, the larger the character appears on your screen.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Setting Options for Logging Events
Event Viewer	9 of 18

Setting Options for Logging Events

You can use the Log Settings command from the Log menu to define parameters for logging events in each kind of log, including the maximum size for the log and whether the events are overwritten or stored for a certain period of time.

For the security log, the administrator can also set auditing policies in User Manager that cause the system to halt when the security log is full.

To set event logging options

1.	From the Log menu, choose Log Settings.

2.	In the Change Settings For box, select the kind of log for which you want to specify settings.

3.	In the Maximum Log Size box, specify the size of the log in kilobytes.

For example, type 640 for a maximum log size of 640 kilobytes. The default setting is 512. The size must be an increment of 64K.

4.	Select an Event Log Wrapping option to define how the events are retained in the log selected in the Change Settings For box. The options include the following.

Use		To
Overwrite Events As Needed		Have new events continue to be written when the log is full. Each new event will replace the oldest event in the log.
Overwrite Events Older Than [ ] days		Retain the log for the number of days you specify before overwriting events. The default setting for this option is seven days. This is the best choice if you want to archive log files weekly.
Do Not Overwrite Events		Clear the log manually rather than automatically. Select this option only if you cannot afford to miss an event - for example, for the security log at a site where security is extremely important.
5.	If you want to restore all default settings, choose the Default button.

6.	Choose the OK button.

Note

When a log is full (no more events can be logged), you can free the log by clearing it. Reducing the amount of time you keep an event also frees the log if it allows the next record to be overwritten.

If you specify that events cannot be overwritten in a log, you must clear the log periodically - either when the log reaches a certain size or when a message notifies you that the log is full. Archived logs cannot be cleared.

To clear a log

1.	Switch to the log whose events you want to clear.

2.	From the Log menu, choose Clear All Events.

A message asks if you want to archive the currently logged events. If you answer Yes, the Save As dialog box appears. For more information about this dialog box, see "Archiving a Log," later in this chapter.

After you answer Yes or No, Event Viewer empties the current log. All new events are recorded in the log.


Viewing Specific Logged Events
Event Viewer	10 of 18

Viewing Specific Logged Events

After you select a log to view in Event Viewer, you can:

Sort events from old to new or from new to old.

Filter events so that only events with specific characteristics are displayed.

Search for events based on specific characteristics or event descriptions.

View descriptions and additional details that the event source might log.

These subjects are covered in detail in the following sections.


Sorting Events
Event Viewer	11 of 18

Viewing Specific Logged Events

Sorting Events

The events displayed in Event Viewer are listed in sequence by date and time of occurrence. You can specify the order as newest events first or oldest first. The default listing order is from newest to oldest.

When a log is archived, the sort order affects the order in which event records are archived in a text format or comma-delimited text format file, but sort order does not affect the order of event records in a log archived in log file format. For more information, see "Using Archived Log Files," later in this chapter. If the Save Settings On Exit command from the Options menu is checked when you quit, the current sort order is used the next time you start Event Viewer.

To specify sort order

From the View menu, choose Newest First or Oldest First.

The command currently in effect is checked on the menu.


Filtering Events
Event Viewer	12 of 18

Viewing Specific Logged Events

Filtering Events

When you first start Event Viewer, all events recorded in the selected log are displayed automatically. You can choose Filter Events from the View menu if you want to view only events with specified characteristics. Filtering has no effect on the event log whatsoever; all events are logged all the time, whether the filter is active or not. The filter affects only what is displayed, and you can see all the logged events any time you want by turning off the event filter.

Your choices for filtering are used throughout the current Event Viewer session, unless you decide to change them. If Save Settings On Exit from the Options menu is checked when you quit Event Viewer, your choices for filtering remain in effect the next time you start Event Viewer. When filtering is on, a check mark appears by the Filter command on the View menu and "(Filtered)" appears on the title bar.

To filter events

1.	From the View menu, choose Filter Events.

2.	In the Filter dialog box, specify the characteristics that qualify an event for display in Event Viewer.

The following table describes the options in the Filter dialog box. Entries in the Filter dialog box are not case sensitive.

3.	Choose the OK button to view the filtered events.

To return to the default criteria

In the Filter dialog box, choose the Clear button.

To turn off filtering of events

From the View menu, choose All Events.

The following table describes the options available in the Filter dialog box.

Use	To filter for

View From	Events after a specific date and time. By default, this is the date of the first event in the log file.

View Through	Events up to and including a specific date and time. By default, this is the date of the last event in the log file.

Information¹	Infrequent significant events that describe successful operationsof major server services. For example, when a database program loads successfully, it may log an Information event.

Warning¹	Events that are not necessarily significant but that indicate possible future problems. For example, a Warning event might be logged when disk space is low.

Error¹	Significant problems, such as a loss of data or loss of functions. For example, an Error event might be logged if a service was not loaded during Windows NT startup.

Success Audit¹	Audited security access attempts that were successful. For example, a user's successful attempt to log on to the system might be logged as a Success Audit event.

Failure Audit¹	Audited security access attempts that failed. For example, if a user tried to access a network drive and failed, the attempt might be logged as a Failure Audit event.

Source²	A source for logging events, such as an application, a system component, or a driver.

Category³	A classification of events defined by the source. For example, the security event categories are Logon and Logoff, Policy Change, Privilege Use, System Event, Object Access, Detailed Tracking, and Account Management.

User³	A specific user that matches an actual user name. This field is not case sensitive.

Computer³	A specific computer that matches an actual computer name. This field is not case sensitive.

Event ID²	A specific number that corresponds to an actual event.

¹ This option is not available for LAN Manager 2.x servers.

² This option is not available for audit logs on LAN Manager 2.x servers.

³ This option is not available for error logs on LAN Manager 2.x servers.


Searching for Events
Event Viewer	13 of 18

Viewing Specific Logged Events

Searching for Events

Searching for events can be useful when you are viewing large logs. You can search for each event that matches the type, source, or category that you want by choosing Find from the View menu. For example, you can search for all Warning events related to a specific application. Or search for all Error events from all sources.

Your choices in the Find dialog box are in effect throughout the current session. The default settings are restored the next time you start Event Viewer, if Save Settings On Exit is selected in the Event Viewer Options menu.

To search for specific kinds of events in a log

1.	From the View menu, choose Find.

2.	In the Find dialog box, select any of the Types of events you want to find.

3.	Specify any other Source, Category, Event ID, Computer, and User events you want to find, as described in "Filtering Events," earlier in this chapter.

4.	In the Description box, type text that matches any portion of an event record description.

Because you can search for any portion of an event record description, the complete description is not required.

5.	To specify the direction of the search, select the Up or Down option button.

The search direction is independent of the sort order checked on the View menu.

6.	Choose Find Next to begin the search.

To find the next matching event

Press F3 to continue searching without displaying the Find dialog box again.

To restore the default search criteria

In the Find dialog box, choose the Clear button.


Viewing Details About Events
Event Viewer	14 of 18

Viewing Specific Logged Events

Viewing Details About Events

For many events, you can view more information than is displayed in Event Viewer by choosing Detail from the View menu.

The Event Detail dialog box shows a text description of the selected event and any available binary data for the selected event. This information is generated by the application that was the source of the event record. Because the data appears in hexadecimal format, its meaning can only be interpreted by a support technician familiar with the source application. Not all events generate such data.

The event data is saved if you archive a log in log file format, but is discarded if you archive it in text or comma-delimited text format. The event description is saved in all archived logs.

To view more details about an event

1.	In Event Viewer, double-click the event you want to view details about. Or select an event in the list, and then choose Detail from the View menu.

2.	In the Description or Data box, use the scroll box to browse the information about the event.

3.	To view details about other events in sort-order sequence, choose the Next or Previous button.

4.	When you finish viewing details, choose the Close button to return to Event Viewer.


Using Archived Log Files
Event Viewer	15 of 18

Using Archived Log Files

You can archive an event log in log file format so that you can later reopen it in Event Viewer. Or the log can be saved in text format or comma-delimited text format so that you can use the archived information in other applications.

These subjects are covered in more detail in the sections that follow:

Saving a log as an archived file

Viewing a log archived in log file format

Using log files saved in text format or comma-delimited text format

For example, you might choose to archive security logs so that you can monitor security events over a period of time. Or you might archive application logs so that you can track the Warning and Error events that occur for specific applications.

When you archive a log file, the entire log is saved, regardless of any filtering options you specified in Event Viewer. If you changed the sort order in Event Viewer, the event records are saved exactly as displayed if you archive the log in a text or comma-delimited text file.

An archived log contains all events that were current when the file was saved, so the archived file might contain new events or might not contain events overwritten after you first displayed the log in Event Viewer.


Archiving a Log
Event Viewer	16 of 18

Using Archived Log Files

Archiving a Log

When you archive an event log, you can save the log in one of three file formats:

Log file format, which you should choose if you want to view the archived log again in Event Viewer.

Text file format, for using the information in an application such as a word processor.

Comma-delimited text file format, for using the information in an application such as a spreadsheet or a flat-file database.

To archive an event log

1.	From the Log menu, choose Save As.

2.	In the File Name box, type a filename for the archived log file.

Event Viewer adds the .EVT filename extension for log files, or the .TXT extension for either kind of text format file.

3.	In the Save File As Type box, select a file format option for saving the log information, and then choose the OK button.

Archiving a log has no effect on the current contents of the active log. To clear the original log, you must choose Clear All Events from the Log menu. To remove an archived log file, delete the file in the same way that you delete other kinds of files.


Viewing a Log Archived in Log File Format
Event Viewer	17 of 18

Using Archived Log Files

Viewing a Log Archived in Log File Format

You can view an archived file in Event Viewer only if the log was saved in log file format. You cannot choose the Refresh or Clear All Events commands to update the display or to clear an archived log. To remove an archived log file, you must delete the file in File Manager.

To display an archived log in Event Viewer

1.	From the Log menu, choose Open.

2.	In the File Name list, select the filename of the log you want to view, and then choose the OK button.

3.	In the Open File Type dialog box, select the kind of log you saved originally  - System, Security, or Application. Then choose the OK button.

Note

If you do not specify the correct log type, the Description displayed for the archived log in the Event Detail dialog box will not be correct.


Using Logs Archived in a Text Format
Event Viewer	18 of 18

Using Archived Log Files

Using Logs Archived in a Text Format

If you save an event log in text or comma-delimited text format, you can open that file in other applications. Those other applications can be used to filter, sort, and format the archived event records. Or you might combine event records from two or more archived text files to create reports.

If an archived log is saved in text or comma-delimited text format, the binary data for each event record is discarded. The sequence of data in an event record saved in either text format is the following:

1. Date¹	4. Type	7. User
2. Time	5. Category	8. Computer
3. Source	6. Event	9. Description
¹  Depends on the sort order specified in the View menu.

For example, you might copy lines of text from an archived log to include as supporting information in an electronic mail message. As another example, you might archive a security log in comma-delimited format so you can place the information in a spreadsheet and produce a chart depicting the archived information.


Disk Administrator
Chapter 18	1 of 13

Disk Administrator

Disk Administrator is a graphical tool for managing disk resources. This tool encompasses and extends the functionality of character-based disk management tools, such as MS-DOS Fdisk and the Microsoft LAN Manager Fault Tolerance character applications, into one graphical interface.

This chapter provides information on using Disk Administrator to set up and organize your hard disks to function more efficiently and safely. The following main topics are included:

Partitioning disks

Creating and deleting volume sets

Extending volumes and volume sets

Creating and deleting stripe sets

Creating and deleting stripe sets with parity

Establishing and breaking mirror sets

Recovering data


Overview
Disk Administrator	2 of 13

Overview

Partitioning the internal hard disk on a new computer is done during initial setup when you load the Windows NT operating software. Making changes to that disk or partitioning an additional new hard disk is done using the Disk Administrator program. Disk Administrator is located in the Administrative Tools group in Program Manager.

The following list provides an overview of what you can do with this graphical tool:

Create and delete partitions on a hard disk and logical drives within an extended partition.

Format and label volumes.

Read status information about disks such as the partition sizes and the amount of free space that is available for creating additional partitions.

Read status information about Windows NT volumes such as the drive-letter assignment, volume label, file system type, and size.

Make and change drive-letter assignments for hard disk volumes as well as CD-ROM devices.

Create and delete volume sets.

Extend volumes and volume sets.

Create and delete stripe sets with or without parity.

Regenerate a missing or failed member of a stripe set with parity.

Establish or break disk-mirror sets.


Starting and Quitting Disk Administrator
Disk Administrator	3 of 13

Overview

Starting and Quitting Disk Administrator

You can only open Disk Administrator if you are logged on as a member of the Administrators group. Double-click the Disk Administrator icon in the Administrative Tools group to display a scrollable graphical representation of all the physical disks connected to your workstation along with their partitions. (You can also type windisk or start windisk at the command prompt.)

A status bar at the bottom of the window provides basic information on partitions. A color-coded legend on top of the status bar shows what the different partition colors and patterns represent. Both context-sensitive and standard Help are provided for all Disk Administrator commands.

To quit Disk Administrator, you can choose either Exit from the Partition menu or Close from the Control menu. If you have requested any significant changes to your disk partitions, Disk Administrator displays a message to remind you about the irreversibility of certain changes, such as deleting a partition, and to ask whether or not you want to save those changes. Disk Administrator performs updates to the disks only after you agree to saving those changes and quit the program or if you choose the Commit Changes Now command from the Partition menu. If you decide not to save the changes, choose the No button and Disk Administrator will close without making the requested changes. If you decide not to quit and want to continue using Disk Administrator, choose the Cancel button.

If you make changes and commit to them upon quitting, Disk Administrator makes the requested changes and displays a message when the disks have been successfully updated. Sometimes after you choose the OK button, another message will advise you that changes have been made that require you to restart the computer. (This happens under some circumstances, such as if you needed to extend a volume set, lock a volume, or search for or restore disk configuration information.) When you choose the OK button, Disk Administrator initiates a complete system shutdown, closes all open applications, and restarts the computer for you.


Organizing Your Screen
Disk Administrator	4 of 13

Overview

Organizing Your Screen

From the Options menu, you can choose whether or not to display the status bar and legend, customize the colors and patterns used in the legend and disk displays, and change how the disk regions are displayed. See online Help for detailed procedures.

When you select an area of free space, notice that Disk Administrator makes a distinction in the status bar between free space on the disk and free space in an extended partition. You can also see the distinction graphically in the way Disk Administrator uses forward slanting lines to fill free space on the disk and backward slanting lines to fill free space in an extended partition.

You can change the colors and patterns that are used on the screen to distinguish between the following items: primary partition, logical drive, stripe set, mirror set, and volume set.

Since you may have several disks with a wide range of capacities, you can change the relative display size of partitions. Disk regions are shown as being proportionate to each other within a single disk bar. You can choose either to display the regions on each disk based on their relative size, size all the regions equally, or let Disk Administrator decide how to size the regions. You can do this differently for each disk or choose the Reset All button to let Disk Administrator decide how to display all the disks connected to your system.

Note

The total lengths of the bars used to represent disks are generally proportional to the size of the disk. However, the total length of a single disk bar is never less than 25 percent of the total length of the largest disk bar.


Managing Disks
Disk Administrator	5 of 13

Managing Disks

This section contains updated information for Windows NT version 3.51. Click here to see the new information.

Windows NT Server Disk Administrator provides a simple, graphical way for you to manage your disks by creating and deleting partitions, to enhance performance, and to take full advantage of the fault-tolerance options that are provided to protect your data.

If you use only the Windows NT operating system, you can create one partition that occupies your entire disk or as many as four partitions. If you want to use other operating systems on your hard disk (such as UNIX or MS-DOS) with file systems that are not recognized by Windows NT, you must create separate partitions for each non-Microsoft operating system. Notice, though, that MS-DOS and Windows NT can share the same partition when using the file allocation table (FAT) file system.

On an x86-based computer, the operating system starts from the active system partition on the first internal hard disk (that is, Disk 0). Computers using reduced instruction set computing (RISC) processors can have several system partitions that are configurable by the manufacturer's configuration program. Such partitions must be formatted for the FAT file system. Consult your hardware documentation for detailed information on setting up more than one system partition on a RISC-based computer.

When you partition a disk, you specify which portion of the disk a file system can use, and the system assigns it a drive letter. When you format a partition, Windows NT prepares an existing partition with a drive letter to use a specific file system. After you partition a disk, you may either commit the changes immediately or wait until you quit Disk Administrator to save them. You may then use the Format and Label commands under the Tools menu with each new partition or go to the Windows NT command prompt to format and label them. For more information on formatting partitions with Disk Administrator, see "Formatting and Labeling Partitions," later in this chapter, or see the online Command Reference for information on using the format and label commands.


Partitioning Disks
Disk Administrator	6 of 13

Managing Disks

Partitioning Disks

Disk management under Windows NT is very flexible. You can create up to four partitions in the free space on a physical hard disk, create multiple logical drives in the free space of an extended partition, and delete partitions. You can also add hard disks to your system configuration, recover disk configuration information, and assign specific drive letters to each primary partition or logical drive.

Setting Up a New Hard Disk

You can create any of the following in the free space on a hard disk:

A single primary partition

Additional partitions up to the maximum of four

An extended partition with a number of logical drives that is limited only by the size of the partition

Other types of Windows NT volumes, such as volume sets and stripe sets

Free space is an unused and unformatted portion of a hard disk that can be partitioned or subpartitioned. Free space within an extended partition is available for the creation of logical drives. Free space that is not within an extended partition is available for the creation of a partition, with a maximum of four partitions allowed.

Note

Windows NT cannot recognize free space that was created on a FAT partition using the UNDELETE SENTRY feature in MS-DOS version 6.2. With the SENTRY method, MS-DOS reserves part of the hard disk to store deleted files, then compensates during MS-DOS queries about free space. Because Windows NT does not understand SENTRY, it reports the space on the FAT partition as used.

A partition is a portion of a physical disk that functions as though it were a physically separate unit. A volume is a partition or collection of partitions that have been formatted for use by a file system. A Windows NT volume can be assigned a drive letter and used to organize directories and files.

A partition is usually referred to as either a primary or an extended partition. A primary partition is a portion of a physical disk that can be marked for use by an operating system. There can be up to four primary partitions (or up to three, if there is an extended partition) per physical disk. A primary partition cannot be subpartitioned.

An extended partition is created from free space on a hard disk and can be subpartitioned into zero or more logical drives. The free space in an extended partition can also be used to create volume sets or other kinds of volumes for fault tolerance purposes. Only one of the four partitions allowed per physical disk can be an extended partition, and no primary partition needs to be present to create an extended partition. Free space in an extended partition is described as such in the status bar.

The following illustration shows examples of different disk-partitioning schemes on x86- and RISC-based computers and where certain files might be located.

x86 or RISC-based computers

x86-based computers

x86-based and RISC-based computers

Creating Primary Partitions

When creating primary partitions, the system assigns space to a partition starting from the beginning of the space available. Therefore, in the beginning, there are no gaps between partitions. Gaps only happen when you delete a partition later on. For example, if you delete the second of three partitions and create a new smaller-sized second partition, that will leave a gap of free space between the second and third partitions.

To create a primary partition

1.	Select an area of free space on a disk.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Create.

Disk Administrator displays what the minimum and maximum sizes for the primary partition can be.

3.	In the Create Primary Partition dialog box, type the size of the primary partition that you want to create.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Creating an Extended Partition

One of the four partitions that you can create under Windows NT, if disk space allows, is an extended partition. You can use the free space in the extended partition to create multiple logical drives or use all or part of it when creating volume sets or other kinds of volumes for fault-tolerance purposes.

To create an extended partition

1.	Select an area of free space on a disk.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Create Extended.

Disk Administrator displays what the minimum and maximum sizes for the extended partition can be.

3.	In the Create Extended Partition dialog box, type the size of the extended partition that you want to create.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To create logical drives in an extended partition

1.	Select an area of free space in an extended partition.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Create.

Disk Administrator displays what the minimum and maximum sizes for the logical drive can be.

3.	In the Create Logical Drive dialog box, type the size of the logical drive that you want to create.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Formatting and Labeling Partitions

Before you can store files and directories on the partitions or partition sets that you have created, you must commit the changes to disk and format each partition or partition set individually for use with the file system with which you want to work. You can also assign descriptive volume labels at this time.

To format a partition and label the volume

1.	Select the newly created partition or partition set.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Commit Changes Now.

3.	From the Tools menu, choose Format.

4.	In the Format dialog box, select the file system that you want and type a name in the Label box.

5.	If you do not want Windows NT to scan for bad sectors in the partition during the formatting process, choose the Quick Format option. This option is not available for formatting mirror sets and stripe sets with parity.

6.	Choose the OK button to initiate the format request.

A message asks you to confirm this request.

If you choose Yes, a box appears while the disk is being formatted to show you how quickly the process completes. The Formatting Disk box also provides you with the option of canceling the process. However, be aware that choosing Cancel will not necessarily return a volume to its previous state.

To change or delete a volume label

1.	Select the formatted volume.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Label.

3.	In the Label dialog box, type the new name for the volume label.

4.	Choose the OK button to commit the change.

If you want to change the file system on an existing HPFS or FAT partition to the NTFS format, you can use the CONVERT.EXE utility from the command prompt.

If you want to change the file system on an existing NTFS partition, you must first back up all the information, reformat the partition, and then restore the files. However, if Windows NT is installed on the NTFS partition, you cannot reformat the partition from the command prompt nor delete it from within Disk Administrator. Instead, you must use the Setup program.

To reformat an NTFS partition containing Windows NT

1.	Back up the information on the partition.

2.	Start the Windows NT installation procedure.

3.	Choose Express or Custom Installation.

4.	When Windows NT Setup asks you to select the partition on which you would like to install, select the NTFS partition and type D to delete the partition.

5.	Either continue from here using the Setup program to recreate and format the partition, or quit the Setup program and use the MS-DOS fdisk and format commands to complete the process.

Marking Partitions as Active

The names commonly used for the partition(s) containing the startup and operating system files are the system and boot partitions, respectively. Mirroring is the only fault-tolerance method that can be applied to either of them.

The system partition for Windows NT is the volume that has the hardware-specific files needed to load Windows NT. On x86-based computers, it must be a primary partition that has been marked as active for startup purposes and must be located on the disk that the computer accesses when starting up the system. There can only be one active system partition at a time, which is denoted on the screen by an asterisk. If you want to use another operating system, you must first mark its system partition as active before restarting the computer.

Partitions on a RISC-based computer are not marked active. Instead, they are configured by a hardware configuration program supplied by the manufacturer. On RISC-based computers, the system partition must be formatted for the FAT file system. On either type of computer, the system partition can never be part of a stripe set or volume set.

The boot partition for Windows NT is the volume, formatted for either an NTFS, FAT, or HPFS file system, that has the Windows NT operating system and its support files. The boot partition can be (but does not have to be) the same as the system partition. It also cannot be part of a stripe set or volume set.

To mark a partition as active on an x86-based computer

1.	Select the primary partition that contains the startup files for the operating system that you want to activate.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Mark Active.

A message advises you that the partition has been marked active and that the operating system on that partition will be started after you restart your computer.

3.	In the Disk Administrator message box, choose the OK button.

An asterisk appears in the color bar of the active partition.

Securing System Partitions

Since the system partition on a RISC-based computer must be formatted for the FAT file system, there is no way to secure information in individual directories and files on that partition. Therefore, the only way to secure the system partition is to allow access only to members of the Administrators group.

To secure the system partition on a RISC-based computer

1.	From the Partition menu, choose Secure System Partition.

A message asks you to confirm this request. When the command is in effect, a check mark appears next to the command in the Partition menu.

2.	To activate security on the system partition, Disk Administrator initiates a restart of your computer.

To remove security from the system partition on a RISC-based computer

1.	From the Partition menu, choose Secure System Partition.

The check mark disappears, but security on the system partition will not actually be removed until your computer is restarted.

2.	Disk Administrator initiates a restart of your computer.

Assigning Drive Letters

You can create more than 24 volumes with Windows NT, but you will not be able to assign more than 24 drive letters for accessing these volumes. Drive letters A and B are reserved for floppy disk drives. However, if you do not have a physical B drive, you can use the letter B for a network drive.

Windows NT allows the static assignment of drive letters. This means that a drive letter can be permanently assigned to a specific hard disk and partition/volume. When a new hard disk is added to an existing computer system, it will not affect statically assigned drive letters.

However, this static assignment of drive letters occurs only after Disk Administrator has been used on the workstation or server. Until then, drive letters are assigned by Windows NT in a manner similar to that used by MS-DOS, which adheres to the following rule: first the primary partitions on each hard disk get letters assigned starting with the letter C. Windows NT then continues assigning the next available drive letter to each of the logical drives in alphabetical order on each hard disk, and then to the secondary primary partitions on each hard disk. The active system partition is typically the C drive.

The following is an example with three hard disks:

The following is an example with only one hard disk:

Note

You should be careful when making drive-letter assignments because many MS-DOS and Windows programs make references to a specific drive letter. For example, the Path environment variable shows specific drive letters in conjunction with program names.

To assign a drive letter

1.	Select the partition or logical drive whose drive letter you want to assign.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Drive Letter.

3.	In the Assign Drive Letter dialog box, select the appropriate option button.

If you decide to assign a drive letter, you can either accept the next letter available or select a different one.

4.	Choose the OK button to commit the change.

Assigning CD-ROM Drive Letters

In addition to supporting the static assignment of drive letters on volumes and partitions, Disk Administrator also supports assigning a permanent drive letter to CD-ROM drives.

Choosing the CD-ROM Drive Letter command under the Tools menu provides you with a list of device names to which you can make drive-letter assignments per name. However, you do not have the option of removing a drive letter altogether. It is also possible that a letter cannot be assigned because the CD-ROM is in use by some application in the system. If this happens, a warning message appears. You must then close the application accessing the CD-ROM drive and choose the command again.

To assign a CD-ROM drive letter

1.	From the Tools menu, choose CD-ROM Drive Letter.

A list appears showing all the CD-ROM drives attached to the computer.

2.	Select the CD-ROM drive whose drive letter you want to assign.

3.	Accept the next letter available or select a different one.

4.	Choose the OK button to commit the change.

Deleting Partitions, Volumes, or Logical Drives

Before deleting partitions, volumes, or logical drives under Windows NT, you need to ensure that the information on them has been backed up onto another storage medium and verified, or is no longer needed.

Windows NT places certain restrictions on your freedom to delete. It will not let you delete the volume with the files needed to run Windows NT. Nor can you delete individual partitions that are part of a set without deleting the entire set. But, on a RISC-based computer, you can delete the system partition with the files needed to load Windows NT, so be very careful. Windows NT also requires that all the logical drives or other volumes in an extended partition be deleted before you can delete the extended partition.

However, remember that no changes actually happen until you agree to save them when you quit Disk Administrator or until you choose the Commit Changes Now command under the Partition menu.

To delete a partition, volume, or logical drive

1.	Select the partition, volume, or logical drive.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Delete.

A message advises you that all data will be lost and asks you to confirm your action.

3.	In the Confirm message, choose the Yes button.

The partition, volume, or logical drive and any data are deleted, and the space becomes free again.

Adding Hard Disks

The maximum number of hard disks that you can add to a computer depends on your hardware configuration, such as how many SCSI adapters you have attached. After adding additional hard disks to your computer, restart your computer and then start Disk Administrator. Before the Disk Administrator window opens, a message advises you that Disk Administrator has noticed a change and will update the system configuration after you choose the OK button. However, drive letters are not changed by the system when you add new hard disks if they have already been statically assigned.

Recovering Disk Configuration Information

In addition to the Emergency Repair disk that you created during Setup, Disk Administrator provides options for saving and restoring the following currently defined disk configuration information: assigned drive letters, volume sets, stripe sets, stripe sets with parity, and mirror sets. You should be sure to do this before upgrading the operating system to a newer version to ensure that you do not lose your current configuration information.

You can also search for disk configuration information among different installed versions of Windows NT and select a specific version to replace another. However, you should be careful to update this version's information every time you make a change to your disk's configuration. Make your changes first, quit Disk Administrator, restart your computer and Disk Administrator, and then save the configuration information and quit Disk Administrator.

To save disk configuration information

1.	From the Partition menu, choose Configuration.

2.	From the Configuration menu, choose Save.

A message describes what will be saved and where you should save it. It also warns you that changes made during this session will not be included.

3.	Insert a blank floppy disk, or a floppy disk with a previous version of the configuration information.

4.	Choose the OK button.

To restore disk configuration information

1.	From the Partition menu, choose Configuration.

2.	From the Configuration menu, choose Restore.

A message warns you that this operation will overwrite your current disk configuration information with what was previously saved on the floppy disk. Also, any changes made during this session will be lost.

3.	Insert the floppy disk containing the saved configuration information.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	Disk Administrator initiates a restart of your computer.

To search for disk configuration information

1.	From the Partition menu, choose Configuration.

2.	From the Configuration menu, choose Search.

A message warns you that this operation will overwrite your current disk configuration information with the information from a different installation of Windows NT. Also, any changes made during this session will be lost.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Disk Administrator scans your disk for other Windows NT installations and then displays a list of the installations.

4.	Select an installation.

5.	Choose the OK button.

6.	Disk Administrator initiates a restart of your computer.

Deleting Mirror Sets

If you are using Windows NT Workstation on your computer and inherit several hard disks that were formerly used on a computer running Windows NT Server, you may also inherit two volumes with duplicated, or mirrored, information. Establishing mirror sets and then breaking them, without deleting the information in the two volumes, is part of the fault-tolerance functionality provided with Windows NT Server.

However, Windows NT Workstation will not recognize such volumes unless you first saved the configuration information from the Windows NT Server computer to a floppy disk and then restored that information on the Windows NT Workstation computer. They will appear in the disk bar with the color bar for a primary partition or logical drive, and there will be no drive letter assigned. You may then choose either to assign them drive letters or to delete the volumes and regain the use of that disk space.


Creating and Deleting Volume Sets
Disk Administrator	7 of 13

Managing Disks

Creating and Deleting Volume Sets

Volume sets are a mechanism for more effectively using the total available free space on a disk. They are created, as shown in the following illustration, by combining various-sized areas of free space on from one to 32 disks into one large logical volume set that is treated like a single partition.

Note

Operating systems, such as MS-DOS, that do not have volume-set functionality cannot recognize any volume sets that are created by Windows NT. Therefore, if you create a volume set on a dual-boot computer, those partitions become unusable by MS-DOS.

The areas of free space used to create volume sets can be of different sizes, as shown in the following illustration. Volume sets are organized in such a way that the free space on one disk gets filled up and then, starting at the beginning of the next disk, all that free space gets filled up. The process continues in the same way on each subsequent disk up to a maximum of 32.

Deleting partitions to create free space that is then combined into one volume set also frees up drive letters for other uses, enables the creation of a large volume for file system use, and may improve system performance by better balancing data input and output (I/O) across the drives.

To create a volume set

1.	Select two or more areas of free space on from one to 32 hard disks by selecting the first area of free space, and then pressing CTRL and clicking each of the other areas.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Create Volume Set.

Disk Administrator displays the minimum and maximum sizes for the volume set.

3.	In the Create Volume Set dialog box, type the size of the volume set that you want to create.

4.	Choose the OK button.

If you choose to use less than the total available space, Disk Administrator divides the total size by the number of disks to create almost equal-sized unformatted partitions in each of the selected disks and assigns a single drive letter to the collection of partitions that make up the volume set.

When you no longer want to have a volume set, or you want to reorganize the data on your disks, or you have a problem with a faulty disk drive, you should first back up all the information on the volume set and then choose the Delete command. Deleting the volume set deletes all the information contained in the volume set.

To delete a volume set

1.	Select the volume set that you want to delete.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Delete.

A message advises you that all the data will be lost and asks you to confirm that you want to delete it.

3.	In the Confirm message, choose the Yes button.


Extending Volumes and Volume Sets
Disk Administrator	8 of 13

Managing Disks

Extending Volumes and Volume Sets

Existing NTFS volumes and volume sets can also be extended by adding free space. Disk Administrator forces the system to restart after you quit and save your changes, and then formats the new area without affecting any existing files on the original volume or volume set.

To extend a volume or volume set

1.	Select an existing volume (that is not part of a stripe set or mirror set) or a volume set and one or more areas of free space.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Extend Volume Set.

Disk Administrator displays the minimum and maximum sizes for the volume set.

3.	In the Create Extended Volume Set dialog box, type the size of the volume set that you want to create.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Depending on the size that you specified, Disk Administrator determines how much of the free space to use.

5.	Disk Administrator then initiates a restart of your computer.


Creating and Deleting Stripe Sets
Disk Administrator	9 of 13

Managing Disks

Creating and Deleting Stripe Sets

Stripe sets are created similarly to volume sets, but with more restrictions. Each member partition of the stripe set must be on a different disk up to a limit of 32 disks. Also, Disk Administrator will make all the partitions approximately the same size.

Note

Operating systems, such as MS-DOS, that do not have stripe-set functionality cannot recognize any stripe sets that are created by Windows NT. Therefore, if you create a stripe set on a dual-boot computer, those partitions become unusable by MS-DOS.

Stripe sets are created by combining areas of free space on from two to 32 disks into one large logical volume. The partitions in stripe sets are all approximately the same size so that the data can be written in stripes across each partition. This enables I/O commands to be issued concurrently and increases throughput.

The following illustration shows a set of six hard disks and how the stripes are distributed across them.

To create a stripe set

1.	Select two or more areas of free space on from two to 32 hard disks by selecting the first area of free space on the first disk, and then pressing CTRL and clicking an additional area of free space on each of the other hard disks.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Create Stripe Set.

Disk Administrator displays the minimum and maximum sizes for the stripe set.

3.	In the Create Stripe Set dialog box, type the size of the stripe set that you want to create.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Disk Administrator divides the total size by the number of disks to create equal-sized unformatted partitions in each of the selected disks and assigns a single drive letter to the collection of partitions that make up the stripe set. If you choose a number that cannot be divided equally, Disk Administrator rounds to the closest higher or lower value.

When you no longer want a stripe set or you have a problem with a faulty disk drive, you should first back up all the information on the stripe set and then choose the Delete command. Deleting the stripe set deletes all the information there.

To delete a stripe set

1.	Select the stripe set that you want to delete.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Delete.

A message advises you that all the data will be lost and asks you to confirm that you want to delete it.

3.	In the Confirm message, choose the Yes button.


Protecting Data
Disk Administrator	10 of 13

Protecting Data

Windows NT Server provides several tools for protecting data. They include the Backup and Disk Administrator programs in the Administrative Tools group, as well as the UPS program in Control Panel. The Windows NT Server version of Disk Administrator includes the common organizational tools (volume sets and stripe sets) and then adds the data-protection tools (mirror sets and stripe sets with parity).

The most widely used fault-tolerance method is tape backup with off-site archiving. It is also the least expensive form of data protection. To make frequent backups even easier, Windows NT provides the Backup program as one of the Administrative Tools. To minimize downtime from power failures and provide some advance warning before total power loss, Windows NT provides the UPS program in Control Panel for managing an uninterruptible power supply.

Windows NT Server provides other data-protection tools in the Disk Administrator program that take advantage of the popular data-management scheme called RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks). These include the commands for creating mirror sets (RAID-level 1) and stripe sets with parity (RAID-level 5). For more information on the RAID levels and fault-tolerance issues, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.

Disk mirroring can be considered a form of continual backup because it maintains a fully redundant copy of a partition on another disk. It therefore provides protection from the downtime and expense involved in recovering lost data and in restoring data from a backup storage facility. Mirroring also provides some performance benefits when reading data from disks under heavy I/O loads.

Disk duplexing is a term often used to describe establishing a mirrored copy on a disk with a different controller. This provides protection against controller failures, in addition to media failures. The term disk mirroring is used in Windows NT Server to describe both protection techniques.

Disk striping consists of data being written in stripes across a volume that has been created from areas of free space. These areas are all the same size and spread over an array of up to 32 disks. When you add a parity-information stripe to each disk partition in the volume, the data protection provided becomes equivalent to that of disk mirroring but requires much less disk space for the redundant data. Disk striping with parity also provides a performance improvement for the reading of data when compared to a single device or a mirror.

Stripe sets with parity are a good solution for data redundancy in a computing environment in which most activity consists of reading data. For example, if your network has a server on which you maintain all copies of the programs used by the people at that site, this may be a good case for using a stripe set with parity. This would enable you to protect the programs against the loss of a single disk in the stripe set, and the read performance would improve due to concurrency of the reads across the disks making up the stripe set with parity.

In an environment in which frequent updates to the information occur, it may be better to use mirror sets. However, you could use a stripe set with parity if you want redundancy and if the storage overhead cost of a mirror is prohibitive.

Notice that operating systems, such as MS-DOS, that do not have fault-tolerance functionality cannot recognize the partitions that Windows NT Server creates for fault tolerance. Therefore, if you mirror your MS-DOS system partition on a dual-boot computer, MS-DOS cannot use or start that partition. Also, as a precaution, you should be sure to create a fault-tolerant boot disk so that you can boot from the mirrored partition if the system partition is lost. For information on creating and using such a fault-tolerant boot disk, see the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.


Creating and Deleting Stripe Sets with Parity
Disk Administrator	11 of 13

Protecting Data

Creating and Deleting Stripe Sets with Parity

There are two kinds of stripe sets:  those with and those without parity. Only those with parity provide fault-tolerance protection. When you no longer want a stripe set with parity or you have a problem with a faulty disk drive, you should first back up all the information on the stripe set and then choose the Delete Stripe Set With Parity command.

Stripe sets without parity are created by combining areas of free space on from two to 32 disks into one large logical volume. To gain fault-tolerance protection with disk striping, you must add parity-information stripes. Disk striping with parity includes one additional parity stripe per row. Therefore, you must use at least three, rather than two, disks to allow for this extra parity information. Parity stripes, as shown in the following illustration, are distributed across all the partitions to balance the I/O load. The protection provided here is as complete as with disk mirroring. This technique also provides data redundancy at a cost of only one additional disk for the set. Recovery from the failure of a disk in a parity stripe set is more time consuming, though, than for mirror sets.

The following illustration shows a set of six hard disks and how the parity stripes are distributed across the partitions.

To create a stripe set with parity

1.	Select three or more areas of free space on from three to 32 hard disks by selecting the first area of free space on the first disk, and then pressing CTRL and clicking each additional area of free space on each of the other hard disks.

2.	From the Fault Tolerance menu, choose Create Stripe Set With Parity.

Disk Administrator displays the minimum and maximum sizes for the stripe set with parity.

3.	In the Create Stripe Set With Parity dialog box, type the size of the stripe set that you want to create.

4.	Choose the OK button.

Disk Administrator divides the total size by the number of disks to create equal-sized unformatted partitions in each of the selected disks and assigns a single drive letter to the collection of partitions that make up the stripe set with parity. If you choose a number that cannot be divided equally, Disk Administrator rounds to the closest higher or lower value.

Note

Stripe sets with parity are distinguished from stripe sets only in the status bar. The color shown in the legend is the same for both types.

When you want to use the space in a stripe set with parity for other purposes, be sure to do a backup first if you want to reuse that information and then choose the Delete command. Deleting the stripe set deletes all the information contained in the stripe set.

To delete a stripe set with parity

1.	Select the stripe set with parity that you want to delete.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Delete.

A message advises you that all the data will be lost and asks you to confirm that you want to delete it.

3.	In the Confirm message, choose the Yes button.


Establishing and Breaking Mirror Sets
Disk Administrator	12 of 13

Protecting Data

Establishing and Breaking Mirror Sets

Disk mirroring protects a partition on a disk from media and, possibly, controller failure by maintaining a fully redundant copy on another disk. When a mirrored partition fails, you must break the mirror set to expose the remaining, secondary partition as a separate volume with its own drive letter. That volume then becomes the main partition, and you can create a new mirror-set relationship with unused free space of the same size, or greater, on another disk.

Mirror sets are created by duplicating a partition on another disk. The same drive letter is used for both partitions. Any existing partition, even the system and boot partitions, can be mirrored onto another partition of the same size, or greater, on another disk using either the same or a different controller.

The following illustration shows several examples of mirror sets using both the same and different controllers.

Disk mirroring reduces the chance of an unrecoverable error by providing a duplicate set of data, which doubles the number of disks required and the I/O operations when writing to the disk. However, some performance gains are achieved for reading data because of I/O load balancing of requests between the two partitions.

To establish a mirror set

1.	Select the partition that you want to duplicate and an area of free space of the same size or greater on another hard disk by selecting the first partition, and then pressing CTRL and clicking the area of free space.

2.	From the Fault Tolerance menu, choose Establish Mirror.

Disk Administrator creates an equal-sized partition in the free space for the mirror and assigns the drive letter to the mirror set.

When you want to use the space in a mirror set for other purposes, you must first use the Break Mirror Set command from the Fault Tolerance menu and then the Delete command from the Partition menu. Breaking the mirror set does not delete the information, but it is still safer to do a backup first. You will then be ready to delete one of the partitions that made up the mirror set to regain free space.

In the case of an unrecoverable error on a partition within a mirror set, you need to break the mirror-set relationship to expose the remaining partition as an individual partition or logical drive, and then reassign some free space on another disk to create a new mirror set. For more information on doing this, see "Recovering Data," later in this chapter.

To break a mirror set

1.	Select the mirror set that you want to break.

2.	From the Fault Tolerance menu, choose Break Mirror.

A message advises you that this will end the mirroring relationship and create two independent partitions. It then asks you to confirm that you want to break the selected mirror.

3.	In the Confirm message, choose the Yes button.

To convert the unmirrored partition to free space

1.	Select the unmirrored partition that you no longer need.

2.	From the Partition menu, choose Delete.

A message advises you that all data will be lost and asks you to confirm your action.

3.	In the Confirm message, choose the Yes button.


Recovering Data
Disk Administrator	13 of 13

Protecting Data

Recovering Data

The Windows NT Server fault-tolerance tools enable you to recover quickly and easily from problem situations. Disk mirroring enables you to have instant access to another disk with a redundant copy of the information on a failed disk. Using stripe sets with parity enables you to regenerate data from the parity stripe if a disk fails. Bad-sector mapping capabilities enable the system to fix sector failures without user intervention.

This section discusses briefly how to recover data from the following types of error situations:

Failed disk in a stripe set with parity

Failed disk in a mirror set

Sector failures

More information on disk management is available in the Windows NT Server Concepts and Planning Guide.

Fixing Mirror Sets and Stripe Sets with Parity

When a member of a mirror set or a stripe set with parity fails in a severe manner, such as a loss of power or a complete head crash, it becomes an orphan. The fault-tolerance driver then determines that it can no longer use it and directs all new reads and writes to the remaining members of the fault-tolerance volume.

When a member of a mirror set is orphaned, you must first break the mirror-set relationship to expose the remaining secondary partition as a separate volume. The remaining, working member of the mirror set receives the drive letter that was previously assigned to the complete mirror set. The orphaned partition receives the next available drive letter or whatever letter you want to assign.

You can then create a new mirror-set relationship from unused free space on another disk. (For details on how to break and reestablish a mirror set, see "Establishing and Breaking Mirror Sets," earlier in this chapter.) When you restart the computer, the data from the good partition is copied to the new member of the mirror set.

When a member of a stripe set with parity is orphaned, you can regenerate the data for the orphaned member from the remaining members. Select a new area of free space that is the same size as, or greater than, the other members of the stripe set with parity, and then choose the Regenerate command from the Fault Tolerance menu. When you restart the computer, the fault-tolerance driver reads the information from the stripes on the other member disks, and then recreates the data of the missing member and writes it to the new member.

To regenerate a recoverable stripe set with parity

1.	Select the recoverable stripe set.

2.	Select an area of free space of the same size or greater.

However, if the stripe set failure is due to a power failure or cabling failure on a single device, you can regenerate within the orphaned member of the original stripe set once the hardware state is restored.

3.	From the Fault Tolerance menu, choose the Regenerate command.

4.	Quit Disk Administrator and restart your computer.

The regeneration process occurs in the background, and the stripe set with parity will not appear as healthy in the Disk Administrator status bar until regeneration is complete.

Fixing Sector Failures

The Windows NT Server fault-tolerance services add extra bad-sector mapping capabilities to the system. If a sector, or group of sectors, fails, the Windows NT Server fault-tolerance services attempt to fix the failure by asking the lower supporting device and device driver to map out the failing sectors with good sectors. The appropriate data is then restored to these new, good sectors by recovering it from the redundant copy.

This approach works for most SCSI-class devices. If the device cannot do this mapping, the Windows NT Server fault-tolerance services return the correct data from the redundant copy to the file system. The administrator is then notified in the Event Viewer program of the potential for data loss if the redundant copy also fails.


Performance Monitor
Chapter 19	1 of 28

Performance Monitor

Performance Monitor provides administrators and other users with a very capable monitoring tool to help with initial performance troubleshooting and capacity planning.

This chapter explains how to use the four windows in Performance Monitor to better understand how well your own computer or other computers on a network are performing. The following main topics are included:

Monitoring performance

Charting current activity

Logging current activity

Setting alerts on current activity

Creating reports on current activity

Working with existing log files


Overview
Performance Monitor	2 of 28

Overview

Performance Monitor is a graphical tool for measuring the performance of your own computer or other computers on a network. On each computer, you can view the behavior of objects such as processors, memory, cache, threads, and processes. Each of these objects has an associated set of counters that provide information on such things as device usage, queue lengths, and delays, as well as information used for throughput and internal congestion measurements.

It provides charting, alerting, and reporting capabilities that reflect current activity along with ongoing logging. You can also open log files at a later time for browsing and charting as if they were reflecting current activity. Performance Monitor is located in the Administrative Tools group in Program Manager.

The following list provides an overview of what you can do with this graphical tool to view the performance of objects:

View data from any number of computers simultaneously.

View and dynamically change charts reflecting current-activity counter values that are updated at a user-defined frequency.

Export data from charts, logs, alert logs, and reports to spreadsheet or database programs for further manipulation and printing.

Add system alerts that list an event in the Alert Log and, optionally, notify you by reverting to the Alert view, logging the event in Event Viewer's Application log, or issuing a network alert.

Run a predefined program every time, or just the first time, a counter value goes over or under a user-defined value.

Create log files containing data about various objects from different computers.

Append to one file selected sections of other existing log files to form a long-term archive.

View current-activity reports or create reports from existing log files.

Save individual chart, alert, log, or report settings, or the entire workspace setup, and reuse when needed.


Starting and Quitting Performance Monitor
Performance Monitor	3 of 28

Overview

Starting and Quitting Performance Monitor

You do not need any special privileges to open Performance Monitor. However, you do need to be logged on as a member of the Administrators group to use the diskperf command. This command turns on and off the counters for physical and logical disk activity on your own or another computer. The ability to control the activation of these counters is useful because disk counters can increase disk access time by approximately 1.5% on 386 processors. After restarting the computer, you can then use Performance Monitor to view disk performance data.

To activate the physical and logical disk counters

1.	Log on as a member of the Administrators group.

2.	At the command prompt, type diskperf to view help information on how to turn diskperf on and off and specify a remote computer's name.

It will also state whether or not the disk performance counters have been activated already on that computer.

3.	Restart the computer to activate the disk performance counters.

Double-click the Performance Monitor icon in the Administrative Tools group to display the Performance Monitor window in the Chart view. (You can also type perfmon [settings file] at the command prompt. The previously saved settings file can consist of selections made within a single view or within all four views, which is known as a Workspace and is saved as a .PMW file. If you do not specify a settings file, Performance Monitor searches the current working directory for the default chart file _default.pmc. That is also what happens if you specify a computer name instead of a settings file by typing perfmon -c [computername] at the command prompt. That computer will then appear as the default computer when you choose the Add To command.)

Performance Monitor actually consists of four main windows, which you display by choosing to view Chart, Alert, Log, or Report. All four windows contain different information and have only the menu bar, status bar, and toolbar in common. Both context-sensitive and standard Help is provided for all the Performance Monitor commands.

The following most commonly used commands from the View, Edit, and Options menus are also available on the toolbar:

Chart	Add To	Bookmark
Alert	Edit	Options
Log	Delete From
Report	Update Now
An important menu item that is available in all four windows is the Data From command under the Options menu. You use this command to specify if you want to view current activity and work with current values or if you would rather manipulate an existing log file. The default value for displaying data is from current activity. Therefore, you will not need to change it until you want to examine an existing log file.

You can quit Performance Monitor by choosing either Exit from the File menu or Close from the Control menu. Be sure to save your individual chart, alert, log, or report settings, or the entire workspace, to a file before quitting, unless you are sure you will not need that exact combination of settings again.

To save settings in any view

1.	From the File menu, choose the corresponding Save Settings command.

If you have not already assigned a filename, the Performance Monitor - Save As dialog box appears.

2.	Type a name in the File Name box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

The assigned filename now appears in the status bar.

To change the name of a settings file

1.	From the File menu, choose the corresponding Save Settings As command.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - Save As dialog box, type a name in the File Name box or choose one from the list of existing filenames.

3.	Choose the OK button.

The new filename now appears in the status bar.

To save related settings from all four windows

1.	From the File menu, choose Save Workspace.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - Save Workspace As dialog box, type a name in the File Name box or choose one from the list of existing filenames.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Organizing Your Screen
Performance Monitor	4 of 28

Overview

Organizing Your Screen

You can choose to view one of four windows:  Chart, Alert, Log, or Report. The only consistent elements among the four windows are the display options:  Menu and Title, Toolbar, Status Bar, and Always On Top. By showing or hiding any of these options, you can vary the amount of screen space available for display purposes. The Always On Top option ensures that Performance Monitor, even when no longer the active window, stays visible over any other window on your screen.

Performance Monitor also has a chart-highlighting feature that provides better visibility for a selected counter by changing the counter's on-screen color to white. While in chart-highlighting mode, you can change selections in the legend area and see the corresponding chart line change to white on the screen. To stop highlighting your selections, you must turn off the chart-highlighting mode.

To show or hide a display option

From the Options menu, choose the appropriate display option's command.

When an option is in effect, a check mark appears next to the command on the Options menu.

To show or hide only the menu bar and title bar

1.	Double-click anywhere in the display area that does not contain text information.

2.	Double-click again to reverse the action.

To move the window while the title bar is hidden

Click anywhere in the display area that does not contain text information and drag the mouse to move the window.

To turn the chart-highlighting mode on or off

1.	To turn the chart-highlighting mode on and change the color of the selected counter to white, press CTRL+H.

2.	To stop highlighting selected counters, press CTRL+H again.


Monitoring Performance
Performance Monitor	5 of 28

Monitoring Performance

Performance Monitor is a graphical tool that almost everybody can use to gain a better understanding of how efficiently their computer is functioning and what the problems might be if it is performing poorly. You can use it to find bottlenecks on a network, to help in capacity planning, to do configuration management, and to verify or predict problem areas in a program design.

You can create charts, set alerts, build log files, and format reports that enable you to monitor the current performance of selected counters and instances for objects on Windows NT such as the following. However, notice that the objects will be different when viewing computers with different operating systems.

Cache	Paging File	Redirector
LogicalDisk	PhysicalDisk	Server
Memory	Process	System
Objects	Processor	Thread
Different scenarios may demand the use of different features in Performance Monitor. For example, a network administrator may routinely monitor network activity to watch for problems and may also need to report on any failure to provide guaranteed service levels. There may be workload discrepancies between servers, one server may be paging excessively because of insufficient memory, or a server disk may be almost saturated.

System throughput problems usually occur when the demand for resources exceeds the supply. The available resources, in this case, are the microprocessor(s), memory, hard disk(s), and networking hardware and software. Finding out how user applications interact with each of these resources is a logical first step when you start monitoring.

An important second step is to assess the overall load on each of these resources. How close to being saturated is a system processor? How many applications are waiting to use the disk drive? User applications are not the only programs demanding resource time; a number of operating-system processes also consume fixed amounts of each resource.

You can receive immediate feedback on how changes that you make affect the computer. You can also view information gathered over a period of time to see trends before and after the changes were made. And you can view all this in several different ways.

You can view information on current activity as well as from log files that you recorded earlier for viewing at a more convenient time. Current-activity data or selected data from log files can also be exported to a spreadsheet or database program and rearranged to fit your needs. Or, for a quick snapshot of the current activity, you can press alt+PrintScreen and then use the Paste command in Paintbrush to display a printable bitmap of the active window.

The same objects and counters are available for monitoring in all four views. When you select an object to monitor in Log view, all the counters for that object, or for each instance of that object, are monitored when you start collecting data in a log file. However, when you choose to view the results in one of the other three view windows, you can selectively add those counters and instances that are of interest to you.

Despite its wide applicability, Performance Monitor does not answer every performance-tuning question. It should be thought of as a broad tool that provides an overview of the computer's performance. And, generally, it will be the first tool used on any performance problem. Frequently, you will be able to use it to resolve the problem completely. In other cases, you will use it to indicate which specialized tool (such as a profiler, a working set monitor, a disk optimizer, or a LAN packet sniffer) to use next.


Understanding Objects, Counters, and Instances
Performance Monitor	6 of 28

Monitoring Performance

Understanding Objects, Counters, and Instances

When monitoring a system, you are really monitoring the behavior of its objects. In Windows NT, an object is a standard mechanism for identifying and using a system resource. Objects are created to represent individual processes, sections of shared memory, and physical devices. Performance Monitor groups counters by object type. A unique set of counters exists for the processor, memory, cache, hard disk, processes, and other object types that produce statistical information. Certain object types and their respective counters are present on all systems. However, other counters, such as transport-protocol counters, only appear if the computer is running the associated software.

Each object type can have several instances. For example, the Processor object type will have multiple instances if a system has multiple processors. The PhysicalDisk object type has two instances if a system has two disks. Some object types, such as Memory and Server, do not have instances. If an object type has multiple instances, each instance produces the same set of statistics (counter information).

Two object types, Process and Thread, have a particularly close relationship. A Windows NT process is created when a program runs. A process may be either an application (such as Microsoft Word or Corel® Draw), a service (such as Event Log or Computer Browser), or a subsystem (such as the print spooler or POSIX). In addition to an executable program, every process consists of a set of virtual memory addresses and at least one thread.

Threads are objects within processes that execute program instructions. They allow concurrent operations within a process and enable one process to execute different parts of its program on different processors simultaneously. Each thread running on a system shows up as an instance for the Thread object type and is identified by association with its parent process. For example, if Print Manager has two active threads, Performance Monitor identifies them as Thread object instances Printman ==> 0 and Printman ==> 1.

Note

Instances of the Process object type appear as numbers if they are internal system processes. Other types of processes are identified by the name of the executable file. Also notice that only 32-bit processes normally appear in the Instances box and that 16-bit applications running in a Virtual DOS Machine (VDM) do not appear unless they are started in a separate memory space.

The following table provides a list of sample counters and why you would use them to resolve various problems.

Object:  Counter		Description		Significance
Process: Working Set		The portion of physical memory allocated to a running application		This value may be larger than the minimum number of bytes actually needed by the process. Therefore, it will change slowly over time depending on the activity of the application.
Memory: Available Bytes		The size of the virtual memory that is currently available		If this number falls below a certain threshold, less free memory is available and Windows NT gradually begins to take memory away from the working sets of running applications to ensure that a certain amount of free memory exists.
Pages/sec		The number of pages that had to be read from or written to disk because they were not in physical memory		Check this counter's value if you suspect excessive paging, which would mean that memory demand is exceeding supply and therefore system performance is decreasing. If it is consistently greater than 5 for a single disk, you probably have a memory-caused bottleneck.
Page Faults/sec		The number of page faults in the processor		Data was not immediately available in the specified working set in memory.
Paging File:% Usage		The amount of the paging file that is in use		Check this counter's value to see if the size of PAGEFILE.SYS is appropriate. If it nears 100%, consider increasing the initial file size.
% Usage Peak		The peak usage of the system paging file		Check this counter's value to see if the size of PAGEFILE.SYS is appropriate. If it approaches the maximum paging-file setting, consider increasing the initial file size.
Processor:% Processor Time		The percentage of elapsed time that a processor is busy executing a non-idle thread		Check this counter's value to see how busy a processor is. Since each process thread requires a certain number of processor cycles when it runs, demand can exceed supply. If long processor queues develop, system response time can suffer.
Interrupts/sec		The rate of service requests from I/O devices		If this counter's value increases dramatically without a corresponding increase in system activity, it could indicate a hardware problem.
PhysicalDisk:% Disk Time		The percentage of time that a drive is active		If disk I/O is performing properly, there will be less strain on virtual memory, and programs will run faster. If this counter's value is high, check the Disk Queue Length counter. If both values are consistently high, move some files to an additional disk or server or consider upgrading the disk drive.
Disk Queue Length		The number of requests outstanding on the disk at the time the performance data is collected		The number of waiting I/O requests should be sustained at no more than 1.5 to 2 times the number of spindles making up the physical disk. Most disks have one spindle. However, Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks (RAID) disks usually have more and yet appear as only one physical disk in Performance Monitor.
Avg. Disk sec/Transfer		The amount of time a disk takes to fulfill requests		If this counter's value is high, it may indicate that the disk controller is continually retrying the disk because of failures. For most disks, high average disk-transfer times correspond to values greater than 0.3 seconds. A missed disk revolution typically adds 16 ms to average disk-transfer time.
Avg. Disk Bytes/Transfer		The average number of bytes transferred to or from disk during read or write operations		If this counter's value is greater than 20K, the disk drive is generally performing well. Low values result if an application is accessing a disk inefficiently. Applications that access a disk at random also raise Avg. Disk sec/Transfer times because random transfers require increased seeking time.


Working with Information on Current Activity
Performance Monitor	7 of 28

Monitoring Performance

Working with Information on Current Activity

Performance Monitor provides four different views for information on the current behavior of objects, counters, and instances. However, you can use the same approach to accessing and working with the information in all four windows:  Chart, Alert, Log, or Report.

To work in any view with information on current activity

1.	From the view's File menu, choose either a new settings file or open an existing one.

You can open either a separate chart (.PMC), alert (.PMA), log (.PML), or report (.PMR) settings file, or a workspace (.PMW) file containing settings for all four windows.

2.	From the view's Edit menu, choose the Add To command to select one or more computers to monitor and the appropriate objects, counters, or instances.

For details on how to select a computer in any view, see the following procedure.

To select multiple objects and counters, select the first item and then do one of the following:

Press and hold down the SHIFT key and then select the last contiguous item.

Drag the mouse until you reach the last contiguous item.

Press and hold down the CTRL key and select each non-contiguous item.

3.	Choose either the Add To or Edit command to make changes, if you want, to how selections are represented.

4.	From the view's File menu, choose to save selections in a new settings file or update the current one.

5.	From the view's Options menu, change any of the options provided with that view, such as specifying the time interval and update method, hiding and displaying items, changing the graphic format, starting and stopping logging, adding bookmarks, and specifying the notification method.

6.	Change to another window, or view, and repeat the process to gain a different perspective on the same information or to monitor some other aspect of the problem.

7.	If you have related information in all four windows, save the settings for the entire workspace.

8.	If you plan to open certain settings files regularly, use File Manager's File Associate command to associate the five Performance Monitor file-extension types with the Performance Monitor program. Then use Program Manager's File New command to create a new Personal Program Group into which you can put your settings files as new program items. Double-clicking on an item's icon will start Performance Monitor with that settings file already opened.

To select a different computer

1.	From the view's Edit menu, choose the Add To command.

2.	In the Computer box, type the computer's name. Or click the gray button at the end of the box to display the Select Computer dialog box.

The names of the domains or workgroups to which you have access appear in the Select Computer box. The first time you use this, there may be some delay while Performance Monitor searches the accessible domains and workgroups for member computers.

3.	Double-click the name of the appropriate domain controller or workgroup to display a list of the servers and workstations connected to it.

4.	Select the name of the server or workstation that you want to monitor.

5.	Choose the OK button.

Notice that the Add button is disabled while Performance Monitor searches for that computer. If the computer is found, the Add button is enabled again, and the boxes change to show the default settings of the new computer. If the computer is not found, a message appears and you revert back to your own computer's default settings.

If you want to add more counters for a computer that has already been selected, you may also select that counter from the screen display before choosing the Add To command. That counter's computer will then appear as the default computer.

Clearing the Display vs. Deleting Selections

You can also use the same approach in all four views to delete either a full screen of information or a single selection.

To clear the values displayed on the screen

From the view's Edit menu, choose Clear Display.

To delete a selection

1.	Select the legend, log, or report item that you want to delete.

2.	From the view's Edit menu, choose the Delete command. Or choose the Delete button on the toolbar. Or choose the DELETE key on your keyboard.

Updating the Display

All four views have a command under the Options menu and a button on the toolbar that enable you to update manually the information on the screen. You can use the Update Now command or button between automatic data updates to get a current snapshot of the situation. Each view also has within its own Options dialog box an Update Time box for choosing the automatic updating frequency or for switching to only manual updates.

Notice that time-interval settings also affect the amount of memory and processor time used by Performance Monitor. Monitoring is generally not a large burden on processor time or memory unless you retrieve data very frequently from a large number of computers.

To update the screen display in any view

From the view's Options menu, choose Update Now. Or choose the Update Now button on the toolbar.

To change the updating method within each view

1.	In the appropriate view's Options dialog box, select either periodic or manual updating.

2.	If you selected Periodic Update, type a number in the Interval box to determine the time, in seconds, between updates.

3.	Choose the OK button.

Printing a Snapshot of the Window Display

You can use the PRINTSCREEN key to capture a graphical view of the current window at certain intervals or during peak periods to keep a record over time. You can then use the Paintbrush program in the Accessories group to clean up and print out a copy of the window display.

To print a snapshot of the current window

1.	Press ALT+PRINTSCREEN to copy a view of the active window. If Performance Monitor is maximized, press Printscreen to copy the whole desktop.

2.	Start the Paintbrush program in the Accessories group.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Paste and then, if you want to save the bitmap to a file, choose Save As from the File menu.

4.	From the File menu, choose Print.

Exporting Data

When you want to manipulate a snapshot of the current window's data in a spreadsheet or database program before printing it or when you want to change how the information is presented, use the view's Export command.

To export data to a spreadsheet or database program

1.	From the view's File menu, choose the Export command.

The Performance Monitor - Export As dialog box appears.

2.	In the Column Delimiter box, choose either the Tab (*.TSV) or Comma (*.CSV) method for separating the data columns in the file.

3.	Select or type a path name, with the appropriate extension for the column delimiter, for the file that you want to export.

If you want to select a file that is on another computer, choose the Network button to display and select from the Network Connections dialog box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

5.	Start the spreadsheet or database program.

6.	Open your Performance Monitor file and work with it.


Working with Information from Log Files
Performance Monitor	8 of 28

Monitoring Performance

Working with Information from Log Files

Performance Monitor provides four different views of historical information on the behavior of objects, counters, and instances. As with information on current activity, you can use a similar approach to accessing and working with these existing log files in all four windows:  Chart, Alert, Log, or Report.

To work in any view with information from log files

1.	From the view's Options menu, choose Data From to select an existing log file.

2.	From the view's Edit menu, choose Time Window to change the starting and stopping times, if necessary.

3.	Choose the appropriate Add To command to select one or more computers to monitor and the appropriate objects, counters, or instances.

Or you can open an existing settings file or workspace file with the Open command from the view's File menu.

For details on how to select a computer in any view, see the procedure given in the "Working with Information on Current Activity" section.

4.	Choose either the Add To or Edit command to make changes, if appropriate, to how selections are represented.

5.	From the view's File menu, choose to save selections in a new settings file or update the current one.

6.	From the view's Options menu, change any options, if available, such as hiding and displaying items, changing the graphic format, starting and stopping relogging, specifying the logging interval, and adding bookmarks.

7.	Change to another window, or view, and repeat the process to gain a different perspective on the same information or to study some other aspect of the problem.

8.	If you have related information in all four windows, save the settings for the entire workspace.


Charting Current Activity
Performance Monitor	9 of 28

Charting Current Activity

The ability to create customized charts to monitor the current performance of selected counters and instances is useful for doing tasks such as the following:

Investigating why a computer or application is slow or inefficient

Continuously monitoring systems to find intermittent performance bottlenecks

Discovering why you need to increase capacity

For help understanding a selected counter, choose the Explain button in the Add To Chart dialog box to display the Counter Definition box.

To view the Chart window

From the View menu, choose Chart. Or choose the Chart button on the toolbar.

If you are switching from another view, the Chart window is blank unless you already created or opened a chart during that session or from the command prompt.

To open an existing chart settings file

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - File Open dialog box, select or type the path name for the .PMC file containing the selections that you want to reuse.

If you want to select a file that is on another computer, choose the Network button to display and select from the Network Connections dialog box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To create a new blank chart

From the File menu, choose New Chart.


Adding Chart Selections
Performance Monitor	10 of 28

Charting Current Activity

Adding Chart Selections

Different problems require different settings. Creating charts to reflect these different requirements is a simple matter of selecting the computer to be monitored and adding the appropriate objects, counters, and instances. You can then save these selections under a filename for viewing whenever you want an update on their performance. To make the graphs more readable, vary the scale of the displayed information and the color, width, and style of the line for each counter as you add it to the chart. You can also modify these properties after you add a selection.

To add selections to a chart

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Add To Chart. Or choose the Add To Chart button on the toolbar.

The Add To Chart dialog box appears with the default settings and your workstation or server listed in the Computer box. To select a different computer, see the procedure given in the "Working with Information on Current Activity" section earlier in this chapter.

2.	In the Object box, select an object to monitor from the list of those that are available on the chosen computer.

The Counter and Instance boxes change to display the items that are available for that object on the chosen computer.

3.	In the Counter box, select one or more counters.

For a definition of the selected counter, choose the Explain button.

4.	In the Instance box, select one or more instances if appropriate.

5.	If you do not want the next available color to be assigned to a counter along with the default scale and the default line width and style, make your own selections now.

The scale factor is applied to all the currently selected counters. The factor displayed is multiplied times the counter value, and the product is charted. Notice, however, that the value bar continues to show the actual value, not the scaled value.

6.	Choose the Add button.

7.	Repeat the process for any additional objects or computers that you want to monitor.

8.	When you finish adding selections, choose the Done button.

A list of your selections appears in the legend at the bottom of the window, and Performance Monitor displays the changing values of your selections on the chart. Notice that each displayed value is usually an average over the last two data reads, which are separated by the length of the time interval.

To save chart selections in a settings file

1.	From the File menu, choose Save Chart Settings As.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - Save As dialog box, select or type a path name for the file that will contain the selections that you want to reuse.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Changing Chart Selections
Performance Monitor	11 of 28

Charting Current Activity

Changing Chart Selections

Creating a readable chart is important. Sometimes, you should change the scale at which you graph the counter information to display the activity more in the center of the chart, but the actual reported values are not changed. To make each counter's line stand out better, you might want to vary the color, style, and width used. You might also want to use the chart-highlighting mode on a selected counter.

To change how a selected counter is represented on the chart

1.	In the legend, select the counter that you want to change.

2.	Double-click the selected counter. Or, from the Edit menu, choose Edit Chart Line. Or choose the Edit Chart Line button on the toolbar.

The same dialog box as the one used for Add To Chart appears, showing only the information for the counter that you selected in the legend.

3.	Change any of the following options:

Select an option under		To
Color		Use colors to reflect your personal preferences.
Scale		Change the scale at which the information is displayed. The numbers shown in the value bar, however, are not scaled.
Width		Make the line thicker or thinner. Thick lines, however, cannot be styled.
Style		Use a different style with a thin line.
4.	Choose the OK button.

The legend information area now displays the new selections.

To update chart selections that have been saved in a settings file

From the File menu, choose Save Chart Settings.


Changing the Chart Options
Performance Monitor	12 of 28

Charting Current Activity

Changing the Chart Options

The Chart window shows a blank grid area and legend until you add information to it by selecting objects, counters, and instances to be monitored with the Add To Chart command from the Edit menu. Choosing the Chart command from the Options menu enables you to customize the charts that you create and change the method used for updating the chart values.

In the Chart Options dialog box, you can choose whether or not to display or hide horizontal and vertical grid lines, vertical labels, the value bar, and the legend and legend-information area.

You can also change the vertical maximum value of the displayed graph labels and the time interval used for graphing the information from the counters. The chosen graph-time interval is reflected in the value bar, which also displays the last, average, minimum, and maximum values for the data visible on the chart.

Finally, you can change from a graph format to a histogram bar-type representation (as shown in the following illustration) of the information that you are gathering. This is useful for better viewing the simultaneous behavior of many instances of the same object.

The Options menu also enables you to update manually the information on the screen. You can use the Update Now command between automatic data updates to get a current snapshot of the situation. In the Chart Options dialog box, use the Update Time box for choosing the automatic updating frequency or for switching to only manual updates.

To change chart options

1.	From the Options menu, choose Chart. Or choose the Options button on the toolbar.

2.	In the Chart Options dialog box, select the options that you want to display.

3.	In the Vertical Maximum box, type the maximum value to which the vertical axis should extend.

4.	In the Update Time box, select either Manual Update or Periodic Update and then type a number in the Interval box to determine the time, in seconds, between updates of the charts.

The Graph Time value displayed in the value bar shows the time, in seconds, that it takes to create a complete chart across the window.

5.	In the Gallery box, select how you want to display information in the chart.

6.	Choose the OK button.


Logging Current Activity
Performance Monitor	13 of 28

Logging Current Activity

Logging enables you to record information on the current activity of selected objects and computers for viewing later.

You can create a log file on the performance of counters and instances for objects on Windows NT. You can also collect data from multiple systems into a single log file. Log files contain detailed data for bottleneck detection or other detailed analysis. For capacity planning, you need to view trends over a longer period, which requires the ability to create a log file and to produce reports from that file.

To view the Log window

From the View menu, choose Log. Or choose the Log button on the toolbar.

If you are switching from another view, the Log window is blank unless you already created or opened a log file during that session or from the command prompt.

To open an existing log settings file

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - File Open dialog box, select or type the path name for the .PML file containing the selections that you want to reuse.

If you want to select a file that is on another computer, choose the Network button to display and select from the Network Connections dialog box.

If there is a log file name associated with that log settings file, be aware that Performance Monitor will start logging data to that log upon opening that settings file.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To create a new blank log file

From the File menu, choose New Log Settings.


Adding to a Log
Performance Monitor	14 of 28

Logging Current Activity

Adding to a Log

You can create different logs to accumulate information on the behavior of selected objects on various computers to be studied later. You can then save these selections under a filename and reuse them when you want to create another log of the same type of information for comparison.

To add selections to a log

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Add To Log. Or choose the Add To Log button on the toolbar.

The Add To Log dialog box appears with the default settings and your workstation or server listed in the Computer box. To select a different computer, see the procedure given in the "Working with Information on Current Activity" section earlier in this chapter.

2.	In the Objects box, select an object or set of objects to monitor from the list of those that are available on the chosen computer.

3.	Choose the Add button.

4.	Repeat the process for any additional computers that you want to monitor.

5.	When you finish adding objects, choose the Done button.

A list of your selections appears in the display area.

To save log selections in a settings file

1.	From the File menu, choose Save Log Settings As.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - Save As dialog box, select or type a path name for the file that will contain the selections that you want to reuse.

Notice that Performance Monitor also saves the log file name with the log settings file and will start logging data to that file upon reopening that settings file.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Changing the Log Options
Performance Monitor	15 of 28

Logging Current Activity

Changing the Log Options

The Log window has a display area for listing the objects and their corresponding computers that you have selected with the Add To Log command from the Edit menu. Choosing the Log command from the Options menu enables you to fill in or change the information shown in the gray boxes in the Log window, to start or stop logging, and to change the method used for updating the log values.

The Log window displays a list of objects and computers along with the current file size and the following items that you can specify in the Log Options dialog box:

Complete path and name of the log file.

Log Interval in seconds, from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour).

Status, either Collecting or Closed.

The Options menu also enables you to update manually the information on the screen. You can use the Update Now command between automatic data updates to get a current snapshot of the situation. In the Log Options dialog box, use the Update Time box to select either an automatic updating frequency or only manual updates.

To change the log options

1.	From the Options menu, choose Log. Or choose the Options button on the toolbar.

2.	In the Log File box, type a name for the log file that you are creating.

If this is the name of an existing file, the new data will be appended to the old data. To replace the old data, you must first delete the file and then create a new one with the old name.

3.	In the Update Time box, select either Manual Update or Periodic Update and then type a number in the Interval box, or open the list and select a number to determine the time, in seconds, between updates of the log.

4.	If you do not want to start logging yet, choose the OK button.

To start or stop logging

1.	From the Options menu, choose Log.

2.	To start logging, choose the Start Log button, which then changes to Stop Log.

If the Start Log button is not enabled, you must first type or select a log file name and add some objects to log.

After you start logging, a log symbol with the changing total file size appears on the right side of the status bar and remains there in all four views.

Notice also that, when a remote computer from which you are logging data shuts down, a bookmark comment is added to the log file. Another bookmark comment is added when that computer later reconnects and logging starts again.

3.	To stop logging, choose the Stop Log button.


Adding Bookmarks
Performance Monitor	16 of 28

Logging Current Activity

Adding Bookmarks

Log files become more usable when you add bookmark comments at various points while logging. Bookmarks serve as reminders by describing the circumstances under which the file was created or by highlighting major points of interest. You can then refer to these bookmarks when you work with the log file later. The Bookmark command becomes available when you start logging.

To add a bookmark

1.	From the Options menu, choose Bookmark. Or choose the Bookmark button on the toolbar.

2.	In the Bookmark Comment box, type a comment.

3.	Choose the Add button.


Setting Alerts on Current Activity
Performance Monitor	17 of 28

Setting Alerts on Current Activity

Alerts enable you to continue working while Performance Monitor tracks events for you and notifies you in the way that you specify. In the Alert view, you can create an alert log that enables you to monitor the current performance of selected counters and instances for objects on Windows NT.

With the alert log, you can monitor several counters at the same time. When a counter exceeds a given value, the date and time of the event are recorded in the Alert window. A total of one thousand events are recorded, after which the oldest event is discarded when the next new one is added. An event can also generate a network alert. When an event occurs, you can have a specified program run every time or just the first time that it occurs.

For help understanding what a selected counter shows, choose the Explain button in the Add To Alert dialog box to display the Counter Definition box.

To view the Alert window

From the View menu, choose Alert. Or choose the Alert button on the toolbar.

If you are switching from another view, the Alert Log area is blank unless you already created or opened an alert log file during that session or from the command prompt.

To open an existing alert log settings file

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - File Open dialog box, select or type the path name for the .PMA file containing the selections that you want to reuse.

If you want to select a file that is on another computer, choose the Network button to display and select from the Network Connections dialog box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To create a new blank alert log file

From the File menu, choose New Alert Settings.


Adding Alert Selections
Performance Monitor	18 of 28

Setting Alerts on Current Activity

Adding Alert Selections

You can create alert logs to warn yourself about problems in different situations. You can then save these selections under a filename and reuse them when you want to see if the problems have been fixed.

To add selections to an alert log

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Add To Alert. Or choose the Add To Alert button on the toolbar.

The Add To Alert dialog box appears with the default settings and your workstation or server listed in the Computer box. To select a different computer, see the procedure given in the "Working with Information on Current Activity" section earlier in this chapter.

2.	In the Object box, select an object to monitor from the list of those that are available on the chosen computer.

The Counter and Instance boxes change to display the items that are available for that object on the chosen computer.

3.	In the Counter box, select one or more counters.

For a definition of the selected counter, choose the Explain button.

4.	In the Instance box, select one or more instances if appropriate.

5.	If you do not want the next available color to be assigned to a counter, make your own selection now.

6.	In the Alert If box, select either Over or Under and add a value that is appropriate for that counter.

7.	In the Run Program On Alert box, select either First Time or Every Time and type the complete path name for the program or macro that you want to run whenever the specified alert occurs.

The Alert Log entry is passed to the program on the command line.

8.	Choose the Add button.

9.	Repeat the process for any additional objects or computers that you want to monitor.

10.	When you finish adding selections, choose the Done button.

A list of your selections appears in the Alert Legend box at the bottom of the window, and Performance Monitor displays the resulting alerts in the Alert Log area. Notice that each alert value is usually an average over the last two data reads, which are separated by the length of the time interval.

When an alert occurs while you are not in the Alert view, an alert icon appears in the status bar showing the number of alerts that have occurred since you were last in the Alert view.

When a remote computer that is being monitored shuts down, an alert occurs and creates a comment in the alert log. Another alert occurs (with another corresponding comment) when that computer later reconnects.

To save alert log selections in a settings file

1.	From the File menu, choose Save Alert Settings As.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - Save As dialog box, select or type a path name for the file that will contain the selections that you want to reuse.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Changing Alert Selections
Performance Monitor	19 of 28

Setting Alerts on Current Activity

Changing Alert Selections

After monitoring the alert log for a while, you may decide to change the Alert If criterion, what program to run and how often to run it, or the color used to display certain alerts.

To change how a selected counter is represented in the alert log

1.	Double-click the selected counter in the legend. Or, from the Edit menu, choose Edit Alert Entry. Or choose the Edit Alert Entry button on the toolbar.

The same dialog box as the one used for Add To Alert appears, showing only the information for the counter that you selected in the legend.

2.	Change any of the following options:

Select an option under		To
Color		Use colors to reflect your personal preferences.
Alert If		Change the alert warning criterion.
Run Program On Alert		Change how often the program is run or change to a different program.
3.	Choose the OK button.

The Alert Legend information area now displays the revised selections.

To update alert log selections that have been saved in a settings file

From the File menu, choose Save Alert Settings.


Changing the Alert Options
Performance Monitor	20 of 28

Setting Alerts on Current Activity

Changing the Alert Options

The Alert window has a display area for an alert log reflecting current activity, an Alert Legend box showing the information that you selected for logging with the Add To Alert command from the Edit menu, and an Alert Interval box showing, in seconds, how often you want the system to be monitored.

The Options menu enables you to update manually the information on the screen. You can use the Update Now command between automatic data updates to get a current snapshot of the situation. In the Alert Options dialog box, use the Update Time box to select either an automatic updating frequency or only manual updates.

Choosing the Alert command from the Options menu enables you to specify not only the alert interval but also how you want to be notified when an alert occurs, which can be by either or all of the following methods:

Switching to the Alert view

Logging the event in the Event Viewer's Application log

Sending a network alert message to yourself or someone else

To change alert options

1.	From the Options menu, choose Alert. Or choose the Options button on the toolbar.

2.	In the Alert Options dialog box, select one or all of the notification options:  Switch To Alert View, Log Event In Application Log, or Send Network Message.

3.	In the Network Alert box, type the computername, without backslashes (\\), of the recipient's computer or another predefined name on the recipient's computer in the Net Name box.

The Messenger service must already be started and the net name defined on the recipient's computer. To do so, at the command prompt, type net start messenger /? and net name /? to view Help information on how to use these commands.

4.	In the Update Time box, select either Manual Update or Periodic Update and then type a number in the Interval box to determine the time, in seconds, between updates of the alert log.

5.	Choose the OK button.


Creating Reports on Current Activity
Performance Monitor	21 of 28

Creating Reports on Current Activity

The Report view provides a simple report format for displaying constantly changing values.

With Performance Monitor, you can create reports showing current information on counter and instance values for selected objects. The information is presented in columns for each individual instance. You can adjust report intervals, print snapshots, and export data.

For help understanding a selected counter, choose the Explain button in the Add To Report dialog box to display the Counter Definition box.

To view the Report window

From the View menu, choose Report. Or choose the Report button on the toolbar.

If you are switching from another view, the Report window is blank unless you already created or opened a report file during that session or from the command prompt.

To open an existing report settings file

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - File Open dialog box, select or type the path name for the .PMR file containing the selections that you want to reuse.

If you want to select a file that is on another computer, choose the Network button to display and select from the Network Connections dialog box.

3.	Choose the OK button.

To create a new blank report file

From the File menu, choose New Report Settings.


Adding to a Report
Performance Monitor	22 of 28

Creating Reports on Current Activity

Adding to a Report

Creating reports using current activity can help you to gain a better understanding of object behavior. You can create a report on all the counters for a given object and then watch them change under various loads. For example, certain counter values, such as Working Set, are relatively static, while others, such as % Processor Time, change constantly. At application startup, it is normal to see the % Processor Time value climb sharply, decrease, and then level off.

You can also create reports to reflect the same information that you are charting or to monitor other specific situations. You can then save these selections under a filename and reuse them when you need an update on the same information.

To add selections to a report

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Add To Report. Or choose the Add To Report button on the toolbar.

The Add To Report dialog box appears with the default settings and your workstation or server listed in the Computer box. To select a different computer, see the procedure given in the "Working with Information on Current Activity" section earlier in this chapter.

2.	In the Object box, select an object to monitor from the list of those that are available on the chosen computer.

The Counter and Instance boxes change to display the items that are available for that object on the chosen computer.

3.	In the Counter box, select one or more counters.

For a definition of the selected counter, choose the Explain button.

4.	In the Instance box, select one or more instances if appropriate.

5.	Choose the Add button.

6.	Repeat the process for any additional objects or computers that you want to monitor.

7.	When you finish adding selections, choose the Done button.

A list of your selections by computer and object appears in the report area, and Performance Monitor displays the changing values of your selections in the report. Notice that each displayed value is usually an average over the last two data reads, which are separated by the length of the time interval.

To save report selections in a settings file

1.	From the File menu, choose Save Report Settings As.

2.	In the Performance Monitor - Save As dialog box, select or type a path name for the file that will contain the selections that you want to reuse.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Changing the Report Option
Performance Monitor	23 of 28

Creating Reports on Current Activity

Changing the Report Option

The Report window shows a blank screen until you add information to it by selecting objects, counters, and instances to be monitored with the Add To Report command from the Edit menu. The Options menu enables you to update manually the information on the screen. You can use the Update Now command between automatic data updates to get a current snapshot of the situation. Choosing the Report command from the Options menu enables you to select either an automatic updating frequency or only manual updates.

To change the report updating method

1.	From the Options menu, choose Report. Or choose the Options button on the toolbar.

2.	In the Update Time box, select either Manual Update or Periodic Update and then type a number in the Interval box, or open the list and select a number to determine the time, in seconds, between updates of the report.

3.	Choose the OK button.


Working with Existing Log Files
Performance Monitor	24 of 28

Working with Existing Log Files

Existing log files can provide a wealth of information for troubleshooting or planning. Whereas charting, setting alerts, and creating reports on current activity provide instant feedback, working with existing log files enables you to change the way you look at that feedback and gain a different perspective on the information.

You can examine the information much more thoroughly in a log file than you can while it is happening. You can move around in a log file (that is, change the start and stop times) by using the Time Window command from the view's Edit menu. The times selected will apply to all four views.

Changing the times is easiest to do in the Chart window. Add your selections to the chart first. You can then move the Input Log File Timeframe dialog box out of the way so you can see the gray vertical lines move on the chart as you move the ends of the slide bar. Set up a time window with this method that is appropriate for your needs and then set your alerts, create reports, or relog the data.

To select an existing log file

1.	From the Options menu, choose Data From.

2.	In the Data Values Displayed From box, select Log File.

3.	In the Log File box, type the log's filename. Or click the gray button at the end of the box to display the Open Input Log File dialog box from which you can select a file.

If you want to select a file that is on another computer, choose the Network button to display and select from the Network Connections dialog box.

4.	Choose the OK button.

This also activates the Time Window command in the Edit menu.

To change the time window for the logged information

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Time Window.

2.	In the Input Log File Timeframe dialog box, use one or a combination of both of the following methods to specify how much information you want to display.

To change the starting and stopping points to be used, drag the corresponding end of the time interval slide bar. Or use the ARROW keys or SHIFT+ARROW keys to move either end.

Notice that in charting, as you drag the ends of the slide bar, you are also moving two gray vertical lines on the chart.

To use bookmarks as starting or stopping points, select the appropriate bookmark and choose either the Set As Start button or the Set As Stop button.

3.	Choose the OK button.

The screen display changes to reflect the selected time frame.


Charting Input Log Files
Performance Monitor	25 of 28

Working with Existing Log Files

Charting Input Log Files

When you need a graphical view of a log file, you can open an existing one in Chart view to see how the values changed over a defined period of time. You can also change the time intervals displayed, choose which counters to chart, edit the chart, print a snapshot, and export the data to a spreadsheet or database program for further manipulation and printing.

To chart an input log file

1.	From the Options menu in the Chart view window, choose Data From.

2.	Select a log file name from either your own computer or another one on the network.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose any of the following commands:

Add To Chart, to choose which counters from which computers to chart.

Edit Chart Line, to change any of the selection settings.

Delete From Chart, to remove any counters that are not interesting or needed.

Time Window, to change the displayed starting and stopping points.

4.	From the Options menu, choose Chart to hide or display any items, change the vertical maximum, or change from a graph format to a histogram.

5.	From the File menu, choose any of the following commands:

Save Chart Settings As, to update changes made to the current chart settings file or to create a new file for these setting selections.

Export Chart, to export the data from the displayed chart to a spreadsheet or database program.


Setting Alerts on Input Log Files
Performance Monitor	26 of 28

Working with Existing Log Files

Setting Alerts on Input Log Files

You can take an existing log file and set alerts in the Alert Log to see where values exceeded or went below various alert values. All the counters for those objects that you chose to log will appear in the Add To Alert dialog box. You can now define your Alert Log by selecting only those computers and counters that you need.

To set alerts on an input log file

1.	From the Options menu in the Alert view window, choose Data From.

2.	Select a log file name from either your own computer or another one on the network.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose any of the following commands:

Add To Alert, to choose which counters from which computers to relog with alerts.

Edit Alert Entry, to change any of the selection settings.

Delete Alert, to remove any counters that are not interesting or needed.

Time Window, to change the displayed starting and stopping points.

4.	From the Options menu, choose Alert to select the update-time interval.

5.	From the File menu, choose any of the following commands:

Save Alert Settings As, to update changes made to the current alert settings file or to create a new file for these setting selections.

Export Alert, to export the data from the alert log to a spreadsheet or database program.


Relogging Input Log Files
Performance Monitor	27 of 28

Working with Existing Log Files

Relogging Input Log Files

By changing certain options when relogging, you can significantly condense large log files. You can relog with a longer time interval either all or only selected objects in an existing log file. You can also change the start and stop times and relog only the data within that time frame.

When you direct the output to an existing log file, that output is appended to the end of the file, thus creating a single, smaller archive file.

To relog an input log file

1.	From the Options menu in the Log view window, choose Data From.

2.	Select a log file name from either your own computer or another one on the network.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose any of the following commands:

Add To Log, to choose which objects from which computers to relog.

Delete From Log, to remove any objects that are not needed.

Time Window, to change the displayed starting and stopping points.

4.	From the Options menu, choose Log to change the log file name, the logging interval, and to start relogging.

If you select an existing log file for output, the data will be appended. To enable the Relog File button, you must first provide a filename and select some objects to log.

5.	From the File menu, choose any of the following commands:

Save Log Settings As, to update changes made to the current log settings file or to create a new file for these setting selections.

Export Log, to export the log setting to a spreadsheet or database program.


Reporting Based on Input Log Files
Performance Monitor	28 of 28

Working with Existing Log Files

Reporting Based on Input Log Files

You can create simple reports from existing log files the same as you would with current activity values. However, here the values shown represent the counter values over the selected time frame.

To create a report from an input log file

1.	From the Options menu in the Report view window, choose Data From.

2.	Select a log file name from either your own computer or another one on the network.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose any of the following commands:

Add To Report, to choose which counters from which computers to display in the report.

Delete From Report, to remove any counters that are not interesting or needed.

Time Window, to change the displayed starting and stopping points.

4.	From the File menu, choose any of the following commands:

Save Report Settings As, to update changes made to the current report settings file or to create a new file for these setting selections.

Export Report, to export the data from the report to a spreadsheet or database program.